2000 GC Manual

OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL
Process Gas Chromatograph PGC2000
2000-OSM C1: August 2002
ABB
NOTICE
Material contained within this manual is proprietary information of

ABB Inc.
and is to be used only for the purpose of understanding
and operating this product.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
©2000 - 2002, ABB Inc.
For further information or assistance contact:
ABB Inc.
843 North Jefferson Street
P.O. Box 831
Lewisburg, WV 24901
General Information: Telephone (304) 647-4358

Fax (304) 645-4236
Field Service: Telephone (304) 340-0508
Aftermarket Spares: Telephone (304) 647-1736

Fax (304) 647-1837
Please include Sales Order Number, Tag Number,

Analyzer Part Number and Serial Number
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES—PGC2000 Manual
Date of issue for each version of this manual:
A1 February 2000
A2 August 2000
B1 January 2001
B2 March 2001
B3 August 2001
B4 November 2001
B5 January 2002
C1 August 2002
Revision status of each page in this manual:
Page No. Revision Status
All C1
The revision status is noted at the bottom of each page of this manual.
2000-OSM, C1 i
ABB Inc.
P.O. Box 831
Lewisburg, WV 24901

Fax (304) 645-4236

Fax (304) 647-1837

ii 2000-OSM, C1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Title Page
GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................................................ G-1
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................. 1-1

PGC2000 WITH FLAME PHOTOMETRIC DETECTOR .......................................................................... 1-2
AIR PURGE SYSTEMS .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
SYSTEM VARIATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 1-3
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Physical ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
Safety Area Classification ................................................................................................................. 1-3
Power ................................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Instrument Air .................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Analytical Detectors .......................................................................................................................... 1-4
Isothermal Analytical Oven ................................................................................................................ 1-4
Gas Control (Analog) ........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Gas Control (Digital) .......................................................................................................................... 1-6
SECTION 2. INSTALLATION AND START-UP
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Installation Tools and Equipment ....................................................................................................... 2-1
Plumbing Installation ......................................................................................................................... 2-1
Gas Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 2-2
Calibration Sample ............................................................................................................................ 2-2
Purge Air Alarm ................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Liquid Sample Valve .......................................................................................................................... 2-2
EQUIPMENT MOUNTING ....................................................................................................................... 2-3
CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Tubing ............................................................................................................................................... 2-3
Analyzer Air ....................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Carrier Gas ....................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Sample .............................................................................................................................................. 2-4
Hydrogen Gas ................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Vent ................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Electrical ........................................................................................................................................... 2-4
INITIAL SETUP OF EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................... 2-5
Equipment and Supplies Required .................................................................................................... 2-5
Precautions ....................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Sample System Checkout ................................................................................................................. 2-6
GCC Pre-Checks .............................................................................................................................. 2-6
Analyzer Pre-Checks ........................................................................................................................ 2-6
Leak Check ....................................................................................................................................... 2-7
MATCHING COLUMN FLOWS ............................................................................................................... 2-8
Manual Operation of Valves .............................................................................................................. 2-8
Checking Total Column Flow ............................................................................................................. 2-9
Checking Analytical Flow Adjust ...................................................................................................... 2-10
Checking Backflush Flow ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Checking Selector Flow Adjust ........................................................................................................ 2-12
2000-OSM, C1 iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (continued)
Title Page
Checking Selector Vent ................................................................................................................... 2-12

EQUIPMENT STARTUP ........................................................................................................................ 2-13
Initial Power On ............................................................................................................................... 2-13
Verify GCC Operation ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
Calibration Run ............................................................................................................................... 2-19
Checking Streams ........................................................................................................................... 2-21
Chroma I/O PCB Setup ................................................................................................................... 2-21
Analytical Operation ........................................................................................................................ 2-24
Verify Zero Baseline on Chromatogram .......................................................................................... 2-24
Time Cycle Check ........................................................................................................................... 2-26
Verify Reports ................................................................................................................................. 2-26
Benchmark Run .............................................................................................................................. 2-27
TCD Zero Adjust (Filament TCD Only) ............................................................................................ 2-28
Stopping the Analyzer ..................................................................................................................... 2-29
CONNECTING THE ANALYZER TO VistaNET ..................................................................................... 2-29
Initial Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 2-29
Setting Access Levels ..................................................................................................................... 2-31
Subscriber List ................................................................................................................................ 2-32
Completing the VistaNET Connection ............................................................................................. 2-34
SECTION 3. OPERATION
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............................................................................................................. 3-1

Gas Chromatographic Controller (GCC) ........................................................................................... 3-1
Regulator and Gauge Panels ............................................................................................................ 3-2
Oven Compartment ........................................................................................................................... 3-2
NORMAL OPERATION ........................................................................................................................... 3-2
Display Screen .................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Checking Calibration ......................................................................................................................... 3-3
Checking Streams ............................................................................................................................. 3-4
Analytical Operation .......................................................................................................................... 3-5
ALARMS ................................................................................................................................................. 3-6
CHROMATOGRAMS ............................................................................................................................... 3-7
Displaying a Chromatogram .............................................................................................................. 3-7
Recording a Chromatogram .............................................................................................................. 3-7
SHUT DOWN PROCEDURES ................................................................................................................ 3-8
COMMAND TREE ................................................................................................................................... 3-9
SECTION 4. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 4-1

DETECTORS .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Flame Ionization Detector (FID) ........................................................................................................ 4-3
Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) ............................................................................................... 4-4
Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) ................................................................................................... 4-5
Intercolumn Detector ......................................................................................................................... 4-5
Sequential Dual Detectors ................................................................................................................. 4-6
Simultaneous Dual Detectors ............................................................................................................ 4-6
CIRCUIT BOARDS ................................................................................................................................ 4-11
Power Supply PCB ......................................................................................................................... 4-11
iv 2000-OSM, C1
Title Page
Chroma I/O PCB ............................................................................................................................. 4-11

Single Board Computer (SBC) PCB ................................................................................................ 4-11
DC Solenoid Driver PCB ................................................................................................................. 4-11
Front Panel PCB ............................................................................................................................. 4-11
FID Amplifier PCB ........................................................................................................................... 4-12
TCD Amplifier PCB ......................................................................................................................... 4-12
FPD Amplifier and Interface PCBs .................................................................................................. 4-12
DTC Backplane PCB ...................................................................................................................... 4-12
AC Conditioning PCB ...................................................................................................................... 4-12
DTC Zone PCB ............................................................................................................................... 4-12
EPC Multibus PCB .......................................................................................................................... 4-12
EPC Control PCB ............................................................................................................................ 4-12
EPC Sensor PCB ............................................................................................................................ 4-13
LO COMM PCB (Option) ................................................................................................................. 4-13
Communications PCB (Option) ....................................................................................................... 4-13
Analog Output PCB (Option) ........................................................................................................... 4-13
Digital Input/Output PCB (Option) ................................................................................................... 4-13
METHOD TABLES ................................................................................................................................ 4-13
Calibrating the Method .................................................................................................................... 4-13
Preparing a Method Table ............................................................................................................... 4-15
Editing a Method Table .................................................................................................................... 4-19
Printing a Method Table ................................................................................................................... 4-20
PEAK DETECTION ............................................................................................................................... 4-23
Forced Gating ................................................................................................................................. 4-23
Slope Detection: Introduction ......................................................................................................... 4-23
Slope Detection: Basic Functions ................................................................................................... 4-24
Slope Detection: Supplemental Functions ...................................................................................... 4-24
OTHER TIME-CODED FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................... 4-28
Auto Zero ........................................................................................................................................ 4-28
Stream Step .................................................................................................................................... 4-29
Valve On and Valve Off ................................................................................................................... 4-29
Tic Mark .......................................................................................................................................... 4-29
Skip Next TCF on Alarm .................................................................................................................. 4-30
Skip Next TCF If Stream = .............................................................................................................. 4-30
Do Next TCF If Stream = ................................................................................................................. 4-30
Pressure Check .............................................................................................................................. 4-30
Pressure Control ............................................................................................................................. 4-30
Temperature Check ......................................................................................................................... 4-30
Temperature Control ....................................................................................................................... 4-30
OTHER TABLES AND REPORTS ......................................................................................................... 4-30
Viewing or Editing Tables ................................................................................................................ 4-30
Printing Tables ................................................................................................................................. 4-31
Printing Reports .............................................................................................................................. 4-31
Random Stream Stepping Table ...................................................................................................... 4-32
Time Table ....................................................................................................................................... 4-33
Stream Table ................................................................................................................................... 4-34
Raw Data Report............................................................................................................................. 4-35
Regular Report ................................................................................................................................ 4-36
Short Report .................................................................................................................................... 4-36
Standard Calibration Report ............................................................................................................ 4-36
AIR PURGING ....................................................................................................................................... 4-37
Y and Z Purge ................................................................................................................................. 4-37
2000-OSM, C1 v
Title Page
X Purge Operation .......................................................................................................................... 4-38

X Purge Override Option ................................................................................................................. 4-39
E2PROM ................................................................................................................................................ 4-40
Save Tables to E2PROM ................................................................................................................. 4-40
Restore Tables from E2PROM ......................................................................................................... 4-41
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ............................................................................................ 4-42
Physical Description ........................................................................................................................ 4-42
Operator Settings ............................................................................................................................ 4-42
Manual Temperature Control Mode ................................................................................................. 4-43
5 Zone Names and Limits Table ...................................................................................................... 4-44
Configuring SWITCH ....................................................................................................................... 4-46
Temperature Control Table .............................................................................................................. 4-48
Temperature Check Table ............................................................................................................... 4-49
Controller Type ................................................................................................................................ 4-51
Temperature Configuration Table .................................................................................................... 4-52
Programming Notes ........................................................................................................................ 4-53
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................. 4-54
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION .................................................................................. 4-54
Physical Description ........................................................................................................................ 4-54
Operator Settings ............................................................................................................................ 4-55
Manual Pressure Control Mode ....................................................................................................... 4-55
Pressure Configuration Table .......................................................................................................... 4-57
Configuring SWITCH ....................................................................................................................... 4-59
Pressure Control Table .................................................................................................................... 4-60
Pressure Check Table ..................................................................................................................... 4-62
Alarms ............................................................................................................................................. 4-63
RAW CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE AND REPROCESSING ............................................................. 4-63
General ........................................................................................................................................... 4-63
Accessing Raw Chromatogram Storage ......................................................................................... 4-64
Checking Available Memory ............................................................................................................ 4-64
Erasing (Releasing) Chromatogram Data ....................................................................................... 4-65
Saving Chromatograms .................................................................................................................. 4-66
Displaying Saved Data .................................................................................................................... 4-67
Reprocessing Saved Chromatograms ............................................................................................ 4-68
REMOTE GC OPERATION OPTION .................................................................................................... 4-69
LO COMM PCB Setup .................................................................................................................... 4-69
Remote Operation ........................................................................................................................... 4-72
ANALOG OUTPUT OPTION ................................................................................................................. 4-74
DIGITAL I/O OPTION ............................................................................................................................ 4-75
VistaNET OPTION ................................................................................................................................. 4-77
SECTION 5. MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 5-1

Gas Cylinder Replacement ............................................................................................................... 5-1
Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................ 5-2
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS ............................................................................................................................. 5-2
ROM Checksum ................................................................................................................................ 5-2
Chroma Board ................................................................................................................................... 5-4
Digital Output .................................................................................................................................... 5-4
Trend Output ..................................................................................................................................... 5-6
vi 2000-OSM, C1
Title Page
Hardware Setup ................................................................................................................................ 5-7

SOFTWARE VERIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 5-8
Preliminary Steps .............................................................................................................................. 5-8
Chroma Board 1 Input Table ............................................................................................................. 5-9
Chroma Board 1 Output Table ......................................................................................................... 5-10
Digital Board 1 Input Table .............................................................................................................. 5-10
Digital Board 1 Output Table ............................................................................................................ 5-11
Digital Board 2 ................................................................................................................................. 5-12
Chroma Board 2 .............................................................................................................................. 5-12
Trend and Detector ......................................................................................................................... 5-13
BASIC COMMON! Size .................................................................................................................. 5-13
Final Steps ...................................................................................................................................... 5-14
SECTION 6. TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES ...................................................................................................... 6-1

BASELINE PROBLEMS .......................................................................................................................... 6-1
Baseline or Signal Offset (TCD) ........................................................................................................ 6-1
Cyclic Short Term Drift ...................................................................................................................... 6-2
Continuous Upward or Downward Drift ............................................................................................. 6-2
Baseline Continuous Noise ............................................................................................................... 6-3
Baseline or Signal Offset (FID) .......................................................................................................... 6-4
Baseline Signal Random Noise (FID) ................................................................................................ 6-4
Baseline or Signal Offset (FPD) ........................................................................................................ 6-5
Baseline Signal Random Noise (FPD) .............................................................................................. 6-6
ANALYSIS PROBLEMS .......................................................................................................................... 6-7
No Peaks .......................................................................................................................................... 6-7
Double Sampling ............................................................................................................................... 6-8
Additional Peaks of Unknown Origin (Mystery Peaks) ...................................................................... 6-9
Variable Sample Size ...................................................................................................................... 6-10
Variable Retention Times ................................................................................................................ 6-10
Individual Peak Missing on Report .................................................................................................. 6-11
Peak Inversion ................................................................................................................................ 6-11
Chromatogram Oversized or Off Scale ........................................................................................... 6-12
Reduced Detector Sensitivity .......................................................................................................... 6-12
Peak Discrimination ........................................................................................................................ 6-13
Premature Termination of Analysis .................................................................................................. 6-13
TEMPERATURE CONTROL HARDWARE PROBLEMS ....................................................................... 6-14
Temperature Probe Open ................................................................................................................ 6-14
Temperature Probe Shorted ............................................................................................................ 6-15
Isothermal Oven Heater Thermocouple Faulty ................................................................................ 6-15
Temperature Control Micro #2 ......................................................................................................... 6-16
Loss of Air ....................................................................................................................................... 6-16
Triac Failure .................................................................................................................................... 6-17
T-Rating Disagreement ................................................................................................................... 6-18
Exclusion Jumper Disagreement ..................................................................................................... 6-18
Oven Temperature is Greater Than T-Rating .................................................................................. 6-19
Reasonableness ............................................................................................................................. 6-19
AC Zero Crossing Loss ................................................................................................................... 6-20
Over Temp Trial Test Fail ................................................................................................................. 6-20
Controller Housing Internal Temperature Greater Than 80 Degrees C ............................................ 6-21
2000-OSM, C1 vii
Title Page
Set Point Unacceptable ................................................................................................................... 6-22

Reconfiguration Failure ................................................................................................................... 6-22
Out of Control .................................................................................................................................. 6-22
Open or Shorted Heater .................................................................................................................. 6-23
Blown Fuse, AC Conditioning Board ............................................................................................... 6-23
Low Oven Temperature ................................................................................................................... 6-24
High Oven Temperature .................................................................................................................. 6-24
Programmed Oven Temperature Not Cooling or Slow to Cool ........................................................ 6-24
OUTPUT PROBLEMS ........................................................................................................................... 6-25
Printer Not Generating Report ......................................................................................................... 6-25
Trend Output Not Functioning Correctly .......................................................................................... 6-25
Digital PCB Malfunction ................................................................................................................... 6-25
No Recorder Output ........................................................................................................................ 6-26
No Vista Workstation Communication ............................................................................................. 6-26
No Analyzer Keypad Response ....................................................................................................... 6-26
LOCOM PCB Symptoms and Possible Causes .............................................................................. 6-26
Flame Out LED On.......................................................................................................................... 6-27
Flame Will Not Ignite (FID or FPD) .................................................................................................. 6-28
Low Carrier Pressure Hardware Alarm ............................................................................................ 6-28
Low Sample Flow Hardware Alarm ................................................................................................. 6-28
Loss of Purge Air ............................................................................................................................. 6-29
Stream Not Selected ....................................................................................................................... 6-29
Analyzer Will Not Power Up (X-Purge) ............................................................................................ 6-30
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................... 6-31
CONTROLLER PROBLEMS ................................................................................................................. 6-31
Input Power ..................................................................................................................................... 6-31
Power Distribution ........................................................................................................................... 6-32
Poor Display Contrast ..................................................................................................................... 6-33
ALARMS ............................................................................................................................................... 6-33
Sensors Active ................................................................................................................................ 6-35
Sensors Held .................................................................................................................................. 6-35
Component High ............................................................................................................................. 6-36
Component Low .............................................................................................................................. 6-36
Clock Error ...................................................................................................................................... 6-36
TCF Error ........................................................................................................................................ 6-37
Post Analysis Error .......................................................................................................................... 6-37
Communications Error .................................................................................................................... 6-38
Pressure Board ............................................................................................................................... 6-39
Temperature Board ......................................................................................................................... 6-40
Raw Chromatogram Storage ........................................................................................................... 6-42
Alarm Common Output Connections ............................................................................................... 6-42
Alarm Common Output Checks ....................................................................................................... 6-43
SECTION 7. TEST PROCEDURES
TP 1: CARRIER, MAKEUP, AND UTILITY GAS SUPPLIES ................................................................... 7-1

TP 2: CARRIER AND MAKEUP GAS FLOW ADJUSTMENTS .............................................................. 7-1
TP 3: SAMPLE VALVE LEAKING/COLUMN FLOODING ....................................................................... 7-2
TP 4: CARRIER OR MAKEUP GAS REGULATOR ................................................................................ 7-3
TP 5: TC DETECTOR BALANCE ........................................................................................................... 7-3
TP 6: FILAMENT TCD TEST .................................................................................................................. 7-4
viii 2000-OSM, C1
Title Page
TP 7: TCD ELECTRONICS .................................................................................................................... 7-5

TP 8: COLUMN TRAIN PROBLEMS ...................................................................................................... 7-6
TP 9: BASELINE CYCLIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER (TCD) ....................................................... 7-7
TP 10: BASELINE CYCLIC CARRIER REGULATOR ............................................................................ 7-7
TP 11: BASELINE CYCLIC FLOW CONTROLLER ................................................................................ 7-7
TP 12: COMMON USAGE OF GASES .................................................................................................. 7-7
TP 13: UTILITY GAS CONTAMINATION PROCEDURE ........................................................................ 7-7
TP 14: BURNER AIR CATALYTIC CLEANUP UNIT ............................................................................... 7-8
TP 15: COAXIAL CABLE ........................................................................................................................ 7-8
TP 16: FID REDUCED SENSITIVITY ..................................................................................................... 7-9
TP 17: FID WILL NOT LIGHT ............................................................................................................... 7-10
TP 18: VERIFICATION FLAME IS IGNITED ........................................................................................ 7-11
TP 19: SAMPLE VALVE ACTUATION AIR ........................................................................................... 7-11
TP 20: DOUBLE SAMPLING ................................................................................................................ 7-12
TP 21: VARIABLE SAMPLESIZE ......................................................................................................... 7-13
TP 22: OPEN TEMPERATURE SENSOR ............................................................................................ 7-14
TP 23: SHORTED TEMPERATURE SENSOR ..................................................................................... 7-14
TP 24: LOSS OF OVEN AIR ................................................................................................................ 7-15
TP 25: ISOTHERMAL OVEN OVERTEMP SENSOR OPEN ............................................................... 7-16
TP 26: ZONE INPUT SENSOR OPEN ................................................................................................. 7-17
TP 27: OPEN OR SHORTED HEATER ................................................................................................. 7-18
TP 28: OPEN FUSE TO AC CONDITIONING BOARD ......................................................................... 7-19
TP 29: FID POLARIZING VOLTAGE TEST .......................................................................................... 7-19
TP 30: “FLAME OUT” LED REMAINS ON AFTER FID FLAME IGNITION ........................................... 7-21
TP 31: CHECKING TEMPERATURE TABLE VALUES ......................................................................... 7-22
TP 32: PLUGGED JET OR BREATHER ............................................................................................... 7-27
TP 33: PEAK DISCRIMINATION .......................................................................................................... 7-28
TP 34: CHECKING METHOD TABLE CONFIGURATION .................................................................... 7-29
TP 35: VENT BACK PRESSURE ......................................................................................................... 7-33
TP 36: PRINTER TEST ........................................................................................................................ 7-34
TP 37: RESIDUAL SAMPLE ................................................................................................................. 7-34
TP 38: TREND OUTPUT ...................................................................................................................... 7-35
TP 39: DIGITAL I/O PCB ...................................................................................................................... 7-36
TP 40: VISTA WORKSTATION COMMUNICATION TEST ................................................................... 7-37
TP 41: LOW CARRIER PRESSURE .................................................................................................... 7-37
TP 42: LOW SAMPLE FLOW HARDWARE ALARM ............................................................................ 7-38
TP 43: PROGRAMMED TEMPERATURE OVEN COOL DOWN ......................................................... 7-39
TP 44: STREAM SWITCHING ............................................................................................................. 7-40
TP 45: FPD SETUP ............................................................................................................................... 7-42
SECTION 8. REPAIR
REPLACING HEATERS .......................................................................................................................... 8-1

Isothermal Temperature Oven Heater ............................................................................................... 8-1
Sample Valve Heater ........................................................................................................................ 8-2
SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR ........................................................................................................................ 8-3
Disassembly ...................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Reassembly ...................................................................................................................................... 8-5
COLUMN INSTALLATION OR REPLACEMENT ..................................................................................... 8-7
Column Removal ............................................................................................................................... 8-7
Packed Column Installation ............................................................................................................... 8-7
2000-OSM, C1 ix
Title Page
Capillary Column Installation ............................................................................................................. 8-8

Cutting Capillary Columns ................................................................................................................. 8-8
FID REPAIR ............................................................................................................................................ 8-9
FID Cell Access ............................................................................................................................... 8-10
Replacing the Breather ................................................................................................................... 8-10
Replacing the Thermocouple Assembly .......................................................................................... 8-11
Accessing the Polarizer and Ignitor Elements ................................................................................. 8-12
Replacing the Polarizer ................................................................................................................... 8-12
Replacing the Ignitor Assembly ....................................................................................................... 8-13
Closing the Detector ........................................................................................................................ 8-14
Cleaning the FID Jet ....................................................................................................................... 8-15
Cleaning the Collector ..................................................................................................................... 8-16
Replacing the FID Cable Assembly ................................................................................................. 8-16
FILAMENT TCD REPAIR ...................................................................................................................... 8-17
T/C Detector Access ....................................................................................................................... 8-18
Removing the Filaments .................................................................................................................. 8-18
Installing the Filaments .................................................................................................................... 8-19
Filament Checkout .......................................................................................................................... 8-19
Connecting the Filaments ................................................................................................................ 8-20
Leak Test ......................................................................................................................................... 8-21
Potting the Filaments (CENELEC and CSA only) ............................................................................ 8-21
THERMISTOR TCD REPAIR ................................................................................................................ 8-22
T/C Detector Access ....................................................................................................................... 8-22
Removing the Thermistors .............................................................................................................. 8-23
Installing the Thermistors ................................................................................................................ 8-23
Thermistor Checkout ....................................................................................................................... 8-24
Connecting the Thermistors ............................................................................................................ 8-25
Leak Test ......................................................................................................................................... 8-25
FPD REPAIR ......................................................................................................................................... 8-26
Replacing the Photomultiplier Assembly ......................................................................................... 8-26
Replacing the Photomultiplier Assembly O-Ring ............................................................................. 8-27
Replacing the Burner Block ............................................................................................................. 8-28
Replacing the Burner Block O-Rings ............................................................................................... 8-28
METHANIZER/AIR CLEANUP REPAIR ................................................................................................ 8-29
Removing the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly ............................................................................ 8-30
Removing the Catalytic Tubes ......................................................................................................... 8-31
Installing the Catalytic Tubes ........................................................................................................... 8-32
Packing the Housing ....................................................................................................................... 8-32
Installing the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly .............................................................................. 8-33
Air Cleanup Testing ......................................................................................................................... 8-33
Air Cleanup Final Preparation ......................................................................................................... 8-34
REPAIRING THE CARRIER GAS PANEL (ANALOG) ........................................................................... 8-35
Removing the Carrier Gas Panel .................................................................................................... 8-35
Replacing a Regulator ..................................................................................................................... 8-36
Replacing a Gauge ......................................................................................................................... 8-37
Installing the Carrier Gas Panel ...................................................................................................... 8-37
REPAIRING THE EPC CONTROL ASSEMBLY .................................................................................... 8-38
Removing the EPC Control Assembly ............................................................................................. 8-38
Installing the EPC Control Assembly ............................................................................................... 8-39
Replacing a Sensor PCB ................................................................................................................ 8-39
Replacing a Proportional Valve ....................................................................................................... 8-40
x 2000-OSM, C1
Title Page
Replacing the Control PCB ............................................................................................................. 8-41

Replacing the Heater ...................................................................................................................... 8-42
CALIBRATING THE ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROLLER ......................................................... 8-43
REPAIRING PURGE AIR PANEL COMPONENTS ............................................................................... 8-45
Removing the Purge Air Panel ........................................................................................................ 8-45
Replacing a Regulator ..................................................................................................................... 8-45
Replacing a Gauge ......................................................................................................................... 8-46
Installing the Purge Air Panel .......................................................................................................... 8-46
SETTING JUMPERS ............................................................................................................................. 8-46
Backplane PCB ............................................................................................................................... 8-46
DTC Backplane PCB ...................................................................................................................... 8-48
DTC Zone PCB ............................................................................................................................... 8-49
VAC Conditioning PCB .................................................................................................................... 8-50
Front Panel PCB ............................................................................................................................. 8-50
FID Amplifier PCB ........................................................................................................................... 8-51
Filament TCD Amplifier PCB ........................................................................................................... 8-51
Thermistor TCD Amplifier Interface PCB ......................................................................................... 8-52
EPC Multibus PCB .......................................................................................................................... 8-53
EPC Control PCB ............................................................................................................................ 8-54
Chroma I/O PCB (old type) ............................................................................................................. 8-54
Chroma I/O PCB (new type) ........................................................................................................... 8-55
Power Supply PCB ......................................................................................................................... 8-56
VALCO DIAPHRAGM VALVE REPAIR .................................................................................................. 8-56
Removing the Valve ........................................................................................................................ 8-56
Repairing the Valve ......................................................................................................................... 8-57
Reinstalling the Valve ...................................................................................................................... 8-58
VistaNET DEBUG MONITOR ................................................................................................................ 8-58
Purpose .......................................................................................................................................... 8-58
Making the Connections .................................................................................................................. 8-58
Startup ............................................................................................................................................ 8-59
Information Display ......................................................................................................................... 8-60
Menu Items ..................................................................................................................................... 8-60
Statistical Display ............................................................................................................................ 8-62
DUAL AIR CLEANUP REPAIR .............................................................................................................. 8-65
Removing the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly ...................................................................................... 8-66
Removing the Air Cleanup Tubes .................................................................................................... 8-67
Installing the Air Cleanup Tubes ...................................................................................................... 8-67
Packing the Housing ....................................................................................................................... 8-67
Installing the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly ........................................................................................ 8-68
Air Cleanup Testing ......................................................................................................................... 8-69
Air Cleanup Final Preparation ......................................................................................................... 8-69
REPAIRING THE CP VALVE ................................................................................................................. 8-70
Replacing the Slider ........................................................................................................................ 8-70
Replacing the Wedges .................................................................................................................... 8-71
Replacing the O-Rings .................................................................................................................... 8-71
SECTION 9. REPLACEMENT PARTS
ORDERING INFORMATION ................................................................................................................... 9-1

Equipment Identification .................................................................................................................... 9-1
Hardware Configuration Identification ................................................................................................ 9-1
2000-OSM, C1 xi
Title Page
Software Configuration Identification ................................................................................................. 9-2

Who to Contact ................................................................................................................................. 9-2
GC CONTROLLER ................................................................................................................................. 9-3
Back of Front Panel ........................................................................................................................... 9-3
Card Cage ......................................................................................................................................... 9-3
GCC Chassis .................................................................................................................................... 9-4
Components on Right Side Door ....................................................................................................... 9-4
PURGE AIR PANEL ................................................................................................................................ 9-5
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL PANEL ...................................................................................... 9-5
CARRIER GAS PANEL ........................................................................................................................... 9-6
ISOTHERMAL OVEN COMPONENTS ................................................................................................... 9-6
Liquid Sample Valve .......................................................................................................................... 9-7
Flame Ionization Detector ................................................................................................................. 9-8
Filament Type Thermal Conductivity Detector ................................................................................... 9-8
Thermistor Type Thermal Conductivity Detector ............................................................................... 9-9
M2CP Valve ...................................................................................................................................... 9-9
Type 781 Methanizer/Air Clean Up System ..................................................................................... 9-10
Type 805 Methanizer/Air Clean Up System ..................................................................................... 9-10
Valco Diaphragm Valve ................................................................................................................... 9-11
Dual Air Cleanup System ................................................................................................................ 9-11
FLAME PHOTOMETRIC DETECTOR (FPD) ........................................................................................ 9-12
Transformer and Photomultiplier Components ................................................................................ 9-12
Burner Block Components .............................................................................................................. 9-12
TEMPERATURE PROGRAMMED OVEN ............................................................................................. 9-13
Flame Ionization Detector with Heater Block ................................................................................... 9-14
Filament Type TC Detector with Heater Block ................................................................................. 9-14
SECTION 10. VISTA BASIC
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 10-1

Using the Editor .............................................................................................................................. 10-1
Vista BASIC Line Format ................................................................................................................ 10-2
Character Set .................................................................................................................................. 10-2
Constants ........................................................................................................................................ 10-3
Variables ......................................................................................................................................... 10-3
Arrays ............................................................................................................................................. 10-4
Expressions and Operators ............................................................................................................. 10-4
ALPHABETIC LISTING ......................................................................................................................... 10-5
ABSOLUTE VALUE Function .......................................................................................................... 10-5
ACTIVATED BY Function ................................................................................................................ 10-5
ACTIVATE STREAM Command ...................................................................................................... 10-6
ADD TCF Command ....................................................................................................................... 10-6
ALARM Function ............................................................................................................................. 10-6
ASC Function .................................................................................................................................. 10-6
ASSIGN STREAM Command ......................................................................................................... 10-7
BPRINT Statement .......................................................................................................................... 10-7
CHAIN Statement ........................................................................................................................... 10-7
CHR$ Function ............................................................................................................................... 10-7
CLEAR Command .......................................................................................................................... 10-7
CLOCK ERROR ALARM Function .................................................................................................. 10-7
xii 2000-OSM, C1
Title Page
COMMON Floating Point Array ....................................................................................................... 10-8

COMMON String Array ................................................................................................................... 10-8
COMMUNICATION ERROR ALARM Function ................................................................................ 10-8
COMPONENT NAME Function ....................................................................................................... 10-8
COMPONENT TYPE Function ........................................................................................................ 10-8
COPY ARRAY Command ............................................................................................................... 10-9
CURRENT METHOD Function ....................................................................................................... 10-9
CURRENT STREAM Function ........................................................................................................ 10-9
CYCLE TIME Function .................................................................................................................... 10-9
DACS EVENT MESSAGE Function ................................................................................................ 10-9
DEACTIVATE STREAM Command ............................................................................................... 10-10
DELETE ALL GATE TCFS Command ........................................................................................... 10-10
DELETE ALL TCFS OF A TYPE Command .................................................................................. 10-10
DIM Statement .............................................................................................................................. 10-10
END Statement ..............................................................................................................................10-11
EXPONENT Function .....................................................................................................................10-11
FLAME OUT ALARM Function .......................................................................................................10-11
FLOATING POINT Conversion Routine .........................................................................................10-11
FOR...NEXT Statements ................................................................................................................ 10-11
GET ACTUAL RETENTION TIME Function .................................................................................. 10-12
GET ASTM Function ..................................................................................................................... 10-12
GET BENCHMARK CONCENTRATION Function ........................................................................ 10-12
GET BLEND Function ................................................................................................................... 10-12
GET CALIBRATION CONCENTRATION Function........................................................................ 10-12
GET COMPONENT CONCENTRATION Function ........................................................................ 10-13
GET CORRELATION FACTOR TABLE Command ....................................................................... 10-13
GET EXPECTED RETENTION TIME Function ............................................................................. 10-13
GET MAXIMUM PEAK PARAMETER Function ............................................................................ 10-13
GET MULTIPLIER EXPONENT Function ...................................................................................... 10-14
GET OUTSTANDING REQUESTS Function ................................................................................ 10-14
GET PEAK TYPE PARAMETER Function .................................................................................... 10-14
GET PERCENT OFF FOR A TEMPERATURE Command ............................................................ 10-14
GET PERCENT OFF FOR A TIME Command .............................................................................. 10-14
GET PERCENT OFF TABLE Command ....................................................................................... 10-15
GET PRESSURE OF A ZONE Command ..................................................................................... 10-15
GET RESPONSE FACTOR Function ........................................................................................... 10-15
GET STREAM ASSIGNMENT Function ........................................................................................ 10-15
GET TEMPERATURE FOR A PERCENT OFF Command ............................................................ 10-15
GET TEMPERATURE FOR A TIME Command ............................................................................. 10-16
GET TEMPERATURE OF A ZONE Command .............................................................................. 10-16
GET TEMPERATURE TABLE Command ..................................................................................... 10-16
GET TIME FOR A PERCENT OFF Command .............................................................................. 10-16
GET TIME FOR A TEMPERATURE Command ............................................................................. 10-16
GET TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Command ...................................................................... 10-17
GOTO Statement .......................................................................................................................... 10-17
GO TO SUBROUTINE Statement ................................................................................................. 10-17
HARDWARE ALARM Function ..................................................................................................... 10-17
HIGH CONCENTRATION ALARM Function ................................................................................. 10-17
IDLE ALARM Function .................................................................................................................. 10-17
IF Statement ................................................................................................................................. 10-18
INJECT TIME Function ................................................................................................................. 10-18
2000-OSM, C1 xiii
Title Page
INJECT UCT Function .................................................................................................................. 10-18

INSTR Function ............................................................................................................................ 10-18
INTEGER TYPE Conversion Routine ........................................................................................... 10-18
LENGTH OF CORRELATION FACTOR TABLE Function ............................................................. 10-19
LENGTH OF PERCENT OFF TABLE Function ............................................................................. 10-19
LENGTH OF STRING Function .................................................................................................... 10-19
LENGTH OF TEMPERATURE TABLE Function ........................................................................... 10-19
LENGTH OF TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Function ........................................................... 10-19
LET Statement .............................................................................................................................. 10-20
LOGARITHM BASE TEN Function ............................................................................................... 10-20
LOW CONCENTRATION ALARM Function .................................................................................. 10-20
LPRINT Statement ........................................................................................................................ 10-20
MAXIMUM SIM DIS PEAK HEIGHT Command ............................................................................ 10-22
NATURAL LOGARITHM Function ................................................................................................. 10-22
NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Function ....................................................................................... 10-22
NUMBER OF PEAKS Function ..................................................................................................... 10-22
OFFLINE ALARM Function ........................................................................................................... 10-22
OPERATOR MESSAGE ALARM Function .................................................................................... 10-23
PEAK AREA Function ................................................................................................................... 10-23
PEAK COMPONENT NUMBER Function ..................................................................................... 10-23
PEAK CREST AMPLITUDE Function ........................................................................................... 10-23
PEAK CREST TIME Function ....................................................................................................... 10-23
PEAK END AMPLITUDE Function ................................................................................................ 10-23
PEAK END TIME Function ............................................................................................................ 10-24
PEAK HEIGHT Function ............................................................................................................... 10-24
PEAK RAW AREA Function .......................................................................................................... 10-24
PEAK START AMPLITUDE Function ............................................................................................ 10-24
PEAK START TIME Function ........................................................................................................ 10-24
POST ANALYSIS ERROR ALARM Function................................................................................. 10-25
POWER FAIL ALARM Function .................................................................................................... 10-25
PREVIOUS INJECT TIME Function .............................................................................................. 10-25
PREVIOUS INJECT UCT Function ............................................................................................... 10-25
PREVIOUS METHOD Command ................................................................................................. 10-25
PREVIOUS STREAM Function ..................................................................................................... 10-25
PURGING STREAM Command .................................................................................................... 10-25
PURGING STREAM Function ....................................................................................................... 10-26
PUT ACTUAL RETENTION TIME Command ................................................................................ 10-26
PUT ASTM Command ................................................................................................................... 10-26
PUT BENCHMARK CONCENTRATION Command ...................................................................... 10-26
PUT BLEND Command ................................................................................................................ 10-26
PUT CALIBRATION CONCENTRATION Command ..................................................................... 10-27
PUT COMPONENT CONCENTRATION Command ..................................................................... 10-27
PUT COMPONENT NAME Command .......................................................................................... 10-27
PUT CORRELATION FACTOR TABLE Command ....................................................................... 10-27
PUT EXPECTED RETENTION TIME Command .......................................................................... 10-28
PUT MULTIPLIER EXPONENT Command ................................................................................... 10-28
PUT PERCENT OFF TABLE Command ....................................................................................... 10-28
PUT PRESSURE OF A ZONE Command ..................................................................................... 10-28
PUT REPORT TYPE Command ................................................................................................... 10-28
PUT RESPONSE FACTOR Command ......................................................................................... 10-29
PUT TEMPERATURE OF A ZONE Command .............................................................................. 10-29
xiv 2000-OSM, C1
Title Page
PUT TEMPERATURE TABLE Command ...................................................................................... 10-29

PUT TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Command ...................................................................... 10-30
READ ANALOG INPUT Function .................................................................................................. 10-30
READ DIGITAL INPUT Function ................................................................................................... 10-31
REMARKS Command ................................................................................................................... 10-31
REPORT TYPE Function .............................................................................................................. 10-31
REQUEST ANALYSIS Command ................................................................................................. 10-31
REQUEST BENCHMARK Command ........................................................................................... 10-32
REQUEST CALIBRATION Command ........................................................................................... 10-32
RESET TIME LIMIT Command ..................................................................................................... 10-32
SENSOR ALARM Function ........................................................................................................... 10-32
SET BASIC ALARM Function ....................................................................................................... 10-32
SET BASIC COMPONENT ALARM Function ............................................................................... 10-32
SPACE Function ........................................................................................................................... 10-33
SQUARE ROOT Function ............................................................................................................. 10-33
START ANALYSIS Command ....................................................................................................... 10-33
STOP ANALYSIS Command ......................................................................................................... 10-33
STREAM NAME Function ............................................................................................................. 10-33
STREAM STATUS Function .......................................................................................................... 10-33
SUBSTRING Function .................................................................................................................. 10-34
TCF ERROR ALARM Function ..................................................................................................... 10-34
TEMPERATURE UNITS Function ................................................................................................. 10-34
TIME Function ............................................................................................................................... 10-34
TIME UCT Function ...................................................................................................................... 10-34
TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Function ................................................................................. 10-35
TOTAL PEAK RAW AREA Function .............................................................................................. 10-35
TOTAL SIM DIS AREA Command ................................................................................................. 10-35
UCT TO TIME Conversion Routine ............................................................................................... 10-35
VALUE Function ........................................................................................................................... 10-35
VALVE Command ......................................................................................................................... 10-36
WRITE DIGITAL OUTPUT Command ........................................................................................... 10-36
WRITE TREND OUTPUT Command ............................................................................................ 10-36
Y2X Function ................................................................................................................................ 10-36
ZERO OUTSTANDING REQUESTS Command ........................................................................... 10-36
Vista BASIC Support for VistaNET Communications .................................................................... 10-37
SUBJECT LISTING ............................................................................................................................. 10-38
General Statements ...................................................................................................................... 10-39
Math Routines ............................................................................................................................... 10-39
String and Conversion Routines .................................................................................................... 10-39
GCC Commands and Functions ................................................................................................... 10-39
SIM DIS (Only) Commands ........................................................................................................... 10-41
Simultaneous Dual Detector Commands ...................................................................................... 10-42
VistaNET Commands .................................................................................................................... 10-42
ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................................................................................... 10-43
Compilation Error Messages ......................................................................................................... 10-43
Run-Time Error Messages ............................................................................................................ 10-44
REAL-TIME VISTA BASIC ................................................................................................................... 10-45
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 10-45
Real Time Operation ..................................................................................................................... 10-46
Screens ......................................................................................................................................... 10-46
2000-OSM, C1 xv
Title Page
Real-Time Vista BASIC Commands .............................................................................................. 10-48
SECTION 11. DRAWINGS
USE OF DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................ 11-1

LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................ 11-1
xvi 2000-OSM, C1
ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Title Page
1-1 Typical Process Gas Chromatograph PGC2000 ....................................................................... 1-1

1-2 PGC with Flame Photometric Detector ..................................................................................... 1-2
2-1 Liquid Sample Valve Connection Methods ................................................................................ 2-3

2-2 Analyzer Adjustments ............................................................................................................... 2-7
2-3 Manual Control Mode Screen .................................................................................................... 2-8
2-4 Checking Total Column Flow ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2-5 Matching Flow Through Analytical Flow Adjust Valve .............................................................. 2-10
2-6 Checking Backflush Flow ........................................................................................................ 2-11
2-7 Matching Flow Through Selector Flow Adjust Valve ................................................................ 2-12
2-8 Chroma Board Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-16
2-9 Manual Temperature Control Mode Screen ............................................................................. 2-17
2-10 Background Screen ................................................................................................................ 2-18
2-11 Request Analysis Screen ........................................................................................................ 2-20
2-12 Chroma I/O Board Setup ......................................................................................................... 2-22
2-13 Remote Number Identification with SW1 ................................................................................. 2-23
2-14 Manual Control Mode Screen .................................................................................................. 2-25
2-15 Printer Report Type Screen ..................................................................................................... 2-27
2-16 TCD Amplifier PCB ................................................................................................................. 2-29
2-17 VN Menu Screen (Startup Highlighted) ................................................................................... 2-30
2-18 VistaNET Essential Addresses Screen ................................................................................... 2-31
2-19 VistaNET Access Level Screen ............................................................................................... 2-32
2-20 VN Menu Screen (Tables Highlighted) .................................................................................... 2-33
2-21 Subscriber List Screen ............................................................................................................ 2-33
2-22 Controller Status Screen ......................................................................................................... 2-35
3-1 GCC Card Cage Controls and Indicators .................................................................................. 3-1

3-2 Electronics Housing Controls and Indicators ............................................................................. 3-1
3-3 Regulator and Gauge Panels .................................................................................................... 3-2
3-4 Background Screen with Elements Identified ............................................................................ 3-3
3-5 Request Analysis Screen .......................................................................................................... 3-4
3-6 Alarms Screen .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
3-7 Chromatogram Attenuation Ranges .......................................................................................... 3-8
3-8 Command Tree, Part 1 .............................................................................................................. 3-9
3-9 Command Tree, Part 2 ............................................................................................................ 3-10
4-1 Typical Analytical Flow System Diagram ................................................................................... 4-1

4-2 Chroma Board Screen .............................................................................................................. 4-3
4-3 Flame Ionization Detector ......................................................................................................... 4-3
4-4 Thermal Conductivity Detectors ................................................................................................ 4-4
4-5 Flame Photometric Detector ..................................................................................................... 4-5
4-6 Background Screen, Simultaneous Dual Detectors ................................................................... 4-7
4-7 First Chroma Board Screen ...................................................................................................... 4-7
4-8 Second Chroma Board Screen ................................................................................................. 4-8
4-9 Control Parameters Screen ....................................................................................................... 4-9
4-10 Stream Assignment Screen ....................................................................................................... 4-9
4-12 Chromatogram of Analysis ...................................................................................................... 4-15
4-13 Data for Method Table ............................................................................................................. 4-16
4-14 Method Table #?? Screen ....................................................................................................... 4-17
2000-OSM, C1 xvii
ILLUSTRATIONS (continued)
Figure Title Page
4-15 Cal Define & Cycle Time Screen ............................................................................................. 4-17

4-16 Method Table #01 Screen ....................................................................................................... 4-18
4-17 Component Definition Screen ................................................................................................. 4-19
4-18 Print Tables Screen ................................................................................................................. 4-21
4-19 Printed Method Table .............................................................................................................. 4-22
4-20 Example of Basic Slope Detection Functions .......................................................................... 4-23
4-21 Example of Peak Lumping ...................................................................................................... 4-25
4-22 Example of Tangent Skim ........................................................................................................ 4-25
4-23 Examples of Peak End ............................................................................................................ 4-26
4-24 Example of Forward Projection ............................................................................................... 4-26
4-25 Example of Reverse Projection ............................................................................................... 4-27
4-26 Example of Suspend End ........................................................................................................ 4-27
4-27 Example of End=Crest+ .......................................................................................................... 4-28
4-28 Random Streams Screen ........................................................................................................ 4-32
4-29 Random Stream Stepping Table .............................................................................................. 4-32
4-30 Time Table Screen .................................................................................................................. 4-33
4-31 Stream Assignment Screen ..................................................................................................... 4-35
4-32 Raw Data Report .................................................................................................................... 4-35
4-33 Regular Report ........................................................................................................................ 4-36
4-34 Short Report Without Alarm .................................................................................................... 4-36
4-35 Standard Calibration Report .................................................................................................... 4-37
4-36 X Purge With Cover Removed ................................................................................................ 4-38
4-37 Table Storage Screen .............................................................................................................. 4-41
4-39 Pressure and Temperature Control Screen ............................................................................. 4-45
4-40 5 Zone Names and Limits Table Screen .................................................................................. 4-46
4-42 Temperature Control Screen ................................................................................................... 4-49
4-43 Temperature Check Screen .................................................................................................... 4-50
4-44 Controller Type Screen ........................................................................................................... 4-51
4-45 Temp Config Table Screen ...................................................................................................... 4-52
4-47 Manual Pressure Control Mode Screen .................................................................................. 4-56
4-48 Pressure Configuration Table Screen ...................................................................................... 4-58
4-50 Pressure Control Screen ......................................................................................................... 4-61
4-51 Pressure Check Screen .......................................................................................................... 4-63
4-52 Commands Screen ................................................................................................................. 4-64
4-53 Memory Used Screen ............................................................................................................. 4-65
4-54 Automatically Save Analyses Screen ...................................................................................... 4-67
4-55 Reprocess Screen .................................................................................................................. 4-69
4-56 Location of LO COMM PCB .................................................................................................... 4-70
4-57 Location of LO COMM PCB Switches ..................................................................................... 4-70
4-58 Address Identification with SW1 .............................................................................................. 4-71
4-59 Remote Front Panel Mode Screen .......................................................................................... 4-72
4-60 Remote Controller Screen ....................................................................................................... 4-73
4-61 Trend Table Screen ................................................................................................................. 4-75
4-62 Digital Table Screen ................................................................................................................ 4-76
4-63 VN Menu Screen ..................................................................................................................... 4-77
4-64 VistaNET Essential Addresses Screen ................................................................................... 4-78
xviii 2000-OSM, C1
Figure Title Page
5-1 Recommended Preventive Maintenance Schedule ................................................................... 5-1

5-2 Commands Screen ................................................................................................................... 5-3
5-3 Diagnostic Tests Screen (Tests Selected) ................................................................................. 5-3
5-4 Diagnostic Tests Screen (Tools Selected) ................................................................................. 5-5
5-5 Manual Control of Digital Outputs Screen ................................................................................. 5-5
5-6 Manual Control of Trend Outputs Screen .................................................................................. 5-7
5-7 Serial Configuration Screen ...................................................................................................... 5-8
5-8 Chroma Board Digital Input Screen #2 ...................................................................................... 5-9
5-9 Chroma Board Digital Output Screen #2 ................................................................................. 5-10
5-10 Digital Board Digital Input Screen ............................................................................................ 5-11
5-11 Digital Board Digital Output Screen ......................................................................................... 5-12
5-12 Trend and Detector Configuration Screen ............................................................................... 5-13
6-1 Example of Baseline Offset ....................................................................................................... 6-1

6-2 Cyclic Short Term Drift .............................................................................................................. 6-2
6-3 Continuous Upward Drift ........................................................................................................... 6-3
6-4 Baseline Noise .......................................................................................................................... 6-3
6-5 Baseline Offset .......................................................................................................................... 6-4
6-6 Baseline Random Noise ............................................................................................................ 6-4
6-7 Baseline Offset .......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6-8 Baseline Random Noise ............................................................................................................ 6-6
6-9 No Peaks .................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6-10 Double Sampling ....................................................................................................................... 6-9
6-11 Mystery Peaks .......................................................................................................................... 6-9
6-12 Variable Sample Size .............................................................................................................. 6-10
6-13 Variable Retention Time .......................................................................................................... 6-10
6-14 Peak Inversion ........................................................................................................................ 6-11
6-15 Chromatogram Off Scale ........................................................................................................ 6-12
6-16 Backplane Board Showing VWS Connections ........................................................................ 6-14
6-17 EPC Pressure Control Assembly ............................................................................................ 6-31
6-18 Backplane PCB Power Connections ....................................................................................... 6-31
6-19 Input Power Distribution .......................................................................................................... 6-32
6-20 Location of Contrast Adjustment ............................................................................................. 6-33
6-21 Alarms Screen ........................................................................................................................ 6-34
6-22 Backplane PCB Digital Alarm Connections ............................................................................. 6-43
6-23 Control Parameters Screen ..................................................................................................... 6-44
6-24 Common DO Mask Main Screen ............................................................................................. 6-44
7-1 DTC Backplane PCB .............................................................................................................. 7-16

7-2 FID Amplifier Showing C6 Location ......................................................................................... 7-22
7-6 5 Zone Names and Limits Table Screen .................................................................................. 7-24
7-8 Commands Screen ................................................................................................................. 7-26
7-9 Method Table Screen .............................................................................................................. 7-26
7-10 Temperature Control Screen ................................................................................................... 7-27
7-12 Commands Screen ................................................................................................................. 7-30
7-13 Method Table Screen .............................................................................................................. 7-30
2000-OSM, C1 xix
Figure Title Page
8-1 Analyzer Oven Compartment .................................................................................................... 8-1

8-2 Liquid Sample Valve Connection Method .................................................................................. 8-3
8-3 Liquid Sample Valve .................................................................................................................. 8-4
8-4 Stacking the Belleville Springs .................................................................................................. 8-6
8-5 Flame Ionization Detector ......................................................................................................... 8-9
8-6 FID Cable Assembly ............................................................................................................... 8-17
8-7 Filament TC Detector .............................................................................................................. 8-17
8-8 Thermistor TC Detector ........................................................................................................... 8-22
8-9 FPD Photomultiplier Assembly End View ................................................................................ 8-26
8-10 Photomultiplier Tube Showing O-Ring ..................................................................................... 8-27
8-11 Burner Block ........................................................................................................................... 8-28
8-12 Burner Block, Showing O-Rings .............................................................................................. 8-29
8-13 Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly .......................................................................................... 8-30
8-14 Carrier Gas Panel from Right Side .......................................................................................... 8-35
8-15 Front Right Side of Oven ......................................................................................................... 8-35
8-16 Control Housing Access Area, Right Side of Analyzer ............................................................. 8-36
8-17 EPC Panel Cable Lock Nut ..................................................................................................... 8-38
8-18 EPC Control Assembly Components ....................................................................................... 8-39
8-19 EPC Control PCB Cabling ....................................................................................................... 8-40
8-20 Location of Zone Fittings ......................................................................................................... 8-43
8-22 Manual Pressure Control Mode Screen .................................................................................. 8-44
8-23 Purge Air Panel Fasteners ...................................................................................................... 8-45
8-24 Backplane PCB Jumper Locations .......................................................................................... 8-47
8-25 DTC Backplane PCB Switch and Jumper Locations ............................................................... 8-48
8-26 DTC Zone Board Jumper Location .......................................................................................... 8-49
8-27 VAC Conditioning Board Jumper Locations ............................................................................. 8-50
8-28 Front Panel PCB Adjustment and Jumper Locations ............................................................... 8-50
8-29 FID Amplifier PCB Jumper Locations ...................................................................................... 8-51
8-30 Filament TCD Amplifier PCB Jumper Locations ...................................................................... 8-51
8-31 Thermistor Amplifier Interface PCB Jumper Locations ............................................................ 8-52
8-32 EPC Multibus PCB Jumper Location ....................................................................................... 8-53
8-33 EPC Control PCB Jumper Location ........................................................................................ 8-54
8-34 Old Chroma I/O PCB Jumpers ................................................................................................ 8-54
8-35 New Chroma I/O PCB Jumpers .............................................................................................. 8-55
8-36 Power Supply PCB Jumpers ................................................................................................... 8-56
8-37 Valco 10-Port Diaphragm Valve .............................................................................................. 8-56
8-38 Cap Orientation ....................................................................................................................... 8-57
8-39 Exploded View of Valco Diaphragm Valve ............................................................................... 8-57
8-40 Communications Board Debug Connection ............................................................................ 8-59
8-41 Main Menu .............................................................................................................................. 8-59
8-42 Typical Dump Memory Screen ................................................................................................ 8-60
8-43 Typical Show Registers Screen .............................................................................................. 8-61
8-44 Typical Dump History Screen .................................................................................................. 8-62
8-45 Dual Air Cleanup Assembly ..................................................................................................... 8-65
8-46 Typical M2CP Valve ................................................................................................................ 8-70
8-47 O-Ring Kits ............................................................................................................................. 8-71
8-48 Installing the O-Rings on the Piston Rod and Piston ............................................................... 8-72
8-49 Installing the O-Ring on the Valve Body .................................................................................. 8-73
xx 2000-OSM, C1
Figure Title Page
9-1 Typical Nameplate ..................................................................................................................... 9-1

9-2 Background Screen .................................................................................................................. 9-2
9-3 Back of Front Panel .................................................................................................................. 9-3
9-4 Card Cage Components ........................................................................................................... 9-3
9-5 Chassis Components ................................................................................................................ 9-4
9-6 Right Side Door of GCC ............................................................................................................ 9-4
9-7 Purge Air Panel ......................................................................................................................... 9-5
9-8 Electronic Pressure Control Panel ............................................................................................ 9-5
9-9 Carrier Gas Panel ..................................................................................................................... 9-6
9-10 Isothermal Oven Components ................................................................................................... 9-7
9-11 Liquid Sample Valve .................................................................................................................. 9-7
9-12 FID Components ....................................................................................................................... 9-8
9-13 Filament Type TCD Components .............................................................................................. 9-8
9-14 Thermistor Type TCD Components ........................................................................................... 9-9
9-15 M2CP Valve Components ......................................................................................................... 9-9
9-16 Type 781 Methanizer/Air Cleanup System .............................................................................. 9-10
9-17 Type 805 Methanizer/Air Cleanup System .............................................................................. 9-10
9-18 Valco Diaphragm Valve ........................................................................................................... 9-11
9-19 Dual Air Cleanup System ........................................................................................................ 9-11
9-20 PGC2000 Showing FPD Components .................................................................................... 9-12
9-21 Burner Block Components ...................................................................................................... 9-13
9-22 Temperature Programmed Oven ............................................................................................. 9-13
9-23 FID with Heater Block ............................................................................................................. 9-14
9-24 Filament Type TCD with Heater Block ..................................................................................... 9-14
10-1 Chroma I/O Board, Showing UG1 and UH1 .......................................................................... 10-30
10-2 Background Screen .............................................................................................................. 10-46
10-3 Report, Basic I/O and Options Screen .................................................................................. 10-47
10-4 Real Time BASIC Status Screen ........................................................................................... 10-47
10-5 BASIC COMMON! Area Edit Screen ..................................................................................... 10-48
11-1 Jumper Configuration, RS-232 Printer .................................................................................... 11-2

11-2 Overall System Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 11-3
11-3 Analytical Section Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 11-4
11-4 Control Section Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 11-5
2000-OSM, C1 xxi
ABB Inc.
P.O. Box 831
Lewisburg, WV 24901

Fax (304) 645-4236

Fax (304) 647-1837

xxii 2000-OSM, C1
GLOSSARY
A/D converter device that converts an analog signal to a digital value
analyzer Vista II Series gas chromatograph
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange; standardized

computer coding for printed characters
Auto Zero procedure bringing the detector signal as close to electrical zero as
possible; brings the signal into the most sensitive area of the A/D
baseline reference point from which peak height or peak area is measured on a
chromatogram; detector signal level at which no components are detected
benchmark sample known to be a definite concentration; used to compare an

analyzer's present performance to its past performance
calibration run analysis that involves injecting a standard sample consisting of specific
components whose concentrations and elution sequences are known
CE Mark certification process and marking which denote that analyzer complies
with applicable new approach directives within the European Union
CENELEC Comite’ Europeen de Normalisation Electrotechnique; the European

electronics organization that determines standards and testing to ensure
safe operation of electrical instrumentation in hazardous areas
Chroma I/O Chromatographic Input/Output PCB; provides the interface between the
analog domain of the gas chromatographic analyzer and the digital
domain of the controller
components peaks, parameters or ratios that are being measured or calculated from a
chromatographic analysis
concentration the amount of a specific substance within a sample
CPU Central Processing Unit; controls the analyzer and collects and
manipulates the data
cursor keys front panel control keys marked with directional arrows
DCS Distributed Control System
Data Package application-specific engineering information (such as component tables,

function tables, chromatograms, and temperature, pressure and flow
settings) shipped with each analyzer
default values assigned parameters the controller will assume unless the operator
redefines the values
2000-OSM, C1 G-1
GLOSSARY (continued)
detector random electronic signals picked up by a sensing device in the absence of

background valid measurable input (see “noise”)
noise
Digital I/O Digital Input/Output PCB; enables the use of additional stream valves and/
or alarm sensors
DIP switch PCB switch that is used to set values through hardware instead of
software
drift the variances from the baseline or the norm; generally associated with
uncontrolled or unwanted changes in pressure or temperature
EIA Electronic Instrument Association
elution time the amount of time from the start of analysis that it takes for a peak to be
fully detected
EMC electromagnetic compatibility
EMI electromagnetic interference
Engineering Data see Data Package

Package
EPC Electronic Pressure Control
EPROM Erasable, Programmable, Read Only Memory; program software that can
be erased and reprogrammed a limited number of times
E2PROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory; used for the safe
storage of tables (sometimes written E2PROM or EEPROM)
FID Flame Ionization Detector
field highlighted area on display screen where data entry and modification are
allowed; data entry is ended (terminated) by filling the field with characters
or by pressing ENTER or any soft key or cursor key
forced gating technique of chromatographic data collection in which the controller

collects the detector signal during a specified period of time
Gate On/Off the time-coded function command which turns on and off the collection of
data from the detector
GC Gas Chromatagraph
GCC Gas Chromatographic Controller
Help key front panel control key used to access information pertaining to the current
screen display content
highway address numbers from one to 32 that uniquely identify remote GCC’s
G-2 2000-OSM, C1
HL High Limits, entered into a component table; when a component's

measured and calculated value exceeds the HL value, an alarm is
generated
host link serial communications link which allows the transmitting of analysis results
to the host computer
integer whole numbers that do not contain decimal points
I/O Input/Output
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LL Low Limits, entered into a component table; when a component's

measured and calculated value falls below the LL value, an alarm is
generated
LO COMM Local Communication Module PCB; optional PCB in the GCC that makes
the analyzer communications network possible (sometimes written
LOCOM)
LSV Liquid Sample Valve; used to inject small amounts of liquid into the
sample column
method table operator-entered data specifying the name, retention time, key
designation, response factor, low and high limits, and calibration
concentrations of the various elements of an analysis; also specifies
when, how, and under what conditions the method of data collection is to
proceed
microprocessor the semiconductor circuit containing the central processing unit functions
noise any unwanted signal superimposed upon a useful signal which tends to
obscure the desired information
numeric field field that accepts number entries
“Panic” key nickname for F1 key directly under the screen (soft key); pressing this key
will return the display to the Background screen without changing any
current values in memory; may need press it several times consecutively,
depending on where the current screen relative to the Background screen
PCB Printed Circuit Board
peak area method of measurement in which total peak area beneath the peak
envelope is used to calculate the concentration
peak discrimination the non-linear unequal dilution of hydrocarbons in the column train
peak height method of measurement in which peak maximum is used to calculate

peak concentration
2000-OSM, C1 G-3
PID proportional-integral-derivative; refers to a control method in which the

controller output is proportional to the error, its time history, and the rate at
which it is changing.
Post Analysis the portion of the controller program that calculates the value for the
routine components from the collected data, after completion of the analysis
Postan abbreviation for the post analysis routine
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PSFC Process Supercritical Fluid Analyzer
psia pounds per square inch absolute
psig pounds per square inch gauge
RAM Random Access Memory; contains current operating conditions
ROM Read Only Memory; contains the executable program
redundant the means by which a remote GCC can be connected to one or two
highways central devices by two separate, but equivalent, data highways
response factor numeric value determined by calibration; used in calculating concentration
retention time the time, from the start of analysis, that a peak maximum elutes from the
column
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RS-232 voltage based electrical communications protocol, short range; common

term for EIA RS-232 serial data interchange format
SBC Single Board Computer PCB
selection field horizontal screen display; Right and Left cursor keys move through
options printed on screen; make selection by leaving field with Up or
Down cursor key
slope detect a technique of chromatographic data collection in which the controller

automatically ascertains the presence of a peak and collects data
accordingly
S.O. Sales Order (Customer Order)
Soft Keys four front panel control keys directly under the screen
stream purging the procedure allowing the next stream sample to be analyzed to flow
continuously through the sample loop of the injection valve in preparation
for the next sample injection and analysis cycle
G-4 2000-OSM, C1
stream step TCF command that permits the next stream sample to purge the sample
loop during the remainder of the present cycle
TCF Time-Coded Function; keystroke command sequence; entry in method

table that defines what action is to be performed (e.g. Valve ON) at what
time in the analysis
text field field that accepts data entered with all non-terminating keys
trend output analog signal related to concentration of specified component
VN VistaNET; analytical network that links analyzers, DCS, and support

people using the data
VNSA VistaNET Name Service Administrator; PC software that serves as the

address book for the VistaNET
VWS Vista Workstation
watchdog timer hardware circuit alarm that indicates when the software fails to cycle
through its entire task structure within a set period of time
2000-OSM, C1 G-5
CAUTION
Beginning in January 1996, all analyzers bearing the CE Mark imprint on their nameplates have
EMC shielding that meets the requirements for CE Mark. When working with one of these analyz-
ers, you must handle it carefully to avoid damaging the shielding. If any shielding becomes
damaged or is removed from the analyzer, new shielding must be installed to maintain the CE
mark certification.
ABB Lewisburg has designed “Total Envelope Protection” into its analyzers. The basic enclosure
itself (which is fabricated from sheet steel with all seams welded), when properly “grounded” or
“earthed”, becomes the first barrier of protection from emissions that could radiate from the unit.
In addition, the enclosure also provides a high level of immunity from electromagnetic interference
(EMI) which could affect the performance of the analyzer.
In order for the analyzers produced by ABB Lewisburg to maintain their tested integrity, the instal-
lation methods employed are of equal importance. The grounded enclosure produces a Faraday
Shield around the electronic components, detection systems, and other sensitive components
which could generate EMI or be affected by EMI. An extension of this Faraday shield must be
carried throughout the installation scheme.
If the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by ABB Inc., the protection provided by the
analyzer may be impaired.
NOTE
Special conditions of Certificate of Conformity LCIE 97.D6074 X apply to the electrical equipment
for its safe use. Special conditions for electrical and purge and pressurization are included on the
nameplate of the analyzer. Special conditions for Ex components, which are described in the
individual subsections of Section 8 (“REPAIR”) of this manual, apply to the following certified
components:
Ex Component Certificate
Detector/Chromatographic Column ISSeP 94C.103.1164U, EEx d IIB+H2

Electronic Pressure Control Model 801 LCIE 97.D6033, EEx d IIB+H2 T6
Flame Ionization Detector Model Model 794 or 799 ISSeP 95.C103.1181X, EEx de IIB+H2 T6 - T2
Flame Photometric Detector Type 804 LCIE 97.D6150X, EEx d IIB+H2 T4
Heater Block Model 791 ISSeP 94.C103.1138X, EEx de IIB+H2 T6 - T3
Heating Device Model 800 LCIE 97.6034X, EEx ep IIB+H2 T4 - T2
Methanizer/Air Clean-up Type 805 LCIE 97.6157X, EEx de IIB+H2 T3, T2
Overpressure and Purging Control Device INIEX 88.B103.679 X, EEx D [ib] IIB + H2 T6
Thermal Conductivity Detector Model 002A INIEX 86.103.476X, EEx d IIB+H2 T6 - T3
Thermal Conductivity Detector model 795/798 ISSeP 94.C103.1176 X, EEx de IIB + H2 T2 - T3
G-6 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 1. INTRODUCTION
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
The Process Gas Chromatograph PGC2000 separates and measures the individual
components of gas or liquid samples. It automatically samples and analyzes process
streams, using the analyzer's Gas Chromatographic Controller (GCC) to control analytical
functions. The analyzer (see Figure 1-1) may be mounted on a wall, a rack, or a floor stand.
It includes an insulated, air-heated Oven Compartment, a Gas Chromatograph Controller, a
purge air panel, and a pressure control panel.
Gas
Chromatographic
Controller
(GCC)
Pressure
Purge Air Control
Panel Panel
Oven
Compartment
Nameplate
(on side
or front)
Figure 1-1. TYPICAL PROCESS GAS CHROMATOGRAPH PGC2000
The Oven Compartment houses an isothermal oven which contains the analytical columns,
the detectors, and the sample valves.
The Gas Chromatograph Controller (GCC) contains the card cage with PCBs, the
Temperature Controller, and one or more of the following detector amplifiers: flame ionization
(FID), thermal conductivity (TCD), and flame photometric (FPD). The front panel has a liquid
crystal display (LCD), keyboard, and controller board. The FPD assembly itself is located in
a special cabinet mounted on the left side of the analyzer.
2000-OSM, C1 1-1
Below the GCC are the Purge Air Panel and the Pressure Control Panel. The Purge Air
Panel contains the heater air and purge air gauges and regulators. The Pressure Control
Panel contains the Electronic Pressure Controller (EPC) or a group of mechanical regulators
and gauges. When the EPC is installed the Pressure Control Panel has a blank front panel.
Each analyzer has a temperature code (T-Rating) listed on the nameplate. This T-Rating
indicates the temperature classification of the area in which the analyzer has been designed
to operate. T-Ratings and area classifications for analyzer locations are determined and
supplied by the customer.
A package titled “Important Papers” comes with the analyzer. Included in this package are
data sheets and installation drawings needed to support installation and setup of the
analyzer. This manual refers to these data sheets and drawings as the “Data Package.”
PGC2000 WITH FLAME PHOTOMETRIC DETECTOR
When the analyzer has a flame photometric detector (FPD), a panel attached to the left side
of the analyzer contains the detector, the detector amplifier, and the high-voltage transformer
that provides the spark to ignite the FPD (see Figure 1-2).
Transformer
0 0
FPD Electrometer
Assembly
Detector
Figure 1-2. PGC WITH FLAME PHOTOMETRIC DETECTOR
1-2 2000-OSM, C1
AIR PURGE SYSTEMS
If the analyzer will be in a Class I hazardous location, an air purging system must be installed
to reduce the risk of explosion. Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or
vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or
ignitable mixtures.
SYSTEM VARIATIONS
This manual supports the PGC2000 basic analyzer. An appendix to the main manual
presents additional instructions for special applications such as PGC2002 (simulated
distillation), PGC2003 (PNA), PGC2005 (temperature programmed GC), PGC2007 (fuel
sulfur), PGC2008 (olefins), and PGC2030 (Sparging Sample Conditioning System).
SPECIFICATIONS
Physical
Environmental (Enclosure): Protected from weather: IP 52, (NEMA Type 12) Equivalent
Ambient Temperature Range: 0 to +50° C (32 to 122° F); application dependent
Humidity: maximum of 95% relative humidity, non-condensing
Dimensions: 496 mm W x 340 mm D x 1175 mm H

(19.5 in. W x 13.4 in. D x 46.3 in. H)
Weight: 73 kg (160 lb) (minimum, configuration dependent)
Mounting:
Wall: 32 mm (1.3 in.) from wall with brackets
Floor: Optional wheeled dolly
EMI/RFI Considerations: CE Mark to meet EMC Directive 89/336/EEC as amended

by 92/31/EEC & 93/68/EEC.
Conforms to EN 50081-2: 1994 & EN50082-1: 1992
Electrical Entries: Top
Pneumatic Entries: Right Side
Sample Entries:
Gas: Bottom
Liquid: Right Side
Vents: Bottom and/or Right Side
Safety Area Classification
NEC: Class I, Division 1 Group B, C, D with type ‘Y’ Purge

Class I, Division 2 Group B, C, D without purge
(Optional Type "X" purge provided for Division 1)
(Optional Type "Z" Purge provided for Division 2)
2000-OSM, C1 1-3
CENELEC: Eex pde [ib] ib IIB+H2 T4 to T2 (LCIE 97.D6074 X)
CSA: Class I, Division 1 Group B, C, D with type ‘X’ Purge

Class I, Division 2 Group B, C, D with type ‘Z’ Purge
Z or Y-Purge Wait Time: 4.5 minutes
X-Purge Timeout: 4.6 minutes @ 60 Hz, 5.5 minutes @ 50 Hz
Power
Voltage and Frequency: 100 VAC (+15, -6 VAC), 50/60 Hz ± 10%

120 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz ± 10%
230 VAC ± 10%, 50/60 Hz ± 10%
Power Consumption: 1,200 VA Startup, 900 VA Steady-State Operation

(Typical, varies with installed options)
Instrument Air
Supply Connection: 3/8 inch tube, minimum
Supply Pressure: 414 kPa (60 psig) minimum
Quality: Instrument grade: Clean, Oil Free and -34° C, (-30° F)

dewpoint
Flow Rates, all purge types:

Start-up Purge: 214-242 L/min (7.6-8.6 ft3/min) at 20° C, all purge types
Steady State Purge : 127-147 L/min (4.5-5.2 ft3/min) at 20° C, all purge types
Analytical Detectors
Standard Detectors: Thermal Conductivity, Flame Ionization, Flame

Photometric, Inter-column Thermal Conductivity
Configuration: Up to two simultaneous detectors, each with capability for

sequential inter-column TC detector (one FPD per
analyzer)
Third-party detectors: Consult Factory for availability
Isothermal Analytical Oven
Oven Liner: Stainless Steel
Internal Dimensions: 390 mm W x 520 mm H x 230 mm D

(15.3 in. W x 20.4 in. H x 9.0 in. D)
Number of Valves: Standard provisions for five gas samples or column

switching valves in oven; standard provisions for two
external liquid sample valves (consult factory for special
requirements)
1-4 2000-OSM, C1
Columns: 1/16, 1/8, 3/16 inch, Packed Stainless or Fused Silica
Capillary
Heat: Forced Air
Temperature Control Method: Closed loop PID
Ambient Oven Temperature: + 30° to 180° C (Settings and display in °C only)
Setpoint Resolution: 1° C
Temperature Stability:
Steady Ambient: ±0.1° C
Ambient Range: ±1.0° C
Gas Control (Analog)
Control Method: Mechanical regulators
Filtration: 2µm at inlet, provided
Inlet Pressure:
Minimum: Setpoint + 130 kPa (20 psig)
Maximum: 1380 kPa (200 psig)
NOTE: Supply pressure less than or equal to 1380 kPa (200 psig) and 345
kPa (50 psig) higher than max output required; e.g., supply to a 700 kPa
(100 psig) regulator should not exceed 1034 kPa (150 psig).
Range: 2-15 psig 5-30 psig 20-100 psig
Gauges: 0-102 kPa 0-200 kPa 0-700 kPa

(0-15 psig) (0-30 psig) 0-100 psig)
Temp Coefficient: 2.1 kPa/25° C (0.3 psi/25° C)
Regulation: 0.1 kPa (0.01 psi) outlet / 10.0 kPa (1.0 psi) inlet
Accuracy: N/A
Repeatability: N/A
Allowable Gasses: H2, He, N2, Air, Ar
Quality: GC Grade
Flow Adjustment: Oven mounted needle valves or flow controllers with

external adjustment
Tube Fittings: 316 SS Gyrolok (standard)

316 SS Swagelok (optional)
1/16, 1/8, 1/4 inch connections
2000-OSM, C1 1-5
Gas Control (Digital)
Control Method: Closed loop PID; temperature stabilized
Number of Zones: 1 to 5
Filtration: 2µm at inlet, provided
Inlet Pressure:
Minimum: Setpoint + 69 kPa (10 psig)
Maximum: 1034 kPa (150 psig)
Range: 0-100 psig, bubble tight, non-venting
Gauges: Electronic readout: 0.01 psig resolution

Setpoint resolution: 0.01 psig
Temp Coefficient: None
Regulation: See below
Accuracy:
0-50 psig: 1.7%
50-100 psig: 2.7%
Repeatability: ±0.1 psig
Allowable Gasses: H2, He, N2, Air, Ar

No liquids, corrosives, combustibles, O2 GC grade
Quality: GC Grade
Flow Adjustment: Oven mounted needle valves or flow controllers with

external adjustment
Tube Fittings: 316 SS Gyrolok (standard)

316 SS Swagelok (optional)
1/16, 1/8, 1/4 inch connections
1-6 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 2. INSTALLATION AND START-UP
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION
Locate the analyzer as close as practical to the stream to be sampled. Analyzer location and
area classification are the customer's responsibility.
When determining where to install the analyzer, include the following location criteria:
• EMC certification, where required

• area classification, as specified by the customer
• protection from rain, direct sunlight, temperature extremes
• avoiding exposure to corrosive gas
• free from dust and static electricity
• space of at least 450 mm (18 in.) to the right of the analyzer for various customer
connections and for servicing.
Installation Tools and Equipment
The following tools and equipment are required to install and check out the system.
Tools: #2 Phillips screwdriver

#1 Phillips screwdriver with short handle
3/16-inch flat blade screwdriver
1/8-inch flat blade screwdriver
9/64-inch ball driver
7/16-inch open end wrenches (2)
6-inch adjustable wrench
12-inch adjustable wrench
3/8-inch drive socket set with ratchet handle and leverage bar
5/16-inch (8 mm) hex key wrench (supplied with Analyzer)
5/64-inch (2 mm) hex key wrench (supplied with Analyzer)
Equipment: Leak testing solution (e.g., Snoop®)

Flow Meter
Stop Watch (if not using a digital flow meter)
Chart Recorder
Flashlight
Plumbing Installation
All plumbing connections enter at the right side of the cabinet. Be careful to avoid damaging
fittings and to ensure tight connections. Refer to the Data Package for specific plumbing
information.
For brass and stainless steel pipe fittings, wrap the threads with Teflon tape or a suitable
thread sealant. Make all connections and then tighten them appropriately. Leak check each
connection as described in the "Leak Check" paragraph.
2000-OSM, C1 2-1
Gas Requirements
The following information represents general requirements. Due to differences in

applications, refer to the Data Package supplied with your analyzer for application-specific
requirements.
• Instrument Air: instrument grade air.
• Burner Air: ISA Hydrocarbon Free Grade with hydrocarbon content less than 1 ppm and
dew point less than -40° C.
• Carrier Gases: varies with the application; the lower the levels of components being
measured, the higher the necessary carrier gas purity.
• TCD: for percent level measurements, gases of 99.99% purity; for ppm measurement
ranges, 99.995% purity.
• FID: for measurements down to 5 ppm, gases of 99.995% purity; lower ranges require
higher levels of purity (refer to the Data Package for specifics).
• FPD: varies with the application; refer to the Data Package for specifics.
Calibration Sample
A primary factor in determining the accuracy of the analyzer's calibration is the quality and
precision of the calibration sample. Regardless of the sample composition or number of
complete analysis components, generally only measured components are in the calibration
sample.
Purge Air Alarm
The analyzer contains circuits that detect the loss of purge air to the analyzer and generate
alarm signals to the operator. The customer has the responsibility to connect the purge
alarm to a visual or audible annunciator located in a constantly monitored area, as required
by NFPA 496 (1993).
Liquid Sample Valve
You must take extreme care to avoid having the sample lines exert force on the sample
connections of the Liquid Sample Valve. For example, if stiff 1/4-inch tubing or heat-traced
lines are bent into position and attached to the valve, the force will cause premature failure of
the valve stem and seals, resulting in leakage. A loop of 1/8-inch tubing or a flex hose is
recommended between the valve and the sample line (this may be insulated if necessary).
Figure 2-1 illustrates the incorrect and correct connection methods.
It is also important to use two wrenches when tightening the sample line connections to the
sample chamber. One wrench must be used to back up the force applied to tighten the fitting
(direct wrench force will bend the stem).
2-2 2000-OSM, C1
Putting a loop in the tubing or using flexible hose reduces
any sideways force at the connection.
Forcing the tubing into position can exert a sideways

force at connection, causing valve leakage.
INCORRECT CORRECT
Figure 2-1. LIQUID SAMPLE VALVE CONNECTION METHODS
EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
WARNING
Depending on the configuration of the analyzer, it can weigh from 175

to 300 pounds. You should have one or more persons help you lift it
and move it.
Unpack the analyzer near the installation site and move it with a transportation machine.
Handle the analyzer carefully so that it does not fall. For floor-mounted units, secure the
Analyzer with anchor bolts. Secure wall-mounted units appropriately. Refer to the Outline
and Mounting Dimensions drawing in the Data Package for specific mounting information.
CONNECTIONS
Tubing
Refer to the applicable drawings in your Data Package for specific tubing and connection
information while you perform the following steps.
1. Do not remove the tube caps, provided at the analyzer tubing ports to prevent
deterioration of the columns, until immediately before making each connection.
2. Use an anticorrosion material for the lines and fittings.
3. To ensure using proper size tubing and pipe, refer to the Outline and Mounting
Dimensions Diagram contained in the Data Package.
2000-OSM, C1 2-3
4. Use lines and fittings free of interior contamination from grease, oil or other substances.
Before connecting these lines, completely air-purge their interiors.
5. Carefully connect the lines so that there are no leaks from the connections. Leak check
each connection as described in the "Leak Check" paragraph.
Analyzer Air
The air supply is connected to the fitting marked Air In.
Carrier Gas
The carrier gas is connected to the fitting marked Carrier In.
Sample
The methods used for transporting the sample from the process stream to the analyzer or
from the calibration sample to the analyzer are critical to the operation of the analyzer. Refer
to the system drawings in the Data Package for specific sample system connections.
Hydrogen Gas
WARNING
Hydrogen is highly explosive. Follow applicable safety precautions and

use extreme care in making connections.
The analyzer uses hydrogen gas as a burner fuel with flame cell detectors (FID and FPD)
and sometimes uses it as a carrier gas. Verify that the hydrogen gas meets the criteria
stated in the "Gas Requirements" paragraph. Refer to the Data Package for specific
connection information.
Vent
Typical analyzer vents are: Cell Vents, Backflush Vent, Sample Vent, and Housing Vent. All
vents must be at atmospheric pressure unless otherwise specified in the Data Package. The
vent lines should slope down from the analyzer so that condensation will not collect in the
analyzer or cause backpressure in the external tubing. Refer to the Data Package for
specific connection information.
Electrical
The analyzer must be installed according to all applicable codes. If it will be in a hazardous
area, the wiring method must conform to the applicable explosion proof requirements.
Install the signal wiring and power wiring in separate conduit pipes or cable trays to reduce
noise and crosstalk. If a grounding (earthing) connection is required, connect the
appropriate size grounding wire to the Earthing Connection on the right side of the oven
compartment.
The following wiring is required, though the amount of wiring varies with the installation.
• Power wiring for heater, power circuits, electronics, and grounding circuit (circuit breaker
protection must be provided by the customer)
2-4 2000-OSM, C1
• Signal wiring between the GCC and the VistaNET
• Contact output Error alarms, timing signal, status signal, and annunciator
• Contact input Operation start/stop, mode-selection request, etc.
• Analog output (4 to 20 mA) Analog hold output, chromatogram recorder output
• Analog input (-10 to +10 volts)
• Detector output (10 volts)
Refer to the applicable drawings in your Data Package for specific interconnection wiring
information.
INITIAL SETUP OF EQUIPMENT
The following instructions assume that all equipment has been properly installed and
checked, that the analyzer has been application engineered, and that temperature
controllers, alarm switches and other adjustments have been properly set.
CAUTION
Ensure that there are no hazardous or flammable gases present in the

immediate area of the analyzer, as they may create the potential for fire,
explosion, damage to property and injury to personnel. Obtain proper
work permits such as hot work, etc.
Equipment and Supplies Required
1. Analyzer Data Sheets from the Data Package
2. Flow measuring device
Precautions
1. Refer to the Data Package for correct values and settings before adjusting pressure,
flow, temperature, etc.
2. Review all data on alarms and corrective action before operating the analyzer.
3. Connect the analyzer purge alarm to a visual or audible annunciator located in a

constantly monitored area, as per NFPA 496 (1993). This is the customer's
responsibility.
4. Observe and take note of all caution tags attached to the analyzer; make all adjustments
using the specific data sheets for this analyzer.
5. Ensure all air, gas and sample supply lines coming into the analyzer are properly
connected and turned OFF at the external flow shutoff valves (these shutoff valves are
normally associated with analyzer installation and are not a part of the analyzer itself).
2000-OSM, C1 2-5
6. Ensure the power supply line is properly connected and turned OFF at the circuit
breaker outside the analyzer (this circuit breaker is associated with analyzer installation
and is not part of the analyzer itself).
Sample System Checkout
Verify that the sample system has been leak and flow checked and is known to be operating
correctly.
GCC Pre-Checks
CAUTION
Before opening any analyzer doors, ensure the area is safe and hazard-
free and will remain so the entire time the analyzer is open.
1. Verify that the circuit breaker which supplies power to the analyzer is turned OFF.
2. Release the GCC front panel by turning the panel latches fully counterclockwise with a
5/16-inch (or 8 mm) hex key wrench.
3. Open the GCC front panel.
4. Verify all PCB’s are secure and latched in place.
5. Close the GCC front panel and hold the front panel shut while you tighten the panel
latches.
Analyzer Pre-Checks
The purge air and heater air pressures are set during factory checkout and calibration tests.
These settings should not be changed during installation setup and operation. They can be
verified at the gauges on the Purge Air Panel.
Analytical pressures are also set during factory checkout and calibration tests but these
settings may have to be adjusted for the installation environment. Once you have verified
proper operation of the analyzer, adjust the analytical pressures as necessary.
Perform initial startup by following the steps listed below.
1. Visually inspect the analyzer for inoperative or damaged gauges, loose or damaged
connections, and overall condition.
2. If you have not completed the GCC pre-checks (previous paragraph), perform those
steps now.
3. Turn on the instrument air at its source.
4. Refer to the Data Package to ensure that air supply at the specified pressure is provided
to the INSTRUMENT AIR inlet.
5. Refer to Figure 2-2 (when EPC is installed, the Pressure Control Panel will be blank).
The purge air and heater air pressures should be as specified on the label below the
corresponding regulator.
2-6 2000-OSM, C1
Purge Air Panel Pressure Control Panel
Figure 2-2. ANALYZER ADJUSTMENTS
6. Turn on carrier gas at its source.
7. Refer to the Data Package to ensure that the specified carrier gas is provided at the
specified pressure to each CARRIER inlet.
8. At the external circuit breaker or switch turn the power ON.
9. For EPC-equipped analyzers, refer to the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen. Verify
that carrier and gas pressures are the same as those specified in the Data Package. If
necessary, adjust each set point (SP) until it is the same as the Data Package value.
10. If the analyzer has mechanical regulators, verify from the Pressure Control Panel gauge
that carrier and pressures are the same as that specified in the Data Package. If
necessary, adjust each regulator until its gauge value is the same as the Data Package
value.
11. Verify any other gases in the same manner as Carrier #1.
12. If a leak occurs during start-up, perform the leak check described in "Leak Check"
paragraph.
13. Allow sufficient time for oven warm-up. The oven should stabilize at the temperature
indicated in the Data Package. If adjustments are required, adjust the Digital
Temperature Controller as described in "DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER" in
Section 4.
14. Proceed to "MATCHING COLUMN FLOWS."
Leak Check
If a leak occurs during initial turn-on, perform a simple leak check on the analyzer section as
follows:
1. Plug all carrier gas vents and pressurize to 30 psig. Shut off the carrier supply.
2. Note pressure drop-off on the carrier supply and column pressure gauges. A visual
decline is excessive.
3. Starting at the inlet to the detector and working back to the carrier gas supply, plug the
exit of each valve or column to locate the leak.
4. Use “Snoop®“ or other suitable leak detection solution to check for leaks.
2000-OSM, C1 2-7
MATCHING COLUMN FLOWS
When you are matching column flows, refer to the Data Package for flow rates and valve
configurations. Although methods of matching column flows vary with valve configurations,
the following procedures apply to most configurations. Verify flows using a flow meter
connected to the point being checked (e.g., cell vent).
Manual Operation of Valves
Operate the valves manually as follows:
1. On the Background screen press the F2 (Manual Control) soft key.
2. On the Manual Control Mode screen (see Figure 2-3), the first line (“Valves:”) indicates
which valves are ON. The cursor will be on the second line (“Enter Valve: 0”), which
enables you to turn valves on and off.
3. To turn Valve One ON, verify that the number “1” does not appear on the first line, then
press the “1” key on the keyboard. The number “1” appears momentarily on the second
line and then appears on the first line.
****** Manual Control Mode ******

Valves:- - - - - - - - Time:00000
Enter Valve: [0] Cycle Time:00000
RECORDER: Method Tbl: 000
Offset : 0 % Stream: 01
Attn : 5 Purging: 01
Off Chroma Bar Trend Peaks: 00
PURGE SELECT: 0 State: Idle
Start Crest End Peak
Time Time Time Area Type
Last: 52 55 73 18032 Val-Bas
38 43 51 15322 Bas-Val
Exit Detector Manually Press. &

to and Zero Temp.
Background Graphics Baseline Control
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-3. MANUAL CONTROL MODE SCREEN
4. To turn Valve One OFF, verify that the number “1” appears on the first line (“Valves”).
Move the cursor to the second line and press the number “1” key. The number “1”
disappears from the first line of the screen.
5. Turn Valve Two and other valves on and off manually in the same manner.
2-8 2000-OSM, C1
Checking Total Column Flow
To check column flow using a 10-port sample valve and an 8-port selector valve, perform the
following steps (other valve configurations use similar procedures):
1. Turn all valves off as described in the previous paragraph.
2. See Figure 2-4. To check total column flow, set Valves One and Two to ON.
3. Connect the flow-measuring device to the CELL VENT of the detector cell and measure
the flow rate. The total column flow should be as specified in the Data Package. s If
necessary, adjust the COLUMN PRESSURE regulator to obtain the specified flow rate.
CARRIER
IN
COLUMN
PRESSURE
ADJ
PI
AIR OUT AIR IN AIR OUT AIR IN
VALVE "ON" VALVE "ON"
SAMPLE
VENT
SELECTOR
1 6 FLOW ADJ 1 6
2 7 2 7 SELECTOR
SAMPLE
IN VENT
3 8 3 8
COLUMN
4 9 2 4 9
5 10 5 10
ANALYTICAL
FLOW ADJ COLUMN
3
COLUMN 1
BACKFLUSH
SAMPLE LOOP
VENT
CELL
DETECTOR
VENT
Figure 2-4. CHECKING TOTAL COLUMN FLOW
2000-OSM, C1 2-9
Checking Analytical Flow Adjust
1. Set Valve One to OFF; Valve Two remains ON (see Figure 2-5).
CARRIER
IN
COLUMN
PRESSURE
ADJ
PI
AIR IN AIR OUT AIR OUT AIR IN
VALVE "OFF" VALVE "ON"
SAMPLE
VENT
SELECTOR
1 6 FLOW ADJ 1 6
2 7 2 7 SELECTOR
SAMPLE
IN VENT
3 8 3 8
COLUMN
4 9 2 4 9
5 10 5 10
ANALYTICAL
FLOW ADJ COLUMN
3
BACKFLUSH
VENT
COLUMN 1
SAMPLE LOOP
CELL
DETECTOR
VENT
Figure 2-5. MATCHING FLOW THROUGH ANALYTICAL FLOW ADJUST VALVE
2. To compensate for the pressure drop through Column 1, adjust the ANALYTICAL FLOW
ADJUST needle valve (accessed from the right side of the Oven Compartment) until the
flow rate at the cell vent of the detector cell is the same as the total column flow.
3. If the analyzer has several valves, first set the lowest-numbered valve ON and check
the flow rate. Then set the other valves on one at a time, checking the flow rate and
adjusting the corresponding restrictor (if necessary) after each valve is turned on.
Checking Backflush Flow
1. Connect the flow-measuring device to the Backflush Vent and verify that Valves One
and Two are OFF (see Figure 2-6).
2-10 2000-OSM, C1
2. Adjust the Backflush Vent restrictor to the flow rate stated in the Data Package.
CARRIER
IN
COLUMN
PRESSURE
ADJ
PI
AIR IN AIR OUT AIR IN AIR OUT
VALVE "OFF" VALVE "OFF"
SAMPLE
VENT
SELECTOR
1 6 1 6
FLOW ADJ
2 7 2 7 SELECTOR
SAMPLE
IN 3 8 VENT
3 8
COLUMN
4 9 4 9
2
5 10 5 10
ANALYTICAL
FLOW ADJ COLUMN
3
BACKFLUSH
VENT
COLUMN 1
SAMPLE LOOP
CELL
DETECTOR
VENT
Figure 2-6. CHECKING BACKFLUSH FLOW
2000-OSM, C1 2-11
Checking Selector Flow Adjust
1. See Figure 2-7. Set Valve One to ON and Valve Two to OFF.
CARRIER
IN
COLUMN
PRESSURE
ADJ
PI
AIR OUT AIR IN AIR IN AIR OUT
VALVE "ON" VALVE "OFF"
SAMPLE
VENT
SELECTOR
1 6 FLOW ADJ 1 6
2 7 2 7 SELECTOR
SAMPLE
VENT
3 8 IN 3 8
COLUMN
4 9 2 4 9
5 10
5 10
ANALYTICAL
FLOW ADJ COLUMN
3
COLUMN 1
BACKFLUSH
SAMPLE LOOP
VENT
CELL
DETECTOR
VENT
Figure 2-7. MATCHING FLOW THROUGH SELECTOR FLOW ADJUST VALVE
2. To compensate for the pressure drop through Columns 1 and 2, adjust the SELECTOR
FLOW ADJUST needle valve until the flow rate at the cell vent is the same as the total
column flow.
Checking Selector Vent
1. See Figure 2-7. Connect the flow-measuring device to the Selector Vent and verify that
Valve One is ON and Valve Two is OFF.
2. To compensate for the pressure drop through Column 3, adjust the Selector Vent
restrictor until the flow rate at the Selector Vent is the same as the total column flow.
2-12 2000-OSM, C1
EQUIPMENT STARTUP
CAUTION
free and will remain so the entire time the analyzer is open.
The following instructions assume that all equipment has been properly installed and
checked, that the analyzer has been application engineered, and that temperature
controllers, alarm switches and other adjustments have been properly set.
CAUTION
When you stop an analysis, select "At End of Analysis" unless an

emergency occurs. Selecting "Now" stops an analysis immediately,
which could inadvertently damage the analyzer if it stops while an
analysis is in progress. Stopping during an analysis could trap sample
in a column or permit temperature or pressure ramps to continue
without adequate control.
Initial Power On
For Y and Z purged analyzers, note the purge label on the analyzer and allow sufficient air
purge time before switching on the power source at the circuit breaker. Once the purge
requirements are met, turn power to the equipment ON at the supply breaker. The following
components receive power: oven heater system, optional heated devices (Liquid Sample
Valve vaporizer, Air Clean-up/Methanizer), detector power supply, and GC Controller (display
illuminates).
CAUTION
Verify that the X Purge is not in override (see "X Purge Override
Option" in Section 4).
For X Purged and CENELEC certified analyzers, you can turn the power supply ON at the
circuit breaker immediately after the air supply is turned ON. X Purge automatically controls
the purge time and applies power to the analyzer only after the purge cycle is completed.
Refer to the Data Package for specific purge cycle time. (There is an X Purge Override
operation that may be used during startup, if necessary. See "AIR PURGING" in Section 4
for detailed information.)
1. Turn ON carrier gas to purge the columns. Do this before the oven is heated to prevent
the columns from being damaged.
2. For FID and FPD only: if the Flameout LED on the GCC front panel is not illuminated,
turn off Burner Fuel at the Pressure Control Panel. The isothermal oven must be at
operating temperature before igniting the flame, to prevent damage to the detector.
3. Allow adequate time for the oven to heat to proper operating temperature before
continuing. Condensation damage may occur to the Methanizer/Air Clean-up unit if the
oven is not at operating temperature before Burner Air flow starts.
4. Check the oven temperature on the Temperature Control screen (see "Temperature
Control Table" in Section 4).
2000-OSM, C1 2-13
NOTE
The oven will begin to cycle and control temperature in about one hour.
However, total equilibrium may take 8 to 12 hours depending on the
analyzer configuration and ambient conditions. Baselines will continue
to drift until the system stabilizes.
5. Turn ON Burner Fuel and Burner Air at the flow shut off valves and observe the Actual
values shown on the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen. Ensure pressures are set
according to the Data Package and adjust set points (SP) as necessary. If the analyzer
has mechanical regulators, observe the gauges on the Pressure Control Panel and
adjust the regulators as necessary.
CAUTION
When the hydrogen supply line is turned on, if there is no pressure

visible on the hydrogen gauge, do not increase hydrogen flow.
Leak check every connection outside the analyzer on the entire

hydrogen flow path.
Ensure the area is safe and hazard free before opening the oven
compartment to leak check the hydrogen flow path inside the oven.
6. After the temperature stabilizes, recheck all purge air pressures at the gauges on the
Purge Air Panel. Adjust corresponding regulators, if needed, according to the Data
Package.
7. Check column pressure by examining the Actual values for Carrier #1 and Carrier #2
shown on the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen. Verify these values with the Data
Package specification and adjust the Carrier #1 and Carrier #2 set points as necessary.
8. If the analyzer has mechanical regulators, check column pressure by examining the
Carrier #1 and Carrier #2 gauges on the Pressure Control Panel and verify these values
with Data Package specifications. Adjust the Carrier #1 and Carrier #2 regulators as
necessary.
9. Turn ON Calibration Gas supply (may be called Standard Sample). The gauges and
regulators used to monitor the calibration gas are normally part of the Sample
Conditioning System. If necessary, adjust the appropriate controls on the Sample
Conditioning System to provide the analyzer with correct sample pressure and flow,
according to the Data Package.
11. On the Manual Control Mode screen press the F2 (Detector and Graphics) soft key.
12. For an analyzer with a TCD:
a. On the Chroma Board screen press the F3 (Manually Zero Baseline) soft key.
b. Add the values of the Hardware Zero reading and Software Zero reading.
c. Open the GCC front panel and locate the TCD Amplifier Board on the left side
wall of the GCC.
2-14 2000-OSM, C1
d. Adjust the TCD Zero Adjust on the TCD Amplifier Board until the Detector
Reading on the Chroma Board screen is equal to the sum of the Hardware and
Software Zero readings.
e. On the Chroma Board screen, press the F3 (Manually Zero Baseline) soft key.
The Detector Reading should now be 2.00 ± 0.05 mV and the Hardware Zero
should be 10% or less.
f. Close and fasten the GCC front panel.
CAUTION
Do not ignite FPD/FID flame if the isothermal oven temperature is below

operational level. Low oven temperature will result in condensation
damage to the flame cell. Check oven temperature on the Temperature
Control screen (see "Temperature Control Table" in Section 4).
13. For an analyzer with an FID:
a. On the Chroma Board screen, observe the “Flame” line. If "Lit" is underlined the
flame should be on and the Flameout LED on the front panel should be off.
b. If the Flame is not lit and the Ignitor is Off, press the F4 (Manual Ignitor On) soft
key to light the cell flame. The ignitor coil remains powered for the specified
Timeout period. Once the flame lights the Flame Out LED will go off. The cell
flame burns as long as there is sufficient burner air and hydrogen fuel in the cell.
14. For an analyzer with an FPD:
a. On the Chroma Board screen, observe the “Flame” line. If "Lit" is underlined the
flame should be on and the Flameout LED on the front panel should be off.
NOTE
With an FPD, if "Lit" in underlined on the Chroma Board screen and the
Flameout LED on the front panel is ON, verify the Flameout Alarm is set
to normally open (NO). See "SOFTWARE VERIFICATION" in Section 5
for instructions on checking the status of the Flameout Alarm.
2000-OSM, C1 2-15
b. On the Chroma Board screen, verify that the FPD Temp Zone is the same as
that specified in the Data Package (see Figure 2-8).
***** Chroma Board *****

Detector: FPD
Flame: Lit Ignitor: Off H2: None
Hardware Zero: 5.10mV ( 4.7%)

Software Zero: - 3.18mV
Detector Reading: 1.98mV
Ignitor: Manual Auto Auto Timeout
Timeout: 0 seconds
FPD Temp Zone: 0
Manually Manual
Exit Graphics Zero Ignitor
Baseline On
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-8. CHROMA BOARD SCREEN
c. On the Chroma Board screen, observe the "Ignitor" line. "Manual" should be
underlined.
d. Press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
e. On the Manual Control Mode Screen, press the F4 (Press. & Temp. Control) soft
key.
f. On the Pres and Temp Control screen, cursor to TEMP CONTROL and press the
F2 (Manual Temp Control) soft key.
g. On the Manual Temperature Control Mode screen (see Figure 2-9), verify that
the actual temperature for the FPD is at least 120 degrees.
2-16 2000-OSM, C1
**** Manual Temperature Control Mode ****
Zone Config Actual SP Rate
ISO-OVEN ISO 79.9 80.0 0.0
PROG. OVEN PROG/C 220.1 220.0 0.0
FPD ISO 120.2 125.0 0.0
LSV ISO 199.9 200.0 0.0
Valve # : [0] Time : 0125

Zone # : 2 State : Pk Back
Set Point: 220.00
Ramp Rate: 30.0000 T-Rating Ver
VALVES : - - - - - - - - T2 290C
Accept Zero Span

Escape Control All All
Point Zones Zones
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-9. MANUAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL MODE SCREEN
h. When the temperature is at least 120 degrees, press the F1 (Escape) soft key
two times to return to the Manual Control Mode screen.
i. On the Manual Control Mode screen, press the F2 (Detector and Graphics) soft
key.
j. On the Chroma Board screen, verify the flame is off and the Ignitor is Off.
k. Press the F4 (Manual Ignitor On) soft key to light the cell flame. The ignitor coil
remains powered for the specified Timeout period. Once the flame lights the
Flame Out LED will go off. The cell flame burns as long as there is sufficient
burner air and hydrogen fuel in the cell.
14. With Dual Detectors, perform steps 12 and 13 for each detector, as appropriate.
15. Again verify settings with the Data Package and adjust as needed. Check oven
temperature on the Temperature Control screen (see "Temperature Control Table" in
Section 4).
Verify GCC Operation
Restore all tables from E2PROM as follows:
2000-OSM, C1 2-17
1. Verify that the Background screen is displayed (see Figure 2-10). If it is not displayed,
press the F1 soft key several times until the Background screen appears.
********** B A C K G R O U N D **********
ABB Analytical GCC Remote 0.1
803V029-1R (Std GCC) (C) 2001
**ALARM**
**ALARM** 20-JUN-2002 THU 08:16:01
**ALARM**
Analysis Time :00114 Peaks Found:00
Cycle Time :00000 State:Idle
Current Stream :01 Key Component:

Purging Stream :01 none
Method :01 entered
Exit Manual Cur Report,

to Control Basic I/O & Alarms
Commands Options
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-10. BACKGROUND SCREEN
2. Press the F1 (Exit to Commands) soft key.
3. On the Commands screen cursor down to STORAGE & CONFIG.
4. Press the F2 (Save or Restore Tables) soft key.
5. On the Table Storage screen cursor down to RESTORE TABLES FROM E2PROM.
6. Press the F2 (Restore Tables) soft key.
7. When “Are You Sure? Y/N” appears on the screen, press the “Y” key.
8. Press the F1 soft key as necessary to return to the Background screen.
This restores to main memory the tables that were most recently saved to E2PROM.
If ABB Lewisburg provided Applications Engineering, verify all method tables by comparing
them to those in the Data Package. This is done most easily by printing the tables (if a
printer is connected to the analyzer). To print the method tables:
1. Display the Background screen.
2-18 2000-OSM, C1
3. On the Commands screen cursor down to PRINTER.
4. Press the F2 (Test Printer) soft key. A string of characters should print. If characters
print go to step 5. If a string of characters does not print go to step 9.
5. Verify that the cursor is on PRINTER.
6. Press the F3 (Print Tables) soft key.
7. Select a table to print. Repeat until you have printed all tables.
8. Verify that the printed tables are the same as those in the Data Package. If so, go to
"Calibration Run."
9. If a string of characters did not print when you selected Test Printer, cursor to TESTING/
SET UP.
10. Press the F3 (Hardware Set Up) soft key.
11. On the Hardware Set Up screen, verify that the baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits
values match those set at the printer. Refer to the printer manual if necessary.
12. Press the F2 (Exit & Update) soft key and return to the Commands screen.
13. Perform steps 3 through 8.
Calibration Run
If you have a calibration run specified for your analyzer, request a calibration and compare
the results with those in the Data Package. To do this perform the following steps (which will
enable you to perform a single calibration run):
1. On the Background screen press the F1 (Exit to Commands) soft key.
2. On the Commands screen cursor to TABLE EDIT and then press the F2 (Methods) soft
key.
3. The Method Table #?? screen will appear. Use the number keys on the GCC front panel
to enter the number of the method to be calibrated. When the desired number appears
on the screen, press the F2 (Edit The Table) soft key.
4. The Cal Define & Cycle Time screen will appear. Note the calibration stream number
that appears on the Primary Cal Stream line.
5. Press the F1 (Continue) soft key.
6. When the next Method Table screen appears, press the F1 (Exit) soft key, then press
the F1 (Escape) soft key.
7. When the Commands screen appears, cursor to ANALYSIS CONTROL and then press
the F2 (Request Analysis) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 2-19
8. On the Request Analysis screen (see Figure 2-11), select the method number for a
calibration run.
****** Request Analysis ******

Analysis Requests: For a benchmark
or calibration enter the method#,
otherwise enter the stream#:[1 ]
None Stream Bench Cal
PENDING: 00 00 00
Accept Clear
Escape The All
Request Requests
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-11. REQUEST ANALYSIS SCREEN
9. Place the cursor on “Cal” and then press the F2 (Accept The Request) soft key.
10. Press the F1 (Escape) soft key to return to the Commands screen.
11. If the analyzer is running, go to step 14. If the analyzer is stopped, go to step 12.
12. On the Commands screen, press the F4 (Start/Stop Analysis) soft key.
13. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen, press the F2 (Start Analyzer) soft key. The controller
will perform the calibration as soon as it completes all other requests.
15. Watch the screen to determine when the calibration stream (noted in step 4) has purged
and starts the calibration.
16. Press the F3 (Current Report, Basic I/O, and Options) soft key.
17. On the Report, Basic I/O and Options screen, cursor to CURRENT REPORT, if
necessary, and press the F2 (View Current Report) soft key. The desired report will
display at the end of the calibration.
18. When the report is complete, press the F1 soft key as necessary to return to the
Background screen. The analyzer will continue to run until the operator stops it.
19. To stop the analyzer, press the F1 (Exit to Commands) soft key.
2-20 2000-OSM, C1
20. On the Commands screen cursor to ANALYSIS CONTROL, if necessary, and press the
F4 (Start/Stop Analysis) soft key.
21. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen, cursor to “At End of Analysis?” and then press the F2
(Stop Analyzer) soft key.
Checking Streams
To verify the operation of each stream, perform a single analysis on each one before going
into full operation.
2. On the Commands screen cursor to ANALYSIS CONTROL, if necessary, and then press
3. On the Request Analysis screen (see Figure 2-11), select the stream to be analyzed.
4. Place the cursor on “Stream” and then press the F2 (Accept The Request) soft key.
7. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen, press the F2 (Start Analyzer) soft key. The controller
will start the analysis on this stream as soon as all other requests have been completed.
9. Watch the screen to determine when the desired stream has purged and starts the
analysis.
display at the end of the analysis.
Background screen.
13. To repeat the process for the remaining streams or to rerun this stream, repeat steps 1
through 12.
14. When checkout is complete, press the F1 soft key to return to the Background screen.
Chroma I/O PCB Setup
The Chroma I/O PCB, located in slot 2 of the GCC Card Cage, requires setting of switches
for network operation and local control options. Eight-position DIP Switch SW1 controls
these features.
2000-OSM, C1 2-21
Refer to the Data Package to see if a network identification (“Remote Number”) is assigned
to the analyzer. When you determine the Remote Number for this analyzer, set or verify this
identification using positions 1 through 5 of SW1, as follows.
NOTE
Each time one of these address switches is changed, you must

initialize the switch selections. To do this, open the GCC Front Panel,
press and release the RESET switch on the Single Board Computer
PCB, and then close the Front Panel. Additionally, you must restore the
tables from E2PROM (see "Verify GCC Operation").
1. Turn power to the analyzer OFF.
CAUTION
Always wear a fully-connected anti-static wrist strap when removing or

installing PC boards.
3. Remove the Chroma I/O PCB from the Card Cage.
4. Locate Switch SW1 on the Chroma I/O PCB (see Figure 2-12).
1 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ON OFF
SW1
Figure 2-12. CHROMA I/O BOARD SETUP
5. Set the switch positions to the desired remote number, using Figure 2-13 as a guide.
6. Insert the Chroma I/O PCB into slot 2 of the Card Cage and make sure the PCB is
securely in place.
7. Close and lock the GCC front panel.
2-22 2000-OSM, C1
Switch No. Switch No.
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1 1 #1 0 1 1 1 1 #17
1 1 1 1 0 #2 0 1 1 1 0 #18
1 1 1 0 1 #3 0 1 1 0 1 #19
1 1 1 0 0 #4 0 1 1 0 0 #20
1 1 0 1 1 #5 0 1 0 1 1 #21
1 1 0 1 0 #6 0 1 0 1 0 #22
1 1 0 0 1 #7 0 1 0 0 1 #23
1 1 0 0 0 #8 0 1 0 0 0 #24
1 0 1 1 1 #9 0 0 1 1 1 #25
1 0 1 1 0 #10 0 0 1 1 0 #26
1 0 1 0 1 #11 0 0 1 0 1 #27
1 0 1 0 0 #12 0 0 1 0 0 #28
1 0 0 1 1 #13 0 0 0 1 1 #29
1 0 0 1 0 #14 0 0 0 1 0 #30
1 0 0 0 1 #15 0 0 0 0 1 #31
1 0 0 0 0 #16 0 0 0 0 0 #32
Remote No.
Figure 2-13. REMOTE NUMBER IDENTIFICATION WITH SW1
8. Turn power to the analyzer ON at the circuit breaker.
The local control options are manual control, view only, and screen saver, using SW1
positions 6, 7, and 8 (SW1 positions 6 and 7 interact).
• Setting SW1-7 to OFF locks the screen in a “view only” mode; you cannot edit any
tables or functions. Setting SW1-7 to ON disables the “view only” function.
• SW1-6 provides manual control but does not let you update tables. Setting SW1-6 to
OFF enables manual control, but only when SW1-7 is in the ON position. When SW1-7
is set of OFF this overrides the setting of SW1-6.
• The screen saver option lets you blank the display screen when it is not being used.
SW1-8 OFF activates the screen saver, while SW1-8 ON disables this feature.
2000-OSM, C1 2-23
If the GCC has user nameable inputs option, you may insert names for up to five sensor
inputs (digital inputs on the Chroma I/O Board). To enter these names, perform the following
steps:
1. On the Background screen, press the F1 (Exit to Commands) soft key.
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to NAMES and press the F2 (Name Sensors &
Basic) soft key.
3. On the Sensor And Basic Alarm Names screen, enter the desired names (up to ten
alpha-numeric characters each) and then press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to
save the names.
Analytical Operation
Once you have verified the calibration data and each stream’s data, you are ready to place
the analyzer into full operation. Display the Background screen and then perform the
following steps:
the F4 (Start/Stop Analysis) soft key.
3. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen press the F2 (Start Analyzer) soft key.
The analyzer will run according to an already designated method table (usually #1). The
analyzer will continue to operate until you command it to stop (see "Stopping the Analyzer").
Verify Zero Baseline on Chromatogram
You can verify a chromatogram’s zero baseline in one of the following ways:
• Record the chromatogram, to compare it with the Data Package
• Display the chromatogram
• Display the percent offset used to achieve zero
Recording a Chromatogram
2. On the Manual Control Mode screen (see Figure 2-14), cursor down to CHROMA, then
left to OFF.
3. Press the ENTER key. The recorder turns off.
4. Cursor to CHROMA and then press the ENTER key. The recorder turns on and will
record the chromatogram.
5. When the chromatogram is complete, press the F1 soft key as necessary to return to
the Background screen.
2-24 2000-OSM, C1
Valves:- - - - - - - - Time:00000
RECORDER: Method Tbl: 000
Offset : 0 % Stream: 01
Attn : 5 Purging: 01
PURGE SELECT: :0 State: Idle
Last: 52 55 73 18032 Val-Bas
38 43 51 15322 Bas-Val

To and Zero Temp.
Background Graphics Baseline Control
F1 F2 F3 F4
Displaying a Chromatogram
3. On the Chroma Board screen press the F2 (Graphics) soft key.
4. On the Graphics Mode screen press the F2 (Display the Graphics) soft key. A
chromatogram will scroll up the screen as it happens. A baseline at mid-screen is good.
5. When you have completed the chromatogram display, press the F1 soft key as
necessary to return to the Background screen.
Displaying the Percent Offset
2. On the Manual Control Mode screen press the F3 (Manually Zero Baseline) soft key.
3. A message line appears above the soft key, similar to the following: “Zero Offset Used
004%.” A value less than 10% is good.
4. When you have completed the zero offset check, press the F1 soft key as necessary to
return to the Background screen.
2000-OSM, C1 2-25
Time Cycle Check
Perform a complete program cycle to verify that each stream and method is operating
according to the Data Package.
Verify Reports
Compare all reports in the Data Package to the corresponding reports in the analyzer by
printing the analyzer reports.
Putting a Header on Printed Reports
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to NAMES and then press the F3 (Name
Headers) soft key.
3. On the Name Headers screen, enter a header (up to two lines) and then press the F2
(Exit and Update) soft key to save the headers.
Printing the Reports
2. On the Commands screen cursor down to REPORTS.
3. Press the F2 (Printer Report Type) soft key to display the Printer Report Type screen
(see Figure 2-15). Highlighted or underlined items on this screen indicate the current
selections.
4. Cursor right or left to the report type you want to print: Raw Data, Regular, or Short (see
"OTHER TABLES AND REPORTS" in Section 4 for detailed examples of report types).
5. Cursor down to Print and then cursor right to Always to activate the printer.
6. Cursor down to Alarm Report and select No (or Yes to print an alarm report).
7. Cursor down to Frequency if you are changing how often you print this report.
“Frequency” in this screen means whether you will print the report each time it occurs
(“1”), only every other time it occurs (“2”), only every third report that occurs (“3”), etc.
8. When you have made and verified your selections, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft
key to print the report.
2-26 2000-OSM, C1
****** Printer Report Type ******
GC Analysis Report:
Type: [Raw Data] Regular Short
Print: Never Always On Alarm
Alarm Reports: No Yes
Frequency: 1
Inhibit Cal/Bench Report: No Yes
Exit
Escape and
Update
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-15. PRINTER REPORT TYPE SCREEN
Benchmark Run
Benchmarks are periodic tests used to ensure the analyzer is functioning properly. If you
perform a benchmark of each applicable method at the end of start-up, this will provide a
reference for later benchmarks. In order to do benchmarks, the benchmark concentrations
must be entered into the Component Definition screen and the benchmark stream must be
defined (see "Preparing a Method Table" in Section 4).
To run a benchmark test:
2. On the Commands screen cursor to TABLE EDIT and then press the F2 (Methods) soft
key.
3. The Method Table #?? screen will appear. Use the number keys on the GCC front panel
to enter the number of the method to benchmark. When the desired number appears
on the screen, press the F2 (Edit The Table) soft key.
4. The Cal Define & Cycle Time screen will appear. Note the benchmark stream number
that appears on the Benchmark Stream line.
5. Press the F1 (Continue) soft key.
6. When the next Method Table screen appears, press the F1 (Exit) soft key, then press
the F1 (Escape) soft key.
7. When the Commands screen appears, cursor to ANALYSIS CONTROL and then press
2000-OSM, C1 2-27
8. On the Request Analysis screen select the method number to be benchmarked.
9. Place the cursor on “Bench” and then press the F2 (Accept The Request) soft key.
11. If the analyzer is running, go to step 14. If the analyzer is stopped, go to step 12.
12. On the Commands screen press the F4 (Start/Stop Analysis) soft key.
13. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen press the F2 (Start Analyzer) soft key. The controller
will perform the benchmark as soon as all other requests have been completed.
15. Watch the screen to determine when the benchmark stream (noted in step 4) has
purged and starts the benchmark.
display at the end of the benchmark run.
Background screen. The analyzer will continue to run as directed by the Stream
Assignment Table unless it is stopped by the operator.
19. To stop the analyzer press the F1 (Exit to Commands) soft key.
20. On the Commands screen, cursor to ANALYSIS CONTROL, if necessary, and press the
TCD Zero Adjust (Filament TCD Only)
To adjust the Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) zero, perform the following steps:
3. On the Chroma Board screen press the F3 (Manually Zero Baseline) soft key. The
Detector Reading should change to a value of 2.00 mV ± 0.05 mV.
4. Note the readings (on the Chroma Board screen) for Hardware Zero, Software Zero,
and Detector Reading values.
5. Open the Controller front door.
2-28 2000-OSM, C1
6. Locate the TCD Amplifer PCB on the left side wall of the GCC and remove the plug
covering the Zero Adjust Potentiometer (see Figure 2-16).
Zero Adjust
Potentiometer
Figure 2-16. TCD AMPLIFIER PCB
7. Adjust the Zero Adjust potentiometer until the Detector Reading is equal to the sum of
the Hardware Zero and Software zero values noted in step 4.
8. Press the F3 (Manually Zero Baseline) soft key and recheck the readings. The detector
is adequately zeroed when the Hardware Zero percentage is less than 10%.
Stopping the Analyzer
To stop the analyzer perform the following steps:
3. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen, verify that the highlighted area is on "At End of
Analysis?" and press the F2 (Stop Analyzer) soft key. The analyzer will stop at the end
of the analysis.
CONNECTING THE ANALYZER TO VISTANET
If the analyzer is connected to ABB's VistaNET, you must connect the GCC to the VistaNET
PC as described in the VistaNET 2.0 Installation Guide (2300-IG). After the connections
have been completed and verified you must set up the GCC to work on this network. This
setup consists of several sets of front panel display entries.
Initial Setup
These steps set up the analyzer to work with VistaNET. The paragraphs that follow explain
specific additional information required for full VistaNET operation.
2000-OSM, C1 2-29
NOTE
Before changing VistaNET screens, verify all data with your Network
Administrator to ensure proper VistaNET connection and operation.
2. On the Commands screen, cursor to TESTING/SETUP and then press the F4 (Status
Display) soft key.
3. On the Controller Status screen, press the F2 (Clear Highway Stats) soft key to reset all
data to zero so you will know when VistaNET data is sent and received.
4. On the Commands screen, cursor to VISTANET and then press the F2 (VistaNET
Tables and Commands) soft key.
5. On the VN Menu screen (see Figure 2-17), cursor to STARTUP and then press the F2
(Essential Addresses) soft key.
************ VN Menu **********
TABLES
STARTUP
TESTING
Essential Access Refresh

Escape Addresses Level VNSA
Tables
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-17. VN MENU SCREEN (STARTUP HIGHLIGHTED)
6. On the VistaNET Essential Addresses screen (see Figure 2-18), enter the GCC's
identification on the Name line. This identifies the device type and location.
7. Cursor down to the Tag line and enter the GCC's tag number. This usually identifies the
tap in the process that connects to the analyzer.
8. Cursor to the Board Address line and enter the Communication Board's address.
9. Cursor to the Domain 1 line and enter your GCC's Domain 1 identification.
2-30 2000-OSM, C1
******* VistaNET Essential Addresses *******
Name: [GCC10 ]
Tag: GCC10
Board Address: 0.10

Domain 1: 0.1
Domain 2: 0.2
VNSA Address: 0.1.0.199

Router Address: 0.1.0.199
Exit
Escape and
Update
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-18. VistaNET ESSENTIAL ADDRESSES SCREEN
11. Cursor to the VNSA Address line and enter the complete address of the VNSA serving
your GCC.
12. Cursor to the Router Address line and enter the complete address of the Router serving
your GCC.
13. When you have completed and verified your entries, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft
key to save your entries.
Setting Access Levels
Next you must enter the appropriate access level. There are three levels of remote access
(i.e., via VistaNET) granted by the analyzer:
1. Net Locked: no remote modification of the analyzer's tables is permitted. It requires a

SUPERVISOR VNSA access level to modify any of the analyzer's tables from the front
panel (see the applicable VistaNET Installation Guide for more information).
2. Restricted: remote modification of tables is limited to users that have SUPERVISOR or

NORMAL access level.
3. Unrestricted: remote modifications can be performed by any user.
You set the remote access level for an analyzer from the front panel as follows:
2000-OSM, C1 2-31
1. At the VN MENU screen, cursor to STARTUP and press the F3 (Access Level)
soft key (see Figure 2-19).
2. Select level desired from scroll list and select Exit and Update.
***** VistaNET Access Level *****
Access Level: Unrestricted
Exit
Escape and
Update
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-19. VistaNET ACCESS LEVEL SCREEN
Subscriber List
Since you want the analyzer to automatically send analysis results and analyzer events to
the VistaREPORTER, the HIU, and VistaSTORAGE, you must enter their addresses and
associated time-outs in the Subscriber List. The time-out determines how long the analytical
device will wait for an appropriate response from the server before trying an alternate
domain or different server altogether.
Unlike the Essential Addresses and Access Level, the Subscriber List can be edited
remotely. This installation procedure will only cover editing the Subscriber List from the
device’s front panel.
To edit the Subscriber List:
1. At the VN MENU screen cursor to TABLES (see Figure 2-20).
2-32 2000-OSM, C1
**** VN Menu *****
TABLES
STARTUP
TESTING
Subscriber SQC
Escape List Config
Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-20. VN MENU SCREEN (TABLES HIGHLIGHTED)
2. Press the F2 (Subscriber List) soft key to access the VistaNET Subscriber List (see
Figure 2-21).
***** VistaNET Subscriber List *****
Command: Previous Next Add Delete
Type: HIU
Primary Address: 0.1.0.100
Secondary Address: 0.2.0.100
Time Out: 7000 ms
This Entry: 1 Total Entries: 3
Exit Accept Expand

Escape & Update Command Address
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-21. SUBSCRIBER LIST SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 2-33
3. Cursor to Type field and select server type: HIU, RD (VistaREPORTER), or SD
(VistaSTORAGE).
4. Cursor to Primary Address field and enter the full address of the server that the
analytical results or analyzer events will be sent to first.
5. Cursor to Secondary Address field and enter the full address of the server that is
contacted only when no proper response has been received from the Primary Address
within the time limit set in the Time Out field.
6. Cursor to the Time Out field and enter the time period before the analytical device will
switch to the Secondary Address for services. The time-out period must be entered in
milliseconds. Note: If the HIU time-out period is inadequate for HIU communications
with the DCS, the HIU will automatically modify the analytical device’s Subscriber List.
7. Cursor to the Command field, then cursor to Add.
8. Press the F3 (Accept Command) soft key.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 7 for each Subscriber List entry.
10. When you have completed all entries, press the F2 (Exit & Update) soft key.
Completing the VistaNET Connection
When all entries have been completed and verified, you should perform the following steps
to ensure VistaNET is operating properly.
1. On the VN Menu screen with Startup highlighted, press the F4 (Refresh VNSA Tables)
soft key and then press the Escape soft key to return to the Commands screen.
Display) soft key.
3. On the Controller Status screen (see Figure 2-22), note that "Blocks Acked" and "Blocks
Received" both have numbers, indicating that your command to Refresh VNSA Tables
was sent and acknowledged. You are now connected to VistaNET.
2-34 2000-OSM, C1
***** Controller Status *****
CPU: 41% Memory: 089% / 342656 Bytes

Channel: One Two
Domain: 0.1 0.2
# Blocks Acked 001463 000955
# Blocks Not Acked 000360 000167
# Blocks Received 001467 000953
# Purges/Queued 000000 000000
# Time Outs 000372 000365
# Blocks Dropped 000000 000000
# Blocks Avail/Used 000014 000000
Clear
Escape Highway
Stats
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 2-22. CONTROLLER STATUS SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 2-35
ABB Inc.
P.O. Box 831
Lewisburg, WV 24901

Fax (304) 645-4236

Fax (304) 647-1837

2-36 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 3. OPERATION
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Gas Chromatographic Controller (GCC)
The GCC’s internal controls and indicators are as shown in Figure 3-1.
Single Board Computer

Chroma I/O PCB
(SBC) PCB
Reset Switch
(resets SBC PCB)
Halt
Time Out
Run
Highway 2 Transmit
Highway 2 Receive
Highway 1 Transmit
Highway 1 Receive
Figure 3-1. GCC CARD CAGE CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The GCC’s external controls and indicators are as shown in Figure 3-2.
Hardware Fault LED (indicates a hardware fault)

Video Display
(presents screens & displays Software Fault LED (indicates a software fault)
Front Panel Latch

Flame Out LED (holds front door closed)
(indicates FID/FPD Alpha/Vista BASIC Keys
flame not lit) (enter alphabetic commands)
Soft Keys HARDWARE
ABC DE F GH I J
K L MNOPQRS T
FAULT
(access screens) U VWX Y Z +

- SPACE
BKSP
SHIFT
Numeric Keys
. , * / < > ( )
SOFTWARE
FAULT
:
1
;
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (enter numeric information)
RECORDER
Recorder Jacks
FLAME OUT 0 - 10 V
F1 F2 F3 F4 ENTER HELP
Cursor Keys (connect chart recorder)

(move in a screen)
ENTER Key Side Panel Latch

(makes screen (holds side door closed)
selection)
Front Panel Latch
HELP Key (holds front door closed)
(gets help from internal computer)
Figure 3-2. ELECTRONICS HOUSING CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
2000-OSM, C1 3-1
Regulator and Gauge Panels
The Purge Air Panel contains the pressure regulators and gauges for controlling the purge
air and heater air (see Figure 3-3).
Purge Air Panel Pressure Control Panel
Figure 3-3. REGULATOR AND GAUGE PANELS
If the analyzer has mechanical regulators and gauges, the Pressure Control Panel will have
the analytical regulators and gauges. (The application determines which specific regulators
and gauges are installed.) If the analyzer has EPC, the Pressure Control Panel has a blank
front panel.
Oven Compartment
On the right side of the oven compartment are located the column flow adjustments for
setting flows. These needle valves, located in the oven for thermal stability, allow flows to be
set using a screwdriver through the oven wall without disturbing the thermal integrity of the
analysis zone.
NORMAL OPERATION
When the analyzer is first installed or when it is being turned on for the first time after
maintenance or repair, you should verify that all installation and startup checks have been
completed (see Section 2 of this manual).
Display Screen
This analyzer operates from a series of menus and screens, using the display on the GCC.
The Background screen is the default screen, from which you can select the other screens.
Since all screens are divided into the same basic elements, you should understand this
screen structure before operating the analyzer (see Figure 3-4).
3-2 2000-OSM, C1
********** B A C K G R O U N D ********** Screen Title
803V029-1R (Std GCC) (C) 2001
**ALARM**
**ALARM** 20-JUN-2002 THU 08:16:01
**ALARM**
Analysis Time :00114 Peaks Found : 00 Data Display
Cycle Time :00000 State : Idle

entered
Message Line
to Control Basic I/O & Alarms Soft Key
Commands Options Labels
Soft Keys
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 3-4. BACKGROUND SCREEN WITH ELEMENTS IDENTIFIED
When the Background screen is not displayed, you can return to the Background screen by
repeatedly pressing the F1 soft key until the Background screen appears.
Before you start into full analytical operation, perform a calibration (if appropriate) and a
single analysis on each stream. These precautions enable you to verify the analyzer and the
process.
CAUTION
When you stop analytical operation, select “At End of Analysis” unless
an emergency occurs. Selecting “Now” stops an analysis immediately,
which can inadvertently damage the analyzer if it stops while an
analysis is in progress. Stopping during an analysis can trap sample in
a column or permit temperature or pressure ramps to continue without
adequate control.
Checking Calibration
If you have a calibration run specified for your analyzer, request a calibration run and
compare the results with those in the Data Package. To do this perform a single calibration
run:
2000-OSM, C1 3-3
3. On the Request Analysis screen (see Figure 3-5) select the method number to be
calibrated.
****** Request Analysis ******

Analysis Requests: For a benchmark
or calibration enter the method#,
otherwise enter the stream#: [1 ]
None Stream Bench Cal
PENDING: 00 00 00
Accept Clear
Escape The All
Request Requests
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 3-5. REQUEST ANALYSIS SCREEN
4. Place the cursor on “Cal” and press the F2 (Accept The Request) soft key.
6. On the Commands screen press the F4 (Start/Stop Analysis) soft key.
will run the calibration when all other requests have been completed.
8. When the calibration run is complete, verify that the Commands screen is displayed and
then press the F4 (Start/Stop Analysis) soft key.
11. On the Background screen press the F3 (Cur Report, Basic I/O & Options) soft key. The
screen will display the current report. The analyzer will run the calibration when it clears
other requests and the report will appear on the screen as it happens.
12. When you have completed the calibration test, press the F1 soft key to return to the
Background screen.
Checking Streams
To verify the operation of each stream, perform a single analysis on each one, as follows:
3-4 2000-OSM, C1
the F3 (Streams) soft key.
3. On the Stream Assignment screen, determine which streams are active. Then press the
F1 (Exit) soft key to return to the Commands screen.
4. On the Commands screen press the F2 (Request Analysis) soft key.
5. On the Request Analysis screen (see Figure 3-5), select the stream number to be
analyzed.
6. Place the cursor on “Stream” and then press the F2 (Accept The Request) soft key.
will start the analysis on this stream when all other requests have been completed.
11. Watch the screen to determine when the selected stream has purged and is starting its
analysis.
12. Press the F3 (Cur Report, Basic I/O, & Options) soft key.
display at the end of the analysis.
Background screen.
15. To repeat the process for the remaining streams or to rerun this stream, repeat steps 1
through 14.
16. When checkout is complete press the F1 soft key to return to the Background screen.
Analytical Operation
Once you have verified the calibration data and each stream’s data, you are ready to place
the analyzer into full analytical operation.
To Start Analytical Operation
2000-OSM, C1 3-5
4. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen press the F2 (Start Analyzer) soft key.
The analyzer will run the stream for which it is purging, according to the method designated
in the Stream Assignment screen. The analyzer will continue in analytical operation until you
command it to stop.
To Stop Analytical Operation
4. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen cursor to At End of Analysis? and press the F2 (Stop
Analyzer) soft key.
ALARMS
The analyzer has different types and levels of alarms to help you resolve analyzer problems.
When an alarm signal appears on the Background Screen, press the F4 (Alarms) soft key to
display the ALARMS screen with the alarm message (see Figure 3-6).
When you finish with the alarm messages, press the F1 (Exit) soft key to return to the
Background screen without deleting the alarms, or press the F2 (Clear Alarms and Exit) soft
key to clear the alarms and return to the Background screen.
****** ALARMS ******

****** ALARM ******
Post Analysis Error:
*Valve Manually Switched
Clear
Exit Alarms
and Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 3-6. ALARMS SCREEN
3-6 2000-OSM, C1
Alarm messages are of two primary types: main alarms and subordinate alarms. Main
alarms identify a major alarm category. These alarms appear on the alarm screen at the left
margin (e.g., “Post Analysis Error:” in Figure 3-6). If a main alarm has subordinate alarms,
the main alarm title will include a colon (:). Subordinate alarms appear below the main
alarms, indented and preceded by an asterisk (*) to show their subordinate status (e.g.,
“*Valve Manually Switched” in Figure 3-6).
For more information on these alarms refer to "ALARMS" in Section 6, which describes each
alarm in detail.
CHROMATOGRAMS
Chromatograms can be displayed on the screen or recorded on a strip chart recorder while
the analysis is in progress. This can be useful when you suspect an analysis problem.
3. On the Chroma Board screen, press the F2 (Graphics) soft key.
4. On the Graphics Mode screen, set % of Screen Offset to 0 and press the F2 (Display
The Graphics) soft key. The chromatogram will scroll up the screen as it happens.
5. If the chromatogram is too large for the screen or too small to read, press the right or left
cursor arrow key to change attenuation. The attenuation value appears at the bottom of
the Graphics screen, after the letter “R”, with higher numbers representing more
attenuation.
6. To change the speed at which the chromatogram scrolls, press the up (faster) or down
(slower) cursor arrow key. Speed appears at the bottom of the Graphics screen after
the letter “S”, with higher numbers representing faster speed.
7. On the Manual Control Mode screen, cursor down to the attenuation line (Attn:) and
change the attenuation value as necessary to obtain the desired chromatogram size.
The attenuation ranges from 0 to 12 (lower numbers provide more sensitivity).
8. After you have selected an attenuation value, press the F2 (Detector and Graphics) soft
key and then repeat steps 3 through 5.
9. Press any soft key to turn off the chromatogram display.
Recording a Chromatogram
1. Connect the recorder to the red and black front panel jacks or to J104 terminals 2 (+)
and 1 (-) on the left side of the GCC. For a 0-100 mv recorder, install a 1000-ohm, 1/4
watt, 1% resistor across these terminals.
3. On the Manual Control Mode screen, cursor down to Chroma, then left to Off.
4. Press the ENTER key to turn the recorder off.
2000-OSM, C1 3-7
5. Cursor to Chroma and press ENTER. The recorder will turn on and record the
chromatogram.
6. If the chromatogram is too large for the recorder or too small to read, press the F1 soft
key as necessary to return to the Manual Control Mode screen.
7. On the Manual Control Mode screen, cursor down to the attenuation line (Attn:) and
change the attenuation value as necessary to obtain the desired chromatogram size.
Figure 3-7 correlates attenuation values with recorder ranges. These ranges exclude
any operator-entered ZERO OFFSET. (If you have entered a 5% ZERO OFFSET, the
recorder range for Attenuation 1 would become -0.244 to +4.636 mv.)
8. When you finish plotting chromatograms, go to the Manual Control Mode screen.
9. Cursor to Chroma, then to Off, and then press ENTER. The recorder will stop.
Attenuation Recorder Range
1 0 - 4.88 mv
2 0 - 9.75 mv
3 0 - 19.52 mv
4 0 - 39.02 mv
5 0 - 78.08 mv
6 0 - 156.16 mv
7 0 - 312.32 mv
8 0 - 624.64 mv
9 0 - 1.250 V
10 0 - 2.500 V
11 0 - 5.00 V
12 0 - 10.00 V
Figure 3-7. CHROMATOGRAM ATTENUATION RANGES
SHUT DOWN PROCEDURES
If it is necessary to turn off power to the analyzer for maintenance, perform the following
steps:
3. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen, cursor to At End of Analysis? and press the F2 (Stop
Analyzer) soft key. The analyzer will stop at the end of the analysis.
4. If a temporary turn-off is necessary, place the external circuit breaker to OFF.
5. If an extended turn-off is necessary:
a. Turn off sample and burner fuel.
b. Allow analyzer to cool to ambient temperature.
c. Turn off remaining flows at their sources and plug all vents.
3-8 2000-OSM, C1
6. To return the analyzer to operational status, perform the normal turn-on and calibration
procedures.
COMMAND TREE
The menu system (command tree) branches out from general to specific topics, eventually
leading you to a screen that allows you to view or edit the desired parameters. The soft key
selections move you down the command tree one level at a time. Figure 3-8 shows the top
level of the command tree and the remaining levels of all branches other than Commands.
Figure 3-9 shows the tree structure under Commands.
BACKGROUND
EXIT TO MANUAL CURRENT REPORT,

COMMANDS CONTROL BASIC I/O & ALARMS
OPTIONS
CURRENT CLEAR ALARMS &

REPORT WARNINGS
TO FIGURE 3-9
"COMMANDS" MANUAL
BASIC INPUT TEMPERATURE
AND OUTPUT CONTROL
VIEW
START/STOP ALARMS
AND EDIT BASIC
OPTIONS MANUAL
PRESSURE
CONTROL
DETECTOR &
GRAPHICS TEMP CONTROL PRESSURE
CONFIG
MANUALLY ZERO VIEW

BASELINE ALARMS
PRES CONTROL
PRESS. & TEMP. ZONE CONFIG.
CONTROL
TEMP CONFIG. NAMES AND LIMITS
CONTROLLER
TYPE
Figure 3-8. COMMAND TREE, PART 1
2000-OSM, C1 3-9
FROM FIGURE 3-8
COMMANDS
REQUEST TREND TABLE
ANALYSIS
ANALYSIS TIME TABLE

CONTROL STREAMS
PRINTER
REPORT
TYPE START/STOP DIGITAL TABLE
REPORTS ANALYSIS
VIEW
REPORT
RANDOM STREAM
METHODS TABLE
ANALOG
DIGITAL
HOST VISTA BASIC
TABLE EDIT OTHER TABLES PROGRAM
TEST PRINTER
CHROMA
PRINTER BOARD 1
SAVE OR
PRINT TABLES RESTORE TABLES
DIGITAL
BOARD 1
STORAGE UPDATE
& CONFIG. DIGITAL
CONFIG. DIGITAL
BOARD 2
NAMES NAME SENSORS

& BASIC
CHROMA
CONTROL BOARD 2
PARAMETERS
NAME HEADERS
MISC. TREND &
DETECTOR
TIME AND DATE
NAME STREAMS
MEMORY
DIAGNOSTIC USED/LEFT
TESTS
DISPLAY SAVED
DATA GRAPHICS
TESTING/SETUP HARDWARE
SETUP
REPROCESS REPORT TO
STATUS SAVED DATA PRINTER
DISPLAY
CHROMATOGRAM DEFINE SAVE VISTANET TABLES

STORAGE AND RELEASE AND COMMANDS
VISTANET LOG IN/OUT
Figure 3-9. COMMAND TREE, PART 2
3-10 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 4. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Figure 4-1 shows a typical analytical flow system, using the flame ionization detector for
illustration. Connections at the right side of the analyzer cabinet provide all gas and air
inputs. Sliding plate valves, liquid sample valves, or a combination of both, provide control
and measurement of the sample. Each analytical valve is air-actuated by an electrical
solenoid valve, which in turn is controlled by the Solenoid Driver PCB. An operational cycle
for the valves consists of three modes: sample purge, sample inject, and backflush. In the
sample purge mode, sample flows through the sample loop to vent. In the sample inject
mode, the sample valve switches, capturing a plug of sample which the the carrier then
sweeps through the column train to the detector. In the backflush mode, the carrier
backflushes Column 1 to vent.
SUPPLY
AIR SAMPLE
PURGE VENT
AIR ADJ SV SV
CARRIER
IN
SELECTOR
1 6 FLOW ADJ 1 6
2 7 2 7 SELECTOR
3 8 3 8 VENT
COLUMN 4 9 4 9
PRESSURE 5 10 5 10
ADJ
ANALYTICAL COLUMN
FLOW ADJ 2
COLUMN
1 COLUMN CELL
3 DETECTOR VENT
SAMPLE LOOP
SAMPLE
IN OVEN
BACKFLUSH
VENT
Figure 4-1. TYPICAL ANALYTICAL FLOW SYSTEM DIAGRAM
The sample valve captures a sample in the sample loop. When the valve switches, the
carrier gas sweeps a sample plug through the sample/backflush valve, through Column 1, to
Column 2 and into the detector cell, where it is converted to an electrical signal. Column 1
performs preliminary separation to remove the heavier non-measured components, which
are then backflushed to vent. Column 2 separates the components to be measured, which
elute sequentially. The electronic output signal from the detector represents the component
inputs proportionally.
2000-OSM, C1 4-1
The selector valve determines which components will be measured. The sample output from
Column 2 goes through Column 3 to the detector for measurement. When the valve
switches, the sample not being measured is flushed through the Selector Vent.
The carrier gas has three purposes: to purge the columns and cell prior to introducing a
sample, to sweep the sample into the detector cell, and to backflush the backflush column.
An externally mounted pressure regulator and gauge regulate the input flow.
The sample system, together with the GCC, controls the calibration sample input. The
sample system flow and pressure control depend on the sample system configuration.
DETECTORS
Introduction
Standard detectors are the Flame Ionization Detector (FID), the Thermal Conductivity
Detector (TCD), and the Flame Photometric Detector (FPD). These detectors may be used
separately, in combination, or as dual detectors. FID and TCD cell subassemblies are
located in the upper half of the oven chamber; the FPD is mounted in a panel on the left side
of the analyzer.
The Manual Control Mode screen provides access to detector information and adjustment,
as follows:
3. The Chroma Board screen (see Figure 4-2) shows the detector status and adjustments.
4. For FID and FPD equipped analyzers, operate the ignitor manually by pressing the F4
(Manual Ignitor On) soft key.
5. For TCD equipped analyzers, set the baseline by adjusting TCD Zero Adjust on the TCD
Amplifier Board (inside the GCC) while watching the Detector Reading on the screen.
Turn the adjustment screw until you reach the minimum value for the Detector Reading.
6. When you finish the detector adjustments and have verified them, press the F1 soft key
as necessary to return to the Background screen.
If an analyzer with an FPD has the FLAME OUT LED illuminated on the front panel, it can be
ignited either automatically or manually. When the Chroma Board screen has Auto or Auto
Timeout highlighted, the ignitor operates as follows:
1. If the temperature zone associated with the FPD is greater than 110 deg C (or the
temperature zone number is set to “0”), the ignitor is turned on for three seconds.
2. The analyzer waits 15 seconds, then checks the state of the flame. If the flame is lit the
ignition sequence is complete.
3. If the flame is not lit, the analyzer repeats steps 1 and 2 (up to six times).
4. If, after six attempts to light the flame, it still is not lit, the ignition sequence terminates
and the hyrdrogen is shut off.
4-2 2000-OSM, C1
***** Chroma Board *****
Detector: FID

Timeout: 0 seconds
FPD Temp Zone: 0
Manually Manual
Baseline On
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-2. CHROMA BOARD SCREEN
5. From the Chroma Board screen you can press the F4 (Manual Ignitor On) soft key to
request ignition. This automatically turns on the hydrogen supply.
If an analyzer with an FID has the Flameout LED illuminated on the front panel, it can be
ignited either automatically or manually. When the Chroma Board screen has Auto
highlighted, the ignitor will continuously try to ignite the flame. When Auto Timeout is
highlighted, the ignitor will attempt to ignite the flame for the time specified by Timeout on the
Chroma Board screen.
Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
The FID cell (see Figure 4-3) reduces the physical sample to an electrical signal which an
interpretation device such as a recorder can condition and plot.
Breather Microdot
Adapter Connector
Thermocouple
Ignitor Polarizer
Jet
Figure 4-3. FLAME IONIZATION DETECTOR
2000-OSM, C1 4-3
The cell consists of a polarized jet, a collector, and a chamber in which hydrogen fuel and
sample are burned in air. A current, whose magnitude is proportional to the concentration of
the sample, flows between the jet and the collector. This current goes to the FID Amplifier
Assembly.
The FID Amplifier Assembly provides ignition control for the FID cell and amplification of the
detector cell output signal prior to routing the signal to the control section for signal
processing. It consists of a power supply, ignitor assembly, electrometer amplifier, and
associated circuitry. The power supply provides the necessary dc voltages for the FID
Amplifier Assembly and FID.
The ignitor assembly provides control for the ignitor in the detector cell. In the event of a
flame-out, the thermocouple senses the flame-out, illuminates the Flame-Out LED, and
sends a message to the ignitor assembly, which re-ignites the flame. The electrometer
amplifier takes the FID cell’s output, amplifies it, and sends it to the control section for signal
processing.
Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD)
Two types of thermal conductivity detector are used in this analyzer, a filament TCD and a
thermistor TCD (see Figure 4-4).
The filament TCD works on the principle that a heated body loses heat dependent on the
composition of the surrounding gas. Filaments sense the rate of heat loss so that any
change in filament current results in a bridge output proportional to the change. The TCD
contains a reference filament and a measurement filament. When the reference carrier gas
flows across both filaments, the two filaments have the same filament temperature and the
bridge has a zero output. During a measurement cycle a sample flows through the
measurement filament, changing thermal conductivity and the filament temperature, thereby
causing a corresponding change in electrical resistance. The bridge senses this change in
current and increases or decreases current flow through the bridge to compensate for the
temperature change. The change in current flow sensed by the bridge is proportional to the
component concentration in the sample being measured.
Cable
Reference Measure
Filament Filament Measure Reference
Thermistor Thermistor
Reference
Vent
Sample
In
Sample
Vent Measurement Reference
Vent Vent
Reference In
Measurement Reference
In In
Filament TCD Thermistor TCD
Figure 4-4. THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY DETECTORS
4-4 2000-OSM, C1
The thermistor TCD works on the principle that thermistor resistance varies inversely with
temperature change. The TCD contains a reference thermistor and a measurement
thermistor, connected to a comparator circuit. When the reference carrier gas flows across
both thermistors, the two thermistors have the same resistance and the comparator circuit
generates a zero output. During a measurement cycle a sample flows across the
measurement thermistor, thereby creating a resistance difference between the two
thermistors. This resistance difference sensed by the comparator circuit creates an output
signal representing component concentration in the sample being measured.
Flame Photometric Detector (FPD)
Flame photometric detection works on the principle that when sulfur is burned in a hydrogen-
rich atmosphere, luminescence (light) characteristic to sulfur is produced. The FPD cell (see
Figure 4-5) consists of a teflon burner chamber equipped with a spark ignition system, and a
photomultiplier tube which is thermoelectrically temperature controlled. A narrow bandpass
filter optically connects the burner chamber and the photomultiplier tube. An exponential
amplifier conditions and amplifies the photomultiplier tube output to provide a linear output
over a wide dynamic range. Sulfur addition permits accurate measurement of low-level sulfur
compounds.
Photomultiplier Tube Burner Block
Figure 4-5. FLAME PHOTOMETRIC DETECTOR
When a sulfur compound passes through the hydrogen-rich flame, strong luminescence
occurs between 320 and 460 nm. The narrow band-pass filter allows a sulfur spectra-
centered transmission at 394 nm ± 5 nm to achieve a specific ratio of sulfur to non-sulfur
compounds between 10,000 and 30,000:1. A photomultiplier tube views the filtered light and
outputs a voltage proportional to the intensity of the filtered luminescence. For maximum
sensitivity, the detector is optimized with respect to temperature, gas flow rates, and bias
voltage on the photomultiplier tube.
Because the amount of sulfur in the sample is very small, a sulfur addition module provides a
standard level of sulfur. This keeps the sulfur readings above the noise level within the
analyzer. When the analyzer processes a sulfur compound, the sulfur in the sample adds to
the standard sulfur, providing a level more easily measured by the photomultiplier tube.
Intercolumn Detector
The intercolumn detector measures the total sample elution profile before complete
component separation takes place in the analytical column, or as a part of a heart cut, or
backflush valve switch. It is generally used as a setup aid during installation or after rework.
While the exact location of the intercolumn detector is application dependent, it can be
connected between the sample valve and the column, between the column and the analytical
detector, or between the sample valve and the backflush valve.
2000-OSM, C1 4-5
Sequential Dual Detectors
Sequential dual detectors allow one analyzer to provide the detection output of two detectors
to meet speed or sensitivity requirements. Because these detectors function sequentially
using any two detectors, one Chroma I/O Board controls both detectors and their signal
output in series. Valve switching in the method tables determines which detector's data will
be processed by the Chroma I/O Board at any given time. Sample flow through the
detectors is application-specific; the details are shown in the Data Package.
Simultaneous Dual Detectors
Simultaneous dual detectors function in parallel using any two detectors. To accomplish this
simultaneous processing requires one Chroma I/O Board in the analyzer for each detector.
Chroma I/O Board #1 is in GCC Card Cage slot 2 and Chroma I/O Board #2 is in slot 1.
Stream assignments and method tables determine which detector processes each stream
and method. Since sample flow through the detectors is application-specific, refer to the
Data Package for this information.
NOTE
The same Method Table cannot be used for both Chroma I/O Boards.
Each Chroma I/O Board must have its own calibration stream.
Normalized analyses do not normalize across detectors.
There are two modes of running simultaneous dual detectors.
• In the Master/Master mode each Chroma I/O Board controls a separate sample system,
which allows totally independent analyses to be run simultaneously.
• In the Master/Slave mode there is only one sampling system. The methods assigned to
the Master Chroma I/O (Chroma Bd #1) perform the stream stepping and control the
analysis time. The slave (Chroma Bd #2) starts its cycle simultaneously with the master,
but the slave’s cycle time is shorter than that of the master. When the slave completes
its analysis it waits until the beginning of the next master cycle to start another run.
All stream and valve outputs originate in Chroma I/O Board #1 (the total number of streams
and valves for any particular GCC configuration remains the same).
Alarm inputs generic to the GCC (e.g., purge air) connect to both Chroma I/O Boards.
Detector specific alarm inputs connect to the appropriate Chroma I/O Board.
Each Chroma I/O Board can have up to five user-defined sensors. However, you can assign
a total of only five sensor names, so the sensors for the two boards share sensor names
(i.e., Sensor #1 for Chroma I/O Board #2 may differ from Sensor #1 for Chroma I/O Board
#1, but they have the same sensor name).
When the Simultaneous Dual Detector option is installed, many screens and functions
change to support this option. The Background screen shows data for both Chroma I/O
Boards all the time (see Figure 4-6). While the Background screen provides information on
both detectors, other screens will show the data from only one of the two detectors at a time.
4-6 2000-OSM, C1
********** B A C K G R O U N D **********
ABB Anlaytical GCC Remote 0.1
803V031-1R (Sim Dual Det) (C) 2001
19-JUN-2002 WED 15:52:34
Chroma 1 Chroma 2
Analysis Time: 0863/1080 0863/1076

Stream/Method: 20/01 19/02
Purging : 01 02
#Peaks/State : 10/Baseline 03/Baseline
Key Component: HEXANE + E-MERCAPT.
0.394 4.188

Commands Options
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-6. BACKGROUND SCREEN, SIMULTANEOUS DUAL DETECTORS
To select or change which detector’s data is viewed, press the F2 (Manual Control) soft key
on the Background screen. On the Manual Control Mode screen, press the F2 (Detector and
Graphics) soft key. When the Chroma Board screen appears (see Figure 4-7), the top line
identifies the board whose data is shown.
********** Chroma Board #? **********
Chroma Board #: [ 1 ]
Select Select
Escape Chroma Bd Chroma Bd
and View and Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-7. FIRST CHROMA BOARD SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 4-7
To view the data from the second Chroma I/O Board, enter "2" in the highlighted box on the
screen and then press the F2 (Select Chroma Bd and View) soft key. The Chroma Board #2
screen will appear (see Figure 4-8) and all screens showing Chroma I/O Board data will now
show the data from Chroma Board #2.
********** Chroma Board #2 **********
Detector: FID

Timeout: 0 seconds
FPD Temp Zone: 0
Manually Manual
Baseline On
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-8. SECOND CHROMA BOARD SCREEN
Pressing the F3 (Select Chroma Bd and Exit) soft key will also change the selected board,
but it will not display the Chroma I/O Board #2 screen.
The Control Parameters screen contains the entries for selecting whether Chroma I/O Board
#2 is run as a master or a slave. To view the Control Parameters screen, press the F1
(Commands) soft key on the Background Screen. On the Commands screen, cursor to
MISC. and press the F2 (Control Parameters) soft key. On the Control Parameters screen
(see Figure 4-9), cursor down the selections until "Detector 1 Mode" and "Detector 2 Mode"
appear. Select the desired mode for Detector 2 and then press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft
key to save this setting.
4-8 2000-OSM, C1
********** Control Parameters **********
Update Trends on Alarm: No Yes
Auto Update of RF: No Yes
Max RF Variation: 0.000000
Unknown Peak RF: 0.000000
Unknown Peak Units: % ppm
Slope Detect Tics: Never Last First
Detector 1 Mode: Master
Detector 2 Mode: Master Slave
Analyzer Name:
More Below
Exit Alarm Common

Escape and Mask Digital
Update Out. Mask
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-9. CONTROL PARAMETERS SCREEN
The Stream Assignment screen adds two columns to its standard screen (see Figure 4-10),
one to identify the detector used for each stream and method (Det), the other to identify the
link between master and slave (Link).
****** Stream Assignment ******
Stream Status Method Basic Det Link

01 Active 01 00 01 02
02 Active 02 00 02 00
03 Active 01 00 01 04
04 Active 02 00 02 00
05 Inactive 01 00 01 00
06 Inactive 01 00 01 00
07 Inactive 01 00 01 00
08 Inactive 01 00 01 00
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-10. STREAM ASSIGNMENT SCREEN
Since there is no dummy stream in Master/Master mode, all Link column entries are "00".
2000-OSM, C1 4-9
In Master/Slave mode, the Link column in the Stream Assignment screen shows which
stream the slave is using. Because only the Master detector controls the actual streams
used, this slave stream is a "dummy" stream. In Figure 4-10, stream 01 has "01" in the Det
column (Master) and "02" in the Link column. Stream 02 (which is the Link for stream 01)
has "02" in the Det column (Slave) and "00" in the Link column (no link).
Each Chroma I/O Board can send analog output to a recorder, using the terminal board
connections on the right side of the GCC. Chroma I/O Board #2 will always provide data
associated with its respective detector. Chroma I/O Board #1 can provide data associated
with either detector, depending on selections made on the Manual Control Mode screen. In
addition, Chroma Board #1's selected data is available at the front panel Recorder jacks.
The Manual Control Mode screen (see Figure 4-11) controls the recorder output locations for
Chroma I/O Board #1. The RECORDER field selects which detector's output Chroma I/O
Board #1 will send to the recorder outputs. The Mode field selects the type of output to be
sent to the recorder (chromatogram, bar graph, etc.). Press the left and right cursor keys to
scroll the selections.
*** Manual Control Mode - Chroma Bd #1 ***

VALVES: - - - 4 - - - - Time: 200
Enter Valve: 0 Cycle Time: 240
RECORDER: Chroma BD: 1 Method Tbl: 002
Offset: 5% Stream: 08
Atten: 007 Purging: 09
Mode: Chroma Peaks: 00
PURGE SELECT: 0 State:
Last:
Exit Detector Manually Pres &

To And Zero Temp
Bkgnd Graphics Baseline Control
F1 F2 F3 F4
Other screens and menus have minor changes to help identify which detector is being used
at any given time. Changes you may encounter are:
• Entries in the Random Streams screen must be streams running Master analyses. If a
stream is assigned to the Slave detector, the entry will be skipped.
• The Alarm screen is really two screens with Simultaneous Dual Detectors. When you
press the Alarms soft key, the first screen identifies alarms associated with Chroma I/O
Board 1. Pressing the Exit soft key accesses the second alarm screen, identifying
alarms associated with Chroma I/O Board 2.
4-10 2000-OSM, C1
• Vista Basic commands identify the detector by placing the Chroma I/O Board number
after the alarm name (e.g., CUR_STRM (1) or INTEGER = RAI (1,0), where the first
digit identifies the Chroma I/O Board).
Before starting an analysis, the GCC prompts for the Chroma I/O Board to use during the
analysis. The selected Chroma I/O Board must be in Master mode or the analysis will not
start. If the second Chroma I/O Board is running as Slave and it is linked to the Master
board, an analysis will start on it as well. If both boards are in Master mode, the analyses
can be synchronized by pressing the F4 (Start on Both Masters) soft key. This scheme
works only if the cycle times are the same length for the methods used.
CIRCUIT BOARDS
Power Supply PCB
The Power Supply PCB, on the left side wall of the GCC Card Cage, converts the system
input power to provide voltages for the other boards and functions in the analyzer. Its
outputs include +5 Vdc for digital circuits, +15 Vdc and -15 Vdc for analog circuits, and 18
Vac for current modules on the Analog Output PCB. The Power Supply PCB also has alarm
LEDs to assist in isolating power problems.
Chroma I/O PCB
The Chroma I/O PCB, in GCC Card Cage slot 2, uses the control information from the SBC
to switch valve and recorder output functions. During an analysis, the Chroma I/O Board
processes detector amplifier output to provide digital and analog outputs for post analysis
verification. When a second Chroma I/O PCB is used it is in GCC Card Cage slot 1.
Single Board Computer (SBC) PCB
The Single Board Computer PCB, in GCC Card Cage slot 3, provides all analyzer system
control functions. On the SBC reside E2PROM storage, computer memory, and the address
and data control circuits which coordinate internal and external data activities.
DC Solenoid Driver PCB
The DC Solenoid Driver PCB, at the bottom left of the GCC Card Cage, has ten solenoid
control circuits. It generates a +110 volt signal for energizing the solenoids controlling the
analyzer and sample system valves. When the controlling signal (common) from the control
section is applied to any of the inputs, a transistor completes the circuit to the appropriate
solenoid. If a second DC Solenoid Driver PCB is used, it is at the bottom right of the GCC
Card Cage.
Front Panel PCB
The Front Panel PCB, on the inside of the GCC front panel, provides the interface for the
display, the instrinsically safe recorder jacks, and the keypad. This assembly is also the
platform for the optional LO COMM PCB.
2000-OSM, C1 4-11
FID Amplifier PCB
The FID Amplifier PCB, on the left side wall of the GCC, amplifies the flame ionization
detector output signal and applies it to the Chroma I/O Board for processing. This assembly
also accomplishes FID flame sensing and ignition. This PCB's gain configuration is set at
the factory.
TCD Amplifier PCB
The TCD Amplifier PCB, on the left side wall of the GCC, amplifies the thermal conductivity
detector output signal and provides it to the Chroma I/O Board for processing.
FPD Amplifier and Interface PCBs
The FPD Amplifier PCB linearizes and amplifies the flame photometric detector output signal
and applies it to the Chroma I/O Board for processing. This assembly also contains circuitry
for control of thermoelectric coolers for the photomultiplier tube and for FPD flame sensing
and ignition, conditioned through the FPD Interface Assembly. It is located inside the FPD
panel at the left of the analyzer.
DTC Backplane PCB
The DTC Backplane PCB, located on the GCC right-hand door, has two micro controller
chips, one to run the DTC Backplane PCB and the other to check continuously for over-
temperature conditions in the temperature controlled zones. If the temperature in any zone
exceeds the T-Rating limit, the DTC Backplane PCB shuts off power to the temperature
zones and aborts the analysis.
AC Conditioning PCB
The AC Conditioning PCBs, piggybacked on the DTC Backplane PCB, provide AC heater
voltage to the zone boards, power compensation and zero crossing signals to the DTC
Backplane PCB, and the coolant control output to the Coolant Control Solenoid.
DTC Zone PCB
The DTC Zone PCBs, piggybacked on the DTC Backplane PCB, provide individual zone
temperature sensing and power application to heaters for each zone of the digital
temperature controller.
EPC Multibus PCB
The Electronic Pressure Control Multibus PCB, located in Card Cage slot 4, continuously
checks the pressure controlled zones. If any zone loses pressure control, the Electronic
Pressure Control Multibus PCB sends an alarm to the Single Board Computer PCB, which
aborts the analysis.
EPC Control PCB
The EPC Control PCB, mounted in the EPC Module, provides the overall control for the
electronic pressure controller.
4-12 2000-OSM, C1
EPC Sensor PCB
The EPC Sensor PCBs, mounted on the pressure transducers in the EPC Module, provide
the individual zone pressure data to the EPC Module PCB.
LO COMM PCB (Option)
The Local Communications Module (LO COMM) PCB, piggybacked on the Front Panel PCB,
provides remote access for the analyzer, so that this analyzer can operate with other Vista
GCC front panels. See 'REMOTE GC OPERATION OPTION" for a detailed explanation of
remote GC operation.
Communications PCB (Option)
The Communications Board, in any open slot in the GCC Card Cage, provides a two-channel
interface between the GCC and the VistaNET. See "VISTANET OPTION" for a detailed
explanation of the VistaNET option.
Analog Output PCB (Option)
The Analog Output (Trend) PCB has two configurations: a voltage board providing up to 48
outputs and a current board providing up to 16 outputs. Trend PCBs are in GCC Card Cage
slots 6 and 7. See ANALOG OUTPUT OPTION" for a detailed explanation of the Analog
Output option.
Digital Input/Output PCB (Option)
The Digital Input/Output PCB has two configurations: up to 48 outputs or up to 16 inputs and
32 outputs. Digital I/O PCBs are in GCC Card Cage slots 5 and 6. See DIGITAL I/O
OPTION" for a detailed explanation of the Digital Input/Output option.
METHOD TABLES
A method table is the program used to control an analyzer during an analysis. It contains all
the instructions and data required to identify each component of the sample and produce a
meaningful analysis report. The analyzer can have a maximum of eight method tables, each
supporting up to 62 components. In order for the analysis to be accurate, the analyzer must
be calibrated first.
Calibrating the Method
Calibration provides a response factor which converts the individual component’s peak area
or peak height into an actual component concentration value. This response factor is
generated by one of three calibration methods performed prior to obtaining any valid analysis
results. These calibration methods are:
• External Standard, in which the controller calibrates the analyzer against an external
calibration standard of precisely known component concentration
External Standard calibration requires you to provide the calibration concentration (CC)
for each component to be analyzed. Each component must be contained in one of the
two calibration streams so that the detector response may be determined for each
component independent of all other components. The system performs an analysis of
2000-OSM, C1 4-13
the calibration stream, obtaining corrected values for the peak area (A) and peak height
(H) of each component contained in that stream. The controller then calculates the
response factor (RF) for each component as follows:
RF = CC/A, for peak area analysis of a given component
or
RF = CC/H, for peak height analysis of a given component
• Normalized, in which the controller calibrates the analyzer against the external standard,
then calculates the sum of all peak areas and determines the percent contribution of
each component peak
Normalized calibration requires you to provide the component concentration value of

each component to be analyzed in a calibration stream. The system performs an
analysis of the stream, obtaining corrected peak area counts for each component and
for the total stream. A response factor is generated as:
RFi = (Atot/Ai)CCi, where “Ai” is for individual component, “Atot” for total
• Indirect External Standard, in which the controller uses a previously developed or

literature-derived set of response factors to calculate the relationship between the key
component and each of the other components. This mode is used when the
components cannot be individually calibrated. Calibrating the key component of the
standard sample updates only the K-factor, while the other components are updated
through the relationship of the various components.
Indirect External Standard calibration requires you to provide the concentration of a

specific component in a calibration stream, plus the relative response factor (RRF), for
each component to be measured. The system performs an analysis of the calibration
stream, obtaining a corrected peak area value for the calibration component (Ac). A K-
factor is then calculated for the stream, as follows:
K = (CCc/Ac)(1/RRFc), where subscript “c” is for the calibration component
Component concentration values are then obtained based on corrected peak area
values following an analysis:
CCi = (Ai)(K)(RRFi), where subscript “i” is for the individual component
As part of the calibration you can also select primary and secondary calibration streams,
benchmark stream, multiplier exponent, and K-factor:
• primary calibration stream has a default setting in the analyzer of stream 10. This does
not need to be set or changed (but it can be changed if desired).
• secondary calibration stream is necessary when all standard components are not
compatible in the same container.
NOTE
You can only assign a secondary calibration stream to a method table if

the GCC uses the External Standard calculation technique. Normalized
and Indirect External Standard calculation require a single calibration
stream.
4-14 2000-OSM, C1
• multiplier exponent is an exponential value which allows the analyzer to present the
response factor as an easily identified number (e.g., if response factor is 0.000005,
analyzer might show response factor = 5 and multiplier exponent = 6).
• K-factor is used with the indirect external standard to provide a means of relating the
calibration standards of all components when only one component can be measured.
Once the relationship between the various components is established (at installation),
only the K-factor is changed during calibration.
Preparing A Method Table
This subsection explains how to prepare a method table by constructing a sample method
table. Figure 4-12 shows a chromatogram of the analysis to be controlled. This analysis is
90 seconds long and has three components to measure: A, B, and C. These components
elute at the following times (after the start of the analysis): component A, 30 seconds;
component B, 50 seconds; and component C, 70 seconds.
C
A
0 90
TIME (in seconds)
Figure 4-12. CHROMATOGRAM OF ANALYSIS
In order to construct a method table for this analysis, you need to know when to turn valves
on and off, how the components are defined, and how to measure the components. For this
2000-OSM, C1 4-15
analysis we shall use slope detection, which is described in detail in "PEAK DETECTION."
Figure 4-13 illustrates the data needed to construct a method table for this analysis.
TIME-RELATED DATA OTHER DATA
Time Function Value Method Table No.: 1

Analysis Cycle Time: 90 sec
0001 Valve On One Calibration type: external std
0005 Valve Off One Analysis Normalization: no
0006 Stream Step N/A Primary Cal Stream: 10
0007 Auto Zero N/A Secondary Cal Stream: not used
0012 Slope Detect On Now Benchmark Stream: not used
0020 Valve On Two Multiplier Exponent: 0
0021 Valve Off Two K Factor: 1
0030 Component One Component Units: PPM
0040 Valve On Three Key Component: #2
0041 Valve Off Three Retention Time Deviation: ±5 sec
0050 Component Two Response Factor: 1
0060 Valve On Two required Calibration Concentration: 100
0061 Valve Off Two for each Benchmark Concentration: 100
0070 Component Three component High Concentration Alarm: 100
0089 Slope Detect Off Now Low Concentration Alarm: 0
Calculate By: area
In Primary Cal Stream: yes
Figure 4-13. DATA FOR METHOD TABLE
To construct this method table perform the following steps:
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to TABLE EDIT and then press the F2
(Methods) soft key.
3. The Method Table #?? screen will appear (see Figure 4-14). Use the number keys on
the GCC front panel to enter the number “1” for this method (which is the method
number given in Figure 4-13 data). When the correct number shows on the screen,
press the F2 (Edit the Table) soft key.
4-16 2000-OSM, C1
***** Method Table #?? *****
Enter the table number: [1]
Edit
Escape The
Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-14. METHOD TABLE #?? SCREEN
4. The Cal Define & Cycle Time screen will appear (see Figure 4-15). Set the analysis
cycle time for 90 seconds using the number keys.
****** Cal Define & Cycle Time ******

Analysis Cycle Time: [300] Sec
Calibration Type
Ext Std Normalized Indirect Std
Analysis Normalization No Yes
Primary Cal Stream: 10
Secondary Cal Stream: 0
Benchmark Stream: 0
Multiplier Exponent: 0
K Factor: 1.0000000
Continue
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-15. CAL DEFINE & CYCLE TIME SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 4-17
5. Cursor to the Calibration Type line. The current choice is underlined. To change the
choice, cursor right or left to the desired type (in this case Ext Std) and then cursor to
the next line. Moving the cursor up or down sets the new choice.
6. Cursor to each line in turn and choose the appropriate term or value:
Analysis Normalization: No
Primary Cal Stream: 10
Secondary Cal Stream: 0
Benchmark Stream: 0
Multiplier Exponent and K Factor are updated by calibration; it is not necessary

to set them.
7. Review each line to ensure you have entered the correct data and then press the F1
(Continue) soft key.
8. The Method Table #01 screen will appear (see Figure 4-16), allowing you to enter the
time-related data from Figure 4-13.
***** Method Table #01 *****
Time Function Value

[0001] Valve On One
0005 Valve Off One
0006 Stream Step N/A
0007 Auto Zero N/A
0012 Slope Detect On Now
0020 Valve On Two
0021 Valve Off Two
0030 Component One
More Below
Exit Insert Delete Cal Define

Line Line & Cycle
Time
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-16. METHOD TABLE #01 SCREEN
9. Press the F2 (Insert Line) soft key and then enter “1” using the number keys.
10. Cursor to the Function column. The number you entered now changes to “0001.” In the
Function column, use the up and down arrow keys to scroll the function names until
“Valve On” appears, and then cursor to the right.
11. In the Value column, cursor up or down until “One” appears.
12. Press the F2 (Insert Line) soft key and repeat the insertion procedure for each line in the
Method Table down through “Valve Two Off.”
4-18 2000-OSM, C1
13. After you complete the “Valve Two Off” line, press the F2 (Insert Line) soft key.
14. Enter “30” for Component #1’s time and then cursor right to select “Component.” Since
this is the first component entered into the table, “Undefined” will appear in the Value
column.
15. Cursor right to the Value column. The Component Definition screen will appear (see
Figure 4-17), which will allow you to define this component. Cursor to each line in turn
and enter the appropriate data.
****** Component Definition ******
Name: [ ONE ]
Units: PPM % Calculated
Key Component: No Yes
Retention Time Dev: ± 5.0000000 secs
Response Factor: 1.0000000
Calibration Concentration: 100.00000
Benchmark Concentration: 100.00000
High Concentration Alarm: 100.00000
Low Concentration Alarm: 0.0000000
More Below
Continue
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-17. COMPONENT DEFINITION SCREEN
16. Review each line to ensure you have entered the correct data and then press the F1
17. When the Method Table #01 screen appears, enter the data for the remaining items in
the Method Table. Remember to name Component Two “B” and Component Three “C.”
18. When you have completed all lines in the Method Table, review the table to ensure all
data are correct and then press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
19. On the Method Table #01 screen, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save this
Method Table.
Editing a Method Table
The procedure for editing a method table is the same as that for preparing a new table.
Follow the applicable steps in "Preparing a Method Table" to access the particular screen to
be changed and then insert the new information in place of the information already existing.
2000-OSM, C1 4-19
If the data to be revised exists in the time-related portion of the method table, perform the
following steps to edit the table:
1. Access the method table as described in "Preparing a Method Table," steps 1 to 3.
2. In step 3 insert the desired method number and then proceed to step 4.
3. In steps 4 through 7, review the Cal Define & Cycle Time screen and make changes as
necessary.
4. When the Method Table #01 (or other number you have chosen) appears, locate the
specific line you want to change.
5. If necessary, cursor to the Time column, and then cursor down to the line you want to
edit.
6. If you want to change the time, use the number keys to insert the new time. If this
changes the place of this line in the table, it will automatically move to the correct place
when you leave the Time column.
7. If you want to change the function, cursor right to the Function column and scroll up or
down to display the new function.
8. If you want to change the value, cursor right to the Value column and make the
necessary changes.
9. When you have completed the changes, press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
10. On the Method Table #01, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save your changes
to the method table.
Printing a Method Table
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to PRINTER and then press the F2 (Print
Tables) soft key.
3. On the Print Tables screen (see Figure 4-18), cursor to METHOD TABLE and then press
the F2 (Select Table) soft key.
4-20 2000-OSM, C1
****** Print Tables ******
[METHOD TABLE]
TREND TABLE
TIME TABLE
DIGITAL TABLE
RANDOM TABLE
VISTA BASIC PROGRAM
STREAM TABLE
PRESS. & TEMP.
DIGITAL INS & OUTS
Print
Escape Selected
Table
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-18. PRINT TABLES SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 4-21
4. On the second Print Tables screen, enter the Method Table number and then press the
F2 (Print Selected Table) soft key. The Method Table and Component Table will print
(see Figure 4-19).
METHOD TABLE #01 8:25:29 Fri 30 Sep 1994

Cycle Time = 00140
TIME FUNCTION VALUE
0001 Noise Calc On
0003 Noise Calc Off
0004 Auto Zero N/A
0010 Temp Check One
0016 Pres Check One
0017 Valve On One
0019 Valve Off One
0028 Component One
0037 Valve On Two
0039 Valve Off Two
0048 Component Two
0049 Pres Control One
0057 Valve On One
0059 Valve Off One
0062 Temp Control Two
0068 Component Three
0077 Valve On Two
0079 Valve Off Two
0088 Component Four
0097 Valve On One
0099 Valve Off One
0108 Component Five
0138 Slope Detect Off Now
0139 Component Six
0139 Component Seven
0139 Component Eight
0139 Component Nine
METHOD TABLE #01 8:25:57 Fri 30 Sep 1994

NAME RRT W KEY LL HL RF CC
METHANE 28.00 5.0 Y 0.00 100. 30.673 95.00 %
ETHANE 48.00 5.0 N 0.00 100. 0.50051 0.9689 %
ETHYLENE 68.00 5.0 N 0.00 100. 0.16836 0.5210 %
H2 88.00 5.0 N 0.00 100. 1.7311 3.351 %
CO 108.0 5.0 N 0.00 100. 0.051707 0.1599 %
Z 139.0 5.0 N 0.00 100. 1.0000 0.0000 Clc
REAL HEAT 139.0 5.0 N 0.00 50000. 1.0000 100.0 Clc
SORT OF B 139.0 5.0 N 0.00 100. 1.0000 100.0 Clc
IDEAL HEAT 139.0 5.0 N 0.00 9000. 1.0000 100.0 Clc
Figure 4-19. PRINTED METHOD TABLE
4-22 2000-OSM, C1
5. When all the data have printed, press the F1 soft key as necessary to return to the
Background screen.
PEAK DETECTION
The analyzer measures peaks in two different ways: forced gating and slope detection. Both
methods can exist in the same analysis, but they cannot both measure peaks at the same
time. If the method has forced gating and slope detection on at the same time, the controller
uses the one turned on first, ignoring the second one and sending an alarm to tell you that
both peak detection methods were on.
Forced Gating
When a component's elution time is known, forced gating can measure the peak. You
specify the gating time on and off, which lets you measure only that amount of peak area you
desire. In the method table, forced gating has four commands associated with it.
On @ Base
Off @ Base
On @ Valley
Off @ Valley
“On @ Base” tells the controller it is at the base and to start measuring. The controller
continues to measure until it reads “Off @ Base” or “Off @ Valley” regardless of whether
there are no peaks, one peak, or multiple peaks. The other functions work similarly.
Slope Detection: Introduction
Slope detection determines a peak’s starting and ending points using the analyzer’s
computer. With slope detection active, the controller constantly checks the chromatographic
signal for changes which would indicate the start of a peak, a peak’s maximum, and the end
of a peak. Slope detection utilizes several other functions: noise calculation, peak lumping,
tangent skim, baseline definitions, peak width, and suspend end. In order to explain how
these functions interact, the chromatorgram in Figure 4-20 shows the basic functions, and
the following paragraphs describe the functions.
SLOPE SLOPE
NOISE DETECT DETECT
CALC ON NOW OFF NOW
ON
PEAK
NOISE WIDTH
CALC
OFF
T0 TIME T-END
Figure 4-20. EXAMPLE OF BASIC SLOPE DETECTION FUNCTIONS
2000-OSM, C1 4-23
Slope Detection: Basic Functions
The basic slope detection functions used in a method table are Noise Calculation, Peak
Width, and Slope Detect. Slope Detect On and Slope Detect Off must always appear in the
method table when you want to use slope detection. If noise calculation and peak width are
not specified, the controller will use its stored default values.
Noise calculation determines the noise level in the analysis during a period of inactivity.
Shortly after the start of the analysis, Noise Calc is turned on for at least two seconds, and
then turned off. This noise level measured by Noise Calc is used to decide when the slope
of the chromatogram indicates a peak change and not just random fluctuation due to noise.
Peak width is used to calculate the minimum slope of the start of a peak. A lower number
causes the system to respond more quickly to the start of a peak but is less sensitive to long
term change. A higher number causes the system to respond less quickly but is more
sensitive. For that reason the default is set at 8, a median value that provides both good
response and sensitivity for most applications. Peak width only has meaning when slope
detect is running.
Slope Detect On tells the method that slope detection will be used for this analysis. It should
appear in the method well before the first peak is expected to start. Slope Detect Off tells the
method that you are finished using slope detection. Slope detection has six commands
associated with it use:
On Now
Off Now
Off @ Base
Off @ Valley
Off @ Min
Neg Peak
“On Now” starts slope detection at the next peak. “Off Now” stops slope detection
immediately. “Off @ Base turns off slope detection at the next baseline condition. “Off @
Valley” turns off slope detection at the next valley. “Off @ Min” turns off slope detection at
the next minimum, whether it is a baseline or a valley. “Neg Peak” looks for a negative going
slope to trigger the slope detection algorithm. The negative peak search only works for one
peak. You must enter another “Neg Peak” to continue the search for a second negative
peak.
Slope Detection: Supplemental Functions
In addition to the basic functions, there are six supplemental slope detection functions which
may or may not be used: peak lumping, tangent skim, baseline definitions, suspend end,
end=crest plus, and area rejection. When and how the method uses them depends on the
specific application.
Peak lumping allows you to sum consecutive peaks into a single lumped peak for calculation.
It allows you to focus on the total area of several consecutive components rather than the
individual peak areas. To use peak lumping, turn Peak Lump On prior to the end of the first
peak in the series of peaks to be lumped together (see Figure 4-21). Turn Peak Lump Off
after the end of the last peak in the series. The lumped peak file will include all peaks which
end while the lumped peaks function is active (peaks 2, 3, 4, and 5 in Figure 4-21).
4-24 2000-OSM, C1
6
5
2
1
3 4
TIME
PEAK LUMP ON PEAK LUMP OFF
Figure 4-21. EXAMPLE OF PEAK LUMPING
Tangent skim lets you analyze a smaller peak riding on the tail of a large peak. Tangent skim
directs the slope detection algorithm to look for this by identifying a tangent termination point
for the next peak which begins on a valley point (see Figure 4-22). Since the tangent skim
termination search operates only during a single peak, it is activated by setting Tangent Skim
at the proper time in the method table (no On/Off is required). To use tangent skim, choose a
time in the method table that occurs at a point before the peak in question and set Tangent
Skim. The search begins at the first valley point (point B in Figure 4-22) after the request
point (point A) and ends at the peak termination point. The controller determines it has found
a tangent termination point when the slope of the chromatogram being measured at point C
equals the slope of the line BC. The tangent point identifies this second peak as being a
small peak on the tail of a larger peak, rather than a separate peak.
1
B
2
C
A D
TIME
TANGENT SKIM
Figure 4-22. EXAMPLE OF TANGENT SKIM
Baseline definitions override the normal slope detection definition of the peak topology. This
permits you to define how the baseline is drawn for a peak or series of peaks. In the method
table, the baseline function has five commands associated with it:
Pk End =Vly
Pk End =Base
Proj Forward
Proj Reverse
Proj Term
2000-OSM, C1 4-25
If a specific application is such that the slope detect algorithm has difficulty determining
whether a particular point at the end of a peak is a valley or a baseline, it can provide erratic
data. The algorithm sometimes calls the point a valley and sometimes it calls it a baseline,
thus providing different peak areas in adjacent analyses (see Figure 4-23). By selecting “Pk
End =Vly” you can force the routine to call it a valley each time it occurs, thus removing the
indecision and stabilizing the calculations. “Pk End =Base” is used the same way as “Pk
End =Vly.” Selecting “Pk End =Vly” or “Pk End=Base” forces the slope detect algorithm to
call the point a valley or a baseline every time, whichever provides the more accurate data.
The difference between the two is shown in Figure 4-23, where the area within triangle ABC
is not measured in “Pk End=Base.” It is important to measure these peaks the same way
every time, for consistency.
PEAK PEAK
END AREA END
AREA
MEASURED MEASURED
B
A C
TIME TIME
PK END =VLY PK END=BASE
Figure 4-23. EXAMPLES OF PEAK END
The remaining baseline commands allow you to project a horizontal baseline between two
defined points on the chromatogram. This projected baseline may be set forward (to
measure from the baseline before the peak) or reverse (to measure from the baseline after
the peak). The command to start a projection must be entered at a time before the slope
detect function senses the start of a peak, and the ending command must be entered at a
time before the slope detect routine senses an end of peak.
“Proj Forward” is a forward projection flag inserted before the start of a desired peak. This
sets the baseline as the start of the peak (see “HBF” in Figure 4-24). “Proj Term” is a flag to
end the projection, thereby identifying the peak or group of peaks to be measured. It is set
after “Proj Forward” and before the end of the peak (see “HBT” in Figure 4-24). Line AB in
Figure 4-24 represents the baseline.
C D
A B
TIME
HBF HBT
Figure 4-24. EXAMPLE OF FORWARD PROJECTION
4-26 2000-OSM, C1
“Proj Reverse” is a reverse projection flag that identifies the end of a desired peak or group
of peaks. It is set in the baseline after the end of the peak (see “HBR” in Figure 4-25). With
reverse projection, “Proj Term” is set before the start of the peak—and before “Proj Reverse”
(see “HBT” in Figure 4-25). The system then measures the peak that occurs between HBT
and HBR. Line JK in Figure 4-25 represents the baseline.
H I
K J
TIME HBT HBR
Figure 4-25. EXAMPLE OF REVERSE PROJECTION
“Suspend End” permits the operator to suspend automatic baseline determination. It is

generally used when the component peak is badly tailing. “Suspend End” permits you to
choose the end-of-peak determination (see Figure 4-26).
BASELINE FOUND
BUT IGNORED
B
A C F
D
E
TIME
SUSPEND END ON SUSPEND END OFF
SUSPEND END WAS IMPLEMENTED BECAUSE

THE OPERATOR DECIDED THAT "AF" WAS
THE BEST CORRECTED BASELINE.
Figure 4-26. EXAMPLE OF SUSPEND END
2000-OSM, C1 4-27
Another method for handling badly tailing peaks is “End=Crest+” (see Figure 4-27). This
code forces the end of the peak to be the crest time plus the time specified in the code,
providing a reproducible end to the peak even if the crest of the peak is moving. To use this
command, insert “End = Crest+” into the method together with a specified time after the
crest. The method allows times from 1 to 380 for the length of time after the crest.
END SPECIFIED BY
CREST END=CREST+
TIME
END=CREST+
Figure 4-27. EXAMPLE OF END=CREST+
Area rejection is used to separate smaller, unwanted, peaks from larger peaks. If several
small peaks are close to peaks of interest, area rejection allows you to define a minimum
area a peak has to reach to be retained. Slope detection still measures all the peaks, but at
the end of the analysis all peaks below the rejection area are disregarded. To use area
rejection, insert Reject Area into the method, together with the threshold area value which
tells the controller what minimum peak area is to be retained for analysis. The method
allows you to specify areas from 1.0 to 9,000,000 for the rejection area (corrected peak area
in the Raw Data Report).
OTHER TIME-CODED FUNCTIONS
This section discusses the time-coded functions that are not part of peak detection.
A method table will contain one or more of these functions when the particular application
requires it. The following sections describe each function.
Auto Zero
Auto zero supplies an offset which brings the raw baseline signal down to its most sensitive
range. It also supplies a software offset to bring the signal to 2.0 mV. The auto zero offset is
±100 mV with a resolution of 1.7 mV. Using all of the offset voltage generates an alarm.
The auto zero function occurs immediately when requested, except that it is ignored during
any of the following situations (which cause alarms):
• When a noise calculation routine is in progress
• If a forced gate routine is in progress
• If a slope detect routine is currently processing a peak
4-28 2000-OSM, C1
NOTE
If any of the above conditions exist, an error will occur.
Stream Step
Stream Step begins the automatic sample purge of the next sample stream to be analyzed.
It must occur after completion of the sample inject for the stream currently being analyzed.
This is particularly important when the current stream being analyzed requires multiple
sample injections.
The analyzer samples the active streams in sequential order. However, you can change the
order by setting a random stream-stepping order (using the Random Stream Step table
accessed from the Commands screen).
You may request calibration, benchmark, or analysis of a specific stream at any time. The
GCC stacks and executes multiple stream analysis requests on a last in - first out basis
following the next stream step. The controller will step to any manually requested stream
regardless of its active/inactive status. Only after all requested stream analyses are
completed does the controller step to the next active stream in the routine sequence.
When the screen displays the desired method table, you can change the timing of the stream
step or add a stream step if the method table does not contain one.
NOTE
Each method table must contain a stream step in order for the
equipment to operate properly. If a method table does not have a
stream step, the controller will continue to process the last-identified
stream, repeating it until the purge stream is manually changed or a
stream step is inserted into the method table.
Valve On and Valve Off
Valve On and Valve Off control the operation of a selected valve. Each method table should
contain the valve on and off sequences required for the selected stream. The time of the first
“Valve On” in a method table is used in all reports as the sample inject time. Occasionally
you may have to add a valve on-off sequence, delete a sequence, or change the timing of a
sequence.
To turn on a valve: access the method table, set the desired time to turn on the valve, and
then select “Valve On” and the valve number.
To turn off a valve: access the method table, set the desired time to turn off the valve, and
then select “Valve Off” and the valve number.
Tic Mark
This allows you to generate positive or negative event markers for the reconstructed
chromatogram. Tic marks identify a particular point in time on the chromatogram that you
select. A tic mark can go upward from the analysis line (positive) or downward (negative).
2000-OSM, C1 4-29
Skip Next TCF On Alarm
This allows you to skip the next time-coded function if any sensor alarm is active. This
allows you to bypass sample injection if the chromatographic sensors indicate that the
analyzer is not operating according to preset parameters, such as temperature.
Skip Next TCF If Stream =
This allows you to skip the next time-coded function when this stream value equals the
stream number entered in the method table. This function allows you to skip a TCF on a
particular stream, usually because that TCF does not apply to that stream.
Do Next TCF If Stream =
This allows you to execute the next TCF in the method only if the stream value equals the
stream number entered in the method table. This function allows you to add a specific TCF
to a particular stream, but not to every stream.
Pressure Check
Pressure check, part of the optional Electronic Pressure Controller, lets you check for
pressure zone variances. A pressure value outside the zone limit causes an alarm. This
feature is described in detail in "ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION."
Pressure Control
Pressure control, a feature of the optional Electronic Pressure Controller, lets you review or
modify the pressure zone set point and ramp rate. This feature is described in detail in
"ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION."
Temperature Check
Temperature Check lets you check for temperature zone variances. A temperature value
outside the zone limit causes an alarm and, depending on the condition, aborts the analysis.
This feature is described in detail in "DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER."
Temperature Control
This lets you review or modify the temperature zone set point and ramp rate. This feature is
described in detail in "DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER."
OTHER TABLES AND REPORTS
This section discusses tables and reports that are not covered elsewhere.
Viewing or Editing Tables
Unless otherwise stated, perform the following steps to view or edit a table:
4-30 2000-OSM, C1
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to TABLE EDIT and press the F3 (Other
Tables) soft key.
3. On the Edit Other Tables screen, cursor down to the desired table and then press the F2
Edit the Table) soft key.
4. View or edit the table, then press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
5. On the next screen, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the new data, or
press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original data.
Printing Tables
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to PRINTER and then press the F2 (Print
Tables) soft key.
3. On the Print Tables screen, cursor to the desired table and then press the F2 (Print
Selected Table) soft key. The table will print.
Printing Reports
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to REPORTS and then press the F2 (Printer
Report Type) soft key.
3. On the Printer Report Type screen, cursor to the Type line and select the type of report
print by highlighting it.
4. Cursor to the Print line and select No if you do not want to print a report, Yes if you want
to print each time the report is created, Alarm if you want to print only when an alarm
condition occurs, Change if you want to print only when an alarm condition changes, or
Freq if you want to set how often to print a report.
5. Cursor to the Alarm Reports line and select No or Yes. Selecting No or Yes in step 4
overrides any alarm selection.
6. Cursor to the Frequency line and select how often you want to print a report. In this
usage, “1” means the report will print every time the report occurs; “2” means it will print
every other time; “3” means it will print every third report. Selecting No or Yes in step 4
overrides any frequency value.
7. Cursor to the Inhibit Cal/Bench Report line and select No or Yes. This selection
determines whether calibration and benchmark reports print in addition to analysis
reports (Yes), or just the analysis reports (No) will print.
8. When you have completed all entries, review the screen to verify all data. Then press
the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the changes, or press the F1 (Escape) soft
key to retain the original values. The printer will print the report as you have specified it.
2000-OSM, C1 4-31
Random Stream Stepping Table
The Random Stream Stepping Table establishes the sequence in which the various streams
are to be analyzed, up to a maximum of 50 entries. The table lists the streams in numerical
order unless the operator orders a different sequence. Figure 4-28 shows the Random
Streams screen and Figure 4-29 shows the printed table.
****** Random Streams ******
Stream
0001
0002
0001
0003
0004
0001
0005
0006
More Below
Insert Delete
Exit Line Line
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-28. RANDOM STREAMS SCREEN
RANDOM TABLE 8:27:50 Fri 30 Sep 1994

Stream
01
02
01
03
04
01
05
06
01
07
Figure 4-29. RANDOM STREAM STEPPING TABLE
4-32 2000-OSM, C1
Time Table
This table contains the schedules for automatic calibrations, benchmarks and stream
analyses (see Figure 4-30). The Time Table lists information by the day of the month and
time of day (using a 24-hour clock). If you enter “00” as the day, hour, or minute, the
specified event will occur every day, hour, or minute.
****** Time Table ******
Day Hour Minute Function Value

01 01 01 Cal Method 01
01 01 12 Cal Method 08
01 02 00 Bench Method 01
01 03 00 Bench Method 08
01 04 00 Anal Stream 01
01 04 30 Anal Stream 02
01 05 03 Valve On 01
01 05 09 Valve Off 01
More Below
Insert Delete
Exit Line Line
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-30. TIME TABLE SCREEN
To prepare or edit a Time Table:
1. On the Background screen, press the F1 (Exit To Commands) soft key.
2. On the Commands screen, cursor to TABLE EDIT and then press the F3 (Other Tables)
soft key.
3. On the Edit Other Tables screen, cursor to TIME TABLE and then press the F2 (Edit the
Table) soft key.
4. On the Time Table screen, cursor to the desired line and edit the table as described in
steps 6 through 10, as necessary.
5. If there are no entries in the Time Table, press the F2 (Insert Line) soft key.
6. Use the up and down cursor arrow keys to set the desired day.
7. Cursor right one column and set the desired hour with the up and down cursor arrow
keys.
8. Cursor right one column and set the desired minute with the up and down cursor arrow
keys.
2000-OSM, C1 4-33
9. Cursor right one column and select a function using the up and down cursor arrow keys.
The available selections are:
Cal Method Valve On Report Freq

Bench Method Valve Off Vista Basic
Anal Stream
10. Cursor right one column and select the value for the desired function (method number,
valve number, Vista Basic program, etc.). Use the keyboard number keys to enter the
number and then press ENTER.
11. Add more lines by inserting lines and repeating steps 6 through 10 as needed.
12. When you have completed the Time Table, press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
13. On the next screen press the F2 (Exit And Update) soft key to save the Time Table
changes, or press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original values.
Stream Table
The Stream Table identifies the status of each stream. This identifies the active streams and
the method number and Vista BASIC program assigned to each stream. It also allows you to
edit the table. You access the Stream Table for printing the same way as other tables, but
you access it for viewing or editing differently from other tables.
To view and edit a Stream Table:
2. On the Commands screen, cursor, if necessary, to ANALYSIS CONTROL and then

press the F3 (Streams) soft key.
3. On the Stream Assignment screen (see Figure 4-31) review the stream data and edit as
necessary. This table lists the active streams and the method number and Vista BASIC
program number assigned to each stream. When “00” is in the Vista BASIC column, no
Vista BASIC program is associated with that stream.
4. When you finish editing the stream data, press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
5. On the next screen, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the new stream
data, or press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original data.
4-34 2000-OSM, C1
****** Stream Assignment ******
Stream Status Method Basic

01 Active 01 00
02 Inactive 01 00
03 Inactive 01 00
04 Inactive 01 00
05 Inactive 01 00
06 Inactive 01 00
07 Inactive 01 00
08 Inactive 01 00
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-31. STREAM ASSIGNMENT SCREEN
Raw Data Report
This report (see Figure 4-32) provides analytical information on each component in a
particular method. The data includes retention time, concentration, uncorrected and
corrected peak heights and areas, slope sensitivity, peak width, start and end times, and
start and end amplitudes. This level of information is often useful to have when
troubleshooting the equipment.
8:09:18 Fri 30 Sep 1988 Stream 01

*** ALARM ***
High Concentration
* For Comp. #09: IDEAL HEAT
Raw Data Report For a Regular Analysis Method Table 01
Name Retention Conc Flags Uncorrected Corrected Slope Pk Start Start End End
Time Start End Pk Hgt. Pk. Area Pk. Hgt Pk. Area Sens. Wd Time Amp Time Time
METHANE 28.59 94.94% 8000 8000 200.0 31842 198.3 30953 0.0785 08 20.59 1.741 36.59 1.722
ETHANE 51.59 0.9686% 8000 100 101.1 20388 99.37 19352 0.0785 08 41.84 1.759 60.34 1.788
ETHYLENE 68.59 0.5210% 100 8000 200.0 31848 198.2 30946 0.0785 08 60.34 1.788 76.59 1.727
H2 91.59 3.349% 8000 100 101.1 20385 99.37 19349 0.0785 08 81.84 1.761 100.3 1.793
CO 108.5 0.6100% 100 8000 200.0 31869 198.3 30957 0.0785 08 100.3 1.793 116.8 1.717
Figure 4-32. RAW DATA REPORT
2000-OSM, C1 4-35
Regular Report
This report (see Figure 4-33) summarizes the analytical information on each component in a
given method, providing only retention time and concentration data.
8:09:18 Fri 30 Sep 1988 Streams 01

TEST PROGRAM
FOR 2020 SOFTWARE
*** ALARM ***
High Concentration
* For Comp. #09: IDEAL HEAT
Regular Analysis Report Method Table 01
Name RT Conc
METHANE 28.59 94.94 %
ETHANE 51.59 0.9686 %
ETHYLENE 68.59 0.5210 %
H2 91.59 3.349 %
CO 108.5 0.6100 %
Z 0.0000 0.9982 Clc
REAL HEAT 0.0000 8881. Clc
SQRT OF B 0.0000 0.04276 Clc
IDEAL HEAT 0.0000 8865. Clc
Figure 4-33. REGULAR REPORT
Short Report
This report (see Figure 4-34) gives basic information on the analysis, which you can use to
check analyzer operation periodically. It is a one-line report which provides the stream
number, injection time, and concentration for each component by number. The Short Report
comes in two forms:
• without alarm, which has only the analytical data (shown in Figure 4-34)
• with alarm, which identifies any active alarm (has two-line alarm message above the
report)
ST INJT 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
01 816 4.96 0.9680 0.5211 3.348 0.6100 0.9982 8876. 0.04273 8860.
Figure 4-34. SHORT REPORT WITHOUT ALARM
Standard Calibration Report
This report (see Figure 4-35) automatically prints after each calibration run. Depending on
how you set the parameters, the calibration will update the response factors automatically,
leave them as previously set, or update only when the deviation does not exceed the level
you originally specified.
4-36 2000-OSM, C1
8:09:18 Fri 30 Sep 1988 Stream 10
Calibration Report Method Table 01

Multiplier Exponent 04 External Standard Mode
Name RT New RF Old RF % Deviation Update
METHANE 28.59 30.67 30.67 0.002232 YES
ETHANE 51.59 00.5005 0.5009 -0.08174 YES
ETHYLENE 68.59 0.1683 0.1682 0.06264 YES
H2 91.59 1.731 1.731 0.008615 YES
CO 108.5 0.05170 0.05166 0.08079 YES
Figure 4-35. STANDARD CALIBRATION REPORT
AIR PURGING
When an area classification indicates combustible gases or particles are present in the air,
and you have an analyzer containing a possible source of ignition located in this
environment, the analyzer may have an air purging system to reduce the degree of risk. The
type of air purge used depends on the classification of the analyzer's environment; the
analyzer is labelled accordingly.
• Y Purge reduces the internal classification of the analyzer from Division I to Division II.
• Z Purge reduces the internal classification of the analyzer from Division II to

Nonhazardous/General Purpose.
• X Purge reduces the internal classification of the analyzer from Division I to

Nonhazardous/General Purpose. CENELEC requires X Purge on all Vista II Series
analyzers.
Y and Z Purge
The analyzer has a standard air purge system which will reduce the internal classification by
one level. For a Division I internal classification, this purge system, labeled Y Purge, reduces
the classification to Division II. For a Division II internal classification, this purge system,
labeled Z Purge, will reduce the classification to Nonhazardous/General Purpose. Since the
Y and Z Purge systems are identical except for nomenclature, the following explanation
applies to both.
The purge air enters the analyzer system through a pressure regulator, an orifice, and a
gauge used to set purge flow, and then into the electronics housing where purge air flow is
maintained until a fault condition exists.
The following conditions cause a purge air alarm signal:
1. Loss of purge air supply causes the gauge to indicate lower pressure.
2. Blockage of the first orifice causes the gauge to indicate lower pressure.
3. Blockage of the second orifice causes the gauge to indicate increased pressure.
2000-OSM, C1 4-37
When any of these conditions exists, the GCC will set an *** ALARM *** signal display on
the screen and cause a purge alarm contact to switch. A Y or Z Purge alarm alerts you to the
condition, but it does not turn off the analyzer.
NOTE
It is the customer’s responsibility to connect the purge alarm contact to

a visual or audible annunciator located in a constantly monitored area,
as referenced in ANSI/NFPA 496 (1993).
Purge time depends on the application. Refer to the analyzer label or Data Package for
specific analyzer purge time.
X Purge Operation
While X Purge (see Figure 4-36 for features and Figure 1-1 for location) is an optional
feature, installations specifying CENELEC certification require it. X Purge reduces risk by two
levels and turns off the analyzer when an alarm occurs.
GND 2 L1(H) 4 L2(N) 6
L2 (NEUT)
CUSTOMER
POWER L1 (HIGH)
CONNECTIONS
GND
OVERRIDE PUSH BUTTON
Figure 4-36. X PURGE WITH COVER REMOVED
When you turn the power ON, X Purge begins monitoring the electronics housing (GCC and
Purge Air Panel) air purge pressure. When the air purge pressure reaches the specified
level, the X Purge starts a timed cycle. If the air purge pressure remains at the specified
level during the timed cycle, X Purge will supply power to the equipment when it completes
the timed cycle. If the air purge pressure drops before the X Purge completes the timed
cycle, X Purge resets the timer and starts over. It continues to reset the timer until the
analyzer achieves and maintains the correct pressure for a complete timed cycle. The X
Purge will not supply power to the analyzer until it sucessfully completes the timed cycle.
The X Purge cycle time depends totally on the application, but it may vary with analyzer
configuration and condition. Refer to the analyzer label or Data Package for specific purge
specifications. Once X Purge applies power to the analyzer, power continues to the analyzer
as long as the electronics housing maintains air purge pressure.
X Purge removes power from the analyzer when the electronics housing air purge pressure
drops below specifications. It locks out power to the analyzer and activates an alarm. The
analyzer has connections available to the customer for connecting the purge alarm to a
visual or audible annunciator located in a constantly monitored area.
4-38 2000-OSM, C1
In order to re-start the analyzer after an X Purge alarm, you must first correct the cause of
the drop in pressure. Then turn the power OFF at the circuit breaker for at least ten seconds
and turn the power back ON. This starts a new X Purge timed cycle, which it must complete
before it will supply power to the analyzer. If you do not correct the cause and cannot
achieve and maintain pressure, the X Purge will not complete the cycle and will not supply
power to the analyzer.
When X Purge removes and locks out power to the analyzer after a drop in electronics
housing purge air pressure (or before pressure has initially attained the specified level), you
can use Override to provide power to the analyzer for troubleshooting or maintenance
purposes. Override does not cancel the X Purge power lockout but temporarily overrides it.
X Purge Override Option
WARNING
Before you enable X Purge Override to override its control of power to

the analyzer, ensure the area where the analyzer is located is safe and
hazard free, and remains so for the entire time the X Purge housing
cover is removed.
CAUTION
Override must not be left on during regular operation of the analyzer.
Use the X Purge Override Option only for start up, troubleshooting, and maintenance. Do not
leave it on during regular operation of the analyzer. Override requires a well-lighted area to
function. A light sensor inside the X Purge housing allows you to enable Override after you
remove the X Purge housing cover. When you replace the cover, the light sensor cancels
Override.
The following steps describe how to use the override function.
1. Ensure the area is safe and well-lit.
2. Remove the X Purge housing cover and press the Override button (see Figure 4-36) to
apply power to the analyzer.
NOTE
CENELEC versions of the X Purge have a set screw in the lid that must
be removed before the housing cover can be removed.
3. Perform the necessary maintenance and troubleshooting.
4. When you have completed the maintenance and troubleshooting, replace the X Purge
housing cover (and the CENELEC set screw).
5. To cancel Override safely and properly and to reset X Purge, turn the supply power OFF
at the circuit breaker outside the analyzer (for at least ten seconds) and then turn power
ON again.
6. With X Purge reset, the air purge timed cycle begins in the electronics housing.
2000-OSM, C1 4-39
When you use Override during start-up, it overrides the X Purge control of power to the
analyzer, but the air purge timed cycle continues. Once the electronics housing has
pressurized and X Purge completes its timed purge cycle, the analyzer will have power from
the X Purge. If you replace the housing cover without turning the power off at the circuit
breaker, the analyzer will still have power because of X Purge.
If the electronics housing pressure drops during Override use and if the timed cycle is
complete, the X Purge will lock out its power to the analyzer. Since Override bypasses the X
Purge, the analyzer will still have power. If you cancel Override by replacing the housing
cover without turning off the power at the circuit breaker, the X Purge power lock out will
cause the analyzer to be without power. To restart X Purge, you must correct the cause of
the drop in pressure, then turn power OFF (for at least ten seconds), and then ON again.
The X Purge must complete its timed cycle before the analyzer will receive power.
NOTE
The remote control feature of the Override option is not available on

CSA certified analyzers.
The X Purge housing has terminals for connecting a remote control override (see Figure 4-
36), except in CSA certified analyzers. The customer is solely responsible for connecting
and maintaining the remote control switch. This remote control is only to be used during
start-up, maintenance and troubleshooting. The customer must ensure the remotely
controlled override is removed when start-up, maintenance and troubleshooting is
completed.
E2PROM
The Electrical Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (E2PROM) can store the
following tables and functions.
Method Tables Stream Table Digital Table

Trend Tables Time Table Random Stream Table
Report Format Report Headers User Sensor Names
Vista Basic Tables Control Parameters Temp Check Table
Temp Control Table Press. Check Table Press. Control Table
VistaNET Tables Name Headers Name Streams
Chromatogram Storage Parameters
This feature preserves vital tables and functions if you have power failure. Changing any of
these tables or functions the GCC enters the change into RAM. To preserve the tables and
functions, you must save them to nonvolatile memory (E2PROM).
NOTE
The SAVE TABLES TO E2PROM and RESTORE TABLES FROM

E2PROM commands alter significant portions of memory. Be sure to
read this entire subsection before executing either command.
Save Tables to E2PROM
This command saves tables and functions to nonvolatile memory to ensure an analyzer
failure will not erase them.
4-40 2000-OSM, C1
CAUTION
Saving tables and functions from RAM to E2PROM erases tables or

functions already residing in E2PROM. Since these tables and
functions in RAM will replace the tables already in E2PROM, be certain
they are correct before you perform this sequence.
To save tables to E2PROM:
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to STORAGE & CONFIG. and then press the
F2 (Save or Restore Tables) soft key.
3. On the Table Storage screen (see Figure 4-37), cursor to SAVE TABLES TO E2PROM
and press the F2 (Save Tables) soft key. The tables save to E2PROM.
****** Table Storage ******
[ ]
RESTORE TABLES FROM E2PROM
SAVE TABLES TO E2PROM
Escape
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-37. TABLE STORAGE SCREEN
4. When “Are You Sure? Y or N” appears on the screen, press the “Y” key on the GCC
front panel to confirm you want to save the tables.
Restore Tables from E2PROM
This command restores tables and functions from nonvolatile memory to RAM. It is used
when you have lost RAM for any reason.
2000-OSM, C1 4-41
CAUTION
Restoring tables and functions from E2PROM will erase any tables or
functions already residing in RAM. Since these tables and functions in
E2PROM will replace the tables already in RAM, be certain they are
correct before you perform this sequence.
NOTE
If tables and functions in E2PROM are corrupted, you will not be able to
restore them. To replace the E2PROM contents, re-enter the data from
the Data Sheets or your records and then save it to E2PROM as
described in "Save Tables to E2PROM."
To restore tables from E2PROM:
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to STORAGE & CONFIG. and then press the
F2 (Save or Restore Tables) soft key.
3. On the Table Storage screen (see Figure 4-37), cursor down to RESTORE TABLES
FROM E2PROM and then press the F2 (Restore Tables) soft key.
4. When “Are Your Sure? Y or N” appears on the screen, press the “Y” key on the GCC
front panel to confirm restoring the tables. When the GCC restores the tables to RAM,
they supersede any tables and functions already in RAM.
DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
Physical Description
The Digital Temperature Controller's temperature zones represent areas in the analyzer
having heated components: the Isothermal Oven, the Temperature Programmable Oven, the
LSV, the Methanizer, and the TCD and/or FID cells.
The Digital Temperature Controller is comprised of a DTC Backplane PCB, up to two AC

Conditioning PCBs, and up to five Temperature Zone PCBs.
NOTE
The Digital Temperature Controller is set up at the factory and should

not require adjustment on site. Your application may require different
setting from those described in this manual; see the Data Package to
ensure you use the correct settings.
Operator Settings
You can set the controller type and the zone functions for the Digital Temperature Controller,
as well as program specific functions in the Method Table. Use the following screens to
make these changes:
4-42 2000-OSM, C1
Manual Temperature Control Mode Valve On/Off
Set Point, by zone
Ramp Rate, by zone
Temperature Configuration Table Low/High Alarm Limits

Zone Name
Temperature Control Table Zone relationship

Set Point, by entry number in method
Ramp Rate, by entry number in method
Temperature Check Table Zone relationship

Alarm Temperature value, by entry number
in method
Action (Display or Abort), by entry number
in method
Zone Controller Type Controller type
Zone Config Table Zone Configuration

Sensor Type
Heat/Air relationship
Manual Temperature Control Mode
This screen allows operator control of the Digital Temperature Controller. The Manual
Temperature Control Mode screen allows you to change these fields: Valve #, Zone #, Set
Point, and Ramp Rate. Always check the original application-specific temperature limits
listed in the analyzer's Data Package to validate any changes. To access this screen
perform the following steps:
1. On the Background screen, press the F2 (Manual Control) soft key.
2. On the Manual Control Mode screen, press the F4 (Press. & Temp. Control) soft key.
3. On the Pres and Temp Control screen, cursor to TEMP CONTROL and press the F2
(Manual Temp Control) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 4-43
4. On the Manual Temperature Control Mode screen (see Figure 4-38), select the desired
field using the Up and Down cursor keys. Enter two digits for valve numbers (e.g. 04),
as some installations have more than nine valves.

ISO-OVEN ISO 79.9C 80.0C 0.0
PROG. OVEN PROG/C 220.1C 220.0C 30.0
T/C CELL SWITCH 199.8C 200.0C 10.0
LSV ISO 199.9C 200.0C 10.0
Valve # : [0] Time : 0125

Set Point: 220.00
VALVES : - - - - - - - - T2 290C
Accept Zero Span

Point Zones Zones
F1 F2 F3 F4
5. After you enter changes in the Set Point or Ramp Rate fields, press the F2 (Accept
Control Point) soft key to save the new data.
Data changes made on the screen go to the DTC Backplane PCB, which compares the new
settings with the application-specific temperature limits. If the new settings fall within the
limits, it accepts them and applies them to the analysis.
If entries in the Set Point or Ramp Rate fields fall outside the set limits, the * TEMP BD
ALARM * flashes on the screen’s message line. Temperature Zone specific alarms also
cause the zone name to flash. To identify the type of alarm, press Escape to return to the
Pres & Temp Control Screen, then press the F4 (Alarms) soft key to display the Alarm
Screen. After you note the type of alarm triggered and consult the Data Package for the set
limits, clear the alarm, return to the Manual Temperature Control Screen, and change the
entries to values within the set limits. If the DTC Backplane PCB accepts the new settings,
there will be no * TEMP BD ALARM * display on the screen after you press the F2 (Accept
Control Point) soft key.
Zero All Zones and Span All Zones settings are made in the factory and are not intended to
be changed.
5 Zone Names and Limits Table
This screen allows you to enter low and high alarm limits and change the temperature zone
names. Always check the original application-specific temperature limits listed in the
analyzer's Data Package to validate any changes. To access the 5 Zone Names and Limits
Table perform the following steps:
4-44 2000-OSM, C1
2. On Manual Control Mode screen, press the F4 (Press. & Temp. Control) soft key.
3. On the Pres and Temp Control screen (see Figure 4-39), cursor to TEMP
CONFIGURATION and press the F3 (Names and Limits) soft key.
**** Pres and Temp Control ****
TEMP CONTROL
PRES CONTROL
TEMP CONFIGURATION
Names
Escape Zone and Controller
Config Limits Type
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-39. PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 4-45
4. On the 5 Zone Names and Limits Table screen (see Figure 4-40), select the desired field
using the cursor keys.
**** 5 ZoneNames & Limits ****

Zone Low High
Num Name Limit(C) Limit(C)
1 ISO-OVEN -40.00 90.00
2 PROG. OVEN -40.00 250.00
3 T/C CELL -40.00 260.00
4 LSV -40.00 250.00
5 TEMP ZONE5 -40.00 550.00
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-40. 5 ZONE NAMES AND LIMITS TABLE SCREEN
5. In the Names field you can change the zone name by typing a new name, up to a
maximum of ten characters long. When you have completed the name, cursor to
another field.
6. In the low and high alarm limits field, type the desired alarm value and then cursor to
another field.
7. After you have completed and verified the changes, press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
8. On the next screen, press the F2 (Exit And Update) soft key to save the changes, or
press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original values. Pressing F2 saves the
values in the Name, Low Limit, and High Limit fields.
Configuring SWITCH
SWITCH displayed in the Config column indicates an Isothermal Zone with a temperature
Set Point configured at the factory and not intended to be changed. If it becomes necessary
to change the Set Point, perform the following sequence of steps.
CAUTION
free, and will remain so the entire time the analyzer is open. If the
analyzer has X Purge, operate the override function as described in "X
Purge Override Option."
4-46 2000-OSM, C1
1. Open the GCC control panel.
3. On Manual Control Mode screen, press the F4 (Pres & Temp Control) soft key.
4. On the Pres & Temp Control screen, cursor to TEMP CONTROL and then press the F2
(Manual Temp Control) soft key.
5. On the Manual Temperature Control Mode screen, cursor to the Zone # field and enter
the desired zone number (1 - 5).
6. Cursor to the Set Point field and enter the setpoint temperature (the required operating
temperature for this zone).
7. Press the F2 (Accept Control Point) soft key. The GCC displays “Hold Switch on Temp
Board to Accept New Set Point.”
8. Hold down the switch on the DTC Backplane PCB. The GCC displays the message
“Are You Sure?”
9. Continue holding the switch down and press Y on the keyboard to confirm the change.
The GCC sends the new setting to the DTC Backplane PCB where it is checked against
the established limits (this only takes a few seconds).
10. If it accepts the new temperature, the temperature appears on the screen in the Set
Point field. Release the switch and close the front panel.
11. If the GCC does not accept the Set Point, Temp Zone name flashes and * TEMP BD
ALARM * flashes on the message line. If this happens, release the switch and check
the temperature with the T-Rating on the Manual Temperature Control Mode screen.
12. Enter a set point temperature within T-Rating limits by repeating steps 5 through 10.
13. If you do not hold the switch long enough, * TEMP BD ALARM * will also display and the
new setting will not be accepted. Check the temperature with the T-Rating on the
Manual Temperature Control Mode screen and the temperature setting specified in the
Data Package and repeat steps 5 through 10.
14. To cancel the alarm press the F1 (Escape) soft key to return to the Pres & Temp Control
screen.
15. Verify that TEMP CONTROL is selected and press the F4 (Alarms) soft key to display
the alarm explanation on the Alarm Screen.
16. After noting the alarm explanation, press the F2 (Clear Alarms & Exit) soft key. If the
GCC cannot clear the alarm due to other activity, press the F1 (Exit) soft key and clear
the alarm as soon as possible.
17. Return to the Manual Temperature Control Mode screen and repeat steps 5 through 10
to set a temperature for a SWITCH Configured Isothermal Zone.
2000-OSM, C1 4-47
Temperature Control Table
This screen allows you to select zone names and change set points and ramp rates, all
related to the time they occur in the analysis method. To access this screen perform the
following steps:
2. On the Commands screen, cursor to TABLE EDIT and press the F2 (Methods) soft key.
3. On the Methods Table #?? screen, enter the number of the Method Table to be changed
and press the F2 (Edit the Table) soft key.
4. On the Cal Define & Cycle Time screen, press the F1 (Continue) soft key.
5. On the Method Table screen (see Figure 4-41), cursor to the appropriate line in the Time
field, or press the Insert Line soft key to insert a new line (just below the cursor) and
enter the time into the cycle when the function is to be performed.
6. Cursor to the Function field and scroll to Temp Contrl. In Figure 4-41, with Temp Contrl
in the Function field the Value column lists Two as the function to be performed from the
Temperature Control Table.
***** Method Table #01 *****
Time Function Value

[0001] Temp. Contrl Two
0010 Temp. Check One
0120 Noise Calc On
0125 Noise Calc Off
0128 Auto Zero N/A
0130 Skp, Nxt,Str= Nine
0132 Valve On One
0155 Valve Off One
More Below
Insert Delete Cal Define

Exit Line Line & Cycle
Time
F1 F2 F3 F4
7. Move the cursor to the Value column and the Temperature Control Table appears, with
the cursor on Entry line 02 (see Figure 4-42). Note the Entry line number when you
enter the table so you can exit the table from the same line, if desired.
4-48 2000-OSM, C1
***** Temperature Control *****
Set Point Ramp Rate
Entry Zone C C/MIN
01 Temp Zone1 150.0 25.00
[02] Temp Zone1 250.0 50.00
03 Temp Zone1 100.0 01.00
04 Temp Zone1 0.000 0.000
05 Temp Zone1 0.000 0.000
06 Temp Zone1 0.000 0.000
07 Temp Zone1 0.000 0.000
08 Temp Zone1 0.000 0.000
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-42. TEMPERATURE CONTROL SCREEN
8. On the Temperature Control screen, move the cursor as necessary to select the Zone
Name from among the names in the list, and to change Set Point and Ramp Rate
values of the desired entries.
CAUTION
When you exit the Temperature Control screen, the value in the Entry
line highlighted when you exit becomes the Value entry in the Method
Table. Unless you want to change the Value entry, exit on the same
Entry line number that you entered the Temperature Control screen.
9. Verify the changed values and place the cursor on the desired Entry number. Then
press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
Temperature Check Table
This screen allows you to select zone names and change alarm temperature values and
alarm methods, all related to the time they occur in the analysis method. To access this
screen perform the following steps:
2. On the Commands screen, cursor to TABLE EDIT and press the F2 (Methods) soft key.
3. On the Methods Table #?? screen, enter the number of the Method Table to be changed
and press the F2 (Edit the Table) soft key.
4. On the Cal Define & Cycle Time screen, press the F1 (Continue) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 4-49
6. Cursor to the Function field and scroll to Temp Check. In Figure 4-41, with Temp Check
in the Function field the Value column lists One as the function to be performed from the
Temperature Check Table.
7. Move the cursor to the Value column and the Temperature Check Table appears, with
the cursor on Entry line 01 (see Figure 4-43). Note the Entry line number when you
enter the table so you can exit the table from the same, if desired.
8. On the Temperature Check screen, move the cursor as necessary to select the Zone
Name and to change less than (<), more than (>), alarm value, and the alarm mode of
the desired entries.
CAUTION
When you exit the Temperature Check screen, the value in the Entry
line highlighted when you exit becomes the Value entry in the Method
Table. Unless you want to change the Value entry, exit on the same
Entry line number that you entered the Temperature Check screen.
***** Temperature Check *****

Temperature
Entry Zone C Action
[01] Temp Zone1 < 0.0000 Abort
02 Temp Zone1 < 0.0000 Display
03 Temp Zone1 < 0.0000 Abort
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-43. TEMPERATURE CHECK SCREEN
press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
4-50 2000-OSM, C1
Controller Type
There are several types of temperature controllers, such as Sulfur, Sparger, PINA, PNA, and
Regular. This screen is set at the factory and should not have to be changed. If you want to
verify the setting, perform the following steps.
CONFIGURATION and press the F4 (Controller Type) soft key.
4. On the Controller Type screen (see Figure 4-44), verify that the controller type is the
same as specified in the Data Package.
***** Controller Type *****
Controller Type: Regular
Exit
Escape and
Update
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-44. CONTROLLER TYPE SCREEN
5. If you want to change the controller type, use the cursor arrow keys to select the desired
type and then press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the changes, or press the
F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original controller type.
6. If you made changes, "Hold Switch on Temp Board" will appear on the screen.
7. Open the GCC Front Panel and hold down the switch on the DTC Backplane PCB.
8. The CRT will display the message, "Are You Sure? Y or N." Continue holding the
switch down and press "Y" on the GCC keyboard to accept the change.
2000-OSM, C1 4-51
9. If the change is accepted, an acknowledging message appears on the screen. Release
the switch and close the front panel.
Temperature Configuration Table
This screen allows you to select temperature zone names and sensor types. It also allows
you to select the heat/air relationship in zones 3 and 4. To access the Temperature
Configuration Table perform the following steps:
CONFIGURATION and press the F2 (Zone Config) soft key.
4. On the Temp Config Table screen (see Figure 4-45), select the desired field using the
cursor keys.
**** Temp Config Table ****

Remove Heat On
Num Config Sensor Air Loss
1 ISO Probe Yes
2 ISO Probe Yes
3 INACT Probe No
4 INACT Probe No
5 ISO TC Yes
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-45. TEMP CONFIG TABLE SCREEN
5. In the Config field, you can change the temperature configuration by scrolling through
the list of titles and selecting the appropriate one for this zone, then cursor to another
field. The five Temperature Zone configuration choices are:
INACT Inactive
SWITCH Isothermal Controlled by toggle switch on Temp. Control PCB
ISO Isothermal Regular
PROG Programmable
PROG/C Programmable with Vortex Cooler
4-52 2000-OSM, C1
NOTE
SWITCH, displayed in the Config column, indicates an isothermal zone

that is not intended to be changed.
If a change in the zone configuration becomes necessary, the

pushbutton switch on the DTC Backplane PCB confirms the change.
Refer to "Configuring SWITCH," steps 8 and 9.
6. In the Sensor field, you can toggle between Probe and TC. Refer to the Data Package
to ensure you select the appropriate sensor type.
7. In the Remove Heat On Air Loss field you can toggle between Yes and No. Refer to the
Data Package to ensure you make the appropriate selections.
8. After you have completed and verified the changes, press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
9. On the next screen, press the F2 (Exit And Update) soft key to save the changes, or
press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original values.
10. “Hold Switch on Temp Board” will appear on the screen.
CAUTION
11. Open GCC Front Panel and hold down the switch on the DTC Backplane PCB.
12. The screen will display the message, “Are You Sure? Y or N.” Continue holding the
switch down and press “Y” on the GCC keyboard to accept the change.
13. If the GCC accepts the change, an acknowledging message appears. Release the
switch and close the front panel.
14. On the Pres and Temp Control screen, cursor to TEMP CONFIGURATION and press
the F2 (Zone Config) soft key.
15. Verify that changes have been accepted and then press the F1 soft key as necessary to
return to the Background screen.
If the GCC accepts the new configuration settings, they appear on the screen in the
appropriate fields. If it does not accept them, the field settings do not change and a *TEMP
BD ALARM* signal appears. If you do not hold the switch long enough, a *TEMP BD
ALARM* signal appear and the new settings will not be accepted. Check the established
limits for the settings in the Data Package and try again.
Programming Notes
There are two types of programmable zones, standard programmable zone (PROG) and
programmable zone with the vortex cooler (PROG/C). You can program both types of
programmable zones from the Manual Temperature Control Mode screen.
2000-OSM, C1 4-53
The maximum value of Ramp Rate for any PROG or PROG/C zone is 50° C/minute, in
increments of one-tenth of a degree. Setting a Ramp Rate of 0.0° C/minute causes the
temperature controller to maintain the present temperature. A Ramp Rate of 50° C/minute
sends the temperature zone as rapidly as possible to the intended setpoint. This happens
without consideration of true rate or out of control conditions.
Programming for the PROG and PROG/C zones differs only in the cool down ramp rate. In
zones programmed as PROG/C, a coolant solenoid rapidly cools down the zones. This
solenoid activates when it receives a Ramp Rate of 0.1° C/minute. Once the solenoid
recognizes the 0.1° C setting, it forces vortex cooled air into the programmed zone to cool it
down. The rate of cool down depends solely on the zone temperature and the volume of the
cool air. Once the zone reaches the lower set point, power is applied to the heater for this
zone to maintain the new set point while the cool air is still flowing. The coolant solenoid
stops the air flow when a ramp rate other than 0.1° C/minute is received.
Both Set Points and Ramp Rates may originate from a Method Table being run automatically
by the GCC, or the Workstation, or may be entered manually on the Manual Temperature
Control Mode screen.
The last programming information entered runs the analysis, whether entered on the Manual
Temperature Control Mode screen or in the Method Table.
NOTE
On power loss, Set Points and Ramp Rates for all programmable zones
(PROG and PROG/C) are lost. You must re-enter the Values manually
or execute the method stored in the Method Table.
Alarms
Digital Temperature Controller alarms are described in "Temperature Board" alarms in

Section 6. When a temperature alarm occurs, it appears as *** ALARM *** flashing on the
Background screen and * TEMP BD ALARM * flashing on the Manual Temperature Control
Mode screen. To identify the specific alarm, press the F4 (Alarm) soft key on the
Background screen.
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION
The optional Electronic Pressure Control (EPC) replaces the mechanical regulators and
gauges in the Pressure Control Panel. The EPC provides up to five individually controlled
pressure zones.
Physical Description
The EPC is comprised of an Electronic Pressure Control Multibus PCB and an EPC Module
which contains up to five pressure zones.
NOTE
The EPC is set up at the factory and should not require adjustment on
site.
4-54 2000-OSM, C1
Operator Settings
You can set the zone functions for the EPC and also program specific functions in the
method tables. The functions you can set or program appear on the following screens:
Screen Function
Manual Pressure Control Mode Valve On/Off

Set Point, by zone
Ramp Rate, by zone
Pressure Configuration Table Range

Zone Name
Pressure Control Table Zone relationship

Set Point, by entry number in method
Ramp Rate, by entry number in method
Pressure Check Table Zone relationship

Alarm Pressure value, by entry number in method
Action, by entry number in method
Manual Pressure Control Mode
This screen allows operator control of the Electronic Pressure Controller. The Manual
Pressure Control Mode screen allows you to change these fields: Enter Valve, Zone #, Set
Point, and Ramp Rate. Always check the original application-specific pressure limits listed in
the Data Package provided with the analyzer to ensure any changes are valid. To access
this screen perform the following steps:
1. On the Background screen press F2 (Manual Control).
2. On the Manual Control Mode screen press F4 (Press. & Temp. Control).
2000-OSM, C1 4-55
3. On the Pres and Temp Control screen (see Figure 4-46), cursor to PRES CONTROL
and press F2 (Manual Pressure Control).
TEMP CONTROL
PRES CONTROL
TEMP CONFIGURATION
Manual Pressure View

Escape Pressure Config Alarms
Control
F1 F2 F3 F4
4. On the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen (see Figure 4-47), select the desired field
to change using the cursor arrow keys. Enter two digits for valve numbers (e.g. 04), as
some installations have more than nine valves.
**** Manual Pressure Control Mode ****

CARRIER #1 ISO 5.35 5.36 0.0000
PURGEAIR ISO 44.0 44.0 0.0000
N2DIL ISO 30.4 30.5 0.0000
Valve # : [0] Time : 0125

Zone # : 1 State : Idle
Set Point: 0.00000000
Ramp Rate: 0.0000000 Ver A
VALVES : - - 3 - 5 - - - - - - -
Accept Calibrate
Escape Control Zone
Point
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-47. MANUAL PRESSURE CONTROL MODE SCREEN
4-56 2000-OSM, C1
5. After you enter and verify your changes, press F2 (Accept Control Point) to save the
new data.
The Electronic Pressure Control Multibus PCB compares the data changes made on the
screen with the application-specific pressure limits. If the new settings are within the limits,
they will be accepted and applied to the analysis.
If the Set Point (SP) or Ramp Rate (Rate) values are not within the set limits, the *
PRES BD ALARM * flashes on the screen’s message line. Pressure Zone specific alarms
also cause the zone name to flash. To identify the type of alarm, press Escape to return to
the Pres & Temp Control Screen, then press F4 (Alarms) to display the Alarm Screen. After
noting the type of alarm triggered and consulting the Applications Package for the set limits,
clear the alarm, return to the Manual Pressure Control Screen, and change the entries to
values within the set limits. If the new settings are accepted, there will be no * PRES BD
ALARM * display on the screen after F2 (Accept Control Point) is pressed.
Calibrate Zone settings are made in the factory and are not intended to be changed.
Pressure Configuration Table
This screen allows you to enter a pressure range, change the configuration choices, and
change the pressure zone names. Always check the original application-specific pressure
limits listed in the analyzer's Data Package to ensure any changes are valid. To access the
Pressure Configuration Table perform the following steps:
2. On the Manual Control Mode screen press F4 (Press. & Temp. Control).
3. On the Pres and Temp Control screen, cursor to PRES CONTROL and press F3
(Pressure Config).
2000-OSM, C1 4-57
4. On the Pressure Config Table screen (see Figure 4-48), select the desired field using
the cursor keys.
**** Pressure Config Table ****

Zone
Num Name Config Range
1 COLUMN ISO 30
2 ANALYSIS ISO 30
3 SELECTOR ISO 50
4 ANALYSIS ISO 50
5 COLUMN PROG 100
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-48. PRESSURE CONFIGURATION TABLE SCREEN
5. In the Name field you can change the zone name by typing a new name, up to a
maximum of ten characters long. When you have completed the name, cursor to
another field.
6. In the Config field, you can change the pressure configuration by scrollling through the
list of titles and selecting the appropriate one for this zone, then cursor to another field.
7. In the Range field, type the range value and then cursor to another field.
8. After you complete and verify the changes, press F1 (Exit).
9. On the next screen press F2 (Accept Control Point) to save the changes, or press F1
(Escape) to retain the original values.
10. “Hold Switch on Pres Board” will appear on the screen.
CAUTION
11. Open the GCC Front Panel and hold down the switch on the Electronic Pressure Control
PCB.
4-58 2000-OSM, C1
12. The screen will display the message, “Are You Sure? Y or N.” Continue holding the
switch down and press “Y” on the GCC keyboard to accept the change.
13. If the GCC accepts the change, an acknowledging message appears. Release the
switch and close the front panel.
14. On the Pres and Temp Control screen, cursor to PRES CONTROL and press F3
(Pressure Config).
15. Verify that changes have been accepted and then press F1 as necessary to return to
the Background screen.
If the GCC accepts the new configuration settings, it displays them on the screen in the
appropriate fields. If it does not accept them, the field settings do not change and a *PRES
BD ALARM* signal is displayed. If you do not hold down the switch long enough, a *PRES
BD ALARM* signal will display and the new settings will not be accepted. Check the
established limits for the settings in the Data Package and try again.
Configuring SWITCH
SWITCH displayed in the Config column on the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen or
the Pressure Config Table screen indicates a zone with a pressure Set Point that is not
intended to be changed. If it becomes necessary to change the Set Point, perform the
following steps.
CAUTION
3. On the Manual Control Mode screen press F4 (Pres & Temp Control).
4. On the Pres & Temp Control screen, cursor to PRES CONTROL and then press F2
(Manual Pressure Control).
5. On the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen, cursor to the Zone # field and enter the
desired zone number (1 - 5).
6. Cursor to the Set Point field and enter the setpoint pressure (the required operating
pressure for the component in this zone).
7. Press F2 (Accept Control Point). The GCC displays “Hold Switch on Pres Bd to Accept
SP.”
8. Hold down the switch on the Electronic Pressure Control PCB. The GCC displays the
message “Are You Sure?”
2000-OSM, C1 4-59
9. Continue holding the switch down and press Y on the keyboard to execute the change.
The GCC sends the new setting to the Electronic Pressure Control Multibus PCB where
it is checked against the established limits (this only takes a few seconds).
10. If the new pressure is accepted, it is displayed on the screen in the Set Point field.
Release the switch and close the front panel.
11. If the Set Point is not accepted, the Pres Zone name flashes and * PRES BD ALARM *
flashes on the message line. If this happens, release the switch and check the pressure
with the pressure limits prescribed for this zone.
12. Enter a set point pressure within these limits by repeating steps 5 through 10.
13. If the switch is not held long enough * PRES BD ALARM * will also be displayed and the
new setting will not be accepted. Check the pressure with the pressure setting specified
in the Data Package and repeat steps 5 through 10.
14. To cancel the alarm press F1 (Escape) to return to Pres & Temp Control screen.
15. Verify that PRES CONTROL is selected and press F4 (View Alarms) to display the alarm
explanation on the Alarm Screen.
16. After noting the alarm explanation, press F2 (Clear Alarms & Exit). If the GCC cannot
clear the alarm due to other activity, press F1 (Exit) and clear the alarm as soon as
possible.
17. Return to the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen and repeat steps 5 through 10 to
set a pressure for a SWITCH Configured Zone.
Pressure Control Table
This screen allows you to select zone names and change set points and ramp rates, all
related to the time they occur in the analysis method. To access this screen:
1. On the Background screen press F1 (Exit to Commands).
2. On the Commands screen, cursor to TABLE EDIT and press F2 (Methods).
3. On the Methods Table #?? screen, enter the number of the Method Table you want to
change and press F2 (Edit the Table).
4. On the Cal Define & Cycle Time screen, press F1 (Continue).
6. Cursor to the Function field and scroll to Pres Contrl. In Figure 4-49, with Pres Contrl
displayed, the Value column lists Two as the function to be performed.
4-60 2000-OSM, C1
***** Method Table #01 *****
Time Function Value

[0001] Pres Contrl Two
0010 Pres Check One
0120 Noise Calc On
0125 Noise Calc Off
0128 Auto Zero N/A
0132 Valve On One
0155 Valve Off One
More Below
Insert Delete Cal Define

Exit Line Line & Cycle
Time
F1 F2 F3 F4
7. Move the cursor to the Value column and the Pressure Control Table appears, with the
cursor on Entry line 02 (see Figure 4-50). Note the Entry line number when you enter
the table so you can exit the table from the same line, if desired.
***** Pressure Control *****
Entry Zone Set Point Ramp Rate

01 Pres Zone1 150.0 25.00
[02] Pres Zone1 250.0 50.00
03 Pres Zone1 100.0 01.00
04 Pres Zone1 0.000 0.000
05 Pres Zone1 0.000 0.000
06 Pres Zone1 0.000 0.000
07 Pres Zone1 0.000 0.000
08 Pres Zone1 0.000 0.000
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-50. PRESSURE CONTROL SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 4-61
8. On the Pressure Control screen, move the cursor as necessary to select the Zone
Name from among the names in the list, and to change Set Point and Ramp Rate
values of the desired entries.
CAUTION
When you exit the Pressure Control screen, the Entry line highlighted
when you exit becomes the Value entry in the Method Table. Unless
you want to change the Value entry, be sure to exit on the same Entry
line number on which you entered the Pressure Control screen.
press F1 (Exit).
Pressure Check Table
This screen allows you to select zone names and change alarm pressure values and alarm
methods, all related to the time they occur in the method. The Pressure Check Table is
reached from the Method Table as follows:
1. On the Background screen press F1 (Exit to Commands).
2. On the Commands screen cursor to TABLE EDIT and press F2 (Methods).
3. On the Methods Table #?? screen, enter the number of the Method Table you want to
change and press F2 (Edit the Table).
4. On the Cal Define & Cycle Time screen, press F1 (Continue).
5. On the Method Table #01 screen (see Figure 4-49), cursor to the appropriate line in the
Time field, or press the Insert Line soft key to insert a new line (just below the cursor)
and enter the time into the cycle when the function is to be performed.
6. Cursor to the Function field and scroll to Pres Check. In Figure 4-49, with Pres Check in
the Function field the Value column lists One as the function to be performed from the
Pressure Check Table.
7. Move the cursor to the Value column and the Pressure Check Table appears, with the
cursor on Entry line 01 (see Figure 4-51). Note the Entry line number when you enter
the table so you can exit the table from the same, if desired.
4-62 2000-OSM, C1
***** Pressure Check *****
Pressure
Entry Zone psi Action
[01] Pres Zone1 < 0.0000 Abort
02 Pres Zone1 < 0.0000 Display
03 Pres Zone1 < 0.0000 Abort
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-51. PRESSURE CHECK SCREEN
8. On the Pressure Check screen, cursor to select the Zone Name and to change less
than (<), more than (>), alarm value, and alarm mode of the desired entries.
CAUTION
When you exit the Pressure Check screen, the Entry line highlighted at
exit becomes the Value entry in the Method Table. Unless you want to
change the Value entry, be sure to exit on the same Entry line number
on which you entered the screen.
press F1 (Exit).
Alarms
Electronic Pressure Control alarms are described in "Pressure Board" alarms in Section 6.
When a pressure alarm occurs, it displays as *** ALARM *** flashing on the Background
screen and * PRES BD ALARM * flashing on the Manual Pressure Control Mode screen. To
identify the specific alarm, press the F4 (Alarms) soft key on the Background screen.
RAW CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE AND REPROCESSING
General
This is a standard feature on GCCs which have the VistaNET option, but it is optional on all
other units. Raw chromatogram storage gives GCCs the ability to remember an analysis
under a user specified condition (i.e., an alarm), after which the analysis can be checked for
problems. Checking involves looking at the chromatogram, feeding data back through the
controller (as if it were coming from the detector), and generating reports.
2000-OSM, C1 4-63
The raw chromatogram storage and reprocessing option allows only one chromatogram of
each type to be saved (last, calibration, benchmark, typical or alarm), regardless of the
length of the cycle. When the chromatogram is saved, the Raw Data Report is saved also
(but method tables are not saved). Raw chromatograms are saved in GCC memory but they
are not saved on E2PROM. You can save and release raw chromatograms manually or
automatically.
You can view the saved chromatogram on the screen and send the report to the printer. The
GCC does this by feeding the chromatogram back through the controller, allowing the
controller to reprocess it off-line, then displaying it on the screen and sending the report to
the printer.
Accessing Raw Chromatogram Storage
Select the Raw Chromatogram Storage and Reprocessing option from the Commands
screen, as shown in Figure 4-52.
****** COMMANDS ******
ANALYSIS CONTROL
REPORTS
TABLE EDIT
PRINTER
STORAGE & CONFIG.
NAMES
MISC.
TESTING/SETUP
[CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE]
Go To Display Reprocess Define

Background Saved Saved Save And
Data Data Release
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-52. COMMANDS SCREEN
To use this feature, ensure the GCC has sufficient memory to save chromatograms, save the
desired chromatograms, then display, save and reprocess chromatograms.
Checking Available Memory
Before you select any chromatograms to save, first verify the status of available memory for
this purpose as follows:
1. On the Commands screen, cursor to CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE and then press the
F2 (Display Saved Data) soft key.
2. On the Display Saved Data screen, cursor to MEMORY USED/LEFT and press the F2
(Execute the Command) soft key. The Raw Chromatogram Memory Used/Left screen
will appear (see Figure 4-53).
4-64 2000-OSM, C1
**** Raw Chromatogram Memory Used/Left ****
Total Used = 038208 bytes

Total Left = 272916 bytes
Start End Bytes

Type/Lock Num Stream Time Time Used
Current U 01 05 0000 0127 004678
Last 01 04 0000 0155 006654
Alarm 01 02 0000 0245 010244
Calibrate 01 10 0000 0245 009756
Bench 01 09 0000 0155 006876
Escape
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-53. MEMORY USED SCREEN
This screen shows the total memory used and left, and the amount used by each saved
chromatogram. The available GCC memory resides in two separate “pools” that cannot be
shared: memory available for saving raw chromatograms (304KB), and memory available
for building operational tables and saving the Raw Data Reports with the chromatograms
(192KB).
The GCC saves the current analysis. At cycle end, the GCC determines if its program
specifies the analysis just saved as a type to be automatically saved. If it does not specify it
for automatic saving, the GCC erases the current analysis data from memory.
Chromatogram storage uses from 2 to 4 KB of memory for each minute of analysis cycle.
When estimating the memory needed, calculate 4 KB/cycle minute (e.g., 20 KB for a 5
minute cycle, 80 KB for a 20 minute cycle). Alarms and warning signals indicate when either
memory pool runs low. The GCC displays the message NOT ENOUGH MEMORY, NOT
SAVED if the 304KB pool empties or runs low.
If the GCC does not have enough memory, you must erase (release) some saved data. This
screen identifies analyses saved and memory used under “Type/Lock.” You can erase all
saved analyses or one saved analysis at a time (see next subsection).
Erasing (Releasing) Chromatogram Data
When the GCC does not have sufficient memory to save new chromatogram data, you must
erase (release from memory) existing chromatograms. First you must identify which
chromatograms to erase. Then perform the following steps to erase these chromatograms:
1. Press the F1 soft key as necessary to return to the Commands screen.
2000-OSM, C1 4-65
2. Cursor to CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE and press the F2 (Define Save And Release)
soft key.
3. On the Define Save/Release screen, cursor to MANUAL RELEASE and then press the
F2 (Execute The Command) soft key.
4. On the Manually Release Analysis screen, select the type of data to release and press
the F2 (Manually Release Analysis) soft key. If you want to release more than one
analysis, you must select the type of data separately for each analysis released.
Alternatively, you can release all analyses at once by pressing the F3 (Release All
Analyses) soft key.
5. After you have released (erased) all desired data, press the F1 (Escape) soft key to
return to the Display Saved Data menu screen.
Saving Chromatograms
You must save chromatograms before you can display or reprocess them. You can save
chromatograms either manually or automatically.
Saving a Chromatogram Manually
1. On the Commands screen cursor to CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE and press the F2

(Define Save And Release) soft key.
2. On the Define Save/Release screen, cursor to MANUAL SAVE and then press the F2
(Execute The Command) soft key.
3. On the Manual Save Analysis screen, select which type of chromatogram you want to
save.
4. Next select how you want this chromatogram saved (as a calibration analysis,
benchmark, etc.)
5. Verify your selections and press the F2 (Manually Save Analysis) soft key.
6. When you have completed saving analyses, press the F1 soft key as necessary to
return to the Commands screen.
Saving Chromatograms Automatically
1. On the Commands screen cursor to CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE and press the F2

(Define Save And Release) soft key.
2. On the Define Save/Release screen, cursor to AUTO SAVE/RELEASE and then press
the F2 (Execute The Command) soft key.
3. On the Automatically Save Analyses screen (see Figure 4-54), select which types of
chromatograms you want to save. If you do not want any data saved automatically,
select No for each entry.
4. Note the number under Alarm Mask. This represents the alarm configuration set on the
Define Alarm Mask screen. If you want to verify or change the alarm mask, press the F4
(Expand Alarm Mask) soft key.
4-66 2000-OSM, C1
****** Automatically Save Analyses ******
Save This Type Alarm

Cal Bench Last Alarm Mask
01 Yes Yes Yes Yes 65535
Expand
Exit Alarm
Mask
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-54. AUTOMATICALLY SAVE ANALYSES SCREEN
5. On the Define Alarm Mask screen, select No or Yes, as applicable, for each alarm
category. The No/Yes designations (the choices are underlined) specify which alarms
the GCC should watch for when gathering data to be saved as the alarm analysis. Each
arrangement of alarm choices on this screen is represented by a different set of
numbers in the Alarm Mask field on the Automatically Save Analyses Screen.
6. Verify your selections and press the F1 (Continue) soft key. This returns you to the
Automatically Save Analyses screen.
7. On the Automatically Save Analyses screen, verify your selections and then press the
F1 (Exit) soft key.
8. On the second Automatically Save Analyses screen, press the F2 (Exit And Update) soft
key to save your changes, or press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original
values.
9. When you have completed saving analyses, press the F1 soft key as necessary to
return to the Commands screen.
Displaying Saved Data
Once you have saved a chromatogram, you can display the chromatogram and print its raw
data report.
1. On the Display Saved Data screen, cursor to GRAPHICS and press the F2 (Execute
The Command) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 4-67
2. On the Graphics Setup screen, select the type of chromatogram to save: Calibration
(Cal), Benchmark (Bench), most recent (Last), Alarm, or typical (Typ).
3. Next select the amount of screen offset, which determines where on the screen the
chromatogram will display. Start with “0” and adjust if necessary.
4. Then select the amount of screen attenuation, to ensure the entire chromatogram will
appear on the screen.
5. Determine whether the chromatogram needs to be compressed to fit by selecting No or

Yes.
6. Set the chromatogram’s start time ("0" to start at the beginning of the analysis).
7. Set the end time according to how much of the analysis you want to see.
8. Verify the selections and then press the F2 (Execute The Command) soft key. The
chromatogram will start to scroll on the display screen.
9. Press the F1 (Escape) soft key to return to the Display Saved Data screen.
Printing a Raw Data Report
1. On the Display Saved Data screen, cursor to REPORT TO PRINTER.
2. On the Send Report To Printer screen, select the type of data to be printed.
3. Next select whether you want calibration and benchmark data printed as raw data.
4. Verify the selections and press the F2 (Send Report To Printer) soft key. “The
Command is being updated” will appear on the message line and the raw data report
will be printed. The report will not appear on the display screen.
5. Press the F1 (Escape) soft key to return to the Display Saved Data screen.
Reprocessing Saved Chromatograms
The Reprocess Saved Data Screen (soft key F3 on the Command Screen) allows you to
select type of raw data to reprocess, how to process it, whether to send the report to the
VWS (No/Yes) and whether to update Alarms, Trends and Digitals (No/Yes).
Reprocessing takes saved data and sends it back through peak detection in an off-line
mode, then produces a report available to the VWS or VistaNET (but not displayed on the
screen). Because reprocessing uses some of the same program functions as the analysis,
the GCC cannot run a real analysis and reprocess a saved analysis at the same time. To
reprocess a chromatogram, perform the following steps:
1. Stop the analysis.
2. On the Commands screen cursor to CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE and then press the
F3 (Reprocess Saved Data) soft key.
3. On the Reprocess Saved Raw Chromatogram screen (see Figure 4-55), select the type
of chromatogram to be reprocessed.
4-68 2000-OSM, C1
*** Reprocess Saved Raw Chromatogram ***
Type: [Cal] Bench Last Alarm Typ
Process
As: Cal Bench Last
Method Table: 1
Report To VWS: No Yes
Update Alarms, Trends and Digitals: No Yes
Execute
Escape The
Command
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-55. REPROCESS SCREEN
4. Select how to process this data (calibration, benchmark, or last analysis).
5. Then select the method number to use in the reprocessing.
6. Select whether you want the resulting raw data report sent to the VWS or VistaNET and
whether you want alarms, trends, and digitals to be updated.
7. After you complete the entries, verify the selections and press the F2 (Execute The
Command) soft key. The reprocessed chromatogram appears on the display and, if you
so selected, the data report will be sent to the VWS or VistaNET.
8. When the chromatogram is complete, if you have no further data to reprocess press the
F1 soft key as necessary to return to the Background screen. If you want to reprocess
another chromatogram, repeat steps 2 through 7.
9. If desired, start the analysis.
REMOTE GC OPERATION OPTION
The analyzer can operate with other ABB GCC front panels. To implement this option
requires the following changes to the analyzer: an optional PCB and several changes in
wiring connections and switch settings. This section of the manual explains how to prepare
the analyzer for remote operation and how to operate it in this configuration.
LO COMM PCB Setup
The optional Local Communications Module (LO COMM) PCB provides the remote access
for the analyzer. The analyzer has this board, mounted on the Front Panel PCB located
2000-OSM, C1 4-69
inside the GCC (see Figure 4-56), only when remote operation is specified. The LO COMM
PCB connections terminate at TB4 in the GCC cabinet.
LO COMM
FRONT PCB
PANEL PCB
LO COMM DISPLAY
CABLE PANEL
Figure 4-56. LOCATION OF LO COMM PCB
Each LO COMM PCB has a unique address to ensure positive communication. Switch SW1,
an eight-position dip switch on the LO COMM PCB (see Figure 4-57), sets this address.
LO COMM 0 1
CABLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW1
8
OFF ON
SW2
Figure 4-57. LOCATION OF LO COMM PCB SWITCHES
The first five switch positions on SW1 (labeled 0 through 4 on the PCB), determine the
analyzer's address. Switch positions 6, 7 and 8 are always ON ("1"). Figure 4-58 shows
how to identify the address from the switch positions.
4-70 2000-OSM, C1
Switch No. Switch No.
5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1 1 #1 0 1 1 1 1 #17
1 1 1 1 0 #2 0 1 1 1 0 #18
1 1 1 0 1 #3 0 1 1 0 1 #19
1 1 1 0 0 #4 0 1 1 0 0 #20
1 1 0 1 1 #5 0 1 0 1 1 #21
1 1 0 1 0 #6 0 1 0 1 0 #22
1 1 0 0 1 #7 0 1 0 0 1 #23
1 1 0 0 0 #8 0 1 0 0 0 #24
1 0 1 1 1 #9 0 0 1 1 1 #25
1 0 1 1 0 #10 0 0 1 1 0 #26
1 0 1 0 1 #11 0 0 1 0 1 #27
1 0 1 0 0 #12 0 0 1 0 0 #28
1 0 0 1 1 #13 0 0 0 1 1 #29
1 0 0 1 0 #14 0 0 0 1 0 #30
1 0 0 0 1 #15 0 0 0 0 1 #31
1 0 0 0 0 #16 0 0 0 0 0 #32
Address
Figure 4-58. ADDRESS IDENTIFICATION WITH SW1
NOTE
Be sure to save the tables to E2PROM before cycling the analyzer

power. Each time you use one of these address switches, you must
turn the unit OFF and back ON again to initialize the switch selections.
Switch SW2 on the LO COMM PCB provides two other user-selected switch settings. The
PCB labels these “No Analyzer” and “Lock Out Remote.” The OFF position is to the left of
SW2 as it is shown in Figure 4-57.
NOTE
Be sure to save the tables to E2PROM before cycling the analyzer

power. Each time you use either of these switches, you must turn the
unit OFF and back ON again to initialize the switch selection.
When you set the No Analyzer switch ON, the front panel will communicate only with other
GC’s; the front panel will not communicate with an attached analyzer.
2000-OSM, C1 4-71
When the Lock Out Remote switch is ON, another front panel on the network cannot access
this front panel, but this front panel can access other network front panels.
Remote Operation
To understand remote mode operation, visualize the LO COMM PCB as directing analyzer
data traffic along three different routes.
• When the operator at this display/keyboard communicates only with this analyzer, data
runs back and forth between the display/keyboard and the analyzer. This represents
the standard, or stand-alone, mode of operating the analyzer.
• When the operator at this display/keyboard communicates with a remote GCC, data
runs back and forth between this display/keyboard and the remote GCC.
• When the operator at a remote display/keyboard communicates with this analyzer, data
runs back and forth between the remote GCC and this analyzer.
Since the remote mode functions simply by establishing communication routes, operating an
analyzer from a remote location is virtually identical to local operation once you establish the
communication link. The only differences are a remote front panel status message and the
method by which recorder outputs are handled.
To establish remote communication, perform the following steps:
1. From any screen menu, press and release the following keys in sequence: “Upper,”
“Enter,” “R”.
2. The Remote Front Panel Mode menu appears on the screen (see Figure 4-59). This
mode starts automatically if you turn power ON with No Analyzer switch ON.
****** REMOTE FRONT PANEL MODE ******
Enter a Controller Address between

1 and 256: [ ]
If the entry is correct, then press

“EXECUTE” to contact the controller.
If the entry is incorrect, then press

“CLEAR ENTRY” and re-enter the address.
CLEAR
EXIT ENTRY EXECUTE
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-59. REMOTE FRONT PANEL MODE SCREEN
4-72 2000-OSM, C1
3. Enter the number of the remote analyzer you want to access. Verify you have entered
the number correctly and then press the F3 (EXECUTE) soft key.
4. If you entered the remote number incorrectly, press the F2 (CLEAR ENTRY) soft key,
re-enter the number, and then press the F3 (EXECUTE) soft key.
NOTE
If the remote GCC is in use, “Requested Controller is busy. Press

“EXECUTE” to retry” will appear on the screen. Wait thirty seconds
and try again to access the remote GCC.
5. After a short time the Background screen will appear, with the remote number shown at
the top left of the screen in reverse video.
6. At the remote analyzer, a message appears on the screen indicating that analyzer is
being remotely controlled (see Figure 4-60).
A Remote Front Panel is accessing

this controller.
OVERRIDE
REMOTE
OPERATOR
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-60. REMOTE CONTROLLER SCREEN
7. The only active keys on the remote GCC’s front panel are the soft keys. All other keys
are locked out until the accessing operator logs off the GCC or the operator at the
remote analyzer presses the OVERRIDE REMOTE OPERATOR soft key.
8. Use the screen and front panel keys as necessary to obtain the information desired. All
commands and displayed data will reflect what is happening at the remote analyzer.
9. When you complete the remote activity, press “Upper,” “ENTER,” “R”, to return to the
Remote Front Panel Mode screen.
10. On the Remote Front Panel Mode screen, press the F1 (EXIT) soft key to exit remote
mode and return to normal operation of the analyzer. Wait for the screen to
resynchronize before attempting any operations.
2000-OSM, C1 4-73
ANALOG OUTPUT OPTION
This option provides analog outputs to a printer, computer, or other external device. Up to
two optional PCBs, installed in the GCC Card Cage, provide different combinations of current
and voltage outputs. These combinations are:
• one current board, with up to 16 output channels
• two current boards, with up to 32 output channels
• one voltage board, with up to 48 output channels
• two voltage boards, with up to 96 output channels
• one voltage board (with up to 16 output channels) and one current board (with up to 16
output channels
With the current board, the output signal ramps from 4 to 20 ma in proportion to the signal
level. If the output is below the specified low range, the output signal will indicate the lowest
possible signal. If the output is above the specified high range, the output signal will indicate
the highest possible signal.
With the voltage board, the output signal ramps from 0 to 5 vdc in proportion to the signal
level. If the output is below the specified low range, the output signal will indicate the lowest
possible signal. If the output is above the specified high range, the output signal will indicate
the highest possible signal.
The Trend Table screen controls the Analog Output option. This screen lists each available
channel, the associated stream, the component being measured, and the low and high range
values for that component (see Figure 4-61). If you select stream “00” for a particular
channel, then the specified component will apply on that channel for all streams. At the end
of each analysis, each analog output sends the latest current or voltage value to the external
device connected to the Analog Output. When this value is between the low and high range
limits, the analog output represents a proportion of the difference between low and high. If
the analog output is outside the limits, the board will supply its lowest or highest possible
value.
To access the Trend Table screen:
1. Press the F1 soft key as necessary to display the Background screen.
3. On the Commands screen, cursor down to TABLE EDIT and then press the F3 (Other
Tables) soft key.
4. On the Edit Other Tables screen, cursor to TREND TABLE, if necessary, and then press
the F2 (Edit The Table) soft key.
5. When the first Trend Table screen appears, cursor across and down the table to
highlight a value you want to change. Then insert the new value.
6. When you have completed the changes to this Trend Table screen, review them to
ensure all items are correct and then press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
4-74 2000-OSM, C1
****** Trend Table ******
Range Range
Chan Stream Comp Low High
01 01 01 1.0000 100.00
03 01 03 0.5000 100.00
04 02 01 1.0000 100.00
05 02 02 0.5000 100.00
06 02 03 0.5000 100.00
07 08 01 1.0000 100.00
08 08 02 0.5000 100.00
More Below
Insert Delete
Exit Line Line
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-61. TREND TABLE SCREEN
7. On the second Trend Table screen, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the
changes or press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original values.
DIGITAL I/O OPTION
The Digital Input/Output option provides up to 48 output channels, or up to 32 output

channels and 16 input channels. Since the system can support two Digital I/O PCB’s, the
maximum capability is 96 output channels, or 64 output channels and 32 input channels.
The digital output channels provide component high and low alarm warnings, independent of
any other alarms in the analyzer. No alarms or other indications occur when component
concentrations are within their specified ranges, but if a component goes outside the
specified range it changes the state of the appropriate digital contact. The Digital outputs are
contact closures (rated at 30 vdc and 50 ma maximum), available to connect to audio or
visual alarms to alert the operator or technician.
The digital input channels can be read in Vista BASIC, permitting external digital information,
such as alarms, to be used in the analyzer.
The Digital Table screen controls the concentration alarm digital outputs. This screen lists
each available channel, the associated stream, the component being measured, and the low
2000-OSM, C1 4-75
and high range values for that component (see Figure 4-62). If you select stream “00” for a
particular channel, the specified component will apply on that channel for all streams.
****** Digital Table ******

Range Range
Chan Stream Comp Low High
01 01 01 1.0000 100.00
02 01 02 0.5000 100.00
03 01 03 0.5000 100.00
04 02 01 1.0000 100.00
05 02 02 0.5000 100.00
06 02 03 0.5000 100.00
07 08 01 1.0000 100.00
08 08 02 0.5000 100.00
More Below
Insert Delete
Exit Line Line
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-62. DIGITAL TABLE SCREEN
To access the Digital Table screen:
1. Press the F1 soft key as necessary to display the Background screen.
3. On the Commands screen, cursor down to TABLE EDIT and then press the F3 (Other
Tables) soft key.
4. On the Edit Other Tables screen, cursor to DIGITAL TABLE and then press the F2 (Edit
The Table) soft key.
5. When the first Digital Table screen appears, cursor across and down the table to
highlight a value you want to change. Then insert the new value.
6. When you have completed the changes to this Digital Table screen, review them to
ensure all items are correct and then press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
7. On the second Digital Table screen, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the
changes or press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original values.
4-76 2000-OSM, C1
VISTANET OPTION
If the analyzer is connected to VistaNET, you must set up the analyzer to work on this
network. Once the network connection is set up and running, it runs automatically.
To set up the network connection perform the following steps:
NOTE
Before making changes to VistaNET screens, verify all data with your
Network Administrator to ensure proper connection and operation with
VistaNET.
Display) soft key.
3. On the Controller Status screen, press the F2 (Clear Highway Stats) soft key. This will
reset all data to zero so you will know when VistaNET data is sent and received.
4. On the Commands screen, cursor to VISTANET and then press the F2 (VistaNET
Tables and Commands) soft key.
5. On the VN Menu screen (see Figure 4-63), cursor to STARTUP and then press the F2
(Essential Addresses) soft key.
************ VN Menu **********
TABLES
STARTUP
TESTING
Essential Access Refresh

Escape Addresses Level VNSA
Tables
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-63. VN MENU SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 4-77
6. On the VistaNET Essential Addresses screen (see Figure 4-64), enter the GCC's
identification number on the Name line.
******* VistaNET Essential Addresses *******
Name: [GCC10 ]
Tag: GCC10
Board Address: 0.10

Domain 1: 0.1
Domain 2: 0.2
VNSA Address: 0.1.0.199

Router Address: 0.1.0.199
Exit
Escape and
Update
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 4-64. VistaNET ESSENTIAL ADDRESSES SCREEN
7. Cursor down to the Tag line and enter the GCC's tag number.
8. Cursor to the Board Address line and enter the Communication Board's address.
11. Cursor to the VNSA Address line and enter the complete address of the VNSA serving
your GCC.
12. Cursor to the Router Address line and enter the complete address of the Router serving
your GCC.
13. When you have completed and verified your entries, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft
key to save your entries.
14. On the VN Menu screen, press the F4 (Refresh VNSA Tables) soft key and then press
the Escape soft key to return to the Commands screen.
Display) soft key.
16. On the Controller Status screen, note that "Blocks Sent" and "Blocks Received" both
have numbers, indicating that your command to Refresh VNSA Tables was sent and
acknowledged. You are now connected to VistaNET.
4-78 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 5. MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The analyzer design eliminates the need for extensive and complex maintenance. Where
preventive maintenance procedures require specific time frames or intervals, you should
maintain an inspection log and inspection data. Figure 5-1 lists inspection routines, with
recommended time intervals for each routine. In addition, you should verify analyzer
calibration periodically to ensure operating efficiency.
To aid in preventive maintenance, keep system chromatograms for reference and compare
them to current data to ensure early detection of a problem, whether in the analyzer or in the
analysis itself.
INTERVAL ROUTINE
Daily 1. Perform a visual inspection of the analyzer and check for:

a. Damaged or inoperative gauges or meters
b. Loose control knobs
c. Loose hardware
d. Low pressure or flow indicators
e. Equipment grounding connections
f. Unsecured or loose cables
2. Check physical condition of analyzer for corrosion, rust,

etc. Take corrective action as necessary.
3. Using the Data Package supplied with the analyzer, verify

all flow and pressure settings are as specified. Adjust as
necessary.
4. Check to ensure cylinder gas pressures are above 100

psig. Replace cylinders as necessary.
5. Check sampling system as applicable (i.e., pressures and

flows).
Monthly Check air supply filters.
Monthly (Weekly Check carrier line dryers; change as necessary to prevent

for first month to pressure drop. Calibrate and compare resultant chromatograms
ensure stability with those in Data Package.
as required)
Figure 5-1. RECOMMENDED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Gas Cylinder Replacement
When you use two cylinders to supply a gas, connect the cylinders in an automatic
switchover configuration to ensure continuous flow to the analyzer when you replace an
exhausted cylinder. In this configuration, the second cylinder switches in automatically when
the first cylinder is exhausted (100 psig or less). When your check indicates an exhausted
cylinder, replace the cylinder with another containing the specified gas.
2000-OSM, C1 5-1
When you use a single cylinder to supply a gas, you should check this cylinder regularly and
replace it when the pressure falls below 100 psig, using another cylinder containing the
specified gas.
Cleaning
Clean the analyzer as often as environmental conditions require. Accumulation of dirt in

certain analyzer subassemblies can cause overheating and component failure, because dirt
on components acts as insulating material preventing efficient heat dissipation.
CAUTION
Prior to cleaning the analyzer, turn off the power to the unit. Avoid
using chemical agents which might damage the component parts of the
analyzer.
Remove loose dirt accumulated on the outside of the analyzer with a soft cloth or a small
paint brush. Remove any remaining dirt with a soft cloth dampened in a mild solution of
water and detergent. Do not use abrasive cleaners on the analyzer.
Remove dust in the inside of the analyzer, to eliminate electrical conductivity, and possible
short circuits under high humidity conditions. The best way to clean the interior is to dislodge
the accumulated dust with dry, low-velocity air and then remove any remaining dirt with a soft
paint brush and vacuum cleaner.
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
The analyzer contains a number of built-in diagnostic tests and tools, identified as follows:
• ROM Checksum
• Chroma Board
• Digital Output
• Trend Output
• Hardware Setup
ROM Checksum
The ROM Checksum test checks all four ROMs for problems and posts the results on the
screen. To run this test, perform the following steps:
2. On the Commands screen (see Figure 5-2), cursor down to TESTING/SETUP and then
press the F2 (Diagnostic Tests) soft key.
5-2 2000-OSM, C1
***** COMMANDS *****
ANALYSIS CONTROL
REPORTS
TABLE EDIT
PRINTER
STORAGE & CONFIG.
NAMES
MISC.
[TESTING/SETUP]
CHROMATOGRAM STORAGE
VISTANET
Diagnostic Diagnostic
Exit Tests Tools
F1 F2 F3 F4
3. On the Diagnostic Tests screen (see Figure 5-3), cursor to DIAGNOSTIC TESTS and
press the F2 (ROM Checksum Test) soft key.
***** Diagnostic Tests *****
[DIAGNOSTIC TESTS]
DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS
ROM Chroma
Exit Checksum Board
Test Test
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-3. DIAGNOSTIC TESTS SCREEN (TESTS SELECTED)
2000-OSM, C1 5-3
4. When the test is complete, this message will appear on the screen: “ROM Check
PASSED. Any key to continue.” Press any soft key to return to the Diagnostic Tests
screen. If the ROM check fails, contact your service representative.
5. After you complete diagnostic testing, press F1 as necessary to return to the

Background screen. If you are performing another diagnostic test, start that procedure
from the Diagnostic Tests screen.
Chroma Board
The Chroma Board test requests the Chroma I/O Board to test itself and display the results.
NOTE
The following test can only be run when the analyzer is stopped.
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to TESTING/SETUP and then press the F2
(Diagnostic Tests) soft key.
3. On the Diagnostic Tests screen, verify that DIAGNOSTIC TESTS is highlighted and
press the F3 (Chroma Board Test) soft key.
4. When the test is complete, this message will appear on the screen: “Chroma Board
Check PASSED. Any key to continue.” Press any soft key to return to the Diagnostic
Tests screen. If the Chroma Board check fails, contact your service representative.

Digital Output
The Digital Output test allows changing states of individual or all digitals by board and
displays the status of inputs in real time. To run this test, perform the following steps:
CAUTION
You must stop the analysis before accessing the Digital Output test, to
ensure the digital output settings are not accidentally changed.
1. Determine which digital outputs you want to test and prepare to verify the test results.
4. On the Diagnostic Tests screen (see Figure 5-4), cursor to DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS and
press the F2 (Digital Output Test) soft key.
5-4 2000-OSM, C1
***** Diagnostic Tests *****
DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
[DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS]
Digital Trend
Exit Output Output
Test Test
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-4. DIAGNOSTIC TESTS SCREEN (TOOLS SELECTED)
5. On the Manual Control of Digital Outputs screen (see Figure 5-5), select which board
you want to test.
*** Manual Control of Digital Outputs **

Board: Chroma Dig1 Dig2
Pin Number: [ 0]
Pin: 1--------10---------20----25
Chroma 0100 01000000
Dig1 No board present
Pin: 26---30---------40---------50
Chroma 000000000000 000000000000
Deactivate
Exit All
On Board
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-5. MANUAL CONTROL OF DIGITAL OUTPUTS SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 5-5
6. Cursor down to the line marked “Pin Number” and enter the desired Chroma I/O Board
pin number. On the corresponding line below the pin number, the digital value will
change from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0.
7. When the digital value changes, check the output circuit to verify that it changed as
directed.
8. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each digital pin you want to check. If any circuit does not work
properly, contact your service representative.
9. When you have completed checking digital channels, press the F1 (Exit) soft key to
return to the Diagnostic Tests screen. The Chroma I/O and Digital Board settings will
automatically reset to the values that were in effect when you accessed the Manual
Control of Digital Outputs screen.
Trend Output
The Trend Output test allows changing values of individual trend (analog) outputs. To run
this test, perform the following steps:
3. On the Start/Stop Analysis screen, verify that the highlighted area is on "End of
Analysis?" and press the F2 (Stop Analyzer) soft key. The analyzer will stop at the end
of the analysis.
5. Select a trend (analog) output channel to test and connect a meter or recorder to that
output.
8. On the Diagnostic Tests screen, cursor to DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS and press the F3
(Trend Output Test) soft key.
9. On the Manual Control of Trend Outputs screen (see Figure 5-6), select the trend
channel you want to check.
10. Cursor down and enter the desired trend value. This value is a percentage of the total
trend range. Check your output to verify the trend value changed. If it did not change,
try a different value. If no valid entries will cause a change at the trend output, contact
your service representative.
5-6 2000-OSM, C1
11. When you have completed checking trend channels, press the F1 (Exit) soft key to
return to the Diagnostic Tests screen. The Trend Board settings will automatically reset
to the values that were in effect when you accessed the Manual Control of Trend
Outputs screen.
*** Manual Control of Trend Outputs ***
Trend Channel: [ 1 ]
Value: 0.000000
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-6. MANUAL CONTROL OF TREND OUTPUTS SCREEN
Hardware Setup
2. On the Commands screen, cursor down to TESTING/SETUP and press the F3

(Hardware Setup) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 5-7
3. On the Serial Configuration screen (see Figure 5-7), verify that the setup data is the
same as that specified in the Data Package.
*** Serial Configuration ***
Printer Setup
Baud Rate: 300 1200 2400 4800 9600
Parity: None Even Odd
Data Bits: 7 8
Stop Bits: 1 2
Exit Test
Escape and Printer
Update
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-7. SERIAL CONFIGURATION SCREEN
4. If you want to make changes, use the cursor arrow keys to select the desired data line
and enter your changes.
5. When you have completed your changes, verify the data on the screen. To test these
changes press the F3 (Test Printer) soft key. If the results are not satisfactory, make
additional changes and test again.
6. When the results are complete and verified, press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to
save the changes, or press the F1 (Escape) soft key to retain the original values.
7. Press the F1 key as necessary to return to the Background screen.
SOFTWARE VERIFICATION
This section describes software checks that are not part of normal operation, but which may
be used to troubleshoot the analyzer. The primary task is to verify the digital configuration by
performing the following steps.
Preliminary Steps
1. If you have not already done so, verify all reports as described in "Verify Reports" in
Section 2.
2. After all reports have been verified, press the F1 soft key as necessary until the
Background screen appears.
3. On the Background screen press the F1 (Exit To Commands) soft key.
5-8 2000-OSM, C1
4. On the Commands screen, cursor to STORAGE & CONFIG and then press the F4
(Update Digital Config) soft key.
5. On the first Digital Configuration screen, enter RESETDIGIO as the password and then
press the F2 (Accept Entered Password) soft key.
6. On the second Digital Configuration screen, cursor to the board whose configuration
you want to verify and then follow the steps in the paragraph pertaining to that board.
Board Paragraph
Chroma Board 1 5.3.2 and 5.3.3

Digital Board 1 5.3.4 and 5.3.5
Digital Board 2 5.3.6
Chroma Board 2 5.3.7
Other 5.3.8 and 5.3.9
The final steps for saving configuration changes are described in "Final Steps."
Chroma Board 1 Input Table
1. After you cursor to Chroma Board 1 on the second Digital Configuration screen, press
the F2 (Edit The Input Table) soft key.
2. On the first Chroma Board 1 Digital Input screen, cursor to VistaII and press the F1
3. On the second Chroma Board 1 Digital Input screen (see Figure 5-8), verify each pin
and function.
***** Chroma Board 1 Digital Input *****

Pin Function Number State
J13A-5 Flameout N/A NC
J23A-1 Carrier N/A NC
J89-1 Purge N/A NC
J23B-1 Unused N/A NC
J23C-1 Unused N/A NC
J23D-1 Low Std Samp N/A NC
J23E-1 Low Samp N/A NC
J23F-1 H2/N2 Press N/A NC
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-8. CHROMA BOARD DIGITAL INPUT SCREEN #2
2000-OSM, C1 5-9
4. If all entries are correct, press the F1 (Escape) soft key to return to the second Digital
Configuration screen. If there are any errors on this screen, correct the errors and then
press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the corrected data and return to the
second Digital Configuration screen.
Chroma Board 1 Output Table
1. After you cursor to Chroma Board 1 on the second Digital Configuration screen, press
the F3 (Edit The Output Table) soft key.
2. On the first Chroma Board 1 Digital Output screen, cursor to VistaII and press the F1
3. On the second Chroma Board 1 Digital Output screen (see Figure 5-9), verify each pin
and function.
***** Chroma Board 1 Digital Output *****

J15A-1 Valve #1 NO
J15A-2 Valve #2 NO
J15A-3 Valve #3 NO
J15A-4 Valve #4 NO
J15A-5 Valve #5 NO
J15A-6 Valve #6 NO
J15A-7 Stream #1 NO
J15A-8 Stream #2 NO
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-9. CHROMA BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUT SCREEN #2
Digital Board 1 Input Table
1. After you cursor to Digital Board 1 on the second Digital Configuration screen,
press the F2 (Edit The Input Table) soft key.
2. On the Digital Board 1 Digital Input screen (see Figure 5-10), verify each pin and
function.
5-10 2000-OSM, C1
***** Digital Board 1 Digital Input *****
TB6-1 VistaBasic #5 NO
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-10. DIGITAL BOARD DIGITAL INPUT SCREEN
Digital Board 1 Output Table
1. After you cursor to Digital Board 1 on the second Digital Configuration screen, press the
F2 (Edit The Output Table) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 5-11
2. On the Digital Board 1 Digital Output screen (see Figure 5-11), verify each pin
and function.
***** Digital Board 1 Digital Output *****

TB5-18 Stream #11 NO
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-11. DIGITAL BOARD DIGITAL OUTPUT SCREEN
Digital Board 2
1. Cursor to Digital Board 2 on the second Digital Configuration screen.
2. To edit the input table, press the F2 (Edit The Input Table) soft key and follow the steps
in "Digital Board 1 Input Table."
3. To edit the output table, press the F3 (Edit The Output Table) soft key and follow the
steps "Digital Board 1 Output Table."
Chroma Board 2
1. Cursor to Chroma Board 2 on the second Digital Configuration screen.
2. To edit the input table, press the F2 (Edit The Input Table) soft key and follow the steps
in "Chroma Board 1 Input Table."
3. To edit the output table, press the F3 (Edit The Output Table) soft key and follow the
steps in "Chroma Board 1 Output Table."
5-12 2000-OSM, C1
Trend and Detector
1. Cursor to Other on the second Digital Configuration screen and press the F2
(Trend & Detector) soft key.
2. On the Trend And Detector Config screen (see Figure 5-12), verify each trend
setting and detector configuration.
***** Trend And Detector Config *****
Trend 1 00 11 21 12 22
Trend 2 00 11 21 12 22
DETECTOR CONFIGURATION
Chroma Board 1
Det #
1 None FID FPD T/C M1 M2 M3
2 None FID FPD T/C M1 M2 M3
More Below
Exit &
Escape Update
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 5-12. TREND AND DETECTOR CONFIGURATION SCREEN
3. If all entries are correct, press the F1 (Escape) soft key to return to the second
Digital Configuration screen. If there are any errors on this screen, correct the
errors and then press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the corrected
data and return to the second Digital Configuration screen.
BASIC COMMON! Size
1. Cursor to Other on the second Digital Configuration screen and press the F3 (BASIC
COMMON! Size) soft key.
2. On the BASIC COMMON! Size screen, verify the COMMON! size.
3. If it is correct, press the F1 (Escape) soft key to return to the second Digital
Configuration screen. If it is not correct, enter the correct size and then press the F2
(Exit and Update) soft key to save the corrected data and return to the second Digital
Configuration screen.
2000-OSM, C1 5-13
Final Steps
After all configuration changes are complete, you must save the tables to E2PROM and
reset the unit.
1. On the second Digital Configuration screen, press the F1 (Exit) soft key.
2. On the screen with instructions on saving the tables, press any soft key.
3. On the Commands screen, cursor to STORAGE & CONFIG. and press the F2 (Save or
Restore Tables) soft key.
4. On the Table Storage screen cursor to SAVE TABLES TO E2PROM and press the F2
(Save Tables) soft key.
5. When “Are Your Sure? Y/N” appears on the screen, press the “Y” key.
7. On the Single Board Computer PCB, press and release the Reset switch. This resets
the analyzer to use the data you just saved.
5-14 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 6. TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES
This section provides troubleshooting information by category. Included in this information

are symptoms, causes, and suggested tests for further fault isolation. These tests are
described in Section 7, listed by Test Procedure (TP) number.
BASELINE PROBLEMS
Baseline or Signal Offset (TCD)
Symptom: Baseline (detector signal) is continually offset to the positive or the negative with
no short term drift up or down scale (see Figure 6-1). This is indicated on the graphic
display, output recorder, and the detector signal.
AMOUNT OF
OFFSET
BASELINE BASELINE
TIME TIME
NORMAL OFFSET
Figure 6-1. EXAMPLE OF BASELINE OFFSET
Background: A thermal conductivity detector (TCD) contains a measurement and reference

filament detector configured in an electronic bridge circuit. With no sample eluting the
column, both measurement and reference filaments are responding to carrier gas only.
Therefore, the resistance of both the measurement and reference filaments should be within
one ohm of one another (cold) and the detector in balance.
Causes:
1. Temperatures incorrect. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table

Values), steps 1 to 3 , and 8 to 12 to verify or change temperature settings.
2. No carrier gases applied to analyzer. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and
Utility Gas Supplies).
3. Large difference in reference and column carrier flow rate (example: reference 1 cc/
min, column 20 cc/min). Perform Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow
Adjustments).
4. Column broken or connection in column train disconnected, restricted or leaking.

Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas Supplies) and Test
Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments). If there is no carrier gas
flow or the carrier gas flow is restricted, perform Test Procedure 8 (Column Train
Problems).
2000-OSM, C1 6-1
5. Defective carrier regulator. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas
Supplies), Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments), and Test
Procedure 4 (Carrier or Makeup Gas Regulator), as applicable.
6. Column flooded with liquid sample. Perform Test Procedure 3 (Sample Valve Leaking/
Column Flooding).
7. Detector balance adjustment needed. Perform Test Procedure 5 (TC Detector

Balance).
8. A continuous presence of sample at the detector due to sample valve leakage. Perform
Test Procedure 3 (Sample Valve Leaking/Column Flooding).
9. Filament failure. Perform Test Procedure 6 (Filament Test).
10. Electronics failure in the TC circuits. Perform Test Procedure 7 (TCD Electronics).
Cyclic Short Term Drift
Symptom: Baseline (detector signal) is experiencing a cyclic short term drift (see Figure 6-2)
indicated by detector signal, graphics display, or strip chart recorder (if used). If cyclic
behavior is only present on strip chart recorder, verify recorder is functioning properly and
that the recorder connecting wires are properly shielded. Ensure shield is connected to
ground at only one end.
BASELINE BASELINE
TIME TIME
NORMAL CYCLIC DRIFT
Figure 6-2. CYCLIC SHORT TERM DRIFT
At the extreme, the signal may indicate a cyclic behavior with the period of each cycle
ranging from a few seconds to several minutes.
Causes:
1. Short term drift, especially cyclic operation, could be due to temperature out of control at
the TC detector or isothermal oven, “dirty” carrier, or defective flow controller. Perform
Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 to 3, 8 and 9; Test
Procedure 9 (Baseline Cyclic Temperature Controller); Test Procedure 10 (Baseline
Cyclic Carrier Regulator); or Test Procedure 11 (Baseline Cyclic Flow Controller), as
applicable.
2. Another possible cause is cell vent back pressure changing. Disconnect vents to check.
Perform Test Procedure 35 (Vent Back Pressure).
Continuous Upward or Downward Drift
Symptom: Baseline (detector signal) is slowly drifting upward or downward (see Figure 6-3)
as indicated by the detector signal, graphics display, or strip chart recorder (if used).
6-2 2000-OSM, C1
BASELINE BASELINE
TIME TIME
NORMAL UPWARD DRIFT
Figure 6-3. CONTINUOUS UPWARD DRIFT
Cause: This drift characteristic is generally related to detector response. Most common
causes are temperature zone temperature drift, column flooding or contamination by a
sample containing heavy hydrocarbons, leaking sample valve. Temperature zone drift
normally occurs during temperature zone warm up. Column bleed is less pronounced in
capillary columns than packed columns.
Perform Test Procedure 7 (TCD Electronics); Test Procedure 3 (Sample Valve Leaking/
Column Flooding); or Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 to
3, 8, and 9.
Another possible cause could be detector filament deterioration.
Baseline Continuous Noise
Symptom: Baseline (detector signal) with no sample injection appears as noise similar in
appearance to “grass” on a two dimensional drawing on the graphics display or strip chart
recorder (if used), as shown in Figure 6-4. If it is present only on the strip chart recorder,
verify the recorder is functioning properly and that the recorder connecting wires are properly
shielded. Ensure recorder wire shield is connected to ground at only one end.
NORMAL NOISE
Figure 6-4. BASELINE NOISE
Cause: Baseline or detector noise can result from contaminated carrier, makeup gas, tubing
or regulators. This type of contamination is much less pronounced with a TCD than for an
FID. Other causes include defective filaments (TCD), detector wiring, or electrical noise in
the detector electronics or power supplies.
Perform Test Procedure 12 (Common Usage of Gases); Test Procedure13 (Utility Gas
Contamination Procedure); Test Procedure 14 (Burner Air Catalytic Cleanup Unit), Test
Procedure 7 (TCD Electronics), and Test Procedure 15 (Coaxial Cable), as applicable.
2000-OSM, C1 6-3
Baseline or Signal Offset (FID)
no short term drift up or down scale (see Figure 6-5). This is indicated on the output
recorder.
AMOUNT OF
OFFSET
BASELINE BASELINE
TIME TIME
NORMAL OFFSET
Figure 6-5. BASELINE OFFSET
Cause: Baseline offset problems in an FID can be caused by the following:
1. Incorrect temperatures. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table

Values), steps 1 to 3, 8, and 9. Inspect temperature settings and adjust if necessary.
Column Flooding).
3. Contamination can enter through the burner air, burner fuel, or carrier. Secondary
sources are contaminated air, fuel, carrier lines, or regulators.
a. Hydrocarbon contaminates in carrier gas, hydrogen fuel or air can cause the FID
to produce an output signal as they are burned.
b. The gases may be pure, but contaminated tubing or hardware components in

the analyzer or cylinder regulator(s) contaminate the makeup gases as they
pass through them. The FID detects theses contaminants, resulting in a noisy
baseline.
c. An FID is generally equipped with a catalytic air cleanup unit to remove

hydrocarbon impurities from the burner air. If the air cleanup unit fails, the
impurities in the burner air can appear as detector noise.
5. Electronics circuit failure. Replace FID Amplifier Assembly.
Baseline Signal Random Baseline Noise (FID)
Symptom: Baseline characterized by random noise and/or spikes (see Figure 6-6).
NORMAL NOISE
Figure 6-6. BASELINE RANDOM NOISE
6-4 2000-OSM, C1
Cause: FID noise is generally the result of electrical noise or contamination.
1. Electrical noise is usually isolated to a defective FID amplifier, defective coaxial cable or
faulty electrical connections.
a. Electrical noise from the FID amplifier could result from a noisy power supply or
defective component of the PCB.
b. Loose electrical connections can cause electrical signals to be sporadic.
c. Since the FID amplifier input impedances are extremely high, low noise coaxial
cable connects the detector and the FID amplifier. Defective coaxial cables or
poor electrical connections are often sources of noise.
a. Hydrocarbon contaminates in carrier gas, hydrogen fuel or air can cause the FID
to produce an output signal as they are burned.

pass through them. The FID detects theses contaminants, resulting in a noisy
baseline.
c. An FID is generally equipped with a catalytic air cleanup unit to remove

hydrocarbon impurities from the burner air. If the air cleanup unit fails, the
impurities in the burner air can appear as detector noise.
d. If water accumulates in the FID vent, the detector effluent flow can bubble
through the accumulated water. This in effect back-pressures the FID, causing
the flame intensity to fluctuate. This can appear as a noisy baseline as well.
Perform Test Procedure 12 (Common Usage of Gases), Test Procedure 14 (Burner Air
Catalytic Cleanup Unit), or Test Procedure 15 (Coaxial Cable), as applicable. Replace or
clean the FID (see "FID REPAIR" in Section 8).
Baseline or Signal Offset (FPD)
NOTE
Because of the sulfur addition in the FPD detector, the FPD will always
have a background level. The auto zero circuitry compensates for this.
The background will usually use 15% to 50% of the available auto zero
range. If the background uses less than 10% of the auto zero range, the
flame detection electronics will assume the flame is out and the Flame
Out LED will illuminate. Baseline or signal offset is in addition to this
background.
2000-OSM, C1 6-5
no short term drift up or down scale (see Figure 6-7). This is indicated on the output
recorder.
AMOUNT OF
OFFSET
BASELINE BASELINE
TIME TIME
NORMAL OFFSET
Figure 6-7. BASELINE OFFSET
Cause: Baseline offset problems in an FPD can be caused by the following:
1. Incorrect temperatures. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table

Values), steps 1 to 3, 8, and 9. Inspect temperature settings and adjust if necessary.
Column Flooding).
3. Detector adjustment needed. Perform Test Procedure 45 (FPD Setup).
5. Electronics circuit failure. Replace FPD Amplifier Assembly.
Baseline Signal Random Baseline Noise (FPD)
NOTE
Because of the sulfur addition in the FPD detector, the FPD will always
have a background level. The auto zero circuitry compensates for this.
The background will usually use 15% to 50% of the available auto zero
range. If the background uses less than 10% of the auto zero range, the
flame detection electronics will assume the flame is out and the Flame
Out LED will illuminate. Baseline or signal offset is in addition to this
background.
Symptom: Baseline characterized by random noise and/or spikes (see Figure 6-8).
NORMAL NOISE
Figure 6-8. BASELINE RANDOM NOISE
Cause: FPD noise is generally the result of electrical noise or contamination.
1. Electrical noise is usually isolated to a defective FPD amplifier, defective coaxial cable
or faulty electrical connections.
6-6 2000-OSM, C1
a. Electrical noise from the FPD amplifier could result from a noisy power supply or
defective component of the PCB.
b. Loose electrical connections can cause electrical signals to be sporadic.
c. Since the FPD amplifier input impedances are extremely high, low noise coaxial
cable connects the detector and the FID amplifier. Defective coaxial cables or
poor electrical connections are often sources of noise.
a. Hydrocarbon contaminates in carrier gas, hydrogen fuel or air can cause the
FPD to produce an output signal as they are burned.

pass through them. The FPD detects theses contaminants, resulting in a noisy
baseline.
c. If water accumulates in the FPD vent, the detector effluent flow can bubble
through the accumulated water. This in effect back-pressures the FPD, causing
the flame intensity to fluctuate. This can appear as a noisy baseline as well.
Perform Test Procedure 12 (Common Usage of Gases) or Test Procedure 15 (Coaxial

Cable), as applicable. Replace or clean the FPD (see "FPD REPAIR" in Section 8).
ANALYSIS PROBLEMS
No Peaks
Symptom: No peaks are indicated on strip chart recorder, graphic display, or detector signal
(see Figure 6-9).
Missing Peaks
BASELINE BASELINE
TIME TIME
NORMAL OFFSET
Figure 6-9. NO PEAKS
Cause: This generally indicates that either no sample was injected, or the injected sample is
not being detected or processed.
No peak detection could be caused by any one of the following:
1. Chroma not selected on manual control screen (affects recorder output only).
2000-OSM, C1 6-7
2. No sample flowing to the sample valve. Verify sample is flowing to the sample valve.
3. No carrier gas supplied to the analyzer. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup,
and Utility Gas Supplies) and Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow
Adjustments).
4. No air to the sample valve actuator. Perform Test Procedure 19 (Sample Valve
Actuation Air).
5. Baseline offset extreme. See "Baseline or Signal Offset (TCD)" or "Baseline or Signal
Offset (FID)."
6. Column broken or connection in the column train disconnected. Perform Test

Procedure 8 (Column Train Problems).
7. TCD Failure. Perform Test Procedure 5 (TC Detector Balance) and Test Procedure 6
(Filament Test), as applicable.
8. FID Failure. Perform Test Procedure 18 (Verification FID Flame Is Ignited) and Test
Procedure 16 (FID Reduced Sensitivity), as applicable.
9. FPD Failure. Perform Test Procedure 45 (FPD Setup).
10. Low Zone Temperatures. See "TEMPERATURE CONTROL HARDWARE PROBLEMS"

and Test Procedures 22 through 28.
11. Active stream is stream 9 (no inject occurs on stream 9). Change to correct active
stream.
12. Check Method Table for correct entries. Perform Test Procedure 34 (Checking Method
Table Configuration).
13. Sample Valve Failure. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas
Supplies) and Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Glow Adjustments), as
applicable. Also see "Baseline or Signal Offset (TCD)" and "Baseline or Signal Offset
(FID)." Repair sample valve (see "SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR" in Section 8). Check for
correct stem volume and length.
14. Actuation solenoid valve vent is plugged or obstructed. Check and remove any
obstruction.
15. Solenoid not moving. Replace solenoid valve, driver card, or Chroma I/O board.
Double Sampling
Symptom: The chromatogram peaks appear to have double apexes (see Figure 6-10). The
trailing peak apex is generally smaller than the leading due to the first having the greater
sample size.
6-8 2000-OSM, C1
TIME TIME
NORMAL DOUBLE SAMPLING
Figure 6-10. DOUBLE SAMPLING
Cause: Double sampling problems are isolated to the sample valve. Generally the first
injection occurs when the valve is turned on (valve stem inserted into the injection chamber).
The second injection is made when the valve is turned off (the valve stem is withdrawn from
the injection chamber). Perform Test Procedure 20 (Double Sampling).
Additional Peaks of Unknown Origin (Mystery Peaks)
Symptom: Chromatograph displays extra peaks or a noted difference in composite

chromatograph appearance from that of the calibration (see Figure 6-11).
Unknown
TIME TIME
NORMAL MYSTERY PEAKS
Figure 6-11. MYSTERY PEAKS
Cause: If only present on calibration sample and not on process, verify that the correct
calibration and proto fuel samples are being analyzed. Possibly a new calibration blend has
been installed that contains a blending error. Perhaps the wrong calibration sample has
been selected or incorrect analysis is attached to it.
If mystery peaks are present on all process or calibration samples, the analyzer is
experiencing a sampling problem. The sample valve seals may be leaking. The sample
valve may be double sampling (see "Double Sampling"). The sample stem may be
scratched or deformed. Peaks may also be originating from a previous analysis cycle.
Check to ensure correct process stream is aligned with sample system.
Perform Test Procedure 20 (Double Sampling), and Test Procedure 37 (Residual Sample),
as applicable.
2000-OSM, C1 6-9
Variable Sample Size
Variable sample size can cause a nonrepeatibility of peak concentrations if the peak area is
varying (see Figure 6-12).
TIME TIME
ANALYSIS #1 ANALYSIS #2
Figure 6-12. VARIABLE SAMPLE SIZE
Symptom: Chromatogram area or height appears to change with each consecutive injection.
Failure: The liquid sample volume is not consistent between consecutive injections. This
can be related to sample flow, defective sample valve hardware, leaks in column train, or
sample bubbling.
Cause: Leaking sample valve seal can result in random bubbling of carrier into the sample
chamber causing the sample size to vary. If the sample chamber pressure is such that the
temperature is above the bubble point of the sample, the sample will bubble in the sample
chamber, causing an inconsistent liquid fill of the sample loop. This results in a continuously
variable sample size. A defective sample valve stem or leaking seal(s) can also cause
nonrepeatability.
Perform Test Procedure 21 (Variable Sample Size). If necessary, replace the sample valve
seals and stem (see "SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR" in Section 8).
Variable Retention Times
Variable retention times can result in nonrepeatability (see Figure 6-13).
t0 t 30 t0 t 27 t0 t 34
TIME TIME TIME
Figure 6-13. VARIABLE RETENTION TIME
Symptom: Retention times of calibration and individually gated process components change
with each consecutive cycle.
Parameters that affect retention times include the following:
1. Varying Carrier flow rate. Perform Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow
Adjustments).
6-10 2000-OSM, C1
2. Varying Isothermal Oven Temperature. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking
Temperature Table Values).
3. Defective flow controller. Perform Test Procedure 11 (Baseline Cyclic Flow Controller)
and Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments), as applicable.
4. Leak(s) in column train. Perform Test Procedure 8 (Column Train Problems).
5. Variable back pressure on FID vent or TCD measurement vent. Perform Test
Procedure 35 (Vent Back Pressure).
6. Sample valve malfunction. Perform Test Procedure 12 (Common Usage of Gases)

and Test Procedure 19 (Sample Valve Actuation Air), as applicable. See "SAMPLE
VALVE REPAIR" in Section 8.
7. Contaminated Carrier or Makeup Gas. Perform Test Procedure 12 (Common Usage of

Gases), Test Procedure 13 (Utility Gas Contamination Procedure), and Test
Procedure 14 (Burner Air Catalytic Cleanup Unit), as applicable.
Individual Peak Missing on Report
Symptom: Chromatogram indicates all peaks are present; however, the data report shows
the peak to be nonexistent or unknown.
Cause: The gating in the method needs to be modified to ensure gating of the missing peak
in the report. This can be done by modifying the gate ON/OFF time in the method table.
See "PEAK DETECTION" in Section 4 for detailed instructions.
Peak Inversion
Symptom: The peaks on the strip chart recorder are reversed or negative (see Figure
6-14).
Baseline offset
adjusted up scale
NORMAL OFFSET
Figure 6-14. PEAK INVERSION
Cause: Negative peaks on the strip chart recorder could be due to reversed recorder wiring
at the analyzer or at the recorder. Some recorders are equipped with polarity reversal.
Ensure correct polarity setting on recorder. Other possible causes include reversal of sense
and reference tubing connections or filament wiring if a TCD is used, or a grounded jet or
missing jet voltage if a FID is used.
1. Check for reversed sense and reference filament wires.
2. Check for reversed sense and reference tubing connections to the detector.
3. Make necessary corrections.
2000-OSM, C1 6-11
4. Perform Test Procedure 29 (FID Polarizing Voltage Test).
Chromatogram Oversized or Off Scale
Symptom: The chromatogram or peak areas are excessively large. The condition may be
severe enough that all peaks are off scale on the highest attenuation (see Figure 6-15).
Chromatogram may go off scale at approximately the time of distillation on and not return to
scale until time of distillation off.
NORMAL PEAK OFFSCALE
Figure 6-15. CHROMATOGRAM OFF SCALE
Cause: The attenuation could be set too low, making the chromatogram or peaks appear
large (loss of polarizing voltage on FID). Another possible cause is the wrong carrier gas is
being used (e.g. nitrogen used instead of helium).
The peaks may in fact be too large and saturating the detector or column. The splitter may
be out of adjustment, or the liquid sample size may be too large. Possibly the detector gain
jumper at the detector electronics is not setup correctly. The sample valve may be injecting
an excessively large sample volume due to deformation or a scratch in sample stem or worn
seals.
WARNING
Sample will spill or leak out during this procedure. Consult MSDS
sheets on file at your location for safety requirements.
1. Perform Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments).
2. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 and 2, to

check or modify attenuation value.
3. Check detector gain jumper and modify if necessary.
4. Repair sample valve (see "SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR" in Section 8). Check sample loop
size.
Reduced Detector Sensitivity
Symptom: The chromatogram or peaks have reduced in size from that of a previous
analysis. This is also characterized as a reduction in detector sensitivity.
Cause: The attenuation could be set too high, making the chromatogram or peaks appear
small. Another possible cause is the wrong carrier gas is being used (e.g. helium used
instead of nitrogen).
The peaks may be too small as a result of excessive sample splitting due to the splitter being
out of adjustment, or a small liquid sample volume injection. The sample groove in the
6-12 2000-OSM, C1
sample valve stem may be plugged or restricted. A programming error in sample valve on/off
timing may not allow adequate time for a proper sample injection. Sample valve actuation
malfunction can cause inadequate sample injection. Possibly the detector gain jumper
configuration at the detector amplifier is not set up correctly. The sample valve may have a
defective or wrong stem installed. Low polarizing voltage, defective Detector Amplifier, or
“dirty” FID can also reduce sensitivity.
1. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 and 2, to

check or modify the attenuation setting.
2. Perform Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments) to check
carrier and splitter flow rates.
3. Perform Test Procedure 34 (Checking Method Table Configuration) to check sample

on/off time.
4. Perform Test Procedure 29 (“FID Polarizing Voltage Test") to check polarizing voltage.
5. Perform Test Procedure 16 (FID Reduced Sensitivity).
6. Check detector gain jumper and modify if necessary.
7. Repair sample valve (see "SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR" in Section 8).
8. Inspect sample valve stem to check for scratches, deformation and plugging. Check
loop size and stem length.
Peak Discrimination
Symptom: Discrimination is the non linear unequal dilution of hydrocarbons in the column
train. Typically the heavier components will tend to dilute more than the lighter components.
Cause: Discrimination is usually the result of a leak or incorrectly adjusted sample splitter.
The leak or split might cause more of the heavier components to be exhausted out the
splitter vent or leak exit than the lighter components; thus, disproportionate dilution. Perform
Test Procedure 33 (Peak Discrimination) to test for discrimination.
Premature Termination of Analysis
Analyzers that are utilizing only one Vista Workstation (VWS) highway must have the second
highway jumpered on the backplane. If the input to highway 2 is left unconnected, the
communications controller may perceive electrical noise-induced line changes as
information. This extraneous “information” may cause the analysis to stop occasionally at
the end of an analysis method or exhibit other unpredictable behavior.
To prevent this problem from occurring it is recommended that the positive input of the
unused highway be connected to the +5 volt supply. The recommended connection
locations are as follows:
1. Prepare a single conductor 20 AWG wire as a jumper.
2000-OSM, C1 6-13
2. Connect one end of the jumper wire to J102 pin 5 (see Figure 6-16). If there is not a
connector already installed, ABB P/N 3617698-6 may be used at J102.
TB1
J110
1
J11
123456 01
J1A
123456
J1B
12
2 3 4 5
HIGHWAY #2
1 2 3 4 5
HIGHWAY
#2
6
J102
1
J102
Figure 6-16. BACKPLANE BOARD SHOWING VWS CONNECTIONS
3. Connect the other end of the jumper wire to J110 pin 1. If there is not a connector
already installed, ABB P/N 3617698-12 may be used at J110.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL HARDWARE PROBLEMS
The following alarm indicators help to isolate hardware failures in the temperature controller.
Temperature Probe Open
Symptom: No heat to a specific temperature zone. Actual temperature as indicated in

Manual Temperature Control Mode indicates greater than 500 deg C for a specific zone.
Other zones’ actual temperature indicate low or ambient. At the temperature board in
electronics enclosure, all LED’s are off as the temperature control board shuts down.
Any one of the following alarm messages or conditions could be present:
On Background Screen ***ALARM:*** (flashing)
On Manual Temperature Zone (#) (flashing)

Control Mode Screen *Temp Bd Alarm* (flashing)
On Alarm Screen Temperature Board:

*Zone Specific
*Analysis Shutdown
*** TEMP ZONE (#) Alarm ***
*Overtemp
*Reasonableness Test
*Probe Open/Shorted or TC Faulty
*High Temp
6-14 2000-OSM, C1
Failure: The failure is most likely isolated to the zone indicating a temperature greater than
500 deg C. The temperature sensor(s) is a 400 ohm platinum thermocouple probe. As the
temperature of the probe increases, its resistance value increases. As the temperature of
the probe decreases, the resistance decreases. The maximum temperature range
measurable by the temperature controller is 500 degrees. An indication greater than 500
degrees corresponds to a high resistance value at the sensor input. The greatest resistance
possible is an open circuit to the sensor input or open probe or connection. The least
resistance would be a shorted probe or connection to the sensor input.
Cause: The sensor to the zone input has possibly opened, or is no longer connected to the
sensor input. Perform Test Procedure 22 (Open Temperature Sensor).
Temperature Probe Shorted
Symptom: No heat to a specific temperature zone. Actual temperature as indicated in

Manual Temperature Control Mode indicates less than -200 deg C for a specific zone. Other
zones’ actual temperature indicate low or ambient. At the temperature board in electronics
enclosure, all LED’s are off as the temperature board shuts down.
On Manual Temperature Zone (3) (flashing)


*Zone Specific
*Analysis Shutdown
*Low Temp
Failure: The failure is most likely isolated to the zone indicating a temperature less than -200
deg C. The temperature sensor(s) is a 400 ohm platinum thermocouple probe. As the
temperature of the probe increases, its resistance value increases. As the temperature of
the probe decreases, the resistance value decreases. The maximum scaled temperature
range measurable by the temperature controller is -200 degrees. This corresponds to an
extremely low resistance at the sensor input. The least resistance possible is a short circuit
to the sensor input or shorted probe or connection.
Cause: The sensor to the zone input has possibly shorted. Perform Test Procedure 23
(Shorted Temperature Sensor).
Isothermal Oven Heater Thermocouple Faulty
Symptom: At the temperature board in electronics enclosure, all LED’s are off as the
temperature control board shuts down.
2000-OSM, C1 6-15
On Manual Temperature *Temp Bd Alarm* (flashing)
Control Mode Screen

Heater Barrel TC Faulty
*Analysis Shutdown
Failure: The isothermal oven heater temperature is greater than 500 degrees C.
Cause: The sensor input from the isothermal oven heater temperature monitor has opened,
or is no longer connected.
Perform Test Procedure 25 (Isothermal Oven Overtemp Sensor Open).
Temperature Control Micro #2
Symptom: Micro chip #2 monitors for over temperature conditions at the various
temperature zones. No heat being applied to a specific temperature zone. Actual
temperature as indicated in Manual Temperature Control Mode indicates greater than 500
deg C for a specific zone. At the temperature board in electronics enclosure, all LED’s are
off as the temperature control board shuts down.


*Zone Specific
*Analysis Shutdown
*Overtemp
Failure: The failure is most likely isolated to the zone indicating a temperature greater than
500 degrees.
Cause: The sensor to the zone input for temperature monitoring has possibly opened, or is
no longer connected. Perform Test Procedure 26 (Zone Input Sensor Open).
Loss of Air
Symptom: The isothermal oven (zone # 1) and programmed temperature oven (zone #2) are
not being heated. The actual temperature reduces and eventually approaches ambient.
These are the only temperature controllers that use air baths.

Control Mode Screen
6-16 2000-OSM, C1
*Loss of Air
Failure: Malfunction is related to application of oven air to air bath ovens. The air bath
heater(s) will overheat and burn out if air is not applied to the heaters while power is applied.
The air provides the heat to ovens by displacing heat from the heaters. The presence or lack
of oven air is sensed by a pressure switch. If air is removed, the switch opens and power is
removed from the air bath heaters. When air is applied the switch closes allowing the
temperature controller to apply heat to the air bath heaters.
Cause: The oven air has been shut off or reduced below air pressure switch setting. The
oven loss of air pressure switch has failed or connection problem exists. Perform Test
Procedure 24 (Loss of Oven Air).
Triac Failure
Symptom: The Actual temperature is indicating below set point for zone and alarm is
indicating triac failure.


*Zone Specific
*Triac Failure
Cause: The output of the triac is connected to the zone heater(s). An optical isolator
connected parallel to the output senses the firing of the triac(s) as heat is applied to the
heater(s). This output is monitored by the Temperature Control board. If the triac does not
conduct when the gate signal is applied, the triac is diagnosed as failed. Problem could be
associated with triac monitoring optical isolators on output board, or an open heater element.
CAUTION

immediate area of the analyzer. The purged electrical sections of the
analyzer will be declassified when purge is removed, and a danger
exists for fire, explosion, damage to property and injury or death to
plant personnel during the non purged time. Obtain proper permits
such as hot work, etc.
See "AIR PURGING" in Section 4 for the override function. Do not

perform override until you have read Section 4 completely and you
understand and can perform the procedure requirements.
Perform Test Procedure 27 (Open or Shorted Heater) to check for shorted heater.
Replace Heater Output Board.
2000-OSM, C1 6-17
T-Rating Disagreement
Symptom: The temperature board has shut down and all the LED’s are off. The zone
temperatures are reducing and will approach ambient. The T-Rating display is alternating
between the two jumper settings.

Control Mode Screen

*T-Rating Disagreement
*Analysis Shutdown
possible Zone specific
If the T-Rating is in question, refer to final documentation provided with the chromatograph or
contact the ABB Service Department.
Remedy: The T-rating jumpers for Micro #1 and Micro #2 must be set up identically.
Determine the correct setting and configure the jumpers for both identically.
Exclusion Jumper Disagreement
Symptom: The temperature board has shut down and all the LED’s are off. The zone
temperatures are reducing and will approach ambient.

Control Mode Screen

*T-Rating Disagreement
*Analysis Shutdown
possible Zone specific
Failure: Zones not used for temperature control are excluded to prevent operation. They
are also set INACTive in the software.
Cause: The exclusion jumper is not set up correctly.
Remedy: Select correct exclusion jumper configuration. If in doubt contact ABB Service
Department.
6-18 2000-OSM, C1
Oven Temperature is Greater Than T-Rating
Symptom: The temperature board has been shut down. If the trouble is in Micro #1 then all
LED’s are Off on the Temperature Control board and the zone temperature is greater than
the T-Rating. If trouble is in Micro #2, then the top LED is ON and the actual temperature is
greater than the T-Rating.

Alarm Screen Temperature Board:

*Zone Specific
*Overtemp
*High Temp
Cause: The T-rating defines the maximum surface temperature allowed to prevent the
ignition of the flammable liquids and gases. The over-temperature limit prevents the
temperatures from reaching the T-rating limit. The over-temp must be less than the T-rating
limit to prevent the temperature from reaching the T-rating ignition temperature.
Remedy: Reconfigure T-Rating or upper limit to correct setting. To modify the temperature
configuration table, refer to "DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER" in Section 4.
Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values).
Reasonableness
Symptom: Alarm Condition.


*Zone Specific
Cause: Micros #1 and #2 disagree by more than 30 deg C. Micro #1 monitors and controls
the temperature control board. Micro #2 monitors for over-temperature conditions. The
measurement of the two sensors must agree in order to ensure proper over-temp protection.
Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), Test Procedure 22

(Open Temperature Sensor), Test Procedure 23 (Shorted Temperature Sensor), Test
Procedure 26 (Zone Input Sensor Open), and Test Procedure 27 (Open or Shorted
Heater), as applicable.
2000-OSM, C1 6-19
AC Zero Crossing Loss

Control Mode Screen

*No Zero Crossing
The heater output board monitors the AC input with a comparator circuit. This determines
the zero crossover point, which occurs when the magnitude of the AC signal is zero. This
point occurs in both the positive and negative directions. The crossover point is used to
coordinate application of power from the triac to the heating element. Power is applied as
the zero crossover point occurs preventing unnecessary loading and surging on the
temperature output circuitry.
CAUTION

plant personnel during the nonpurged time. Obtain proper permits

Remedy: Replace Heater Output Control board.
Over Temp Trial Test Fail

Control Mode Screen

*Overtemp Test Fail*
possible zone specific Triac failures
Cause: Temperature control did not detect the over-temperature condition when tested.
6-20 2000-OSM, C1
CAUTION


Remedy: The over-temp micro has possibly failed, may require replacement of temperature
control board or output board.
Controller Housing Internal Temperature Greater Than 80 Degrees C
Symptom: The temperature board has shut down and all LED’s on temperature controller
board are off. Actual temperatures are reducing, approaching ambient. Alarm condition
present.

Control Mode Screen

*Ambient Limit Exceeded
Cause: The controller housing temperature is monitored to ensure that the temperature
does not exceed 80° C. This is done to protect the associated heater electronics from high
temperature operation. Excessive temperatures could cause electronics failure and runaway
zone temperature control.
CAUTION


Install a temperature monitor and verify ambient temperature. Ensure air flow into the
Controller housing.
2000-OSM, C1 6-21
Set Point Unacceptable


*Zone Specific
*Set Point Failed
To modify the temperature configuration table, refer to the "DIGITAL TEMPERATURE

CONTROLLER" in Section 4.
Reconfiguration Failure


*Zone Specific
*Reconfiguration Failed
Remedy: Perform the temperature board reconfiguration procedure. Be certain to hold

down the switch and respond by pressing “Y”. To modify the temperature configuration table,
refer to the "DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER" in Section 4.
Out of Control
CAUTION


6-22 2000-OSM, C1
The temperature controllers must be stable with respect to tracking the set point.
Symptom: The actual temperature is not stabilizing at the set point temperature. This alarm
occurs when the zone temperature has remained outside the operational band of the set
point for more than 90 seconds.


*Zone Specific
*Out of Control
1. Check to ensure proper sufficient heater air flow
2. Perform Test Procedure 22 (Open Temperature Sensor), steps 1-3, to check probe for
stability. If not stable replace probe.
3. Replace applicable zone board. Check for stability.
4. Replace AC Conditioning board. Check for stability.
Open or Shorted Heater
Symptom: No heat to a specific temperature zone. Actual temperature is ambient, while set
point is at normal setting. The analyzer may indicate out of control or low temperature alarm.
Failure: The temperature controller and sensor input and heater output control board are
functioning normally. An open heater will not supply heat to the temperature zone.
Cause: The heater to the temperature zone is possibly open. Perform Test Procedure 27
(Open or Shorted Heater).
Blown Fuse, AC Conditioning Board
Symptom: No heat to any temperature zone.
Failure: All temperature zone outputs share a common fuse.
Cause: Open fuse causes power to be removed from zone heaters. The analyzer may
indicate an out of control or low temperature alarm. Perform Test Procedure 28 (Open
Fuse to AC Conditioning Board).
2000-OSM, C1 6-23
Low Oven Temperature
CAUTION


Symptom: Oven temperature is below the specified set point value.
Cause: Low oven temperature can be caused by the following:
1. Low air pressure to analyzer ovens. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and
Utility Gas Supplies) and make necessary adjustment at analyzer air regulator(s).
2. Loss of air pressure switch; wiring or connection is defective. Perform Test Procedure
24 (Loss of Oven Air).
3. Defective temperature probe. Perform Test Procedure 22 (Open Temperature Sensor),

Test Procedure 23 (Shorted Temperature Sensor), Test Procedure 25 (Isothermal
Oven Overtemp Sensor Open), Test Procedure 26 (Zone Input Sensor Open), Test
Procedure 27 (Open or Shorted Heater), and Test Procedure 28 (Open Fuse to AC
Conditioning Board), as applicable.
4. Heater orifice restricted by foreign matter. Check the heater orifice to ensure it is not
restricted or plugged.
High Oven Temperature
Symptom: Oven temperature is above the specified set point value.
Cause: High oven temperature can be caused by a runaway heater or defective

temperature probe. Perform Test Procedure 23 (Shorted Temperature Sensor), Test
Procedure 25 (Isothermal Oven Overtemp Sensor Open), Test Procedure 26 (Zone Input
Sensor Open), Test Procedure 27 (Open or Shorted Heater), and Test Procedure 28
(Open Fuse to AC Conditioning Board), as applicable.
Programmed Oven Temperature Not Cooling or Slow to Cool
Symptom: Programmed temperature oven ramps to final set point, but will not cool to initial
set point or is slow to cool to initial set point.
Cause: Cool down is initiated by the selection of temperature control table entry #2 in the
method tables. If this instruction is missing or incorrect values are placed in the temperature
parameters, cool down will be effected and may not occur. Cool down causes a cool down
solenoid to increase the cool air flow from the vortex cooler into the programmed
6-24 2000-OSM, C1
temperature oven. If the cool down solenoid or vortex cooler fails, cool down will not perform
as expected. If the air flow to the vortex cooler is inadequate, cool down will also be
affected. A rate of 0.1 is needed to activate the cool down solenoid in the temperature
control table entry #2.
The following can cause problems with programmed temperature oven cool down.
1. An error has been made in programming the method table. Perform Test Procedure 31
(Checking Temperature Table Values) to verify all control parameters.
2. Air supply pressure is low. Verify correct air pressures. If necessary make adjustment.
3. Vortex cooler not adjusted. Perform Test Procedure 43 (Programmed Temperature

Oven Cool Down).
4. Listen for cool down solenoid to operate and introduce increased vortex cooler air flow.
If this does not happen, Perform Test Procedure 43 (Programmed Temperature Oven
Cool Down).
OUTPUT PROBLEMS
Printer Not Generating Report
Symptom: No reports or other printer response.
Cause: The printer may be turned off or malfunctioning. The printer may have a blown fuse
or be unplugged from power. The printer may be in alarm condition such as being out of
paper. Wiring to printer may be disconnected or in error. Printer and analyzer output driver
may be not be compatible or mismatched (RS-232).
If no reports are generated the report option may be set to NONE. The post analysis
calculations may still be in progress. If no report is generated before next analysis cycle
begins, there is a problem. Perform Test Procedure 36 (Printer Test) to verify correct printer
setup.
Trend Output Not Functioning Correctly
Symptom: There is no trend output at recorder or input device, or the trend output value is
not correct.
Cause: No trend output to an external device such as a recorder or DCS can be due to
wiring, loss of loop power or, Trend Board failure. Incorrect trend output at the peripheral
device could be due to loop power, input shunt resistance, Trend Board not scaled correctly,
Trend Board malfunction, or incorrect trend table. Perform Test Procedure 38 (Trend
Output) to test trend function.
Digital PCB Malfunction
Symptom: Valves do not switch and alarm digital output not functioning.
Cause: Wrong assignment of valve or alarm digital assignment in method or Vista BASIC
Program. Digital PCB malfunction or defect.
Verify digital assignment (see "DIGITAL I/O OPTION" in Section 4).
2000-OSM, C1 6-25
No Recorder Output
Symptom: Strip chart recorder does not record chromatogram.
Cause: The strip chart recorder may not be powered, or may be malfunctioning. A fuse may
be blown at the recorder. Other causes include defective recorder cable, wiring error or
loose connection. Possibly the wrong attenuation is selected at the recorder or the shunt
resistor is not correct. The Manual Control Screen may not have the Chroma selection or
the Chroma I/O board could be malfunctioning.
The problem may be due to defective or damaged analyzer terminal connection, defective
wiring or connection to the front jacks or backplane connector, or to defective electronics.
Perform Test Procedure 39 (Digital I/O PCB) to test for recorder malfunction.
No Vista Workstation Communication
Symptom: No response to analyzer from Vista Workstation.
Cause: Possible communication failure due to electronics failure, control parameters, cable
or cabling connection.
Perform Test Procedure 40 (Vista Workstation Communication Test).
No Analyzer Keypad Response
Symptom: Pressing keypad on analyzer front panel produces no response on CRT or other
analyzer output.
Cause: No response by keypad could indicate defective keypad or malfunction or defect in

keypad cabling from keypad to keypad assembly PCB. The CRT Control PCB or associated
wiring or connections may be defective. The controller software may be locked up.
LOCOM PCB Symptoms and Possible Causes
Symptom: The CRT display indicates the message “CANNOT CONTACT CONTROLLER”
when attempting to communicate with a remote analyzer.
Cause: The remote analyzer switch address is incorrect. A remote analyzer cannot be
contacted if it is not powered or connected to the network. It is also imperative that the
network wiring be installed and wired correctly. Improper wiring may affect several analyzers
simultaneously.
To isolate the cause, perform the following:
1. Check remote analyzer address, power and wiring.
Symptom: No communication or response from a remote analyzer or from a

local analyzer front panel.
Cause: The remote analyzer front panel address switch is not set correctly or
the “LOCK OUT REMOTE” switch is set to On.
6-26 2000-OSM, C1
2. Check analyzer address switch setting.
Symptom: Only local chromatograms are accessible at the local panel recorder
output jacks. Remote chromatograms cannot be accessed.
Cause: This feature can only be accessed when using the network. The
jumper at JP5 located on the CRT controller may not be configured correctly.
3. Check and change if necessary Change Jumper JP5.
Symptom: The Remote Front Panel Mode menu cannot be exited.
Cause: The “No Analyzer” switch is ON.
4. Place “NO ANALYZER” Switch in OFF position.
Symptom: No operation occurs when “EXECUTE” soft key is pressed in the

Remote Front Panel Mode.
Cause: The “TEST HIGHWAY” switch is On in one of the controllers connected

to the front panel network.
5. Check “TEST HIGHWAY” in analyzers on network and set switch in OFF

position.
Symptom: Two or more controllers are responding to a remote command.
Cause: LOCOM PCBs have identical address switch settings or defective

LOCOM PCB. Check settings and correct. Then cycle power to the device in
which the switch was modified.
6. Replace LOCOM PCB (set-up address switch).
Symptom: Cannot contact or use remote networking feature.
Cause: Previous remote communication was not terminated.
7. Search for analyzer that is accessing another remote, or that is itself being
accessed, then terminate the access.
See "REMOTE GC OPERATION OPTION" in Section 4.
Flame Out LED On
Symptom: Flame Out LED indicates flame is out.
Cause: The FID or FPD flame can be extinguished by insufficient burner fuel, air or column
pressure surges, or plugged vent line (possibly moisture).
The flame may in fact be burning and the thermocouple or the associated flame detection
electronics may have failed to detect the flame on condition.
Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas Supplies), Test Procedure 2
(Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments), Test Procedure 30 (“Flame Out” LED
2000-OSM, C1 6-27
Remains On After FID Flame Ignition), and Test Procedure 35 (Vent Back Pressure), as
applicable.
If the flame will not light after repeated attempts to ignite it, go to the next paragraph.
Flame Will Not Ignite (FID or FPD)
Symptom: Flame Out LED on and continued attempts to light the flame have failed.
Cause: Flame-out thermocouple and its electronics detect that flame is extinguished. The
cause could be lack of or insufficient burner fuel, air, or in some cases carrier when hydrogen
carrier is used. The jet may be plugged or restricted, preventing burner fuel from passing
into the detector cell. The ignitor or ignitor electronics may be defective. The vent line may
be plugged.
Perform Test Procedure 18 (Verification FID Flame Is Ignited), Test Procedure 17 (FID Will
Not Light), Test Procedure 32 (Plugged Jet or Breather), and Test Procedure 35 (Vent
Back Pressure), as applicable.
Low Carrier Pressure Hardware Alarm
Symptom: Low carrier gas alarm. If carrier is in short supply and not corrected, carrier flow
rates will reduce as the gas is depleted. Analyzer data will become erroneous as carrier
pressure drops below the analyzer requirement.
Causes: The following can be causes for low carrier pressure alarm.
1. Low carrier gas supply. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas
Supplies).
2. Defective or incorrectly adjusted carrier pressure switch. Perform Test Procedure 41

(Low Carrier Pressure).
3. Inlet filter or restrictor for hydrogen is plugged.
Low Sample Flow Hardware Alarm
CAUTION
Ensure there are no hazardous or flammable gases present in the

Ensure adequate ventilation in analyzer shelter.

perform override until you read Section 4 completely and you
Symptom: Rotometer and pressure gauge indications are below normal. Bubbles may be
seen in analyzer effluent rotometer. Individual components, RVP and V/L calculation values
are not repeating.
6-28 2000-OSM, C1
Causes: The following can be causes for low sample flow alarm.
1. The sample booster pump is not operating or has failed. Check pump inlet and
discharge pressure and power.
2. Defective or incorrectly adjusted sample flow switch. Perform Test Procedure 42 (Low
Sample Flow Hardware Alarm).
3. Sample flow alarm checked during sample shutoff portion of analysis.
Loss of Purge Air
CAUTION


Symptom: If X purge system is installed, analyzer power will be removed and cannot be
restored until purge air is restored.
Causes: The following can be the causes of loss of purge.
1. Air supply to analyzer has been shut off. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup,
and Utility Gas Supplies).
2. The purged sections in the analyzer have developed leak(s). Leak check with leak
detector.
3. Purge air switches are defective. Replace purge switches.
4. Insect infestation or plugging of purge, atmospheric reference vent(s). Inspect and clear
vent.
5. Tubing to and from pressure switches has disconnected or developed a leak. Inspect
and replace if necessary.
6. The purge orifice is obstructed or plugged. Remove obstruction or plugging.
Stream Not Selected
Symptom: The steam is not selected for analysis.
Cause: Possible causes include the following:
1. Stream of interest is inactive.
2. Stream is not assigned to the correct method table.
2000-OSM, C1 6-29
3. Stream is not included in the Random Stream Stepping Table.
4. Stream step instruction missing from method table. Perform Test Procedure 34
(Checking Method Table Configuration).
5. No activation air to actuator (pneumatic stream selection system). Perform Test

Procedure 19 (Sample Valve Actuation Air).
6. Defective wiring or wiring connection to solenoid valve.
7. Defective solenoid drive PCB.
8. Defective Chroma I/O Board. Perform Test Procedure 44 (Stream Switching).
Analyzer Will Not Power Up (X-Purge)
CAUTION


Symptom: Analyzer will not power up.
Cause: Possible causes for analyzer not powering up are as follows:
1. If attempting to Override X-Purge, light intensity may not be sufficient to energize

Override, or cover to X-Purge electronics housing is not removed.
2. Power is disconnected. Check power distribution circuit breakers and local disconnect
switch. (Watch for lock-out tag-out).
3. No air or insufficient air supply at analyzer. An alarm should be present indicating the
purge failure.
4. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas Supplies).
5. X-purge time-out not complete.
6. Air leak in purged analyzer housing preventing X-purge time from completing. See
"Loss of Purge Air."
7. X-purge is locked out. Cycle power (10 seconds) to reset X-purge, and allow X-purge
sequence to initiate.
6-30 2000-OSM, C1
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL TROUBLESHOOTING
The Pressure Control Assembly (see Figure 6-17) requires special tools and equipment for
repair. If you suspect a problem with this assembly please contact your ABB service
representative.
ABB ABB PROCESS ANALYTICS, INC.

LEWISBURG, WV 24901 U.S.A.
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL
(EPC) MODEL 801
EQUIPMENT FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS:
Class I; Group B,C,D
TEMPERATURE CODE: "T6"
VOLUME = 29.73 in (0.49 L)
"CAUTION"
TO PREVENT IGNITION OF HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES, DISCONNECT FROM THE
SUPPLY CIRCUIT BEFORE OPENING ENCLOSURE. KEEP TIGHTLY CLOSED WHEN
CIRCUITS ARE ALIVE. EACH TIME THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED, THE FLAT
JOINTS (SURFACES) OF THIS ENCLOSURE AND COVER MUST BE THOROUGHLY
CLEANED BEFORE REPLACING COVER. METRIC SCREWS ARE USED TO SECURE
THE COVER.
"AVERTISSEMENT"
OUVRIR LE CIRCUIT AVANT D'ENLEVER LE COUVERCLE. GARDER LE
COUVERCLE BIEN FERME TANT QUE LES CIRCUITS SONT SOUS TENSION.
NETTOYER LES SURFACES DE CONTACT DU COUVERCLE AVANT DE LE REMETTRE
EN PLACE.
ELECTRICAL RATINGS: 115 VAC, 50/60 HZ, 1.2 AMPS
+5 VDC/+15 VDC/-15 VDC; 0.6 AMPS
TORQUE COVER BOLTS TO 16 IN-LBS (2 Nm)
MAXIMUM OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE = 50°C
EPC Housing with Cover Removed
Figure 6-17. EPC PRESSURE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
CONTROLLER PROBLEMS
Input Power
Input power is connected to one or more of the following locations on the Backplane PCB in
the Controller Housing (see Figure 6-18):
TB1
TB1
J1A
1234 5 6
J1A
J1B 1234 5 6
J1B
Figure 6-18. BACKPLANE PCB POWER CONNECTIONS
2000-OSM, C1 6-31
TB1, which is called VAC #1
J1A, which is called VAC #2
J1B, which is called VAC #3
Input power is 115VAC. This may be supplied directly as 115VAC or stepped down from a
higher voltage. The input voltage may be conditioned or supplied from an uninterruptible
power supply (UPS). Each of these choices, made at the time of sale, affects how the power
is brought into the analyzer.
Power Distribution
The analyzer uses three power distribution circuits to route the power (see Figure 6-19):
VAC #1, which provides heater power

VAC #2, which powers the electronics through the Power Supply PCB
VAC #3, which power the detectors, solenoid drivers, and EPC
TB1
Hot
1
115 to 230 VAC
(Not Filtered Neut RFI VAC #1
2
or Conditioned) Filter (to heaters)
Gnd
3
Jumpers installed when

J1A does not have J1A
separate power source
1
3
Hot
4
115 to 230 VAC Neut
(Conditioned VAC #2
5
or UPS) (to electronics)
Gnd
6
Jumpers installed when

J1B does not have J1B
separate power source
6
4
Gnd
3
115VAC Neut VAC #3
(Autoformer) 2 (to solenoids
Hot and detectors)
1
Figure 6-19. INPUT POWER DISTRIBUTION
If all power supplied to the analyzer comes from a single source it will be connected to
TB1. Instead of input cables there will be jumper plugs installed at J1A and J1B to
connect their distribution circuits to the input power source.
6-32 2000-OSM, C1
If unconditioned power is routed to TB1 and conditioned power to J1A, then J1B will
have a jumper plug to connect its distribution circuits to J1A.
If unconditioned power is routed to TB1 and an autoformer output is routed to J1B

(with J1A not being connected to source power), then J1A will have a jumper plug to
connect its distribution circuits to TB1.
When checking input power make sure to note the connections for source power to
determine how power is routed.
Poor Display Contrast
If the analyzer is ON but it is difficult to read the LCD display, you may need to adjust
the display.
1. Ensure the area is safe to open the analyzer.
2. Open the Controller Housing front door.
3. On the Front Panel PCB mounted on the door, locate the contrast adjustment. It is on
the front side of the board, at the bottom center (see Figure 6-20).
Front Panel
PCB
Contrast Display
Adjustment Panel
Figure 6-20. LOCATION OF CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
4. Adjust the contrast potentiometer clockwise a quarter turn to increase the contrast.
5. Verify the change in contrast by viewing the LCD display.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as necessary to achieve the desired contrast.
7. Close and secure the Controller Housing front door.
ALARMS
The analyzer has different types and levels of alarms to help you resolve analyzer problems.
You can review these alarms on the GCC display and on the customer's alarm indicators
(when they are connected to the digital outputs of the GCC—see "Alarm Common Output
Connections").
2000-OSM, C1 6-33
When an alarm signal appears on the Background Screen, press the F4 (Alarms) soft key to
display the ALARMS screen with the alarm message (see Figure 6-21).
****** ALARMS ******

****** ALARM ******
Post Analysis Error:
*Valve Manually Switched
Clear
Exit Alarms
and Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 6-21. ALARMS SCREEN
When you finish with the alarm messages, press the F1 (Exit) soft key to return to the
Background screen without deleting the alarms, or press the F2 (Clear Alarms and Exit) soft
key to clear the alarms and return to the Background screen.
Alarm messages are of two primary types: main alarms and subordinate alarms. Main
alarms identify a major alarm category. These alarms appear on the alarm screen at the left
margin (e.g., “Post Analysis Error:” in Figure 6-21). The main alarms are:
Hardware Alarms Software Alarms
Sensors Active: Component High:

Sensors Held: Component Low:
Startup Hardware Problem Clock Error:
Power Failed TCF Error:
Flame Out Post Analysis Error:
Communications Error:
Pressure Board:
Temperature Board:
Raw Chromatogram Storage:
GCC is not Running an Analysis
Message From VWS
Basic Run Time Errors
Basic Compilation Errors
Subordinate alarms appear below the main alarms, indented and preceded by an asterisk (*)
to show their subordinate status (e.g., “*Valve Manually Switched” in Figure 6-21).
6-34 2000-OSM, C1
If a main alarm has subordinate alarms, the main alarm title will include a colon (:). The
following subsections list the main alarms that have subordinate alarms, together with their
associated subordinate alarms.
Sensors Active
When “Sensors Active:” appears as the main alarm, one or more sensor alarms appears
below the main alarm. “Sensors Active” appears when an alarm is active at the time you
look at the Alarms screen. Typical Sensors Active alarms and their descriptions are:
NOTE
Sensor Alarms 1 to 5 are application-specific alarms. Descriptions of

their use are contained in the Data Package supplied with the analyzer.
* Sensor 5 Alarm: [user entered name]

* Purge Air—activates when purge air is lost. After purge air is restored the alarm
resets.
* Carrier Gas—activates when carrier gas is lost. After carrier is restored the alarm
resets.
* Low Oven Temp—activates when oven temperature goes below the lower setpoint.
When temperature comes back within the setpoints, the alarm resets.
* High Oven Temp—activates when oven temperature exceeds the upper setpoint.
When temperature comes back within the setpoints, the alarm resets.
* Low Standard Sample—activates when standard sample is low or missing. When

the standard sample is restored, the alarm resets.
* Sample Flow—activates when sample flow is lost. When the sample flow is
restored, the alarm resets.
* Low Fuel/N2/Dilution—activates when fuel/N2/dilution is lost. When it is restored

the alarm resets.
Sensors Held
When “Sensors Held” appears as the main alarm, one or more sensor alarms appears below
the main alarm. “Sensors Held” appears when an alarm was active at some time during the
analysis, but before you looked at the Alarms screen. Typical Sensors Held alarms are the
same as those for Sensors Active.
You can manually reset Sensors Held alarms by entering the Alarms screen (after the
problem is corrected) and pressing the F2 (Clear Alarms and Exit) soft key. If you set
Sensors Held to clear at the end of the analysis, they will do so if the Sensors Active have
cleared.
2000-OSM, C1 6-35
Component High
When “Component High:” appears as the main alarm, one or more component alarms
appears below the main alarm. Typical Component High alarms and their descriptions are:
* Component High High—activates when a component exceeds the "high high"

setpoint.
* Component High—activates when a component exceeds the "high" setpoint but is

within the "high high" setpoint.
* Retention Time High—activates when retention time exceeds the upper setpoint.
* Response Factor High—activates when response factor exceeds the upper

setpoint.
Component Low
When “Component Low:” appears as the main alarm, one or more component alarms
appears below the main alarm. Typical Component Low alarms and their descriptions are:
* Component Low Low—activates when a component is below the "low low" setpoint.
* Component Low—activates when a component is below the "low" setpoint but

above the "low low" setpoint.
* Retention Time Low—activates when retention time is below the lower setpoint.
* Response Factor Low—activates when response factor is below the lower setpoint.
Clock Error
When “Clock Error:” appears as the main alarm, one or more clock alarms appears below
the main alarm. Typical clock alarms are:
* No Active Streams—activates when the status of all streams in the stream table has
been set to inactive. To clear this alarm set at least one stream's status to
active.
* Memory Shortage < 20%—activates when the GCC is short of memory. This is
usually caused by chromatogram storage. To clear this alarm return all memory
that is being used for chromatogram storage back to the operating system and
reduce the number of points being saved by Chromatogram Storage function.
* Auto Zero + Over Range—activates when program is unable to autozero because

the signal is out of range high.
* Auto Zero - Over Range—activates when program is unable to autozero because

the signal is out of range low.
* Bad Base Projection Forward—activates when the beginning of a peak was not
defined in the analysis.
6-36 2000-OSM, C1
* Bad Base Projection Backward—activates when the end of a peak was not defined
in the analysis.
* A/D Buffer Overrun—activates when the analog-to-digital algorithm was unable to

perform a conversion based on the analog signal provided.
* A/D Conversion Error—activates when the analog-to-digital algorithm was unable to

perform a conversion.
TCF Error
When “TCF Error:” appears as the main alarm, one or more time-coded function alarms
appears below the main alarm. These alarms are cleared by correcting the associated
method entry designated by the alarm. Typical TCF alarms and their descriptions are:
* Auto Zero During Noise—activates when auto zero is performed during noise
calculation.
* Auto Zero During Gate—activates when auto zero is performed during forced gate.
* Auto Zero During Slope Detect—activates when auto zero is performed during
slope detection.
* Gated During Noise—activates when slope detection is turned on at the same time
that a noise calculation is being performed.
* Gated During Slope Detect—activates when slope detection is turned on at the

same time as a peak is being force gated.
* Gate Switched Off w/o Gate On—activates when a force gate is turned off without
the force gate being turned on.
* Noise During Gate—activates when noise calculation is being performed at the

same time as a force gate is turned on.
* Noise During Slope Detect—activates when noise calculation is being performed at

the same time as slope detection.
* Noise Off w/o Noise On—activates when noise calculation is turned off but never
turned on.
* Not Enough Noise Points—activates when Noise On and Noise Off are too close
together in time to collect sufficient noise points to perform a calculation.
* Invalid Peak Width—activates when the peak setting in the TCF table is greater
than 64.
* Too Many Peaks in Analysis—activates when there are more than 254 peaks in the
analysis.
Post Analysis Error
When “Post Analysis Error:” appears as the main alarm, one or more post analysis alarms
appears below the main alarm. Typical post analysis alarms and their descriptions are:
2000-OSM, C1 6-37
* Invalid Peak End—activates when the program is unable to define an end to a peak
in the analysis (the peak did not end on a baseline or a valley point).
* Cal Fail: RF Out of Range—activates when calibration fails because the new
response factor for a peak was out of the limits specfied for the component.
* Cal Fail: Missing Component—activates when no peak appeared ifor a component

in the calibration stream.
* Missing Component—activates when no peak was found that matches where a

component was defined in the method.
* Unknown Component—activates when a peak was detected in the analysis and not
defined in the method.
* Analyzer Was Not Calibrated—activates when an error occurs in the calibration

cycle and the response factors are not updated.
* Vista Basic Run-Time Error—activates when an error occurs in the Vista Basic
program when it runs.
* Valve Manually Switched—activates when a valve is switched from the Manual

Control screen during the analysis cycle.
Communications Error
When “Communications Error:” appears as the main alarm, one or more communications
alarms appears below the main alarm. Which set of subordinate alarms appears depends
on the communications link used in your system, Vista Workstation (VWS) or VistaNET.
Typical communication alarms and their description are:
VistaNET Link
* Block not transmitted—activates when a VistaNET message is passed to the

Communication PCB and no acknowledgement is received.
* Block dropped—activates when VistaNET messages are being received from the
Communication PCB faster than they can be processed.
* No port to receive—activates when there is not a port in the SBC software

configured to receive the message.
* Time out—activates when a VistaNET message was not received or transmitted in

the time allowed.
* Unfinished multi-block—activates when an incomplete multiblock message is

received.
* Unsolicited reply—activates when a response message is received and there is no

reply pending.
* Unreachable destination—activates when a message that requires a response has

a return address that the GCC could not route the message to.
6-38 2000-OSM, C1
* Socket purged—activates when a VistaNET message is received in which there is
no waiting task.
VWS Link
* Channel 1 Timeout—activates when a VWS message was not received or

transmitted in the time allowed.
* Channel 2 Timeout—activates when a VWS message was not received or

transmitted in the time allowed.
* Undefined Message Channel 1—activates when the GCC receives a message from
the VWS that the GCC cannot interpret (often caused by a VWS failure).
* Undefined Message Channel 2—activates when the GCC receives a message from
the VWS that the GCC cannot interpret (often caused by a VWS failure).
* Checksum Error Channel 1—activates when the GCC receives a message that is
corrupted (often cause by an on-line or VWS failure).
* Checksum Error Channel 2—activates when the GCC receives a message that is
corrupted (often cause by an on-line or VWS failure).
* Transmit Failure Channel 1—activates when the GCC sends a message to the
VWS but does not receive acknowledgement.
* Transmit Failure Channel 2—activates when the GCC sends a message to the
VWS but does not receive acknowledgement.
* Primary/Backup Switched—activates when GCC reverses its primary and backup

data links because of timing discrepancy with the VWS. This only signifies a
failure when there is also another communication alarm.
* NAK From DACS—activates when a "No Acknowledgement" message is received.
Pressure Board
When “Pressure Board:” appears as the main alarm, one or more pressure alarms appears
below the main alarm. Pressure alarms are of two types, overall alarms and zone-specific
alarms, with the zone-specific alarms subordinate to the overall alarms. Typical overall
pressure alarms and their descriptions are:
* ROM Checksum—activates when the EPC Multibus PCB has failed.
* Communications—activates when communications between the SBC PCB and the

EPC Multibus PCB have failed.
* EPC Module Temperature High—activates when the temperature in the EPC

Module exceeds 68.2° C.
* EPC Module Temperature Low—activates when the temperature in the EPC

Module goes below 59.9° C.
* Zone Specific—activates when one of the zone specific alarms is activated.
2000-OSM, C1 6-39
If the “*Zone Specific” subordinate alarm appears, at least two additional lines appear below
that. The first line identifies which zone produced the alarm and the second line identifies the
specific alarm condition. Typical zone specific alarms and their descriptions are:
* Zone Checksum—activates when there is an EEPROM problem.
* Out of Control—activates when the ramp rate settings exceed an acceptable range
or the analyzer is unable to maintain set point.
* Zero Failed—activates when the Zero pressure is not present, or the switch has not
been depressed.
* Set Point Failed—activates when Zone is inactive; zone is SWITCH zone and
switch not depressed or set point is greater than the configured pressure range.
* Ramp Rate Failed—activates when the ramp rate settings exceed an acceptable
range.
* Reconfiguration Failed—activates when switch not depressed.
* High Alarm—activates when the maximum pressure limit set in configuration is too
low.
* Low Alarm—activates when the minimum pressure limit set in configuration is too
high.
NOTE
If either of the next two alarms occurs, information can be displayed

and/or the analysis can be aborted, per the Pressure Check Table
option selections.
* Pressure Check Table
* Entry 01, DILUTER > 600 psig (example)
Temperature Board
When “Temperature Board:” appears as the main alarm, one or more temperature alarms
appears below the main alarm. Temperature alarms are of two types, overall alarms and
zone-specific alarms, with the zone-specific alarms subordinate to the overall alarms.
Typical overall temperature alarms and their descriptions are:
* ROM Checksum—activates when the DTC Backplane PCB has failed.
* No Zero Crossing—activates when there is loss of four or more consecutive AC line

cycles.
* Zone Specific—activates when one of the zone specific alarms is activated.
* Loss of Air—activates when there is temporary loss of air to Zones 1 and 2 heaters.
The analysis cycle aborts. When this alarm occurs, power will be removed from
the heaters of air-operated zones for as long as the loss or air condition exists.
When air pressure is restored, power is restored to the heaters.
6-40 2000-OSM, C1
NOTE
If one of the following alarms occurs, the analyzer will stop and power
will be removed from all heaters. To resume operation, you must turn
power OFF and back ON, and then restart the analysis.
* Overtemp Test—activates when the overtemp micro fails. It may signify a zone triac
failure.
* Communications—activates when communications between the SBC PCB and the

DTC Backplane PCB have failed.
* Overtemp Triac—activates when Micro 1 control triac fails during overtemperature

test.
* Ambient Limit Exceeded—activates when the internal ambient temperature of 80° C

is exceeded.
* Heater Barrel TC Faulty—activates when the heater barrel thermocouple is faulty.
* T-Rating Disagreement—activates when Micro 1 and Micro 2 T-Rating jumpers do

not agree.
* Analysis Shutdown—activates when the Temperature Board alarm has signaled the
SBC with information that will be used to determine whether to abort the
analysis.
If the “*Zone Specific” subordinate alarm appears, at least two additional lines appear below
that. The first line identifies which zone produced the alarm and the second line identifies the
specific alarm condition. Typical zone specific alarms and their descriptions are:
* Reasonableness Test—activates when probe and thermocouple disagree by more

than 100° C.
* Triac Failure—activates when a control triac misfires consistently.
* Zone Checksum—activates when there is a EEPROM problem.
* Out of Control—activates when the ramp rate settings exceed an acceptable range
or the analyzer is unable to maintain set point.
* Zero Failed—activates when Zero resistance is not 400 ohms, or the switch is not
depressed (Zero is not required in the field).
* Span Failed—activates when Span resistance is not 1000 ohms, or the switch is not
depressed (Span is not required in the field).
* Set Point Failed—activates when Zone is inactive; zone is SWITCH zone and
switch not depressed or set point is greater than T-Rating.
* Ramp Rate Failed—activates when the ramp rate settings exceed an acceptable
range (50° C per minute).
* Reconfiguration Failed—activates when switch not depressed.
2000-OSM, C1 6-41
* High Alarm—activates when the maximum temperature limit set in configuration is
too low.
* Low Alarm—activates when the minimum temperature limit set in configuration is

too high.
NOTE
If either of the next two alarms occurs, information can be displayed

and/or the analysis can be aborted, per the Pressure Check Table
option selections.
* Temperature Check Table
* Entry 02, PROG OVEN > 320 deg C (example)
NOTE
If one of the following alarms occurs, the analyzer will stop and power
will be removed from all heaters. To resume system operation, turn the
power OFF and back ON, and then restart the analysis.
* Overtemp—activates when the zone temperature has exceeded the displayed T-

rating.
* Probe Open/Shorted or TC Faulty—activates when there is a defect in the zone

sensor or interconnect.
Raw Chromatogram Storage
When “Raw Chromatogram Storage:” appears as the main alarm, one or more
chromatogram alarms appears below the main alarm. Typical chromatogram alarms and
their descriptions are:
* Memory Below 20%—activates when the memory pool used for chromatogram
storage is below 20%.
* No Memory Left—activates when chromatogram storage has used all available

memory.
* Current Analysis Save Aborted—activates when the GCC is unable to save the last
chromatogram.
* Could Not Save Analysis—activates when the GCC is unable to save the last
chromatogram.
Alarm Common Output Connections
You can view analyzer alarms at the customer's alarm indicator when this indicator is
connected to Hardware Alarm connector J111A and Software Alarm connector J111B on the
GCC Backplane PCB (see Figure 6-22).
6-42 2000-OSM, C1
TB1
J111A
HARDWARE
1 2 3 4 5 6 J111A
J1A ALARM
1
J111B
1 2 3 4 5 6
J111B
J1B
1 SOFTWARE
ALARM
Figure 6-22. BACKPLANE PCB DIGITAL ALARM CONNECTIONS
Alarm Common Output Checks
When the Common Digital Output Mask screen has "Common DO" selected for a given
alarm, an alarm condition will illuminate the appropriate alarm LED on the GCC Front Panel
(Hardware Fault LED or Software Fault LED) and will send an alarm signal to the customer's
alarm indicator (when that indicator is connected to J111A or J111B on the Backplane PCB).
When the Common Digital Output Mask screen has "Masked" selected for a given alarm, no
alarm signals will be generated.
To verify or change the alarm common output settings:
2. On the Commands screen, cursor to MISC. and press the F2 (Control Parameters) soft
key.
2000-OSM, C1 6-43
3. On the Control Parameters screen (see Figure 6-23), press the F4 (Common Digital
Out. Mask) soft key.
***** Control Parameters *****
Analyzer Name:
[ABB Analytical GCC ]
Unknown Peak Alarm: No Yes
Missing Comp Alarm: No Yes
Update Trends on Alarm: No Yes
Auto Update of RF: No Yes
Max RF Variation: 0.000000
Unknown Peak RF: 0.000000
Unknown Peak Units: % ppm
More Below
Exit Alarm Common

Escape and Mask Digital
Update Out Mask
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 6-23. CONTROL PARAMETERS SCREEN
4. On the Common DO Mask, Main screen (see Figure 6-24), cursor down to the desired
alarm name and verify the selection in the right-hand column.
***** Common DO Mask, Main *****
Active Sensors: (Expand) Common DO

Component High: Common DO
Component Low: Common DO
Hardware: Common DO
Power Fail: Common DO
Idle: Common DO
Flame Out: Common DO
Clock: (Expand) Common DO
Method Function: (Expand) Common DO
More Below
Expand
Exit Mask
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 6-24. COMMON DO MASK MAIN SCREEN
6-44 2000-OSM, C1
5. To change the alarm common output, toggle the left or right cursor to obtain the desired
selection (Common DO or Masked).
6. If the selected alarm has "(Expanded)" after the alarm name, the alarm has subordinate
indicators. To view these subordinates, cursor to the desired alarm line and press the
F2 (Expand Mask) soft key.
7. On the expanded alarm screen, repeat steps 4 and 5 to change a specific alarm's
output.
8. Press the F2 (Exit and Update) soft key to save the new alarm data, or press the F1
(Escape) soft key to retain the original data.
2000-OSM, C1 6-45
ABB Inc.
P.O. Box 831
Lewisburg, WV 24901

Fax (304) 645-4236

Fax (304) 647-1837

6-46 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 7. TEST PROCEDURES
TP 1: CARRIER, MAKEUP AND UTILITY GAS SUPPLIES
If you suspect a gas supply (flame, fuel, air) problem, perform the following test.
1. Stop Analysis at end of current analysis, and make no sample injection until procedure
is completed.
2. Check gas supply pressures at the analyzer pressure gauges or EPC screens.
Pressure indications should indicate normal operational values as indicated on the
application data sheets or last valid record.
3. If values are low, check gas supply at source gauges. Verify gas cylinder valve(s) are
open and that gas cylinder regulator(s) are adjusted for the correct outlet pressure.
Verify isolation valves which supply carrier or makeup gases to the analyzer are open.
Verify the cylinder gas supply is not depleted. Make necessary adjustments and replace
empty gas cylinders with full ones.
4. Check the inlet filter or restrictor to ensure it is not plugged.
NOTE
Gas pressures include all carrier, hydrogen fuel, burner air and utility
air supplies.
TP 2: CARRIER AND MAKEUP GAS FLOW ADJUSTMENTS
CAUTION
When the carrier supply is turned on, if there is no pressure indicated

on the carrier gauge, do not increase carrier flow. Leak check every
connection outside the analyzer on the entire carrier flow path.
1. Stop Analysis at the end of the current analysis and make no injection until procedure is
completed.
2. (FID or FPD) Extinguish flame by removing burner air and fuel.
3. Refer to the application data sheets supplied with your analyzer and verify correct
reference and column carrier flow rates, correct hydrogen fuel and burner air flow rates
(if FID or FPD), correct splitter adjustment, and correct air pressure adjustments.
4. (TCD) Make necessary adjustments and balance detector using Test Procedure 5 (TC
Detector Balance).
5. (FPD) Make necessary adjustments using Test Procedure 45 (FPD Setup).
2000-OSM, C1 7-1
TP 3: SAMPLE VALVE LEAKING/COLUMN FLOODING
WARNING
CAUTION

immediate area of the analyzer. The purged electronics sections of the
exists for fire , explosion damage or injury to property and injury or
death to plant personnel during the nonpurged time. Obtain proper
permits such as hot work, etc.
1. Stop Analysis at the end of the current analysis, and make no sample injections until
procedure is completed.
2. Isolate sample valve from the sample system using sample system isolation valves.
3. Take necessary environmental and personal safety precautions. Slowly disconnect

sample inlet line and outlet lines at the sample valve and relieve sample pressure. Do
not disconnect line until all pressure has relieved. Connect a short piece of stainless
steel tubing to the sample valve outlet to a suitable approved waste collection container.
4. Using stainless steel tubing connect a source of 25 psig nitrogen directly to the sample
valve inlet fitting (bottom). Purge all sample from the sample valve into the waste
container via the short piece of tubing previously connected. When nitrogen purging is
complete, (30 seconds), shut off nitrogen purge gas.
5. Raise the oven temperature to final set-point +20% and hold. Perform Test Procedure
31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 to 3, 8 and 9, and observe the oven
temperature (column).
NOTE
Steps 6 and 7 are optional. The existing column can be removed and
another installed prior to performing step 5.
6. Observe baseline for two times the normal cycle time. If baseline offset is reduced, the
sample valve is most likely leaking.
7. If little or no correction in baseline is seen, replace the column. If no column is

available, leave overnight in this state. If the problem is due to column flooding, great
improvement or elimination of offset should be apparent the next morning. If the column
was flooded, repair the sample valve prior to applying sample to the sample valve or
making an injection.
7-2 2000-OSM, C1
TP 4: CARRIER OR MAKEUP GAS REGULATOR
CAUTION
When the carrier supply is turned on, if there is no pressure indicated

on the carrier gauge, do not increase carrier flow. Leak check every
connection outside the analyzer on the entire carrier flow path.
1. Stop Analysis at the end of current analysis, and make no sample injection until the
2. Ensure carrier or makeup gas is applied to the analyzer by performing Test Procedure
1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas Supplies).
3. No carrier or makeup gas pressure is indicated on analyzer gauges (regulator failed

closed), large leak from regulator inlet to supply, gauge has failed, or tubing is restricted
or plugged.
4. Leak check every connection outside the analyzer on the entire carrier flow path.
Perform step 5 only after step 4 has been completed and all leaks are repaired.
5. Loosen inlet fitting nut and check for presence of carrier or makeup gas using a leak
detector solution.
6. If carrier or makeup gas is present, repair or replace the analyzer carrier or makeup gas
regulator. If carrier or makeup gas is not present, continue checking for the presence of
carrier or makeup gas working back toward the gas supply. Loosen each fitting one-at-
a-time. Check each fitting for the presence of gas using a leak detector. Once carrier or
makeup gas is detected, the trouble is isolated between the present and last connection
checked. Make necessary repairs. Tighten all fittings and check for leaks.
7. Adjust carrier or makeup gas pressure for pressure indicated on the analyzer carrier
pressure gauge. If pressure adjusts to the correct value, stop this test and perform Test
Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments) and, if the system has a
TCD, perform Test Procedure 5 (TC Detector Balance).
8. If carrier or makeup pressure cannot be adjusted, repair or replace regulator.
TP 5: TC DETECTOR BALANCE
completed.
Detector Reading should change to a value of 2.00 mV ±0.05 mV.
2000-OSM, C1 7-3
5. On the Chroma Board screen note the Hardware Zero, Software Zero, and Detector
Reading values.
6. Open the Controller front door and locate the Detector Amplifier on the left side wall of
the Controller.
7. Adjust the TCD Adjust potentiometer (located on the Detector Amplifier) until the
Detector Reading is equal to the sum of the Hardware Zero and Software Zero values
noted in step 5.
8. Press the F3 (Manually Zero Baseline) soft key and recheck the readings. The detector
is adequately zeroed when the Hardware Zero percentage is less than 10%.
9. Close and tighten the Controller front door.
TP 6: FILAMENT TCD TEST
CAUTION


1. Stop Analysis at the end of the current analysis cycle, and make no sample injection
until procedure is completed.
2. Remove power from analyzer.
3. Shut off carrier to analyzer.
4. Open the Controller front door and locate the Detector Amplifier on the left side wall.
5. Remove the six thumb nuts, cover, and plastic shield from the Detector Amplifier. Then
locate TB16 .
6. Disconnect the wires on TB 16 terminals 2 (red) and 8 (white).
7. Connect ohmmeter leads between TB16 terminal 7 and the white wire removed from
terminal 8, and measure the resistance of the measure filament.
8. Connect ohmmeter leads between TB16 terminal 1 and the red wire removed from
terminal 2, and measure the resistance of the reference filament. The measured values
of the two filaments should be within one ohm of each other.
9. If the filaments are not within one ohm of each other, replace the filaments. See
“FILAMENT TCD REPAIR” in Section 8.
7-4 2000-OSM, C1
10. Check filament to ground resistance with an ohmmeter. It should indicate an open
circuit.
11. If filament resistance is within tolerance, proceed to Test Procedure 7 (TCD

Electronics).
12. Check all connections, then replace the Detector Amplifier plastic shield, cover, and
thumb nuts.
14. Apply air and carrier to analyzer.
15. Apply power.
16. When analyzer temperature stabilizes, perform Test Procedure 5 (TC Detector
Balance).
TP 7: TCD ELECTRONICS
1. Perform steps 1 through 5 of Test Procedure 6 (Filament Test), observing Cautions.
2. Note the wire colors on Detector Amplifier TB16 terminals 1 (orange), 2 (red), 7 (black),
and 8 (white). Remove filament wires from TB16 terminals 1, 2, 7 and 8, and substitute
a pair of filaments that are mounted in a “dummy” detector cell body.
3. Apply power to analyzer.
4. Perform Test Procedure 5 (TC Detector Balance).
5. If detector balances and noise is eliminated, the electronics is functioning normally. The
trouble is associated with filaments, filament wiring, filament wiring connections, carrier
flow or contaminated sample train associated with sample valve. Perform Test
Procedure 6 (Filament Test), Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow
Adjustments), Test Procedure 3 (Sample Valve Leaking/Column Flooded), and Test
Procedure 8 (Column Train Problems), as applicable. Then proceed to step 15.
6. If the detector does not balance or has excessive noise, locate the respective detector
signal connector, J13A or J13B, on the mother board.
7. Remove power from analyzer. Disconnect the cable assembly from J13A or J13B.
8. Short between connector pins 1 and 2. Apply power and perform Test Procedure 5
(TC Detector Balance).
9. The detector reading should indicate approximately 2.0 mV (stable).
10. Perform the Chroma I/O Test.
11. If the Chroma I/O Test fails, remove power and replace the Chroma I/O PCB.
12. If the detector does not balance or noise remains, remove power and replace the
Detector Amplifier. Take care to copy the jumper configuration of the original Detector
Amplifier.
2000-OSM, C1 7-5
13. Apply power and perform Test Procedure 5 (TC Detector Balance).
14. Remove power.
15. Remove the substitue filaments and replace the filament wires.
16. Reconnect or tighten all fittings and check all connections.
17. Replace the Detector Amplifier plastic shield, cover, and thumb nuts.
19. Apply air and carrier to analyzer.
20. Apply power.
21. When analyzer temperature stabilizes, perform Test Procedure 5 (Detector Balance).
TP 8: COLUMN TRAIN PROBLEMS
CAUTION


1. Stop Analysis at the end of the analysis and make no sample injection until procedure is
completed.
2. Reduce isothermal and programmed temperature oven air temperatures by reducing

oven air pressures to zero psig.
3. Open Isothermal oven.
4. Inspect for disconnected or loose tubing connections or broken column in the column
train from the carrier regulator outlet to the column vent. Reconnect or tighten all tubing
fittings. Check for leaks and make necessary repairs. If corrections or repairs were
made, proceed to step 8.
5. Loosen the fitting connecting the column to the LSV and verify carrier presence with a
leak indicator solution.
6. If carrier flow is not present or is insufficient, continue disconnecting fittings at each

connection in the column train working back toward the carrier supply one-at-a time,
checking for the presence of carrier. When full or nonrestricted carrier flow is detected,
the trouble has been isolated between the present and last connection checked. Make
necessary repair(s). Reconnect or tighten all fittings and check for leaks.
7-6 2000-OSM, C1
7. If carrier flow is present and not restricted, reconnect the fitting to the LSV. Beginning at
the column vent, work back toward the previously disconnected fitting, loosing each
fitting in the column train one-at-a-time, checking each loosened fitting for the presence
of carrier. When full or nonrestricted carrier flow is detected, the trouble has been
isolated between the present and last connection checked. Make necessary repairs.
Reconnect or tighten all fittings and check for leaks.
8. Check for correct carrier flow adjustment. Perform Test Procedure 2 (Carrier and
Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments), Test Procedure 5 (TC Detector Balance), and Test
Procedure 45 (FPD Setup), as applicable.
TP 9: BASELINE CYCLIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER (TCD)
1. Refer to temperature control troubleshooting section and monitor temperature zones for
stability and control from the manual temperature control screen. Alarms relating to
unstable temperature may be present (Out of Control).
2. Check for sufficient oven air supply.
3. If temperatures are stable, temperature as a cause can be eliminated.
TP 10: BASELINE CYCLIC CARRIER REGULATOR
1. Observe the carrier and column pressure gauges in isothermal conditions. Often
contaminated, dirty or cyclic regulator performance can be observed as the carrier
pressure oscillates between two pressure gauge indications. The gauge pointer
movement can be as little as ±0.25 psig or as great as several pounds.
2. If the outlet pressure of the regulator is cyclic, replace regulator.
3. If performance is questionable, replace regulator.
TP 11: BASELINE CYCLIC FLOW CONTROLLER
1. If the cyclic baseline is not a function of the isothermal oven temperature or the carrier
regulator, and a flow controller is installed, the flow controller should be replaced.
2. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values) and Test Procedure
10 (Baseline Cyclic Carrier Regulator), as applicable.
TP 12: COMMON USAGE OF GASES
1. Are other analyzers serviced from the same burner air, carrier, or burner fuel source,
experiencing noise? If Yes, then the noise problem is most likely related to a common
utility gas, tubing, fitting, or regulator.
2. Perform Test Procedure 13 (Utility Gas Contamination Procedure).
TP 13: UTILITY GAS CONTAMINATION PROCEDURE
1. Verify Burner Fuel is UHP Hydrogen (FID or FPD). If not, replace hydrogen cylinder
with UHP Hydrogen. If noise is eliminated, this test is completed. If noise is still
present, continue to step 2.
2000-OSM, C1 7-7
2. Verify carrier purity. If purity questionable, replace carrier gas cylinder. If noise is
eliminated, this test is completed. If noise is still present, continue to step 3.
3. Replace burner fuel cylinder (FID or FPD). If noise is eliminated, this test is completed.
If noise is still present, continue to step 4.
4. Replace carrier or burner fuel cylinder regulators. If noise is eliminated, this test is
completed. If noise is still present, continue to step 5.
5. Replace or wash tubing from cylinder regulator to analyzer.
6. Disassemble and clean Detector (see “FID REPAIR/Cleaning the Collector” in Section
8).
TP 14: BURNER AIR CATALYTIC CLEANUP UNIT
1. Determine if air cleanup unit is operational and at operating temperature. Perform Test
Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 to 3, 8 and 9.
2. If available, connect high purity bottled air to burner air connection. If noise disappears,
see “METHANIZER/AIR CLEANUP REPAIR” in Section 8.
3. If bottled air is not available, see “METHANIZER/AIR CLEANUP REPAIR” in Section 8.
TP 15: COAXIAL CABLE
CAUTION


1. Open isothermal oven door.
2. Gently move or touch coaxial cable, while monitoring detector output on recorder. Some
movement of signal is normal, but spikes of noise should not occur.
3. If noise spikes are systematically generated, check the coaxial cable connections.
4. If the connections are correct and tight, replace coaxial cable.
7-8 2000-OSM, C1
TP 16: FID REDUCED SENSITIVITY
CAUTION


1. Stop analysis at the end of the current cycle and make no sample injection until the
procedure is complete.
2. Check analyzer attenuation in Manual Control Mode. Perform Test Procedure 31

(Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 and 2.
3. Verify sufficient sample flow to sample system.
4. Verify sample valve is functioning correctly.
5. Check to ensure correct carrier type: Helium, Nitrogen, etc.
6. Verify correct sample valve ON and OFF times in method table. Perform Test
Procedure 34 (Checking Method Table Configuration).
7. Refer to the application data sheet supplied with your chromatograph and check carrier,
makeup gases particularly splitter flow, and make any necessary adjustments.
8. If significant corrections were made in steps 2 through 7, run a single cycle analysis to
determine if sensitivity has improved. If sensitivity is now satisfactory, Test Procedure
16 is complete. If sensitivity is still reduced, continue to step 9.
9. Verify detector gain jumper installed correctly.
10. Perform Test Procedure 29 (FID Polarizing Voltage Test). If sensitivity is normal, Test
Procedure 16 is complete. If sensitivity continues to be reduced, continue to step 11.
11. Clean FID as described in “FID REPAIR/Cleaning the Collector” in Section 8.
12. Apply power and gases to analyzer. After temperature stabilizes, check sensitivity. If
satisfactory, Test Procedure 16 is complete. If not, perform steps 13 through 15.
13. Replace electrometer and repeat step 12.
14. Replace coaxial cable and repeat step 12.
15. Replace FID and repeat step 12.
2000-OSM, C1 7-9
TP 17: FID WILL NOT LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not ignite the FID flame if the temperature is below operational level.
Low oven temperature will result in condensation damage to the flame
cell.
1. Ensure burner air and burner fuel are adjusted to the values shown on application data
sheets.
2. If flows and pressures cannot be adjusted, perform Test Procedure 32 (Plugged Jet or
Flame Arrester) to test for jet or air restriction.
3. Remove power and open the Controller front door. Locate the Detector Amplifier on the
left side wall of the Controller and remove the six thumb nuts, cover, and plastic shield.
4. Connect AC voltmeter leads to TB16 terminals 3 and 4 on the Detector Amplifier.
5. On the Chroma Board screen, press the F4 (Manual Ignitor On) soft key to ignite the cell
flame. The meter should indicate 1.2 to 1.5 volts AC. If voltage is not present, the
ignitor could be shorted to ground, the auto ignite board could be defective, or wiring
could be disconnected. If the voltage is present, the defect could be an open ignitor coil.
6. Turn off the burner fuel to extinguish the FID flame and then remove power from the
analyzer.
7. Disconnect the wires from TB16 terminals 3 and 4. Connect an ohmmeter between
these two wires to measure the resistance of the ignitor coil.
8. The resistance of the ignitor coil should measure 0.1 to 1 ohm. If an extremely high
resistance is measured, and the ignitor coil is open, replace the ignitor. See “FID
REPAIR/Replacing the Ignitor Assembly” in Section 8.
9. Connect the ohmmeter leads to one of the wires and chassis ground.
10. Measure the resistance of the ignitor coil to ground. If maximum ohms is not measured,
the ignitor is shorted to ground. Replace the ignitor (see “FID REPAIR/Replacing the
Ignitor Assembly” in Section 8).
11. Reconnect the ignitor wires to TB16 terminals 3 and 4.
12. If the ignitor coil was replaced, apply power to the analyzer. On the Chroma Board
screen, press the F4 (Manual Ignitor On) soft key. If the FID ignites, proceed to step 14.
13. If the ignitor is operating properly and no voltage is present between TB16 terminals 3
and 4 when step 11 is performed, replace the Detector Amplifier.
14. Remove power and replace the Detector Amplifier plastic shield, cover, and thumb nuts.
Close and tighten the Controller front door.
7-10 2000-OSM, C1
TP 18: VERIFICATION FLAME IS IGNITED
One of the primary products of combustion is water. Water vapor produced by the flame is
discharged from the FID/FPD vent. One way to verify the flame is ignited is to observe the
condensation of the water vapor.
1. Disconnect the FID/FPD vent and hold a reflective surface such as a mirror, wrench or
other suitable object at such an angle that you can see the reflective surface.
2. If the flame is ignited, you will be able to see the condensed water vapor form on the
reflective surface.
TP 19: SAMPLE VALVE ACTUATION AIR
CAUTION


1. Check valve assignment in method tables.
2. Verify actuation air is being applied to the sample valve. Gently loosen the two 1/8 inch
fittings at the actuator. Apply “Leak Tech”, “Snoop” or other similar liquid leak detector to
the back of the fittings.
3. From the background screen turn on valve 1. The outside actuation tube fitting should
produce bubbles. Turn off valve 1. The bubbles should now be produced on the inside
fitting.
4. If no air is present, check to ensure air is being applied to solenoid valve by loosening
the solenoid air supply inlet connection and test for the presence of air with a leak
detection solution. If air is applied to the solenoid valve, test to ensure that the solenoid
actuation voltage is being applied.
5. Turn off purge air to analyzer.
7. Connect voltmeter leads across DC Solenoid Driver PCB S1 terminals 1 and 2. From
the Background screen operate valve 1. The voltage to the 4-way solenoid valve should
measure 110 Vdc when the valve is on and zero Vdc when the valve is off.
8. If the voltage is being applied, yet the valve is not switching, replace the solenoid valve.
9. If no voltage is present, remove power and disconnect both solenoid valve leads from
S1 terminals 1-2.
2000-OSM, C1 7-11
10. Apply power and repeat step 7.
11. If no voltage is present, check the AC voltage to the DC Solenoid Driver PCB. Adjust
the voltmeter to read 120 Vac.
12. Connect the voltmeter leads between J9 terminals 1 and 2. If voltage is present,
proceed to step 15.
13. If 120 Vac is not present, check the voltage at Solenoid #1 VAC J9A terminals 1 and 2.
If voltage is present at J9A terminals 1 and 2, check the connections at both ends of the
cable connecting J9A and J9.
14. Remove power and disconnect the cable between J9A and J9. Check continuity
between J9A terminals 1, 2, and 3 and J9 terminals 1, 2, and 3, respectively. If any
wires are open replace the cable, apply power and repeat step 11.
15. Apply power to analyzer and switch DC solenoid driver using procedure in step 7.
16. If voltage does not switch, replace DC solenoid valve driver PCB.
17. If voltage does not switch, replace Chroma I/O board.
19. Apply purge air and power.
20. Allow temperature to equilibrate.
21. Perform an analysis to verify analyzer operation.
TP 20: DOUBLE SAMPLING
1. Request an analysis run on stream 10 (calibration).
2. Verify double apex peaks by analyzing calibration standard of individually resolved

peaks.
3. When the analysis begins, stop the analysis at the end of the cycle.
4. Schedule Sample Valve Off at cycle time plus 20 seconds.
5. Run a second analysis. When the second analysis begins, stop analysis at the end of
the cycle. If valve is double sampling, the peak shape will now be normal in most cases.
6. Schedule valve off at normal cycle time.
7. Manually switch the Sample Valve Off and observe the chromatogram. A second set of
peaks may now appear. (This is another indication of double sampling.)
8. Turn off power, carrier, and sample supply to the analyzer.
9. Replace sample valve seals and stem (see “SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR” in Section 8).
10. Restore carrier, sample, and power.
7-12 2000-OSM, C1
11. Request calibration analysis to verify problem is solved.
TP 21: VARIABLE SAMPLE SIZE
1. For a liquid sample valve, observe the analyzer effluent sample flow rotometer for the
presence of bubbles. The sample pressure and temperature must be such that the
sample pressure at the sample valve is 25 psig above the bubble point of the sample.
2. Ensure that the sample pressure at the sample valve is above the bubble point of the
sample.
3. A booster pump may be necessary for process sample if the supply pressure is below
the bubble point of the sample or the sample flow rate is not adequate at the supply
pressure.
4. Compare the temperature zone temperatures with those of your application data sheets
sent with your chromatograph. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature
Table Values) and make any necessary table corrections. Bubbles at the sample valve
effluent generally indicate the sample temperature is above the bubble point of the
sample. Carrier gas displacement of sample stem groove volume may be occurring due
to leaking valve seals, causing varying sample size.
5. Increase sample flow and backpressure by adjusting metering valves at sample system.
Perform an analysis and check repeatability. If the analyzer repeats, proceed to step 11.
6. For a vapor sample valve, ensure the sample valve effluent is referenced at atmospheric
pressure. A sample shutoff valve may be required or is not operating or is not
functioning properly.
8. Turn off power and air to the analyzer.
9. Open isothermal oven door and the programmed temperature cover (if applicable).
Remove the cover to access the column.
10. Leak test column train. When complete, close ovens with reverse procedure of step 9.
11. If leaks were found, restore air and power. After temperatures stabilize, perform an
analysis to test repeatability. If analyzer repeats, Test Procedure 21 is complete.
12. Repair sample valve, replacing stem and seals (see “SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR” in
Section 8).
13. Apply air, carrier, sample, and power to the analyzer. Let temperatures stabilize and
perform an analysis and check the repeatability.
2000-OSM, C1 7-13
TP 22: OPEN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CAUTION


1. Remove power and purge air from the analyzer.
2. Let all temperature zones cool to ambient.
3. Open the Controller side door.
4. Disconnect the sensor and measure its resistance value. The resistance of the
temperature probe should be approximately 440 ohms at 75°F (24°C). If open
(extremely high), replace probe. The respective probes may be tested at the locations
given below:
Temperature J48A
Zone Board Terminals Assignment
1 4&5 Isothermal Oven

2 4&5 Programmed Temperature Oven
3 4&5 LSV
4 4&5 Detector
5 4&5 Methanizer/Air Cleanup
5. If temperature probe is open, replace the temperature probe.
6. Close and tighten the Controller side door.
TP 23: SHORTED TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CAUTION


7-14 2000-OSM, C1
4. Disconnect the sensor and measure its resistance value. The resistance of the
temperature probe should be approximately 440 ohms at 75°F (24°C). If shorted or
considerable lower, replace probe. The respective probes may be tested at the locations
given below:
Temperature J48A

3 4&5 LSV
4 4&5 Detector
5. If temperature probe is shorted, replace the probe.
TP 24: LOSS OF OVEN AIR
CAUTION


1. Disconnect power and shut off air to analyzer.
2000-OSM, C1 7-15
3. Disconnect the oven air pressure switch by removing the connector from J42B on the
DTC Backplane PCB (see Figure 7-1).
J42B
J42B
Figure 7-1. DTC BACKPLANE PCB
4. Connect an ohmmeter between the terminals of the connector removed from J42B.
5. Apply oven air pressure.
6. Unscrew the pressure switch slightly and check for leakage to ensure air is present at
the switch.
7. Tighten pressure switch.
8. The switch should close. Remove air and the switch should open. If switch does not
function as described, replace the oven air pressure switch.
TP 25: ISOTHERMAL OVEN OVERTEMP SENSOR OPEN
CAUTION

7-16 2000-OSM, C1
CAUTION

1. Remove power from the analyzer.
4. Check for loose connections at the specified terminal connections.
5. Disconnect the thermocouple sensor from J49A terminals 1 and 2 of the Zone 1
Temperature Zone PCB.
6. Connect ohmmeter leads between the two disconnected wires and measure the
resistance value. If the resistance is extremely high, the thermocouple is open.
Replace thermocouple.
7. After repairs, close and tighten the Controller side door.
8. Restore air and power.
TP 26: ZONE INPUT SENSOR OPEN
CAUTION


4. Check for loose connections at the specified terminal connections.
5. Disconnect the RTD sensor from J49A terminals 4 and 5 of the appropriate Temperature
Zone PCB.
6. Connect ohmmeter leads between the two disconnected wires and measure the
resistance value. Typical resistance will be approximately 430 to 450 ohms at ambient
temperature. If resistance is extremely high, the RTD is open. Replace the RTD. The
respective probes may be tested at the locations given below:
2000-OSM, C1 7-17
Temperature J49A

3 4&5 LSV
4 4&5 Detector
TP 27: OPEN OR SHORTED HEATER
CAUTION


3. Locate heater terminal strip connections.
Temperature
Service Zone Board J49B
Isothermal Oven Zone 1 1 and 2

Programmed Temp Zone 2 1 and 2
LSV (120 Vac) Zone 3 1 and 2, 5 and 6
LSV (220 Vac in, 120 V heaters) Zone 3 2 and 3, 4 and 5
LSV (220 Vac in, 220 V heaters) Zone 3 1 and 2, 5 and 6
Detector Zone 4 1 and 2
Methanizer/Air Cleanup Zone 5 1 and 2
4. Check for a loose connection at the defective temperature control circuit.
5. Remove one of the two wires to the defective temperature zone heater. Connect an
ohmmeter across these heater wires and measure the resistance of the heater.
6. If open, the measurement will be extremely high. Typical resistance value is 10 to 120
ohms. Also check for shorted heater to ground. A shorted heater may have opened the
heater fuse.
7. Perform Test Procedure 28 (Open Fuse to AC Conditioning Board).
7-18 2000-OSM, C1
8. If resistance indicates the heater is opened or shorted, replace the defective heater (see
“REPLACING HEATERS” in Section 8).
TP 28: OPEN FUSE TO AC CONDITIONING BOARD
CAUTION


3. Locate Fuses F1 and F2 on the AC Conditioning Board.
4. Remove the fuse(s) in question and test with an ohmmeter. The measurement should
be approximately zero ohms. If the fuse is open, the measurement will be extremely
high.
5. Replace blown fuse. Since a blown fuse may indicate other possible malfunctions or
failures, continue with this procedure to verify the analyzer’s operational status.
6. Test for shorted heater by performing Test Procedure 27 (Open or Shorted Heater).
7. Apply power to analyzer and determine if the fuse fails (opens).
8. If fuse fails, replace the AC Conditioning Board.
TP 29: FID POLARIZING VOLTAGE TEST
CAUTION


2000-OSM, C1 7-19
1. Stop the analysis.
3. Locate the Detector Amplifier on the left side wall of the Controller. Remove the six
thumb nuts, cover, and plastic shield from the Detector Amplifier.
4. Connect a DC voltmeter from Detector Amplifier TB16 terminal 5 to chassis ground. The
meter should indicate -110 volts DC. If voltage is -110 VDC, Test Procedure 29 is
complete. If the voltage is less than -110 VDC continue with step 5.
5. Disconnect the wire to the polarizer at TB16 terminal 5 and measure the voltage as in
step 4.
6. If the voltage indication is below -110 VDC at the 110 volt power supply, replace the 110
volt power supply.
7. If the voltage is -110 VDC, remove power from the analyzer and shut down carrier and
makeup gases.
8. Remove polarizer wire from TB16 terminal 3 and connect an ohmmeter between the
disconnected wire and chassis ground. The meter should indicate an extremely high
resistance (infinity), meter maximum. A lower resistance value may indicate a short, or
presence of corrosion or water. The high value gives no assurance that the polarizer is
contacting the jet.
9. If any repairs were made, the sensitivity should be checked by applying power to the
analyzer and allowing temperatures to equilibrate. Balance detector per Test
Procedure 5 (TC Detector Balance) and perform an analysis. If analysis demonstrates
correct sensitivity, Test Procedure 29 is complete.
10. Remove power from the analyzer and shut down carrier and makeup gases.
11. Clean the detector cell. See “Cleaning FID/Collector” in Section 8.
12. Reconnect the wire to TB16 terminal 3 and apply power to the analyzer.
13. Measure with a DC voltmeter between the jet and chassis ground for -110 VDC. Once
confirmed remove power for reassembling.
14. Complete FID assembly.
15. Close and tighten the Controller front door and the isothermal oven door.
16. Apply carrier, makeup gas, and power.
17. Allow temperatures to equilibrate and perform an analysis to confirm correct sensitivity
and detector operation.
7-20 2000-OSM, C1
TP 30: “FLAME OUT” LED REMAINS ON AFTER FID FLAME IGNITION
CAUTION


Do not ignite the FID flame if the isothermal oven temperature is below
operational level. Low oven temperature will result in condensation
damage to the flame cell.
1. Stop Analysis at the end of analysis cycle and make no sample injections until
2. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup, and Utility Gas Supplies) and Test
Procedure 2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments), if not previously checked.
3. Remove power from the analyzer and open the Controller front door.
4. Locate the Detector Amplifier on the left side wall of the Controller and remove the six
thumb nuts, cover, and plastic shield from the Detector Amplifier.
5. Disconnect the thermocouple wires connected to Detector Amplifier TB16 terminals 1

and 2.
6. Connect an ohmmeter between the two thermocouple leads. The ohmmeter reading
should indicate continuity. If it does not, the thermocouple is open. Replace the
thermocouple (see “FID REPAIR/Replacing the Thermocouple Asembly” in Section 8).
7. Connect the ohmmeter between one of the thermocouple leads and chassis ground.
The resistance should be high. If it is not high, the thermocouple may be shorted to
chassis ground. Replace the thermocouple (see “FID REPAIR/Replacing the
Thermocouple Assembly” in Section 8).
8. Reconnect the thermocouple wires.
9. Apply power to the analyzer.
2000-OSM, C1 7-21
10. Connect a digital voltmeter across capacitor C6 (see Figure 7-2).
C6
C6
Figure 7-2. FID AMPLIFIER SHOWING C6 LOCATION
11. Extinguish the FID flame. The “Flame Out” LED should illuminate. The DVM should
indicate 2.5 mV or less.
12. Ignite flame and the LED should go out. The DVM should indicate 3.0 mV or greater.
13. If the electronics does not perform as described in steps 9 through 11, remove power
and replace the Detector Amplifier.
14. Perform FID cell maintenance for cleaning jet and flame out thermocouple (see “FID
REPAIR/Cleaning the FID Jet” in Section 8).
15. Replace the plastic shield, cover, and thumb nuts on the Detector Amplifier.
TP 31: CHECKING TEMPERATURE TABLE VALUES
Verify that the software and hardware temperature parameter values are correct and have
not been inadvertently changed. To perform this operation, it is necessary to access the
temperature configuration table and the manual temperature control mode.
1. Press the F1 soft key until the Background screen is displayed (see Figure 7-3).
7-22 2000-OSM, C1
********** B A C K G R O U N D **********
803V029-1R (Std GCC) (C) 2001
**ALARM**
**ALARM** 18-JUN-2002 TUE 08:16:01
**ALARM**

Method :01 entered

Commands Options
F1 F2 F3 F4
3. On the Manual Control Mode screen (see Figure 7-4), press the F4 (Press. & Temp.
Control) soft key.

Valves:- - - - - - - Time:00000
RECORDER: Chroma BD:1 Method Tbl: 000
Offset: 0% Stream: 01
Attn: 5 Purging: 01
PURGE SELECT: :0 State: Idle
Last: 52 55 73 18032 Val-Bas
38 43 51 15322 Bas-Val

to and Zero Temp.
Bckgrnd Graphics Baseline Control
F1 F2 F3 F4
2000-OSM, C1 7-23
4. On the Pres & Temp Control screen (see Figure 7-5), cursor up or down to highlight
TEMP CONFIGURATION.
TEMP CONTROL
PRES CONTROL
TEMP CONFIGURATION
Names
Zone and Controller
Escape Config Limits Type
F1 F2 F3 F4
5. Press the F3 (Names and Limits) soft key to view the 5 Zone Names and Limits Table
screen (see Figure 7-6). This table is factory set and is NOT intended to be field
modified. In the unlikely event that one of the parameters was changed, the values
should be compared to those in the table listing provided with the analyzer.
**** 5 Zone Names & Limits Table ****

Zone Low High
Num Name Limit(C) Limit(C)
1 ISO-OVEN -40.00 90.00
2 PROG. OVEN -40.00 250.00
3 T/C CELL -40.00 260.00
4 LSV -40.00 250.00
5 TEMP ZONE5 -40.00 550.00
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 7-6. 5 ZONE NAMES AND LIMITS TABLE SCREEN
7-24 2000-OSM, C1
6. If the values shown in the table agree with those of the listing, there is no need for table
modification. Exit this screen by pressing the F1 (Exit) soft key and go to step 8.
7. If the values do not agree, the values have been changed since the analyzer was
shipped from the factory. The correct value(s) should be entered. To modify the
temperature configuration table, refer to the “DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER”
in Section 4.
8. Confirm the values of the Manual Temperature Control Mode table.
9. On the Pressure and Temperature Control screen (Figure 7-5), cursor up or down until
TEMP CONTROL is highlighted. Press the F2 (Manual Temp Control) soft key to
access the Manual Temperature Control Mode screen (see Figure 7-7).

ISO-OVEN ISO 79.9C 80.0C 0.0
PROG. OVEN PROG/C 220.1C 220.0C 30.0
T/C CELL SWITCH 199.8C 200.0C 10.0
LSV ISO 199.9C 200.0C 10.0
Valve # : [0] Time : 0125

Set Point: 220.00
VALVES : - - - - - - T2 290C
Accept Zero Span

Point Zones Zones
F1 F2 F3 F4
10. Compare the set point values of temperature zones 1 through 5 with those of the factory
table listing that was provided with the chromatograph. If the values agree, there is no
need to modify the table. Exit this screen by pressing the F1 (Escape) soft key and
proceed to step 12.
11. If the values do not agree, the values have been changed since the analyzer was
shipped from the factory. The correct values should be entered.
12. Return to the background screen by repeatedly pressing the F1 soft key until the
Background screen is displayed.
13. From the Background screen press the F1 (Exit to Commands) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 7-25
14. On the Commands screen(see Figure 7-8), cursor up or down to highlight TABLE EDIT.
Then press the F2 (Methods) soft key to access the methods tables.
****** COMMANDS ******
ANALYSIS CONTROL
REPORTS
TABLE EDIT
PRINTER
STORAGE & CONFIG.
NAMES
MISC.
TESTING/SETUP
SIM DISTILLATION
Go to Other
Background Methods Tables
F1 F2 F3 F4
15. When the Method Table #?? screen appears, enter “1” for the method and then press
the F2 (Edit the Table) soft key.
16. The Cal Define & Cycle Time screen appears. Press the F1 (Continue) soft key to
display the first eight lines of Method Table # 01 (see Figure 7-9).
***** Method Table #01 *****
Time Function Value

0001 Temp. Contrl Two
0120 Noise Calc On
0125 Noise Calc Off
0128 Auto Zero N/A
0132 Valve On One
0155 Valve Off One
0160 Distillation On
More Below

Line Line & Cycle
Time
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 7-9. METHOD TABLE SCREEN
7-26 2000-OSM, C1
17. Move the cursor up or down to highlight the time associated with Temperature Control
Function Two. Then move the cursor to the right to highlight the value “Two”. The
Temperature Control screen appears (see Figure 7-10).
***** Temperature Control *****
Entry Zone Set Point Ramp Rate

C C/MIN
01 PROG. OVEN 220.0 30.00
02 ISO-OVEN 50.0 0.100
03 ISO-OVEN 0.0000 0.0000
04 ISO-OVEN 0.0000 0.0000
05 ISO-OVEN 0.0000 0.0000
06 ISO-OVEN 0.0000 0.0000
07 ISO-OVEN 0.0000 0.0000
08 ISO-OVEN 0.0000 0.0000
More Below
Exit
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 7-10. TEMPERATURE CONTROL SCREEN
18. Compare the set point and ramp rate values with those in the factory table listings
provided with your chromatograph. If they agree, press the F1 (Exit) soft key. If they do
not agree, modify the Temperature Control screen as explained in “DIGITAL
TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER” in Section 4.
19. Return to background screen by repeatedly pressing the F1 soft key until the
Background screen is displayed.
TP 32: PLUGGED JET OR BREATHER
CAUTION


2. If the jet is totally plugged, flame will be extinguished. If restricted, the flame could
possibly still be burning at low intensity.
2000-OSM, C1 7-27
3. Extinguish flame by reducing burner air, fuel and carrier to zero by rotating regulator
adjustment counterclockwise until burner air fuel and carrier gauges indicate zero.
When flame is out, the “Flame Out” LED will illuminate.
4. Connect flow meter (e.g. bubble tower) to FID vent.
5. Increase carrier pressure to value indicated on the application data sheets provided with
the chromatograph. Both carrier pressure and carrier vent flow measurement at the FID
vent should be the same as indicated on data sheets. If values are the same, jet and
flame arrester are not plugged, Test Procedure 32 is complete. If values are low or
nonexistent, the jet or flame arrester may be plugged.
6. Reduce the temperature programmed (if applicable) and isothermal oven air pressures
to zero psig as indicated by their respective gauges.
7. Open the isothermal oven door.
8. If applicable, remove the temperature programmed temperature oven covers.
9. Disconnect the column fitting at the bottom of the FID. Connect the loose column end to
a flow meter.
10. Measure the carrier flow. If flow is restored to the expected measurement, the jet or
breather is plugged. Proceed to step 12. If flow is deficient, reconnect the column to
the FID and perform step 11.
11. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier, Makeup and Utility Gas Supplies), Test Procedure
2 (Carrier and Makeup Gas Flow Adjustments), and Test Procedure 8 (Column Train
Problems), as applicable. If flow is restored, Test Procedure 32 is complete.
12. Remove the breather and replace with a female connector. Attach the flow meter to the
open end of connector. Measure the carrier flow. If flow is restored to normal, the flame
arrester is plugged. Replace the flame arrester.
13. Repeat steps 4 and 5 above. If flow remains restricted, the jet is plugged.
14. Inspect jet by removing FID cap (see “FID REPAIR” in Section 8). If jet plugging can not
be corrected by removing accumulated matter on jet tip, the FID must be replaced. The
FID must be returned to the factor for jet replacement. See “FID REPAIR” in Section 8
for instruction on removing and reinstalling the FID.
15. Disconnect flow meter, reconnect and tighten all fittings, check for leaks, reattach
programmed temperature oven cover and close isothermal oven door using reverse
procedure of steps 7 and 8.
TP 33: PEAK DISCRIMINATION
1. Request a calibration analysis.
2. Observe the peak areas and new response factors. If a greater percentage change has
occurred in the peak height, peak area, and response factors in the heavier components
than in the lighter, the presence of peak discrimination is apparent.
7-28 2000-OSM, C1
4. Perform Test Procedure 8 (Column Train Problems).
5. Routine validation comparisons will help in the early detection of discrimination.
TP 34: CHECKING METHOD TABLE CONFIGURATION
Verify the method configuration tables as follows:
1. Press the F1 soft key until the Background screen is displayed (see Figure 7-11).
********** B A C K G R O U N D **********
803V029-1R (Std GCC) (C) 2001
**ALARM**
**ALARM** 18-JUN-2002 TUE 08:16:01
**ALARM**

Method :01 entered

Commands Options
F1 F2 F3 F4
2000-OSM, C1 7-29
3. On the Commands screen (see Figure 7-12) cursor to highlight TABLE EDIT. Then
press the F2 (Methods) soft key.
****** COMMANDS ******
ANALYSIS CONTROL
REPORTS
TABLE EDIT
PRINTER
STORAGE & CONFIG.
NAMES
MISC.
TESTING/SETUP
SIM DISTILLATION
Go to Other
Background Methods Tables
F1 F2 F3 F4
4. When the Method Table #?? screen appears, enter “1” for the method number and then
press the F2 (Edit the Table) soft key.
5. The Cal Define & Cycle Time screen appears. Press the F1 (Continue) soft key to
display the first eight lines of Method Table # 01 (see Figure 7-13).
***** Method Table #01 *****
Time Function Value

0001 Temp. Contrl Two
0120 Noise Calc On
0125 Noise Calc Off
0128 Auto Zero N/A
0132 Valve On One
0155 Valve Off One
0160 Distillation On
More Below

Line Line & Cycle
Time
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 7-13. METHOD TABLE SCREEN
7-30 2000-OSM, C1
6. Refer to the table listings provided with your chromatograph. The function scheduling
should be similar to the following:
PROCESS STREAM METHOD TABLE
Method Table #01
Time Function Value

0001 Temp. Contrl One
0128 Auto Zero N/A
0132 Valve On One
0155 Valve Off One
0165 Baseline Proj Forward
0172 Forced Gate On @ Valley
0175 Component One
0178 Forced Gate Off @ Valley
0182 Component Two
0208 Component Four
0214 Component Five
0247 Component Six
0768 Component Nine
0769 Component Ten
0770 Component Eleven
0771 Component Twelve
0772 Component Thirteen
0773 Component Fourteen
0774 Component Fifteen
0775 Component Sixteen
0776 Component Seventeen
0777 Component Eighteen
0778 Component Nineteen
0779 Component Twenty
2000-OSM, C1 7-31
CALIBRATION STREAM METHOD TABLE
Method Table #10
Time Function Value

0120 Noise Calc On
0125 Noise Calc Off
0128 Auto Zero N/A
0132 Valve On One
0155 Valve Off One
0160 Peak Width Eight
0175 Component One
0175 Component One
0182 Component Two
0208 Component Four
0217 Component Five
0217 Baseline Force @ Valley
0247 Component Six
0312 Component Nine
0343 Component Ten
0359 Component Eleven
0390 Component Twelve
0424 Component Thirteen
0440 Component Fourteen
0462 Component Fifteen
0509 Component Sixteen
0540 Component Seventeen
0570 Component Eighteen
0601 Component Nineteen
0650 Slope Detect Off
The various time coded functions are defined as follows. Section 4 contains more complete
descriptions of these functions.

This function ensures that the temperature of the isothermal oven is at the set point value
prior to sample injection.
7-32 2000-OSM, C1
0120 Noise Calc On
0125 Noise Calc Off
This function samples the baseline to determine the random noise level of the baseline and
is applicable only to slope detection.
0128 Auto Zero N/A

This function establishes a baseline zero reference point in the controller. It in effect
compensates for the detector offset from electrical zero. Should this function fail or not be
scheduled, errors could occur in gating, peak detection, post analysis calculations and peak
concentration calculations as a result of errors in baseline correction.
0130 Skp Nxt,Str= Nine

The function at time 0130 causes the next timed function at 0132 to not be executed. Thus,
when the next stream is stream 9 (a blank run), the sample valve on command will not occur
and a sample will not be injected. Should this function not be scheduled, a whole
chromatogram would be saved as a blank run. The result would be a total or near
cancellation of the analysis in the post analysis calculation.
0132 Valve On One

This function causes the sample injection by inserting the sample volume contained in the
machined groove in valve stem into the injection chamber of the sample valve. Once in the
injection chamber, the liquid sample is vaporized and carried into the column train by carrier
gas. Should this function fail or not be scheduled, no sample injection would occur.
0155 Valve Off One

This function withdraws the sample machined groove from the injection chamber into the
sample chamber, where liquid sample continually flows across the stem in preparation for the
next injection. Should this function fail or not be scheduled, only the initial sample injection
would occur; the sample loop would never be refilled.
0165 Baseline Proj Forward

This function is used in baseline correction of individual gated peaks.

This function immediately forces integration to begin and designates the peak topology for
the start to be a valley, doing a perpendicular drop to the baseline.
0175 Component One

This function designates which component is being integrated at gate on command.

This function immediately forces integration to stop and designates the peak end and
topology to be a valley, doing a perpendicular drop to baseline.
NOTE
All other gate and component descriptions are similarly defined.
TP 35: VENT BACK PRESSURE
1. Ensure FID or TCD detector vent is vented to atmospheric pressure.
2. Check for insect infestations in vent or atmospheric vent.
2000-OSM, C1 7-33
3. Replace flame arrester. Check for water in the detector. If necessary clean FID (see
“FID REPAIR/Cleaning the Collector” in Section 8).
TP 36: PRINTER TEST
2. Cursor to PRINTER and then press the F2 (Test Printer) soft key. A string of characters
should print.
3. If characters do not print, cursor to TESTING/SETUP and then press the F3 (Hardware
Setup) soft key.
4. Match baud rate, parity, parity check and data bits to printer setup.
5. Check the power. The Disconnect switch or circuit breaker to printer must be ON.
6. Look for alarm lights and take corrective action.
7. Check serial cable connected to the printer input.
8. Ensure printer has serial interface installed and set up correctly, using the printer or
interface operations manual.
TP 37: RESIDUAL SAMPLE
1. Start sample analysis.
2. Observe the chromatogram. At the end of the cycle, stop the analysis NOW.
3. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values), steps 1 to 3 and 8,

to access the Manual Mode. Reduce the attenuation for maximum sensitivity.
4. Observe baseline for additional peaks to elute.
5. If peaks elute, analyzer is experiencing a residual sample analysis. After all peaks have
eluted, proceed to step 6. If peaks do not elute, Test Procedure 37 is complete.
6. Turn off power and sample to analyzer. Replace sample valve seals and O-rings (see
“SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR” in Section 8).
7. Restore power and allow temperature zones to come to temperature and stabilize.
8. Perform two regular analyses.
9. In second analysis, determine if residual sample problem is repaired using steps 2 to 5.
7-34 2000-OSM, C1
TP 38: TREND OUTPUT
CAUTION


2. Remove access cover to terminals on right hand side of electronics housing.
3. Verify if trend board output is set up for 4 to 20 ma or 0 to 5 VDC.
4. If current output, disconnect one wire from the output to be tested, and place the
milliammeter in series with the load. See output terminal assignment below.
TREND OUTPUT TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT
TREND CHANNEL TB7 + TB7 - SHIELD
1 1 2 5
2 3 4 5
3 6 7 10
4 8 9 10
5 11 12 15
6 13 14 15
7 16 17 20
8 18 19 20
9 21 22 25
10 23 24 25
11 26 27 30
12 28 29 30
13 31 32 35
14 33 34 35
15 36 37 40
16 38 39 40
5. Turn analyzer power on.
8. On the Diagnostic Tests screen, cursor down to DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS and then press
the F3 (Trend Output Test) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 7-35
9. Enter the a trend test value. The output signal at the meter should respond to
equivalent percentage of output. Test for low, middle, and high.
10. If output does not respond or does not reach the expected output value, check the
following:
a. Connect meter to the output terminal strip TB7 (see connection list below) of the
analyzer and repeat step 9. If functioning normally, problem is in loop wiring,
connection, or input device and proceed to step 11.
b. Check wiring from analyzer output to input of receiving device.
c. Access Trend Table and determine if it is setup correctly. Make any necessary
corrections.
d. Substitute trend board. Existing board may be defective.
11. If board functions normal locally, but receiving device is not correctly reporting signal,
check the following:
a. With authorized permission, remove one wire from input device of loop to be
tested and connect the ammeter in series (voltage parallel). Perform step 9 to
determine if loop wiring to input device is functional.
b. Check and verify input device input requirement and configuration.
c. Determine if an input shunt resistor is needed and determine value.
d. Input device may need calibrated or rescaled.
TP 39: DIGITAL I/O PCB
CAUTION


3. On the Diagnostic Tests screen, cursor down to DIAGNOSTIC TOOLS and then press
the F2 (Digital Output Test) soft key and follow screen instructions.
7-36 2000-OSM, C1
4. Connect ohmmeter between output terminal of Digital PCB and output common using
proper polarity (these are transistor outputs).
5. If Digital I/O PCB functions, check for data entry.
6. If Digital I/O PCB does not function, it is defective. Replace the Digital I/O PCB.
TP 40: VISTA WORKSTATION COMMUNICATION TEST
CAUTION


1. Open electronics control section door of chromatograph.
2. Observe LED’s 1 and 3 of the Single Board Computer (SBC).
3. If top LED is not active (flickering), there is no transmit activity. The analyzer is off line
with VWS. This must be corrected by accessing the Command Mode parameters.
4. If command parameters are correct, replace the Single Board Computer.
5. If the bottom LED is not active (flickering), there is no data receive activity. The VWS is
not functioning or there is a possible wiring or connection problem.
6. If it is not a wiring or connection problem, replace the Single Board Computer.
TP 41: LOW CARRIER PRESSURE
CAUTION


1. Check to ensure that the carrier has not been shut off. If so, restore carrier supply.
2. Disconnect power and shut off air to analyzer.
2000-OSM, C1 7-37
3. Disconnect oven carrier pressure switch at J23A terminals 1 and 2.
4. Connect ohmmeter leads between the two wires previously disconnected from J23A
terminals 1 and 2.
5. Apply carrier pressure of at least 80 psi.
6. The switch contacts should close. Remove carrier pressure; switch contacts should
open.
7. If switch does not function as described, remove carrier pressure and replace pressure
switch.
8. If switch functions as described in step 7, but the alarm remains after the switch wiring
has been reconnected and carrier applied, replace Chroma I/O PCB.
TP 42: LOW SAMPLE FLOW HARDWARE ALARM
CAUTION


1. Check to ensure that the sample flow has not been shut off. If so, restore sample flow.
2. Disconnect power to the analyzer.
3. Disconnect sample flow switch at J23E terminals 1 and 2.
4. Connect ohmmeter leads between these two wires.
5. With sample flowing, the switch should open. Stop sample flow and the switch should
close.
6. If switch does not function as described, replace flow switch.
7. If switch functions as described in step 5, but the alarm remains after the switch wiring
has been reconnected and sample flow established, replace Chroma I/O PCB.
7-38 2000-OSM, C1
TP 43: PROGRAMMED TEMPERATURE OVEN COOL DOWN
CAUTION


1. Stop Analysis at the end of this analysis cycle.
2. Check air pressure for correct adjustment. Perform Test Procedure 1 (Carrier,
Makeup, and Utility Gas Supplies).
3. Check all temperature control parameters. Perform Test Procedure 31 (Checking

Temperature Table Values), and correct any errors.
4. Access the Manual Temperature Control Mode by performing steps 1 to 3, 8 and 9 of

Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values). Change Zone 2 set point to
220 and rate to 50.
5. Monitor the actual zone 2 temperature. When it reaches 100 degrees, change the set
point to the normal initial set point value and rate to 0.1.
6. You should hear the coolant solenoid valve operate and hear a sudden discharge of air
into the programmed temperature oven.
7. If you do not hear the solenoid valve operate, override the X purge using the procedure
given in Section 4. If you hear the solenoid valve switch, proceed to step 23.
8. Open electronics housing door. LED DS8 should be illuminated. If not, replace
temperature control board.
9. Access the Manual Temperature Control Mode by performing steps 1 to 3, 8 and 9 of

Test Procedure 31 (Checking Temperature Table Values). Change zone 2 set point to
220 and rate to 50.
10. Connect voltmeter leads across J42D terminals 1 and 2 and check for the presence of
zero VAC.
11. Monitor the actual zone 2 temperature. When it reaches 100 degrees, change the set
point to the initial set point value and rate to 0.1.
12. Connect voltmeter leads across J42D terminals 1 and 2 and check for the presence of
115 VAC. If voltage is present, replace the solenoid valve.
13. If no voltage is measured between J42D terminals 1 and 2, check for presence of 115
VAC between J42C terminals 1 and 2.
2000-OSM, C1 7-39
14. If voltage is not present at J42C terminals 1 and 2, check for 115 VAC at J46A terminals
1 and 2.
15. If voltage is present at J46A terminals 1 and 2, shut off power and replace motherboard.
16. If voltage is present at J46D terminals 1 and 2, remove power from the analyzer.
17. Disconnect the solenoid valve coil wires from J42D terminals 1 and 2 and connect an
ohmmeter between the solenoid valve wire leads. The solenoid coil will have a small
resistance. Check each lead to chassis ground. If shorted to ground or questionable,
replace solenoid valve or coil. Inspect leads for bare insulation that could contact
chassis or other grounded part and make necessary repairs.
18. Disconnect the solenoid valve coil wires from J42D terminals 1 and 2 and connect an
ohmmeter between the solenoid valve wire leads. If the coil resistance is extremely high
or infinity, replace the solenoid valve or coil and fuse. Repeat procedure in step 17.
19. Apply power to the analyzer.
20. Check vortex cooler efficiency in the following manner. Access the Manual Temperature
Control Mode by performing steps 1 to 3, 8 and 9 of Test Procedure 31 (Checking
Temperature Table Values). Change zone 2 set point to 0 deg and rate to 0.1.
21. Monitor the actual zone 2 temperature until temperature measurement is stable.
WARNING
Discharge air from the vortex cooler is extremely hot and can cause
severe burns.
22. Protecting your hands with insulated gloves, adjust the vortex cooler at the discharge
end for maximum cooling (minimum temperature) as indicated on actual zone
temperature.
23. Enter set point at initial temperature.
24. Close and secure all doors and all covers.
TP 44: STREAM SWITCHING
CAUTION


7-40 2000-OSM, C1
1. Check valve assignment in method tables.
2. Verify stream is active. Make necessary changes.
3. If electric solenoid valve stream switching is used, proceed to step 6.
4. If air operated valves are used for stream switching, verify actuation air is being applied
to the stream select valve actuator. Gently loosen the two fittings at the actuator. Apply
“Leak Tech”, “Snoop” or other similar liquid leak detector to the back of the fittings.
5. Request an analysis for the steam in question. At stream step, the stream will begin to
purge as indicated on the background screen. Actuation air will be applied to the
respective actuator, producing bubbles at the loose fitting. When the next different
stream is selected, bubbles should cease at the present actuation line. If the actuation
is double acting, air will be present at the other actuation line and bubbles will be
produced by the leak detector. All streams can be tested in this manner. Reconnect or
tighten each fitting that was loosened.
6. If no air is present, check to ensure air is being applied to solenoid valve by loosening
the solenoid valve air supply inlet connection. Loosen the inlet air fitting and test for the
presence of air with a leak detection solution.
7. If air is applied to the solenoid valve, test to ensure that the solenoid actuation voltage is
being applied.
8. Turn off purge air to analyzer and override X purge.
9. Loosen the four screws that retain the front cover of the heater box.
10. Request an analysis for the stream in question. At stream step the stream will begin to
purge as indicated on the background screen. Connect voltmeter leads across the
stream switch soleniod valve (process) or the calibration solenoid valve (calibration).
The voltage to the solenoid valve should measure 110 VDC when the valve is on and
zero volts when the valve is off. If the voltage is being applied, yet the valve is not
switching, replace the solenoid valve.
11. If no voltage is present, remove power and disconnect both solenoid valve leads.
12. Connect an ohmmeter between the two solenoid valve coil leads. If open, (extremely
high resistance), replace the solenoid valve or coil.
13. Reconnect solenoid valve coil leads.
14. Apply power to analyzer and switch D.C. solenoid driver using procedure in step 8.
15. If voltage does not switch, replace D.C solenoid valve driver PCB.
16. If voltage does not switch, replace Chroma I/O board.
17. Reconnect and tighten all loose or disconnected fittings, and check for and repair any
leaks.
18. Close and secure all doors and all covers.
19. Apply purge air and power.
2000-OSM, C1 7-41
21. Perform an analysis and verify analyzer operation.
TP 45: FPD SETUP
completed.
Detector Reading should change to a value of 2.00 mV ±0.05 mV.
5. On the Chroma Board screen note the Hardware Zero, Software Zero, and Detector
Reading values. The hardware zero should be 15 to 100 mV maximum. On a clean
system it whould be 15 to 50 mV.
6. If the hardware zero reading is less than 15 mV, adjust potentiometer R71 on the FPD
Electrometer PCB clockwise slightly.
7. Repeat steps 4, 5 and 6 until the hardware zero reading in step 5 is 20 mV.
7-42 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 8. REPAIR
REPLACING HEATERS
Refer to Figure 8-1 for component location when replacing heaters.
Temperature
Sensor
Detector
Thermocouple
Methanizer Liquid Sample

Valve
Oven
Heater
Column
Figure 8-1. ANALYZER OVEN COMPARTMENT
CAUTION

See "AIR PURGING" in Section 4 for the X Purge override function. Do

not perform override until you have read Section 4 completely and you
understand and can perform the procedure properly.
Isothermal Temperature Oven Heater
1. Open the Controller front and side doors and the isothermal oven door.
2. On the Zone 1 PCB in the Digital Temperature Controller, disconnect J49B and remove
the isothermal oven heater wires from pins 1 and 2.
3. On the Zone 1 PCB, disconnect J49A and remove the thermocouple wires from pins 1
and 2.
4. On the DTC Backplane PCB disconnect J42A and remove the thermocouple wires from
pins 1 and 2.
5. Connect a small feeder wire (at least 36 inches long) to one of the heater wires.
2000-OSM, C1 8-1
6. In the isothermal oven disconnect the 1/4-inch fitting from the heater.
7. Extract the heater assembly from the clamp.
8. Withdraw the heater and wires from the feedthrough grommet and into the oven.
9. Connect the wires from the new heater assembly to the feeder wire pulled through the
tubing.
10. Install the new heater assembly using the reverse procedure, pulling the wires through
the tubing.
Sample Valve Heater
WARNING
Sample valve repair may necessitate the venting of flammable

substances into the atmosphere surrounding the analyzer. Remove
power from all sources of ignition in the immediate area. Do not open
any purged enclosures that remain powered.
Ensure proper safety equipment is worn, such as rubber gloves and

face shield or safety glasses.
CAUTION

See “AIR PURGING” in Section 4 for the X Purge override function. Do

1. Remove power, sample flow, and air from analyzer and allow to cool.
2. Open the Controller front and side doors, and the isothermal oven door.
3. Locate the Zone Sense Board and disconnect the LSV heater and sensor wires.
4. Withdraw the free end of the vaporizer cable from beneath the Card Cage into the
Controller housing.
5. Inside the isothermal oven, loosen any cable clamps securing the vaporizer cable
assembly and free the cable.
6. Disconnect all tubing connections to the LSV in the isothermal oven.
8-2 2000-OSM, C1
7. Disconnect the air lines from the LSV actuator.
8. Disconnect all tubing connections to the LSV in the isothermal oven.
9. Support the valve with your hand and remove the four Allen screws securing the valve
to the analyzer.
10. Withdraw the sample valve body from the oven.
11. Remove the vaporizer assembly collar from the valve, separate the vaporizer halves,
and remove the vaporizer.
12. Reassemble and connect the vaporizer using the reverse procedure.
SAMPLE VALVE REPAIR
You must take extreme care to avoid having the sample lines exert force on the sample
connections of the Liquid Sample Valve. For example, if stiff 1/4-inch tubing or heat-traced
lines are bent into position and attached to the valve, the force will cause premature failure of
the valve and possibly bend the stem. A loop of 1/8-inch tubing or a flex hose is
recommended between the valve and the sample line (this may be insulated if necessary).
Figure 8-2 illustrates the incorrect and correct connection methods.
Putting a loop in the tubing or using

flexible hose reduces any sideways
force at the connection.
Forcing the tubing into position can

exert a sideways force at connection,
causing valve leakage.
INCORRECT CORRECT
Figure 8-2. LIQUID SAMPLE VALVE CONNECTION METHOD
It is also important to use two wrenches when tightening the sample line connections to the
sample chamber. One wrench must be used to back up the force applied to tighten the fitting
(direct wrench force will bend the stem).
2000-OSM, C1 8-3
Refer to Figure 8-3 for typical sample valve component location.
3 4 6 7
1 5 8
2
22 9
21
20 17
16
19 18 15 14 13 12 11 10
Figure 8-3. LIQUID SAMPLE VALVE
WARNING
Sample valve repair may necessitate the venting of flammable

substances into the atmosphere surrounding the analyzer. Remove
power from all sources of ignition in the immediate area. Do not open
any purged enclosures that remain powered.
Ensure proper safety equipment is worn, such as rubber gloves and

face shield or safety glasses.
CAUTION


Disassembly
1. Stop the analysis at the end of a cycle.
2. Turn off power, carrier, sample, and air to the analyzer.
3. Remove the two cone point set screws (1 in Figure 8-3) from the cylinder (22).
8-4 2000-OSM, C1
4. Slide the cylinder (22) off of piston (21) and body (2).
5. Using an Allen wrench, rotate the sleeve (20) counterclockwise until it is loose.
6. Unscrew the body (2) from the flange (13) and vaporizer chamber (10).
7. Remove the vaporizer chamber (10) from the flange (13).
8. Slide the seal (3) from the stem (12) using sample chamber (4).
9. Withdraw the piston (21) and the rod assembly (18) from the sleeve (20).
10. This will free the seal (3) from the stem (12).
11. Inspect the seals for visible imperfections. If imperfections are found, replace the seals.
12. Inspect the stem for visible imperfections. If imperfections are found, replace the stem.
13. Remove the rear valve seat (14) from the body (2).
14. Remove the 15 Belleville springs (15) from the body (2).
15. Remove the O-rings (19) from the body (2) and piston (21).
16. Unscrew the piston rod (18) from the piston (21). and extract the stem assembly (12)
from the piston rod (18).
17. Remove the O-ring (16) from the piston rod (18).
18. Unscrew the sleeve (20) from the body (2).
19. Remove the O-ring (17) from the sleeve (20).
Reassembly
NOTE
In all steps the lubricant used is High Vacuum Grease.
1. Clean the seals (3) with acetone and air dry them.
2. Clean the sample chamber (10) with acetone and air dry it.
3. Lightly lubricate O-Ring (17), sleeve threads (2), and internal threads and bore of the
body (2) with High Vacuum Grease.
4. Install the O-ring (17) onto the sleeve (20).
5. Screw the sleeve (20) into the body (2) until the back of the sleeve (20) is flush with the
ears on the back of the body (2), then back the sleeve (20) out 1-1/2 turns.
6. Lightly lubricate the O-ring (16) and the threads of the piston rod (18). Install the O-ring
(16) onto the piston rod (18). Do not allow grease to enter the small hole through the
center of the piston.
2000-OSM, C1 8-5
7. Insert the stem assembly (12) into the rear of the piston rod (18). Screw the piston rod
(18) into the piston (21) and tighten to 27-30 in-lb. Do not overtighten or bend the rod or
stem! Do not allow grease to contact the stem.
8. Lightly lubricate the two O-rings (19). Install the O-rings (19) onto the body (2) and the
piston (21).
9. Insert the piston (21) and the rod assembly (18) into the sleeve (20). Be careful not to
cut the O-ring. Fully insert the piston (21) until it contacts the stops.
10. Stack the 15 Belleville springs (15) (see Figure 8-4) onto the 1/4-inch thin wall plastic
tubing. Using the tubing as a guide, slide the springs (15) over the stem (12) into the
bore of the body (2).
1/4-inch plastic tubing

used for guide only
Stack springs as shown
Figure 8-4. STACKING THE BELLEVILLE SPRINGS
11. Install the rear valve seat (14) over the stem (12) and let it rest against the springs (15).
Do not allow the seat to scratch the stem.
12. Clean all the exposed area of the stem (12) with acetone. Ensure the stem and groove
are free of grease and contamination. Inspect the stem for visible imperfections. If
imperfections are found, replace the stem.
13. Slide the first cleaned seal (3) over the stem (12) using the “A” end of Seal Insertion Tool
TL-791A006B. The 30° angle (pointed end) of the seal (3) must face the springs (15).
14. Slide the cleaned sample chamber (4) over the stem onto the seal (3).
15. Slide the second cleaned seal (3) over the stem (12) using the “B” end of Seal Insertion
Tool TL-791A006B. The 30° angled (pointed end) of the seal (3) faces out, away from
the sample chamber (4).
16. Install the vaporizer chamber (10) into the flange (13) as shown. Lightly lubricate the
threads on the body (2). Screw the body (2) into the flange (13) against the vaporizer
chamber (10) until tight. The sample chamber (4) should be loose in the assembly at
this point. If not, back out the sleeve (20) until the sample chamber (4) is loose. Use
the end of a 0.156 Allen wrench in the slot of the sleeve (20) to adjust to the point of
eliminating the longitudinal play of the sample chamber (4).
17. Tighten the sleeve (20) in 24 1/4-turn increments (6 turns total) to preload the seals.
18. Lightly lubricate the inside bore of the cylinder (22). Align the fittings on the cylinder (22)
with the sample chamber (4) tubes, or with air lines if servicing. Slide the cylinder (22)
onto the piston (21) and the body (2). Install two cone point set screws (1) into the
cylinder #(22) and tighten into the groove on the body (2).
8-6 2000-OSM, C1
COLUMN INSTALLATION OR REPLACEMENT
Refer to Figure 8-1 for column location.
CAUTION

Column Removal
1. If analyzer is running and a column is to be replaced, stop the analysis.
3. Reduce Isothermal Oven temperature by reducing oven air pressure to zero psig.
4. Shut off carrier and other FID makeup gases (if applicable).
5. Open isothermal oven door.
6. To remove the column, loosen the fittings on both ends of the column and gently extract
the column from the respective fitting connections.
7. Loosen any screw securing the column to the column mounting brackets and remove
the column.
Packed Column Installation
1. Install the column, orienting it in such a way that one end can be connected to the fitting
at the LSV and the other into the bottom of the detector.
2. Fasten and secure column in place at the column mounting bracket with the retaining
screws.
3. Insert the column end into the appropriate fitting connection and finger-tighten the nut.
Then tighten it an additional 1/4 turn and test column for a secure connection.
4. Apply carrier gas and leak check. Further tighten the two fittings as required to ensure
no leaks are present.
5. Close and secure the Isothermal Oven door.
6. Apply air and makeup gases.
7. Allow zone temperatures to stabilize.
8. Check and adjust carrier and makeup gases flow rates.
9. Ignite FID (if applicable).
2000-OSM, C1 8-7
Capillary Column Installation
1. Inspect the ends of the column. The ends should be round and burr free. If either
column end is not round or burr free, the column end must be trimmed as described in
"Cutting Capillary Columns."
2. Insert the end of the column through the back of the tubing nut.
3. Insert the column end through the new ferrule.
4. Slide the ferrule down the length of the column approximately three inches.
5. Insert the extended column length and the end of the ferrule into the appropriate tubing
connection at the sample valve.
6. Connect the tubing nut and finger-tighten; then tighten it an additional 1/4-turn with an
open-end wrench.
7. Test the column for a secure connection by gently pulling the column at the 1/8-inch
tubing nut. Any withdraw should be corrected. Continue to tighten the nut until the
column is securely connected at the fitting.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 for the other end of the column.
9. For columns connected to an FID, insert the column end into the FID analysis inlet
connection until it stops against the jet. Then withdraw the column approximately 1/16-
inch and tighten the nut finger tight. Tighten the nut an additional 1/4-turn with an open-
end wrench, then check it for a secure fit.
NOTE
If a metal capillary column is used, particular care should be taken to

ensure that the column does not contact the jet. The metal column will
conduct electricity and could cause an electrical short at the jet.
10. Apply carrier gas and check for leaks. Further tighten the two fittings as required to stop
any leaks.
11. Install all analyzer covers and doors.
12. Perform the analyzer startup procedure as described in Section 2.
Cutting Capillary Columns
The procedure for cutting glass or metal capillary columns is the same, except that a small
sharp file may be used to score metal columns.
NOTE
Do not use high speed cutting wheels or grinders to cut capillary

columns. This type of cutting generates heat that can damage the
column and the resultant column cuttings could plug the column.
8-8 2000-OSM, C1
1. Use a diamond or ceramic scoring tool to score the surface of the outside tubing wall
approximately one inch from the end of the column. Take care not to cut through the
tubing wall.
2. Wipe the scored area clean to prevent material from entering the column.
3. Secure the column with your fingers 1/2-inch on each side of the score and gently bend
the tubing at the score, in the direction opposite the score. When the score point opens,
bend the tubing back towards the score. The tubing should make a clean break.
4. Inspect the end of the column for roundness and ensure it is burr free. If the end is not
round and burr free, repeat the procedure until it is.
5. The column is now ready for installation.
FID REPAIR
Refer to Figure 8-5 for FID component location.
CAUTION
This repair should only be attempted by people who are properly

trained and posses the expertise for this repair.
Before disposing of any residual insulating materials, ensure that

disposal methods comply with all applicable regulatory restrictions.
Breather Microdot
Adapter Connector
Thermocouple
Ignitor Polarizer
Jet
Figure 8-5. FLAME IONIZATION DETECTOR
2000-OSM, C1 8-9
FID Cell Access
CAUTION


The thermocouple, polarizer and ignitor assembly elements are fragile

and can be easily damaged if not handled with extreme care. Do not
touch the end of the elements.
CAUTION
Caution should be used when working with the soldering iron. The
soldering iron, melted solder and heated wiring can cause severe
burns. Safety glasses and protective gloves should be used to protect
against hot molten solder and hot surfaces. Personal protective
equipment such as goggles, face shield, lab coat and rubber gloves
should be used while cleaning with solvents such as acetone. Cleaning
with solvents should be done in a well ventilated area.
1. If power is applied to the analyzer, turn it off.
2. Turn off oven air to the Isothermal Oven and allow all temperature zones to cool.
3. Turn off carrier and other gases, as applicable.
5. For temperature programmed units, you must remove the insulated covers surrounding
the FID cell body to access any of the FID cell internal components.
Replacing the Breather
1. Disconnect the red coaxial cable located on the top of the detector.
2. Loosen the breather set screw using a 0.050-inch Allen wrench, then extract the adapter
fitting from the detector.
3. Using a 9/16-inch open-end wrench and a 1/2-inch backup wrench, disconnect the 1/4-
inch vent connection from the breather.
4. Remove the breather with adapter fitting from the analyzer oven.
8-10 2000-OSM, C1
5. Remove the adapter fitting from the breather using 3/4-inch and 1/2-inch open-end
wrenches.
6. Using a 3/4-inch open-end wrench and a 1/2-inch backup wrench, remove the 1/4-inch
male connector from the existing breather.
7. Remove the existing Teflon tape from the nipple of the adapter fitting and apply new
tape.
8. Remove the existing Teflon tape from the male connector and apply new tape.
9. Install the detector outlet adapter into the breather and finger tighten. Finish tightening
using 3/4-inch and 1/2-inch open-end wrenches.
10. Install the 1/4-inch male connector into the breather using 3/4-inch and 1/2-inch open-
end wrenches.
11. Connect the 1/4-inch detector vent tubing to the breather. Finger tighten, then tighten
with a 9/16-inch open-end wrench and a 1/2-inch backup wrench.
12. Ensure the detector vent O-ring is in place in the adapter fitting.
13. Finish installing the breather by inserting the cylindrical end of the adapter fitting
completely into the detector outlet and tightening the set screw with a 0.050-inch Allen
wrench. Note the set screw will fit into the groove of the adapter fitting when installed
correctly.
14. Reconnect the red coaxial cable to the top of the detector.
15. Close and secure the isothermal oven door.
Replacing the Thermocouple Assembly
1. Disconnect the red coaxial cable located on the top the detector.
2. Locate the thermocouple assembly as identified by the two red and black wires.
3. If applicable, remove any cable ties and free the wiring to expose the wire splices.
4. Cut and remove the heat shrink and glass tape from the red and black wires to expose
the soldered connections.
5. Using a 40 watt soldering iron, disconnect the wiring splice.
6. Using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench, carefully remove the thermocouple. Note its
location for reassembly.
7. Carefully insert the replacement thermocouple into the detector body and finger tighten,
taking care not to damage it. Finish tightening using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench.
8. Roll each end of the red and black wires of the new thermocouple assembly between
your forefinger and thumb, causing the wire ends to be tightly spiral wrapped.
9. Using the 40 watt soldering iron and approved high temperature solder, “tin” the wire
ends.
2000-OSM, C1 8-11
10. Spread or expand the end of approved heat shrink to allow easy installation over the
solder connection.
11. Install the heat shrink over each of the wires and slide it as far as possible from the
connection. This will prevent premature shrinking of it when the connection is soldered.
12. Overlap the “tinned” ends of the red wire from the analyzer electronics and red element
assembly wire, then solder the wires together using approved high temperature solder
and the 40 watt soldering iron.
13. Repeat step 12 for the black wire.
14. Apply a short wrap of glass tape over each connection.
15. Slide the heat shrink over the soldered connection and shrink it with a heat gun.
16. Reconnect the red coaxial cable to the top of the detector.
Accessing the Polarizer and Ignitor Elements
1. Disconnect the red coaxial cable located on the top of the detector.
2. Cut cable ties securing the detector element assembly wiring and straighten the wires
to increase accessibility.
3. Remove the breather as described in "Replacing the Breather."
4. Visually trace the capillary tubing connections from the detector to the nearest unions.
Place temporary tape labels on each side of the union tubing connections.
5. Disconnect the associated capillary connections at the unions.
NOTE
Steps 6 through 8 are required only for Temperature Programmed

analyzers.
6. Rotate the detector cover latch counterclockwise until it is freed from the detector body.
7. Slide the detector cover from the detector heater housing and set aside.
8. Remove enough of the insulation from the detector heater housing to expose the
polarizer and ignitor; retain it for later use.
9. Position the wiring and capillary tubing such that the housing can be lifted from the
detector base up over the detector, then lift off the housing, fully exposing the detector
body and elements.
Replacing The Polarizer
1. After accessing the detector elements as described in "Accessing the Polarizer and
Ignitor Elements," locate the polarizer as identified by the element with the single green
wire.
8-12 2000-OSM, C1
3. Cut and remove the heat shrink and glass tape from the green wire to expose the
soldered connection.
4. Using a 40 watt soldering iron, disconnect the wire splice.
5. Using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench, carefully remove the polarizer assembly. Note its
location for reassembly.
6. Carefully insert the replacement polarizer into the detector body and finger tighten,
taking care not to damage it. Finish tightening using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench.
7. Roll each end of the green wire of the new polarizer between your forefinger and thumb,
causing the wire ends to be tightly spiral wrapped.
ends.
solder connection.
10. Install heat shrink over each wire and slide it as far as possible from the connection.
This will prevent premature shrinking when the connection is soldered.
11. Overlap and solder the “tinned” ends of the green wire from the wiring harness and the
green polarizer assembly wire using approved high temperature solder and 40 watt
soldering iron.
12. Apply a short wrap of glass tape over the connection.
13. Slide the heat shrink over the taped connection and shrink it with a heat gun.
14. Close the detector as described in "Closing the Detector."
Replacing The Ignitor Assembly
1. After accessing the detector elements as described in "Accessing the Polarizer and
Ignitor Elements," locate the ignitor as identified by the element with the two white wires.
3. Cut and remove the heat shrink and glass tape from the two white wires to expose the
soldered connections.
4. Using a 40 watt soldering iron, disconnect the wiring splice.
5. Using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench, continue loosening and carefully remove the Ignitor
assembly. Note its location for reassembly.
6. Carefully insert the replacement ignitor into the detector body and finger tighten, taking
care not to damage it. Finish tightening using a 3/8-inch open-end wrench.
7. Roll each end of the two white wires of the new ignitor between your forefinger and
thumb, causing the wire ends to be tightly spiral wrapped.
2000-OSM, C1 8-13
ends.
solder connection.
10. Overlap and solder the “tinned” ends of one white wire from the wiring harness and one
white ignitor assembly wire and solder the wires together using approved high
temperature solder and 40 watt soldering iron.
11. Repeat this operation for the remaining white wire.
12. Apply a short wrap of glass tape over each connection.
13. Slide the heat shrink over the taped connection and shrink it with a heat gun.
14. Close the detector as described in "Closing the Detector."
Closing the Detector
1. Verify that all work inside the detector housing is complete.
2. Route the wiring up through the top of the detector housing .
NOTE
Steps 3 through 6 are required only for Temperature Programmed

analyzers.
3. Slide the housing down over the insulation and detector body onto the base. The
housing must slide over the circular base and rest on the mounting bracket.
4. Bend the capillary tubing back into place, then route the wiring to the back of the
detector housing and install insulation into the housing.
5. Install the detector cover by channeling the cover slot through the machined groove in
the detector body, while sliding the cover into place. Note that the wiring exits through
the slot in the cover, and that the capillary tubing exits the can through the sheared edge
of the top cover.
6. Rotate the detector cover latch clockwise until is secured by the detector. Note the
small slot in the latch also fits into the same machined groove the cover fits.
7. Install the breather as explained in "Replacing the Breather."
8. Using the previously installed temporary labels, connect the capillary tubes to their
respective unions.
9. Remove the temporary labels.
10. Install cable ties to secure the detector wiring.
11. Install the red coaxial cable to the connector on top of the detector.
8-14 2000-OSM, C1
Cleaning the FID Jet
NOTE
Steps 1 and 2 are required only for Temperature Programmed

analyzers.
1. Remove the three screws securing the detector can assembly, using a 9/64-inch Allen
wrench or ball driver.
2. Extract the can from the isothermal oven.
3. CENELEC and CSA flame ionization detectors are identified by the presence of three
packing adapter nuts (5/8-inch, 1/2-inch and 7/16-inch). Other models contain only two
packing adapter nuts (5/8-inch and 1/2-inch).
4. On CENELEC AND CSA models, loosen the 7/16-inch packing adapter nut using a 7/
16-inch open-end wrench, backed up with a 1/2-inch open-end wrench on the 1/2-inch
packing adapter nut. Continue to loosen by hand until disconnected.
5. For all models, loosen the 1/2-inch packing adapter nut using a 1/2-inch open-end
wrench with a 5/8-inch open-end back-up wrench. Continue to loosen by hand until
disconnected.
6. Withdraw the column and associated ferrules and adapters from the detector.
7. Loosen the 5/8-inch adapter fitting from the bottom of the detector.
8. Extract the jet with the adapter fitting from the jet cavity in the detector.
9. Inspect the end of the jet for damage. It should not be pitted or plugged. If pitted,
replace with a new jet.
10. Insert a 0.016-inch diameter piano wire into the jet and rod it out. If the piano wire will
not pass through, replace the jet.
11. Using a syringe and protective equipment and clothing, flush the jet with a mild solvent
such as acetone; then blow dry with 15 psig clean air, nitrogen or helium.
12. Use a 5/8-inch adapter fitting to insert the jet into the jet cavity. Finger tighten and finish
tightening using a 5/8-inch open-end wrench.
13. Insert the column end, ferrule and adapter nut into the detector inlet and finger tighten;
then loosen 1/8 turn.
14. If the ferrule was loose and slid any length on the column, continue to push the column
into the detector analysis inlet until it stops.
15. Withdraw the column approximately one mm and tighten the 1/2-inch adapter nut finger
tight. Tighten the nut 1/4 turn more with a 1/2-inch open-end wrench, then check it for a
secure fit by gently attempting to pull the column slightly away from the detector.
Carefully tighten the adapter until the column is secure.
2000-OSM, C1 8-15
16. For CENELEC and CSA models, slide the 7/16-inch packing adapter nut and ferrule
toward the detector and install finger tight. Tighten the nut an additional 1/4 turn with a
7/16-inch open-end wrench.
17. For temperature programmed units, install the detector can assembly and secure it with
the hex head screws using a 9/64-inch Allen wrench or ball driver. Be sure to align the
three holes such that the edge of the can is parallel with edge of the temperature
programmed oven.
Cleaning the Collector
1. For temperature programmed units, remove the temperature programmed oven covers
as described in "Cleaning the FID Jet."
2. Disconnect the column and remove the jet as described in Cleaning the FID Jet."
3. Remove the breather as described in "Replacing the Breather."
4. Remove the thermocouple as described in "Replacing the Thermocouple Assembly."
5. Access the detector elements as described in "Accessing the Polarizer and Ignitor
Elements."
6. Remove the polarizer and ignitors described in "Replacing the Polarizer" and "Replacing
the Ignitor Assembly."
7. Use a small stainless steel brush precleaned with acetone to remove chloride
accumulations from the collector, by inserting the brush through the detector inlet
connection and briskly scrubbing with an in-and-out motion.
8. Install the detector elements as described in "Accessing the Polarizer and Ignitor
Elements."
9. Install the column as described in "Packed Column Installation" or "Capillary Column

Installation."
10. For temperature programmed units, install and secure the temperature programmed
oven covers.
Replacing the FID Cable Assembly
NOTE
This procedure requires a special tool, Insertion Tool ABB P/N

TL799M013-1, to assist in passing the cable through the insulation
between the Control Housing and the Oven.
1. Disconnect the Microdot connector located on top of the detector (see Figure 8-5).
2. Cut the cable just below where it passes through the Oven into the Control Housing and
remove the cable from the Oven.
8-16 2000-OSM, C1
3. Disconnect the other end of the cable from the FID Amplifier Assembly and remove the
cable from the Control Housing.
4. Remove the grommets from the grommet holes (located in the bottom of the Control
Housing and the top of the Oven) that will accommodate the routing of the new cable.
5. The new FID Cable Assembly has a Microdot connector on one and and a BNC
connector on the other end (see Figure 8-6). Screw the Microdot connector end of the
new cable assembly into the Insertion Tool.
Microdot BNC
Connector Connector
Figure 8-6. FID CABLE ASSEMBLY
6. Pass the Insertion Tool through the grommet holes from the Control Housing to the
Oven.
7. Remove the Insertion Tool from the cable connector.
8. Make a slit in each grommet from the outer diameter to the inner hole. (This is
necessary because the cable connector will not pass through the grommet.)
9. Position the cable in the grommets in the Control Housing and the Oven.
10. Push the grommets into the grommet holes.
11. Connect the cable connectors to their respective locations (BNC connector to the FID
Amplifier Assembly and Microdot connector to the top of the detector).
FILAMENT TCD REPAIR
Refer to Figure 8-7 for Filament Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) component location.
Reference Measure
Filament Filament
Reference Vent
Sample In
Sample Vent
TC Assembly
Reference In
Figure 8-7. FILAMENT TC DETECTOR
2000-OSM, C1 8-17
CAUTION

trained and possess the expertise for this repair.
T/C Detector Access
CAUTION

analyzer are declassified when purge is removed, and a danger exists
for fire, explosion, damage to property and injury or death to plant
personnel during the nonpurged time. Obtain proper permits such as
hot work, etc.

The filaments are fragile and can be easily damaged if not handled with
extreme care. Do not touch the end of the elements.
Caution should be used when working with a soldering iron. Safety

glasses and protective gloves should be used to protect against hot
molten solder and hot surfaces. Personal protective equipment such
as goggles, face shield, lab coat and rubber gloves should be used
while cleaning with solvents such as acetone. Cleaning with solvents
should be done in a well ventilated area.
Removing the Filaments
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two Phillips head screws located on the front
underside of the mounting bracket.
2. Remove the mounting bracket cover by sliding it out and away from the detector
assembly.
3. Remove the insulating material from the mounting bracket.
4. If they are not already labeled, label the wire pair connected to the measurement
filament “M” and the wire pair connected to the reference filament “R”.
5. If the detector filament wiring connections are spliced, perform steps 6 through 8. If they
are not spliced, go to step 9.
6. Position the detector wiring such that the wired splices can be accessed.
8-18 2000-OSM, C1
7. Cut and remove the heat shrink from each of the spliced filament wire connections to
expose the soldered connections.
8. Using a 40 watt soldering iron, de-solder and disconnect the wire splices.
9. If the detector filament wiring connections are not spliced, cut the existing detector
harness wires approximately three inches from the detector end.
10. Remove the harness retaining clamp and free the harness.
11. Clean the area around the two detector filaments to reduce the chance of foreign
particles entering the detector cavity when the filaments are removed.
12. Loosen the two detector filament retaining gland nuts with a 3/8-inch open-end wrench.
Continue to loosen by hand.
13. Carefully extract the filaments from the detector cell cavity.
Installing the Filaments
Replacement filament installation kits are supplied with two cable glands, a wire spreader,
736 RTV, high temperature solder, and heat shrink.
1. Cut the four filament wires approximately the same length as the wires on the filaments
that were removed.
2. Insert one pair of filament wires through the threaded end of the gland nut, then carefully
insert the filament into the detector cell cavity marked “M” (measurement).
3. Slide the nut down the length of the wires to insert and align it with the measurement
cavity.
4. Tighten the cable gland finger tight, then finish tightening with a 3/8-inch open-end
wrench.
5. Insert the second pair of filament wires through the threaded end of the gland nut, then
carefully insert the filament into the detector cell cavity marked “R” (reference).
6. Slide the nut down the length of the wires to insert and align it with the reference cavity.
7. Tighten the cable gland finger tight, then finish tightening with a 3/8-inch open-end
wrench.
8. Using wire strippers, remove approximately 1/4 inch of insulation from the end of each
detector filament wire.
Filament Checkout
1. Obtain a multimeter and select the ohms function and a range capable of measuring 40
ohms.
2. Connect one multimeter lead to each wire of the measurement filament (installed in the
detector cavity labeled “M”). The resistance measurement should be approximately 40
ohms.
2000-OSM, C1 8-19
3. Connect one multimeter lead to each wire of the reference filament (installed in the
detector cavity labeled “R”). The resistance measurement should be within one ohm of
the measurement filament resistance.
4. If the resistance measurements are not within one ohm of each other, ensure the
multimeter is connected and functioning correctly, and that the correct meter function is
selected.
5. If the detector filaments are not in tolerance, the detector filaments are defective. The
filaments must be replaced and the checkout repeated.
6. Neither filament should contact the detector cell body. Connect the multimeter leads to
one of the filament wires and the detector cell body. The meter reading should range
from several hundred megohms to infinity.
7. Repeat this measurement for each of the other three filament wires. If all resistance
measurements are correct, go to "Connecting the Filaments." If any resistance is too
low, go to step 8.
8. If the resistance measurement is approximately 20 ohms, filament being tested is

contacting the internal wall of the detector cell cavity. When this occurs, carefully loosen
the gland of the suspect filament. Continue to loosen by hand and withdraw first the
gland, then the filament from the detector cell body (taking care not to touch or damage
the filament).
9. Inspect the filament for damage or bending. If it is damaged, the filament pair will have
to be replaced.
10. If the filament is slightly bent, use small needle nose pliers to gently and carefully bend it
straight.
11. If the filament orientation now appears to be correct, reinstall the detector filament and
repeat the complete checkout. If it fails again, replace the detector filament pair and
repeat the harness checkout.
12. If the filament is damaged during this attempted correction process, the filament pair
will have to be replaced.
Connecting the Filaments
1. Roll the ends of each stripped harness wire between your thumb and index finger to
tightly spiral wrap the wire ends.
2. Using a 40 watt soldering iron and approved high temperature solder, “tin” each of the
harness wire ends.
3. Roll the ends of each stripped filament wire between your thumb and index finger to
filament wire ends.
5. Slide the insulating sheath of each filament back to reveal the stranded wire, install
approved heat shrink over each of the four filament wires, and slide it as far from the
free wire end as possible.
8-20 2000-OSM, C1
6. Select a harness assembly wire with the “R” label designation and overlap the “tinned”
ends of this harness wire with one of the reference filament wires.
7. Solder the wires using a 40 watt soldering iron and approved high temperature solder.
Apply solder sparingly, allowing it to flow evenly. Do not overheat the solder or a high
resistance connection could result.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the remaining harness wire labeled “R” and reference filament
wire.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 for the harness wires labeled “M” and the measurement wires.
10. Slide heat shrink over each connection and shrink with a heat source.
Leak Test
1. Restore carrier to the analyzer and establish carrier flow to both the measurement and
reference ports of the detector.
2. Verify carrier and reference flow using a flow meter. Typically the flows should be 30 to
40cc per minute if packed columns are used; 10 to 15 cc per minute if 0.53 mm ID
capillary columns are used, and 3 to 5 cc per minute if 0.32 mm ID capillary columns are
used.
3. Test for leaks around the detector filament gland nut with a nonconductive liquid leak
detection solution. Correct all leaks before proceeding.
4. Shut off the carrier supply to the analyzer.
5. Gently remove any excess leak detection solution with a soft cloth or tissue and blow
dry with 15 psig clean dry air, helium or nitrogen.
Potting The Filaments (CENELEC and CSA Only)
Perform this procedure if you know that your analyzer is constructed to CENELEC or CSA
specifications or the if existing detector filament is potted.
1. Gently slide the insulation sheath out of and away from the gland nut.
2. Using a syringe filled with Silastic compound “Dow 736 RTV,” completely fill the gland
cavity with the Silastic compound.
3. With the insulation still pulled away from the gland nut, use needle nosed pliers to install
the wire spreader.
4. Separate and insert filament wires into the slots on either side of the spreader. The
spreader should be positioned between the end of the sheath insulation and the back of
the gland nut.
5. Press the spreader into the recess in the gland nut. The retainer must be installed such
that it is not in anyway tilted. It is normal for the retainer to protrude slightly from the
gland recess.
6. Slide the sheath insulation toward the wire spreader until it contacts the face of the
spreader.
2000-OSM, C1 8-21
7. Replace the mounting bracket insulation.
8. Install the mounting bracket cover and secure it with two Phillips head screws.
THERMISTOR TCD REPAIR
Refer to Figure 8-8 for Thermistor Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) component location.
Cable Top Cover
Top Sleeve Standoffs
Measure Reference
Figure 8-8. THERMISTOR TC DETECTOR
CAUTION

trained and possess the expertise for this repair.
T/C Detector Access
CAUTION

analyzer are declassified when purge is removed, and a danger exists
for fire, explosion, damage to property and injury or death to plant
personnel during the nonpurged time. Obtain proper permits such as
hot work, etc.
Ensure adequate ventilation in the analyzer shelter.

The filaments are fragile and can be easily damaged if not handled with
extreme care. Do not touch the end of the elements.
8-22 2000-OSM, C1
CAUTION
Caution should be used when working with a soldering iron. Safety

glasses and protective gloves should be used to protect against hot
molten solder and hot surfaces. Personal protective equipment such
as goggles, face shield, lab coat and rubber gloves should be used
while cleaning with solvents such as acetone. Cleaning with solvents
should be done in a well ventilated area.
Removing the Thermistors
1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two Phillips head screws located on the top
cover.
2. Remove the top cover by sliding it out and away from the detector assembly.
3. Remove the top sleeve from the detector assembly.
4. If they are not already labeled, label the wire pair connected to the measurement
thermistor “M” and the wire pair connected to the reference thermistor “R”.
5. Position the detector wiring such that the wired splices can be accessed.
6. Cut and remove the heat shrink from each of the spliced thermistor wire connections to
expose the soldered connections.
7. Using a 40 watt soldering iron, de-solder and disconnect the wire splices.
8. Clean the area around the two detector thermistors to reduce the chance of foreign
particles entering the detector cavity when the thermistors are removed.
9. If necessary, remove the two standoffs that hold the top cover in place and retain them
for re-installation.
10. Loosen the two detector thermistor retaining gland nuts with a 5/16-inch open-end
wrench. Continue to loosen by hand.
11. Carefully extract the thermistors from the detector cell cavity.
Installing the Thermistors
Replacement thermistor installation kits are supplied with a matched pair of thermistor
assemblies, high temperature solder, and heat shrink tubing.
1. Cut the four thermistor wires approximately the same length as the wires on the
thermistors that were removed.
2. Insert one thermistor assembly into the detector cell cavity marked "M" (measurement)
and screw the cable gland finger tight.
2000-OSM, C1 8-23
3. Finish tightening the cable gland with a 5/16-inch open-end wrench.
4. Insert the second thermistor assembly into the detector cell cavity marked “R”
(reference) and screw the cable gland finger tight.
5. Finish tightening the cable gland with a 5/16-inch open-end wrench.
6. Using wire strippers, remove approximately 1/4 inch of insulation from the end of each
detector thermistor wire.
Thermistor Checkout
1. Obtain a multimeter and select the ohms function and a range capable of measuring 40
ohms.
2. Connect one multimeter lead to each wire of the measurement thermistor (installed in
the detector cavity labeled “M”). The resistance measurement should be approximately
40 ohms.
3. Connect one multimeter lead to each wire of the reference thermistor (installed in the
detector cavity labeled “R”). The resistance measurement should be within one ohm of
the measurement thermistor resistance.
4. If the resistance measurements are not within one ohm of each other, ensure the
multimeter is connected and functioning correctly, and that the correct meter function is
selected.
5. If the detector thermistors are not in tolerance, the detector thermistors are defective.
The matched set of thermistor assemblies must be replaced and the checkout repeated.
6. Neither thermistor should contact the detector cell body. Connect the multimeter leads
to one of the thermistor wires and the detector cell body. The meter reading should
range from several hundred megohms to infinity.
7. Repeat this measurement for each of the other three thermistor wires. If all resistance
measurements are correct, go to "Connecting the Thermistors." If any resistance is too
low, go to step 8.
8. If the resistance measurement is approximately 20 ohms, the thermistor being tested is

contacting the internal wall of the detector cell cavity. When this occurs, carefully loosen
the gland of the suspect thermistor. Continue to loosen by hand and withdraw the gland
and thermistor from the detector cell body (taking care not to touch or damage the
thermistor).
9. Inspect the thermistor for damage or bending. If it is damaged, the matched set of
thermistor assemblies will have to be replaced.
10. If the thermistor is slightly bent, use small needle nose pliers to gently and carefully
bend it straight.
11. If the thermistor orientation now appears to be correct, reinstall the detector thermistor
and repeat the complete checkout. If it fails again, replace the matched set of thermistor
assemblies and repeat the harness checkout.
8-24 2000-OSM, C1
12. If the thermistor is damaged during this attempted correction process, the matched set
of thermistor assemblies will have to be replaced.
Connecting the Thermistors
1. Roll the ends of each stripped harness wire between your thumb and index finger to
harness wire ends.
3. Roll the ends of each stripped thermistor wire between your thumb and index finger to
thermistor wire ends.
5. Install approved heat shrink over each of the four thermistor wires and slide it as far
from the free wire end as possible.
6. Select a harness assembly wire with the “R” label designation and overlap the “tinned”
ends of this harness wire with one of the reference thermistor wires.
7. Solder the wires using a 40 watt soldering iron and approved high temperature solder.
Apply solder sparingly, allowing it to flow evenly. Do not overheat the solder or a high
resistance connection could result.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the remaining harness wire labeled “R” and reference
thermistor wire.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 for the harness wires labeled “M” and the measurement wires.
10. Slide heat shrink over each connection and shrink with a heat source.
Leak Test
1. Restore carrier to the analyzer and establish carrier flow to both the measurement and
reference ports of the detector.
2. Verify carrier and reference flow using a flow meter. Typically the flows should be 30 to
40cc per minute if packed columns are used; 10 to 15 cc per minute if 0.53 mm ID
capillary columns are used, and 3 to 5 cc per minute if 0.32 mm ID capillary columns are
used.
3. Test for leaks around the detector thermistor gland nut with a nonconductive liquid leak
detection solution. Correct all leaks before proceeding.
4. Shut off the carrier supply to the analyzer.
5. Gently remove any excess leak detection solution with a soft cloth or tissue and blow
dry with 15 psig clean dry air, helium or nitrogen.
2000-OSM, C1 8-25
FPD REPAIR
CAUTION


Replacing the Photomultiplier Assembly
Refer to Figure 8-9 as you perform this procedure.
FPD Electrometer
(in Controller Housing)
FPD
Electrometer
Cables
Cables
Nuts Nuts
Photomultiplier Photomultiplier
Early Version Current Version

FPD Electrometer in Controller Housing FPD Electrometer in FPD Enclosure Box
Figure 8-9. FPD PHOTOMULTIPLIER ASSEMBLY END VIEW
2. Turn off oven air to the isothermal oven and allow all temperature zones to cool.
8-26 2000-OSM, C1
3. Turn off air supply to air cleanup unit.
4. Open the door on the left side of the analyzer.
5. Disconnect the cables to the Photomultiplier Assembly and set them aside.
6. Remove the four nuts securing the Photomultiplier Assembly to the analyzer, being
careful to retain the nuts to reinstall the Photomultiplier Assembly.
7. Carefully pull the Photomultiplier Assembly straight out of the analyzer.
8. Reinstall the Photomultiplier Assembly in reverse order of removing it.
Replacing the Photomultiplier Assembly O-Ring
Figure 8-10. PHOTOMULTIPLIER TUBE SHOWING O-RING
1. Perform steps 1 through 7 of "Replacing the Photomultiplier Assembly."
2. Take the O-Ring off the end of the Photomultiplier shaft.
3. Lubricate the new O-Ring with a slight film of silicone grease.
4. Insert the new O-Ring on the Photomultiplier shaft.
5. Reinstall the Photomultiplier Assembly in reverse order of removing it.
2000-OSM, C1 8-27
Replacing the Burner Block
Heater
Vent Line
Mounting
Thermocouple Screws
Sample
H2 and/or
Carrier Thermocouple
Heater
Sulfur Addition
Wafer
Figure 8-11. BURNER BLOCK
5. Disconnect the thermocouple leads from the Burner Block.
6. Disconnect the heater leads from the Burner Blcok.
7. Disconnect the sample line from the Burner Blcok.
8. Disconnect the vent line from the Burner Block.
9. Disconnect the hydrogen (H2) and carrier lines from the Burner Block.
10. Remove the bracket screws that fasten the Burner Block to the oven.
11. Slide the Burner Block off the end of the Photomultiplier Assembly and remove the
Burner Block from the oven.
12. Install the new Burner Block in reverse order of removing it.
Replacing the Burner Block O-Rings
Refer to Figure 8-12 when performing this procedure.
1. Perform steps 1 through 4 of "Replacing the Burner Block."
2. To remove a particular O-Ring, carefully remove the associated connector and then
remove the O-Ring.
8-28 2000-OSM, C1
O-Ring
O-Ring 45051-4-106
45051-5-18
O-Ring O-Ring
45051-4-13 45051-4-106
Figure 8-12. BURNER BLOCK, SHOWING O-RINGS
3. Lubricate the new O-Ring with a slight film of silcone grease.
4. Insert the new O-Ring and reinstall the connector.
METHANIZER/AIR CLEANUP REPAIR
CAUTION


Let the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly cool a minimum of 30

minutes prior to disassembly. Internal surface temperatures can cause
severe burns if they are touched before they have cooled.
No asbestos is used in any assembly or component part of the

Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly. Therefore, all residual insulating
materials may be disposed of without regulator restrictions.
The high temperatures present under normal operating conditions can

cause wiring insulation to become brittle and fragile.
Ceramic temperature probes should always be considered fragile.

When servicing the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly, these
component parts must be handled with great care to avoid damage.
2000-OSM, C1 8-29
The analyzer uses two different types of Methanizer/Air Cleaner Assembly, Type 781 and
Type 805. These are essentially the same except for appearance.
The Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly comes from the factory supplied with both air cleanup
and methanizer tubes. The larger tube is used for air cleanup and the smaller tube for the
methanizer. If a tube is not being used, its inlet and outlet connections will be plugged. It is
necessary to replace only the tube that is in use.
Refer to Figure 8-13 for Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly component location.
Removing the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly
5. Label the tubing on both sides of the associated unions with temporary numbered tape
labels. The labels are later used to ensure correct tubing connections when the air
cleanup/methanizer is reinstalled.
Harness Assy
3 1 2 4
4 2 1 3
Air
Cleanup
Tube
Methanizer
Tube
TYPE 781 TYPE 805
Figure 8-13. METHANIZER/AIR CLEANUP ASSEMBLY
6. Using 7/16-inch and 5/16-inch open-end wrenches, disconnect the tubing connections
from the reducing unions.
7. Disconnect any retaining clamps that are securing the harness.
8-30 2000-OSM, C1
8. Remove the four Phillips head screws attaching the support brackets to the isothermal
oven wall. Secure the unit with your hand while removing the final top screws.
9. Lay the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly on a suitable work surface within the
constrained length of the heater harness. If only the catalytic tubes are to be replaced,
the harness will not require further disconnection.
10. Type 781 only: Remove the four Phillips head screws attaching the support bracket to
the top unit end caps and lay them aside.
CAUTION
Wait 30 minutes before proceeding to open the Methanizer/Air Cleanup

Assembly.
11. Mark the top and bottom caps and housing with a grease pencil or permanent marker.
When the caps are replaced with the marks aligned, the support bracket holes will be
correctly aligned.
12. Using a 9/64-inch Allen wrench, remove the four Allen head screws attaching the air
cleanup/methanizer top cap to the outer housing.
13. Grasp the housing and top cap. Withdraw the internal body assembly from the housing.
14. Using tweezers or a small screw driver, remove the insulation from around the body
assembly. Retain it for later use.
Removing the Catalytic Tubes
1. Using a 1/4-inch open-end wrench, disconnect the catalytic connections from the bottom
side of the cap.
2. To remove a catalytic tube, remove the Phillips head screw and flat washer located in
the center of the body at the opposite end from the harness.
3. Grasp the long coiled or “pig tail” end of the tubing and pull the short nutted end through
the body assembly.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the second catalytic tube, if it is present.
5. Carefully rotate the body assembly and remove the Phillips head retaining screw and
flat washer.
6. Note the location of the cartridge heater, temperature probes and thermocouple.
Carefully extract the cartridge heater, probes and thermocouple from the air cleanup
body.
7. Inspect the probe end of the wiring harness for damage. If any harness wiring or
devices are damaged, replace the harness as described in "Packing the Housing" and
"Installing the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly."
2000-OSM, C1 8-31
Installing the Catalytic Tubes
1. To install the air cleanup tube, insert the short end of the catalytic air tube through the
larger tube passage of the body and align it with the inside air inlet port connection of
the top cap.
2. To install the methanizer tube, insert the short end of the catalytic methanizer tube
through the smaller tube passage of the body and align it with the inside methanizer
inlet port connection.
3. Insert the tube fitting into the cap and tighten the inlet fitting nut finger tight.
4. Repeat step 3 for the second catalytic tube, if applicable.
5. Assemble the flat washer and screw.
6. Insert the flat washer retaining screw assembly into the center hole located in the end of
the body assembly opposite the harness and tighten it with the Phillips screwdriver.
7. If a new tube is being installed, a small loop or “pig tail” should be coiled in the tubing to
compensate for the excess tubing length. If installing an existing tube, the pig tail will
already be present.
8. Bend and position the coiled tubing such that the end fitting can be inserted into the
corresponding air or methanizer outlet connection port located on the bottom of the top
cap.
9. Tighten all inside catalytic tube inlet and outlet fittings, using a 1/4-inch open-end
wrench.
Packing the Housing
1. Pack a small amount of insulation around the probes, thermocouple, heater, and
associated wiring of the body assembly and set the assembly aside.
2. Using a 9/64-inch Allen wrench, loosen and remove the four Allen head screws
attaching the air cleaner/methanizer bottom cap to the outer housing. Separate and set
the bottom cap aside.
3. Carefully insert and press the body assembly into the outer housing.
4. Align the top cap with the marks on the outer housing. This will align the mounting
bracket holes in the top cap.
5. Install the four Allen head screws that secure the top cap to the outer housing and
tighten with a 9/64-inch Allen wrench.
6. Place a small quantity of insulation into the housing cavity and gently pack it down using
an object such as a screwdriver. Continue adding and packing in insulation until the
cavity is filled, taking care not the damage any wiring.
7. Install the bottom cap, aligning the mark on the cap with the mark on the housing. This
will align the bottom mounting bracket holes.
8-32 2000-OSM, C1
8. Install the four Allen head screws to secure the bottom cap to the housing, and tighten
with a 9/64-inch Allen wrench.
9. Type 781 only: Install the two mounting brackets with four Phillips head screws. The
mounting brackets should be aligned parallel to one another.
Installing the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly
1. Attach the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly to the interior of the isothermal oven wall.
Secure the air cleanup/methanizer with your hand while installing the four Phillips head
screws through the support bracket holes and into the mounting holes located in the
isothermal oven back interior wall.
2. Connect the tube connections to their respective reducing unions while matching the
numbers on the temporary labels.
3. Remove the temporary tape labels.
4. Apply carrier and air to the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly.
5. Using a liquid leak detection solution, test for leaks and make necessary repairs before
proceeding.
6. Route the heater harness in the oven interior, following the same path as the original
harness installation.
7. Connect heater one wires to J48E terminals 1 and 2, and connect heater two wires to
J48E terminals 5 and 6.
8. Connect the temperature sensor wires to terminals 1 through 6, as follows:
Overtemp Thermocouple: yellow (+) to 1

Overtemp Thermocouple: red (-) to 2
RTD sensor: 4 and 5
Shield (individual): 3
Composite Shield: 6
9. Close and secure the isothermal oven door, and the Controller front and side doors.
Air Cleanup Testing
1. Restore burner air to the cleanup unit by adjusting the burner air regulator for the correct
burner air pressure as indicated at the burner air pressure indicator.
2. If a methanizer is used, restore carrier gas by adjusting the carrier regulator for the
correct carrier pressure indication at the carrier pressure indicator.
3. Using a suitable liquid leak detection solution, test and repair any leaks that may be
present in the connections loosened or disconnected during the maintenance
procedure.
4. Close the isothermal oven door and secure the latch.
2000-OSM, C1 8-33
5. Restore carrier gas, oven air and fuel gas, if necessary, by adjusting the regulators for
the correct indications at the pressure indicators.
6. After ensuring the area is safe, and the proper permits are in effect, apply AC power.
7. To check the temperature of the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly, exit to the

Background screen by pressing the F1 soft key.
8. Access the Manual Control Mode screen by pressing the F2 (Manual Control) soft key.
9. Access the Pressure and Temperature Control Mode by pressing the F4 (Press. and
Temp. Control) soft key.
10. From the Pres and Temp Control screen, position the cursor up or down to highlight
TEMP CONTROL and press the F2 (Manual Temperature Control) soft key to access
the Manual Temperature Control Screen.
11. On the Manual Temperature Control screen observe the setpoint value. If necessary,
change the setpoint of the air cleanup/methanizer temperature controller to 450° C.
12. The temperature of the Methanizer/Air Cleanup Assembly can also be monitored from
this screen. The time required to achieve stability is two hours.
Air Cleanup Final Preparation
1. Restore all utility gases and verify that the pressures and flow rates are correct. These
include oven air, purge air, carrier, burner fuel, and burner air. If the faces of the
pressure gauges were previously marked and the marked location is known to be
correct, simply adjust the pressure regulators until the gauge pointers are aligned with
the pressure indicating marks. Refer to the engineering data package supplied with
your analyzer for the correct values.
2. After sufficient air purge time and when authorized by your safety administrator, apply
3. Verify that all Digital Temperature Control setpoint values are correct. Refer to the
engineering data package supplied with your analyzer for the correct values.
4. Allow the temperature controlled zone temperatures to equilibrate.
5. Verify that sample is being introduced to and is sufficiently flowing through the analyzer
sample valve.
6. Perform a minimum of three analyses to verify correct chromatographic response and

analysis reports. Minor adjustments or calibration may be necessary to achieve desired
analysis results.
7. Once analyzer operation and performance have been verified, place the analyzer back
in service.
8-34 2000-OSM, C1
REPAIRING THE CARRIER GAS PANEL (ANALOG)
Removing the Carrier Gas Panel
1. Open the Control Housing access panel (see Figure 8-14).
(1) Open Control

Housing Access
Panel
(2) Remove Screw
Figure 8-14. CARRIER GAS PANEL FROM RIGHT SIDE
2. Remove the screw from the Carrier Gas Panel (see Figure 8-14).
4. In the isothermal oven, remove tubing connections as shown in Figure 8-15.
(4) Remove tubing

connections
(5) Unscrew
feedthroughs
Figure 8-15. FRONT RIGHT SIDE OF OVEN
2000-OSM, C1 8-35
5. In the isothermal oven, unscrew the feedthroughs (see Figure 8-15) and pull them down
approximately 0.5 inches; it is not necessary to completely remove them.
6. Open the Controller front door to gain access the mother board.
7. In the Control Housing access area, unplug the alarm switches from the mother board
and unscrew them from the manifold (see Figure 8-16).
(7) Unscrew alarm

switches
(8) Remove plugs
(9) Remove socket

head screws
Figure 8-16. CONTROL HOUSING ACCESS AREA, RIGHT SIDE OF ANALYZER
8. In the Control Housing access area, remove the plugs from the manifold (see Figure
8-16).
9. In the Control Housing access area, remove the five socket head screws from the
manifold (see Figure 8-16).
10. Carefully remove the Carrier Gas Panel.
Replacing a Regulator
1. Remove the Carrier Gas Panel from the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the lines from the back of the regulator.
3. Remove the regulator adjusting knob.
4. Remove the nut securing the regulator to the panel.
5. Remove the regulator from the panel.
6. Remove the adjusting knob from the new regulator.
7. Insert the new regulator through the hole in the panel.
8. Fasten the nut securing the regulator to the panel.
8-36 2000-OSM, C1
9. Install the adjusting knob on the regulator.
10. Reinstall the lines on the back of the regulator.
11. Install the Carrier Gas Panel in the analyzer.
Replacing a Gauge
2. Disconnect the line from the back of the gauge.
3. Loosen the screws on the plate that secures the gauge to the panel and then remove
the plate.
4. Remove the gauge from the panel.
5. Insert the new gauge through the hole in the panel.
6. Install the plate that secures the gauge to the panel.
7. Tighten the screws holding the gauge and plate to the panel.
8. Reinstall the line on the back of the gauge.
Installing the Carrier Gas Panel
1. Insert the Carrier Gas Panel into the Control Housing access area of the analyzer
controller.
2. In the Control Housing access area, install the five socket head screws into the manifold
(see Figure 8-16), making sure the sealing gasket is in place.
3. In the Control Housing access area, install the plugs into the unused ports of the
manifold (see Figure 8-16).
4. In the Control Housing access area, screw the alarm switches into the manifold (see
Figure 8-16) and plug the ware harness into their original locations on the mother board.
5. In the isothermal oven, reinstall the feedthroughs (see Figure 8-15).
6. In the isothermal oven, reinstall tubing connections as shown in Figure 8-15.
7. Close the isothermal oven door.
8. Install the screw in the Carrier Gas Panel (see Figure 8-14).
9. Close the Control Housing access panel.
10. Close the Controller front door.
2000-OSM, C1 8-37
REPAIRING THE EPC CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Removing the EPC Control Assembly
1. Open the Control Housing access panel.
2. Remove the two screws holding the EPC cover and remove the cover panel.
4. In the isothermal oven, disconnect the EPC feedthrough tube nuts.
5. In the isothermal oven, unscrew the feedthroughs and pull them downward
approximately 0.5 inches; it is not necessary to remove them completely.
6. Open the Controller front door to gain access to the mother board.
7. At the left side of the mother board, disconnect the EPC Control Assembly cable from
J44.
8. On the EPC Multibus PCB in the card cage, disconnect the EPC Control Assembly
cable from J43 (near the bottom of the PCB).
9. In the Control Housing access area, unplug the alarm switches from the mother board
and unscrew them from the manifold.
10. In the Control Housing access area, remove the plugs from the manifold.
11. In the Control Housing access area, remove the five socket head screws from the
manifold.
12. Remove the four screws holding the Purge Air Panel in place and carefully pull the panel
forward and down.
13. On the side wall behind the Purge Air Panel remove the lock nut on the pipe nipple
which retains the EPC Panel cables (see Figure 8-17).
Lock Nut
Figure 8-17. EPC PANEL CABLE LOCK NUT
8-38 2000-OSM, C1
14. Remove the screw on the side of the EPC Control Assembly.
15. Carefully remove the Control Assembly.
Installing the EPC Control Assembly
Install the new EPC Control Assembly in the reverse order of removal, following the steps of
"Removing the EPC Control Assembly.".
Replacing a Sensor PCB
CAUTION
Use an ESD Wrist strap and proper grounding procedures before

handling any components in the EPC Control Assembly.
The Zones are arranged in the EPC Control Assembly enclosure with Zone one on the left
and Zone 5 on the right (see Figure 8-18).
Screw and Proportional Valve, Sensor PCB,
Washer Zone 5 Zone 5
Proportional Valve,
Zone 1
Heater
Sensor PCB,
Zone 1
Control PCB
Figure 8-18. EPC CONTROL ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS
2. Remove the ten screws holding the EPC Control Assembly cover and remove the cover.
Be careful not to damage the flame-proof or explosion-proof surfaces of the cover or the
body of the Control Assembly.
2000-OSM, C1 8-39
3. Unplug the large ribbon cable from the Control PCB (see Figure 8-19).
Heater Cable
AC Power Cable from
Backplane PCB J44
Valve Cable, Zone 1
Sensor PCB Cable, Valve Cable, Zone 2
Zone 1
Valve Cable, Zone 3
Sensor PCB Cable, Valve Cable, Zone 4
Zone 2
Valve Cable, Zone 5
Sensor PCB Cable,
Zone 3
Large Ribbon Cable

from EPC Sensor PCB Cable,
Multibus PCB Zone 4
Sensor PCB Cable,

Zone 5
Figure 8-19. EPC CONTROL PCB CABLING
4. Locate the Sensor to be replaced. Using a 1.5 mm hex socket wrench, remove the
screws and washers that retain the Sensor PCB.
5. Unplug the Sensor PCB from the Controller PCB.
6. Grasp the Sensor PCB at opposite corners and gently remove it from the EPC
Controller Assembly.
7. Check to ensure that o-ring is still on the Sensor PCB and not in the installation cavity.
If the o-ring is in the cavity, carefully remove it.
8. Remove the protective cap from the bottom of the new Sensor PCB and verify the
presence of an o-ring.
9. Place the Sensor PCB into position, with the cable iat the bottom right edge.
10. Place screws with nylon washers through holes in the Sensor PCB, then through the
spacers. (The spacers go into the recessed holes in the block.)
11. Alternate tightening the screws using a 1.5 mm torque limiting screwdriver set at 7 in.-
oz.
12. Plug the Sensor PCB cable into the corresponding connector on the Control PCB.
13. Reconnect the large ribbon cable to the Control PCB.
14. Reinstall the EPC Control Assembly cover and then insert the ten screws and tighten
them to 16 in.-lb. Ensure that the flame-proof or explosion-proof surfaces of the cover
or the body of the Control Assembly are not damaged.
15. Reinstall the EPC cover panel and insert the two holding screws.
Replacing a Proportional Valve
8-40 2000-OSM, C1
4. Locate the valve to be replaced (See Figure 8-18) and disconnect the valve cable at the
connector on the Control PCB.
NOTE
You may need to remove the Sensor PCB cable from the Control PCB
to allow access to the connector of some zones.
5. Using a 3 mm hex socket wrench, remove the screws and washers that secure the
valve in place.
6. Firmly grasp the valve and remove it from the enclosure.
7. Before inserting the new valve, check the position of the o-ring on the valve. If the o-
ring is positioned at top of groove, use a solder aid or non-metal pick to roll the o-ring
down to the bottom of the groove. The o-ring must not be twisted.
8. Insert the new valve into its position in the enclosure. The wires coming out of the coil
should face the Control PCB (See Figure 8-18).
9. Assemble the spring or Belville washer and hex socket head screw, ensuring that the
concave side of the washer is facing away from the head of the screw.
10. Start the screw with the spring washer in the hole next to the valve.
11. Press down on the center of the valve and finish tightening the screw.
12. Inspect the area around the valve to ensure the o-ring has not been damaged.
13. Insert and tighten the second screw and washer, if applicable.
14. Plug all cables back into their corresponding connectors on the Control PCB.
Replacing the Control PCB
CAUTION
Use an ESD Ground strap (wrist) and proper grounding rocedures

before handling any components in the EPC Control Assembly.
2000-OSM, C1 8-41
4. Unplug all valve, sensor PCB, and heater cables.
5. Using a 2.5 mm hex socket wrench, remove four screws and washers (two from the
triacs and two from the PCB mounting brackets).
6. Pull the Control PCB straight out of the enclosure toward you.
7. Remove fish paper isolator (do not throw away).
8. On the new Control PCB, place a thin layer of thermal joint compound on all sides and
the bottom of each RTD, and on the back of each triac.
9. Insert the Control PCB into enclosure with components and connectors facing up.
10. Align RTDs with the holes in the enclosure and ensure the RTDs are inserted in the
holes flush with the enclosure.
11. Using a 2.5 mm hex socket wrench, attach the Control PCB to the enclosure with four
screws and washers.
12. Insert the fish paper insulator between the enclosure and the back side (solder side) of
the Control PCB.
13. Plug all cables back into their corresponding connectors on the Control PCB.
Replacing the Heater
3. Unplug the large ribbon cable from Control PCB (see Figure 8-19).
4. Locate the Sensor PCBs for Zones 1 and 2 (see Figure 8-18).
5. Using a 1.5 mm hex socket wrench, remove screws and washers that mount the
Sensors and set these screws and washers aside for later use.
6. Remove the Sensor PCBs and set them aside for later reinstallation.
7. Unplug the heater connector from the Controller PCB.
8-42 2000-OSM, C1
8. Carefully extract the heater from its cavity in the enclosure.
9. Place a thin layer of anti-seize compound on the new heater.
10. Insert the new heater in its cavity in the enclosure, making sure it goes all the way down
in the cavity.
11. Clean any anti-seize compound residue from the enclosure.
12. Plug the heater connector into the Controller PCB.
13. Replace the Sensor PCBs, following steps 9 through 13 of "Replacing a Sensor PCB."
CALIBRATING THE ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROLLER
The EPC should only require calibration if a component has been replaced. You should only
need to calibrate the particular zone affected by the servicing. To calibrate a zone:
1. Determine the zone that needs calibration.
3. Eliminate any back pressure to the zone by loosening the feedthrough fitting associated
with the zone to be calibrated (see Figure 8-20).
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL
1 2 3 4 5
ZONE FITTINGS
Figure 8-20. LOCATION OF ZONE FITTINGS
4. On the Controller, verify the Background screen is displayed and then press the F2
(Manual Control) soft key.
5. On the Manual Control Mode screen press the F4 (Press. & Temp. Control) soft key.
2000-OSM, C1 8-43
6. On the Pres and Temp Control screen (see Figure 8-21), cursor to PRES CONTROL
and press the F2 (Manual Pressure Control ) soft key.
***** Pres and Temp Control *****
TEMP CONTROL
PRES CONTROL
TEMP CONFIGURATION
Manual Pressure View

Escape Pressure Config Alarms
Control
F1 F2 F3 F4
7. On the Manual Pressure control Mode screen (see Figure 8-22), enter the zone number
of the zone you want to calibrate.
**** Manual Pressure Control Mode ****

COLUMN ISO 0.0241 0.0000 0.0000
ANALYSIS ISO 0.360 0.0000 0.0000
SELECTOR ISO 0.699 0.0000 0.0000
ANALYSIS ISO 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
COLUMN PROG 0.00167 0.0000 1.0000
Valve # : [0] Time : 0125
Zone # : 1 State : Idle
Set Point : 0.00000000
Ramp Rate : 1.0000000 Ver A
VALVES : --3-5-------
Accept Calibrate
Escape Control Zone
Point
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 8-22. MANUAL PRESSURE CONTROL MODE SCREEN
8-44 2000-OSM, C1
8. Press the F3 (Calibrate Zone) soft key. The GCC displays “Calibrate zone, hold switch
on board.”
9. Hold down the switch on the EPC Multibus PCB. The GCC displays “Are You Sure?”
10. Continue holding down the switch and press “Y” on the keyboard to save the new
calibration.
11. When the GCC displays “This zone has been calibrated,” release the switch.
12. If the Set Point shows an unexpected value, enter the desired set point value. (The
unexpected value is an offset corrected by the calibration; this is a software reporting
function only, which is not used by the system.)
13. Retighten the fitting loosened in step 3.
REPAIRING PURGE AIR PANEL COMPONENTS
Removing the Purge Air Panel
1. Remove the four screws holding the panel in place (see Figure 8-23).
Mounting
Screws
Figure 8-23. PURGE AIR PANEL FASTENERS
2. Carefully pull the panel forward.
Replacing a Regulator
1. Remove the Purge Air Panel from the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the lines from the back of the regulator, using 1/2-inch and 9/16-inch open-
end wrenches.
3. Remove the regulator adjusting knob.
4. Remove the nut and sealing gasket securing the regulator to the panel.
5. Remove the regulator from the panel.
6. Remove the adjusting knob from the new regulator.
2000-OSM, C1 8-45
7. Insert the new regulator through the hole in the panel.
8. Install the sealing gasket and fasten the nut securing the regulator to the panel.
9. Install the adjusting knob on the regulator.
10. Reinstall the lines on the back of the regulator.
11. Install the Purge Air Panel in the analyzer.
Replacing a Gauge
2. Disconnect the line from the back of the gauge, using a 9/16-inch open-end wrench.
3. Loosen the screws on the plate that secures the gauge to the panel and then remove
the plate.
4. Remove the gauge and sealing gasket from the panel.
5. Insert the new gauge and sealing gasket through the hole in the panel.
6. Install the plate that secures the gauge to the panel.
7. Tighten the screws holding the gauge and plate to the panel.
8. Reinstall the line on the back of the gauge.
Installing the Purge Air Panel
1. Carefully put the panel back in place, aligning the mounting holes.
2. Install the four screws that hold the panel in place.
SETTING JUMPERS
The following paragraphs describe how to set the various PCB jumpers.
Backplane PCB
The Controller Backplane PCB has six jumpers to set up (see Figure 8-24).
Jumpers JP1 and JP5 are used to bypass pressure switch connection points for certain
analyzer configurations. Since the purge switches are daisy chained in series, it is
necessary to jumper across switches that are not connected. Jumper JP1 has its shunt
installed between pins 1 and 2 for standard or Sparger oven usage; the shunt is installed
between pins 2 and 3 for temperature programmed applications. Jumper JP5 has its shunt
installed between pins 1 and 2 for single purge area; the shunt is installed between pins 2
and 3 for dual purge location applications.
8-46 2000-OSM, C1
Jumpers JP2, JP3 and JP6 are associated with the purge alarm switch closures applied to
the Chroma I/O PCB. Jumper JP2 has its shunt installed between pins 1 and 2 for X Purge
applications only; the shunt is installed between pins 2 and 3 for Y or Z purge applications.
Jumper JP3 has its shunt installed between pins 1 and 2 for standard analyzers; the shunt is
installed between pins 2 and 3 for temperature programmed and Sparger applications.
Jumper JP6 has its shunt installed between pins 1 and 2 for single purge configurations; the
shunt is installed between pins 2 and 3 for dual purge applications.
Jumper JP4 is used to connect two detectors to a single Chroma I/O PCB. The location of
the jumper shunt depends on the revision of the Backplane PCB. Backplane PCBs that do
not have JP5 and JP6 are artwork revision D or earlier, while those having JP5 and JP6 are
artwork revision E or later.
• For revision D or earlier, the shunt is installed between pins 1 and 2 when the outputs of
two detector amplifiers are applied to a single Chroma I/O PCB; the shunt is installed
between pins 2 and 3 for normal operation (a Chroma I/O PCB dedicated to a single
detector amplifier).
• Revision E or later: the shunt goes between pins 1 and 2 for normal operation (a
Chroma I/O PCB dedicated to a single detector amplifier); the shunt is installed between
pins 2 and 3 when the outputs of two detector amplifiers are applied to a single Chroma
I/O PCB.
JP5 JP1
JP3
JP2
JP6
JP4
Figure 8-24. BACKPLANE PCB JUMPER LOCATIONS
2000-OSM, C1 8-47
DTC Backplane PCB
The Digital Temperature Controller (DTC) PCB has eight jumpers and one switch to set up
(see Figure 8-25 for location).
Switch SW1 is used to save configuration information to protected memory. Its use is
described in “DIGITAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER” in Section 4, by the statement “Hold
down the switch on the DTC Backplane PCB.”
JP4
JP4
JP1
JP1
JP5
JP6
JP5
JP6
J2
J2
JP3
JP3
JP2
JP2
SW1
SW1
J3
J3
Figure 8-25. DTC BACKPLANE PCB SWITCH AND JUMPER LOCATIONS
Jumpers J2 and J3 are T-Rating jumpers. The jumper shunts must be installed exactly as
shown below to ensure the temperature control operates properly. If they are set incorrectly,
T-Rating disagreement alarms will result (0 = no jumper; 1 = jumper installed).
Pins T5 T4A T4 T3B T3 T2C T2 T1

1-2 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
3-4 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
5-6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
7-8 Shunts installed in these positions Zone 1

9-10 allow set points (for the respective Zone 2
11-12 zones) to be above the T-Rating, Zone 3
13-14 for explosion proof zones only. Zone 4
15-16 Zone 5
8-48 2000-OSM, C1
JP1 is the service diagnostics jumper. For normal operation the shunt is installed between
pins 1 and 2. For service diagnostic screen use (only) the shunt is installed between pins 2
and 3. After servicing, the shunt must be reinstalled between pins 1 and 2.
JP4 is the VAC Conditioning Board jumper. If the analyzer has one VAC Conditioning PCB
installed, the shunt should be between pins 2 and 3. If the analyzer has two VAC
Conditioning PCBs installed, the shunt should be between pins 1 and 2.
JP2, JP3, JP5, and JP6 are the jumpers for the temperature zone boards. These jumpers
are required for the software to recognize unused zones. Jumpers are installed from the
even pins of unused zones to the even pins of used zones, for both Micro #1 (JP2 and JP3)
and Micro #2 (JP5 and JP6). If all zones are in use, no jumpers are installed. Zone jumpers
are identified as follows:
Micro #1 Pin Micro #2 Pin

Zone 1 JP3-2 JP5-2
Zone 2 JP3-4 JP5-4
Zone 3 JP3-6 JP5-6
Zone 4 JP2-2 JP6-2
Zone 5 JP2-4 JP6-4
Example: if Zone 5 is not used, one jumper must be run between JP2-4 and JP2-2 or one of
the other pins listed under Micro #1 Pins, and a second jumper must be run between JP6-4
and JP6-2 or one of the other pins listed under Micro #2 Pins.
DTC Zone PCB
There can be up to five zone boards, one for each designated temperature zone. The
only jumper on a zone board is JP1 (see Figure 8-26). How this jumper is set
depends on the type of temperature sensor used for the zone. The jumper shunt
should be between pins 1 and 2 for a 400 ohm platinum probe sensor; it should be
between pins 2 and 3 for a thermocouple sensor.
3 2 1
JP1
Figure 8-26. DTC ZONE BOARD JUMPER LOCATION
2000-OSM, C1 8-49
VAC Conditioning PCB
There can be either one or two VAC Conditioning PCBs, depending on the application. Each
board has two jumpers to be set, JP4 and JP5 (see Figure 8-27). These jumpers are set
according to the voltage supplied to the board, as follows (JP4 is the hot side and JP5 is the
neutral side):
Applied Voltage JP4 Shunt JP5 Shunt

32 VAC 1-2 1-2
110 VAC 3-4 3-4
220 VAC 5-6 5-6
JP4
VAC CONDITIONING
ASSY 802A009B-
JP4
1
2
JP5
1
JP5
Figure 8-27. VAC CONDITIONING BOARD JUMPER LOCATIONS
Front Panel PCB
There is one adjustment and three jumpers on this board (see Figure 8-28). The adjustment
is potentiometer R56, which is used to set the display contrast for optimum viewing.
JP7 JP6 JP5

1 2 3
TX JP6
RCV JP7 JP5
STANDARD INSTALL STANDARD 1, 2
LOCOM REMOVE LOCOM 2, 3
R56 CONTRAST ADJUST
R56
Figure 8-28. FRONT PANEL PCB ADJUSTMENT AND JUMPER LOCATIONS
The jumpers relate to the LOCOM option. JP5 has its shunt is between pins 1 and 2 for
normal operation, between pins 2 and 3 for LOCOM installations. JP6 and JP7
8-50 2000-OSM, C1
have the shunts in place for normal operation and the shunts removed for LOCOM
installations.
FID Amplifier PCB
The jumper on this PCB relates to intercolumn detector usage. For normal operation shunts
should be installed in the first two positions at the right side of J18. These
shunts are removed for an application using intercolumn detectors (see Figure 8-29).
J18
J18
Figure 8-29. FID AMPLIFIER PCB JUMPER LOCATIONS
Filament TCD Amplifier PCB
The jumpers on this PCB relate to amplifier gain, single or dual carrier, temperature ranges,
intercolumn detectors, and special testing (see Figure 8-30 for location).
GAIN JUMPERS CARRIER JUMPERS

WT11 - WT13 WT7 - WT10
WT13
GAIN HI
WT12
GAIN LO
WT11
WT9 WT10
CARRIER SINGLE
CARRIER DUAL
WT7 WT8
TEMP HI
WT3 WT6
WT2 WT1 WT4 WT5
TEMP LO TEMP LO CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
SERIAL NO.
FILIMENT BRIDGE
ASSY 802A003B-
TEMPERATURE JUMPERS
WT1 - WT6
Figure 8-30. FILAMENT TCD AMPLIFIER PCB JUMPER LOCATIONS
2000-OSM, C1 8-51
The gain jumper is normally connected between WT11 and WT12. For high gain applications
this jumper is connected between WT12 and WT13.
The carrier jumper is normally connected between WT9 and WT10 (single carrier). For dual
carrier applications this jumper is connected between WT7 and WT8.
The temperature jumpers are normally connected between WT1 and WT2 and between
WT4 and WT5 (low temperature). For high temperature applications these jumpers are
connected between WT1 and WT3 and between WT4 and WT6.
For normal operation shunts should be installed in the first two positions at the right side of
J18. These shunts are removed for an application using intercolumn detectors.
The jumper between WT14 and WT15 must be in place for normal operation. It is only
removed when when hi-pot testing is to be performed.
Thermistor TCD Amplifier Interface PCB
The Thermistor Amplifier Interface PCB currently supports one or two Thermistor
Amplifier PCBs (see Figure 8-31).
AMPLIFIER #1 AMPLIFIER #2 AMPLIFIER #3 AMPLIFIER #4
JP2 JP2A
JP1 JP1A
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
JP2 JP1 JP1A JP2A
Figure 8-31. THERMISTOR AMPLIFIER INTERFACE PCB JUMPER LOCATIONS
For single detector applications, one Thermistor Amplifier PCB is used, mounted in the
Amplifier #1 position. Jumpers JP-1, JP-2, JP-1A and JP-2A all have their shunts between
terminals 1 and 2. The output signal is routed through J13A.
For dual detector applications, two Thermistor Amplifier PCBs are used, mounted in the
Amplifier #1 and Amplifier #2 positions. Jumpers JP-1, JP-2 and JP-2A all have
8-52 2000-OSM, C1
their shunts between terminals 1 and 2. Jumper JP-1A has its shunt between terminals 2
and 3. The output signal of Amplifier #1 is routed through J13A and the output signal of
Amplifier #2 is routed through J13B.
EPC Multibus PCB
This board has one jumper and one switch to set up (see Figure 8-32).
JP1 is the service diagnostics jumper. For normal operation the shunt is installed between
pins 1 and 2. For installation and service the shunt is installed between pins 2 and 3. After
installation or service, the shunt must be reinstalled between pins 1 and 2.
Switch SW1 is used to save configuration information to protected memory. Its use is
described in “ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL OPTION” in Section 4, by the
statement “Hold down the switch on the Electronic Pressure Control PCB.”
SW1
JP1
Figure 8-32. EPC MULTIBUS PCB JUMPER LOCATION
2000-OSM, C1 8-53
EPC Control PCB
This board has a single jumper, JP2 (see Figure 8-33). For normal operation JP2 has a
shunt between pins 2 and 3. For servicing of the block, the shunt is placed between pins 1
and 2 to turn off the heater.
JP2
U1 U18
Figure 8-33. EPC CONTROL PCB JUMPER LOCATION
Chroma I/O PCB (old type)
CAUTION
This board can only be used when the analyzer also has the old type
Single Board Computer PCB (identified by having a toggle Reset
switch).
This board, part number 3528515-2, has two jumpers which are mutually exclusive. When
there is only one Chroma I/O PCB in the analyzer, or the board is used as Chroma I/O PCB
#1 in a simultaneous dual detector analyzer, the jumper will be located between the terminals
of JP1 (see Figure 8-34). This jumper is part of the printed circuit trace on this version of the
Chroma I/O PCB.
Jumper trace is on the

circuit side of the board.
Figure 8-34. OLD CHROMA I/O PCB JUMPERS
8-54 2000-OSM, C1
When a second Chroma I/O PCB is used, Chroma I/O PCB #2 must have the JP1 jumper
trace cut and a jumper installed between the JP2 terminals.
Chroma I/O PCB (new type)
This board, part number 802A028D-_, has six jumpers, JP1 through JP6 (see Figure 8-35).
JP1: When there is only one Chroma I/O PCB in the analyzer, or the board is used as
Chroma I/O PCB #1 in a simultaneous dual detector analyzer, the shunt is installed
between pins 1 and 2.
When the board is used as Chroma I/O PCB #2, the shunt is installed between pins 2
and 3.
JP2 through JP6: These jumpers are installed between pins 2 and 3 on the Chroma I/O
PCB (later revisions of this board will have the jumpers hard-wired).
JP1
JP3
JP2 JP4
JP6 JP5
JP3
JP2
JP6 JP5 JP4
Figure 8-35. NEW CHROMA I/O PCB JUMPERS
2000-OSM, C1 8-55
Power Supply PCB
This board has two jumpers (see Figure 8-36), neither of which should have a shunt installed
during normal operation. During troubleshooting a shunt can be installed between pins 1
and 2 of JP4 to enable the power supply LEDs. This shunt must be removed before
returning the analyzer to normal operation.
1 2 3
JP2
1 2 3
JP4
JP2 JP4
Figure 8-36. POWER SUPPLY PCB JUMPERS
VALCO DIAPHRAGM VALVE REPAIR
The Valco DV22-2110 ten-port diaphragm valve is used in some analyzers (see Figure 8-37).
This procedure and the accompanying illustrations were reprinted with permission of VICI,
Houston, TX, USA.
Figure 8-37. VALCO 10-PORT DIAPHRAGM VALVE
Removing the Valve
1. Tag all valve connections.
2. Using a 1/4-inch wrench, remove the connections from the valve cap.
8-56 2000-OSM, C1
3. Using a 7/64-inch hex key wrench, loosen the clamp ring screw.
4. Remove the valve from the clamp ring and take it out of the analyzer.
Repairing the Valve
1. Place the valve on a clean work surface.
2. Note the location of port 1 on the valve, opposite the air inlet (see Figure 8-38).
Figure 8-38. CAP ORIENTATION
3. Using a 9/64-inch hex key wrench, remove the screw from the valve cap (see Figure
8-39).
Hex Head
Screw
Cap Plunger Enlarged

to show
Counterbored Eng
Diaphragm
Plungers
Alignment
Pins
Body
Figure 8-39. EXPLODED VIEW OF VALCO DIAPHRAGM VALVE
4. Carefully remove the valve cap from the two alignment pins.
5. Set the cap aside, with the polished side up so that it does not get scratched.
6. Remove the old diaphragm.
2000-OSM, C1 8-57
7. Remove the plungers.
8. Install new plungers, ensuring that the counterbored end is up toward the valve cap (see
Figure 8-39).
9. Install new diaphragm, ensuring that the marking “TOP” is toward the valve cap. If there
is no marking, ensure the indentation in the diaphragm is toward the valve body (see
Figure 8-39).
10. Reinstall the valve cap, verifying that port 1 is correctly located.
11. Install the valve cap screw and tighten with a 9/64-inch hex key wrench.
Reinstalling the Valve
1. Place the valve in the clamp ring and rotate it to the orientation of the valve that was
removed.
2. Using a 7/64-inch hex key wrench, tighten the clamp ring screw.
3. Install the connections to the valve cap, matching the numbering on the valve to the tags
on the connections.
4. Using a 1/4-inch wrench, tighten each connection.
VistaNET DEBUG MONITOR
Purpose
The VistaNET Communications Board in the Card Cage has an on-board debug monitor that
allows examination of the token bus communications. Several parameters accessible from
the debug connector allow the technician to easily troubleshoot common problems.
CAUTION
You must work carefully with the Debug Monitor. Inserting erroneous
information can cause networking problems. If such problems occur
you must reset the network to reinstate proper operation.
Making the Connections
The VistaNET Communications Board has a connector that allows a serial cable to be
connected to the board. ABB Aftermarket Spares can provide this cable (P/N 3617695-1).
The RS-232 communications protocol allows the use of a laptop PC for access. Included in
Windows 95 is the Hillgraeve HyperTerminal Application, which emulates several popular
devices. This cable should be connected to the Communications Board (see Figure 8-40)
and to the appropriate COM port (Domain 1 or 2) on the laptop PC.
On the laptop PC, set the terminal emulation to VT100, and the associated serial parameters
to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, no handshaking.
8-58 2000-OSM, C1
J4
COMMUNICATIONS
PCB
COMMUNICATIONS
PCB
DEBUG J3
DOMAIN 1 J2
DOMAIN 2 J1
Figure 8-40. COMMUNICATIONS BOARD DEBUG CONNECTION
Startup
When you have set up the terminal application and connected to the communications board,
press <CTRL> A to invoke the Main Menu (see Figure 8-41).
Figure 8-41. MAIN MENU
When you exit the application, press <CTRL> Z to end the session.
CAUTION
Always end the session before exiting the monitor. While the monitor
is intended to be non-invasive, it can affect operation over time. Some
performance parameters are degraded by the monitor program.
2000-OSM, C1 8-59
The Main Menu is divided into three sections: the Information Display at the top of the
screen, Menu Items just below this information, and Statistical Data between the two
horizontal lines.
Information Display
Firmware Revision: Indicates the part number and revision of the communications board
firmware. The last digit of the revision indicates the position of the high-speed jumper
on the board (L indicates low speed operation, H indicates high-speed operation).
IRQ: Indicates “0” when the laptop PC is connected to the GC Communications Board.
Adapter Segment: Indicates “000H” when the laptop PC is connected to the GC

Communications Board.
Menu Items
Dump Memory: Entered as DM XXXX where XXXX is the hexadecimal address to be

examined. Memory is dumped by screen. Pressing the Enter key will scroll to the next
block. The Escape key aborts the command. Figure 8-42 illustrates this screen.
Figure 8-42. TYPICAL DUMP MEMORY SCREEN
Fill Memory: Entered as FM XXXX YYYY ZZ where XXXX is the starting address, YYYY
ending, ZZ pattern to be used to fill the memory block (all in hex).
Read Memory: Entered as RM XXXX where XXXX is the hexadecimal address to be

examined.
Dump Packet: Entered as DP X where X = 0 to 16, indicating the buffer address of the
packet to be examined (0 is the DP RAM buffer last uploaded to the host).
Write Memory: Entered as WM XXXX YY where XXXX is the hexadecimal address to be

written with pattern YY (all in hex).
8-60 2000-OSM, C1
Read/Write Memory: Entered as RWM XXXX YY where XXXX is the hexadecimal
addressed to be written with pattern YY, then read (all in hex).
Show Registers: Entered as SR (see Figure 8-43). The internal register contents of the
80C152 microcontroller are shown. Refer to the manufacturer’s data sheet for an
explanation of the contents. Type MM to return to the Main Menu.
Figure 8-43. TYPICAL SHOW REGISTERS SCREEN
Ignore Token: Entered as IT, used for software loading tests. In this mode, the
communications board remains part of the token bus, however tokens are merely
passed, and no UDP packets are transmitted or received at this node. THIS
COMMAND IS NOT TO BE USED IN THE FIELD.
Main Menu From the SFR display, this command returns to the main menu.
WARNING
The Promiscuous Mode command is used only in the factory.
Promiscuous Mode: Entered as PM, this command is used in software

troubleshooting. In this mode, this node receives all UDP packets, whether destined for
this station or not.
Reset Statistics: Entered as RS, this command resets the cumulative statistics collected at
this node.
Reset stats Globally: Entered as RG, this command resets all cumulative statistics
collected at all nodes by sending a reset statistics command to all nodes by transmitting
a special token.
2000-OSM, C1 8-61
CAUTION
The Dump History command is rather invasive, and may cause this
station to drop tokens.
Dump History: Entered as DH, the history buffer maintained at this node is displayed (see
Figure 8-44).
Displayed are the source addresses of the last 255 stations to send a token on the wire.
Note that the address of the station displaying this buffer is not seen. The location of the
asterisks (***) shows the starting point of the display. The escape key will return to the
main menu. Pressing Enter will display the content of the next buffer captured.
Figure 8-44. TYPICAL DUMP HISTORY SCREEN
Statistical Display
On the screen, several items of interest to the technician are displayed. The Statistical
Display is divided, roughly, into three columns: Transmit, Receive and General Statistics.
Following is an explanation of each screen element.
Transmit Statistics
Transmit Requests: Number of requests for UDP transmission from the host.
Buffers Recycled: Number of requests for UDP transmissions processed by this board.
Transmits: Number of UDP transmissions successfully made.
Transmit Errors: Number of UDP transmissions not acknowledged by the destination

(or acknowledgement was lost on line).
8-62 2000-OSM, C1
Retries: Number of UDP transmissions retried. Under normal conditions, such as a
station off-line, this will be exactly twice the number of Transmit Errors.
Collisions: Number of times this station has detected a loss of transmission on the wire
due to collision with another station or overcome by noise.
Last Destination: Address of the destination of the last UDP transmission.
Tokens Issued: Number of times this station has detected a dead line and the slot
assignment time has expired, resulting in an issuance of a token.
Tokens Dropped: Number of times the token destination did not accept the token, or
the token was lost. This indicates the number of times this station has seen a
station go off-line, or line noise caused the packet to be corrupted.
Tokens Passed: Number of tokens processed by this station.
Receive Statistics
Receives: Number of packets sent to this station.
Errors: Number of unintelligible packets received by this station. Since there is an error
condition, it is indeterminate whether this was a UDP packet or a token.
Last Error: Encoded error condition indicating the failure detected by a receiver error,
as follows:
1. Overrun - indicates a new character received before the last was processed.
2. Collision Abort - indicates a collision occurred during reception.
4. Alignment - indicates a new start of frame was detected before an end of frame.
8. CRC Error - indicates the CRC was in error.
16. Unknown - indicates more than one error condition existed during reception.
32. DMA Overrun - indicates the sending station attempted to send a packet larger
than UDP size, 524 bytes.
Uploads: Number of packets moved from the receive buffer pool into dual port memory
for transfer to the host.
Queued: Number of interrupts issued to the host to retrieve an uploaded packet.
Dequeued: Number of interrupts issued to this board from the host indicating
acknowledgement of a queued packet.
Backups: Number of times this station has run out of receive buffers due to host
interrupt latency.
Invalid: Number of times the host issued unknown commands to this board.
Tokens Received: Number of tokens received by this station. Tokens are broadcast
objects, all tokens are seen by every station.
2000-OSM, C1 8-63
Tokens Dumped: Number of tokens disposed of due to load at this station, or another
station issued a token (indicating a receiver problem at that station). A token was
seen on the wire while this station had a token.
General Statistics
Address: This station’s wire address.
Mode: Indicates the Software State of this station. These conditions are additive, bits
encoded as follows:
1. Receive Request Pending - A UDP packet has been received and needs
processing.
2. Receive Buffer Needed - The receiver buffer pool is full. When one is available,
re-enable the receiver.
4. Transmit Requested - A UDP packet is in dual port memory and needs to be

transmitted.
8. Transmit Completed - The last UDP transmission was successful, notify host.
16. Transmit in Error - The last UDP transmission was in error, notify host.
32. Upload Completed - The last DMA transfer to the host is completed, notify host
a UDP packet has been received.
64. Initialization Requested - The host has requested the board reinitialize itself.
128. Line Timer Expired - The current transmission is taking too long, go into
override mode. The communications board will attempt to clear line condition.
(Caused by incorrect line biasing.)
256. Send Token - A token is ready to be sent to the next station in the token
algorithm.
512. Terminal Input Pending - Carriage return pressed by debug operator, Process
command.
1024. Debug Mode - Update screen each pass through processing loop.
2048. End of Interrupt - Send end of interrupt to host interrupt process.
4096. Initialization Completed - Send initialization complete message to host.
Input: Address of next buffer to fill in receive buffer pool.
Output: Address of next buffer to empty into dual ported RAM.
Max Slack: Maximum difference between input and output, or host efficiency (lag).
Gap Device: Location of next device in gap search algorithm.
Token Dest: Location of next non-gap update token.
8-64 2000-OSM, C1
Next Alive: Address of next station detected on the line.
Next Recvd: Address of the source address of the token seen on the wire subsequent
to this station sending a token.
Rate: Number of total detected errors per billion opportunities to generate errors.
DUAL AIR CLEANUP REPAIR
The Dual Air Cleanup Assembly appears in analyzers having two detectors. Refer to Figure
8-45 for Dual Air Cleanup Assembly component location.
Harness
Assembly
3 1 2 4
Air Cleanup Air Cleanup

Tube #1 Tube #2
Figure 8-45. DUAL AIR CLEANUP ASSEMBLY
CAUTION


Let the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly cool a minimum of 30 minutes prior
to disassembly. Internal surface temperatures can cause severe burns
if they are touched before they have cooled.
No asbestos is used in any assembly or component part of the Dual Air

Cleanup Assembly. Therefore, all residual insulating materials may be
disposed of without regulator restrictions.
2000-OSM, C1 8-65
CAUTION
The high temperatures present under normal operating conditions can

cause wiring insulation to become brittle and fragile.
Ceramic temperature probes should always be considered fragile.

When servicing the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly, these component parts
must be handled with great care to avoid damage.
Removing the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly
5. Label the tubing on both sides of the associated unions with temporary numbered tape
labels. The labels are later used to ensure correct tubing connections when the air
cleanup is reinstalled.
6. Using 7/16-inch and 5/16-inch open-end wrenches, disconnect the tubing connections
from the reducing unions.
7. Disconnect any retaining clamps that are securing the harness.
8. Remove the four Phillips head screws attaching the support brackets to the isothermal
oven wall. Secure the unit with your hand while removing the final top screws.
9. Lay the air cleanup assembly on a suitable work surface within the constrained length of
the heater harness. If only the air cleanup tubes are to be replaced, the harness will not
require further disconnection.
CAUTION
Wait 30 minutes before proceeding to open the Dual Air Cleanup

Assembly.
10. Mark the top and bottom caps and housing with a grease pencil or permanent marker.
When the caps are replaced with the marks aligned, the support bracket holes will be
correctly aligned.
11. Using a 9/64-inch Allen wrench, remove the four Allen head screws attaching the air
cleanup top cap to the outer housing.
12. Grasp the housing and top cap. Withdraw the internal body assembly from the housing.
13. Using tweezers or a small screw driver, remove the insulation from around the body
assembly. Retain it for later use.
8-66 2000-OSM, C1
Removing the Air Cleanup Tubes
1. Using a 1/4-inch open-end wrench, disconnect the air cleanup tube connections from
the bottom side of the cap.
2. To remove an air cleanup tube, remove the Phillips head screw and flat washer located
in the center of the body at the opposite end from the harness.
3. Grasp the long coiled or “pig tail” end of the tubing and pull the short nutted end through
the body assembly.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the second air cleanup tube, if applicable.
5. Carefully rotate the body assembly and remove the Phillips head retaining screw and
flat washer.
6. Note the location of the cartridge heater, temperature probes and thermocouple.
Carefully extract the cartridge heater, probes and thermocouple from the air cleanup
body.
7. Inspect the probe end of the wiring harness for damage. If any harness wiring or
devices are damaged, replace the harness as described in "Packing the Housing" and
"Installing the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly."
Installing the Air Cleanup Tubes
1. To install an air cleanup tube, insert the short end of the catalytic air tube through the
larger tube passage of the body and align it with the inside air inlet port connection of
the top cap.
2. Insert the tube fitting into the cap and tighten the inlet fitting nut finger tight.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second air cleanup tube, if applicable.
4. Assemble the flat washer and screw.
5. Insert the flat washer retaining screw assembly into the center hole located in the end of
the body assembly opposite the harness and tighten it with the Phillips screwdriver.
6. If a new tube is being installed, a small loop or “pig tail” should be coiled in the tubing to
compensate for the excess tubing length. If installing an existing tube, the pig tail will
already be present.
7. Bend and position the coiled tubing such that the end fitting can be inserted into the
corresponding air or methanizer outlet connection port located on the bottom of the top
cap.
8. Tighten all inside catalytic tube inlet and outlet fittings, using a 1/4-inch open-end
wrench.
Packing the Housing
1. Pack a small amount of insulation around the probes, thermocouple, heater, and
associated wiring of the body assembly and set the assembly aside.
2000-OSM, C1 8-67
2. Using a 9/64-inch Allen wrench, loosen and remove the four Allen head screws
attaching the air cleaner/methanizer bottom cap to the outer housing. Separate and set
the bottom cap aside.
3. Carefully insert and press the body assembly into the outer housing.
4. Align the top cap with the marks on the outer housing. This will align the mounting
bracket holes in the top cap.
5. Install the four Allen head screws that secure the top cap to the outer housing and
tighten with a 9/64-inch Allen wrench.
6. Place a small quantity of insulation into the housing cavity and gently pack it down using
an object such as a screwdriver. Continue adding and packing in insulation until the
cavity is filled, taking care not the damage any wiring.
7. Install the bottom cap, aligning the mark on the cap with the mark on the housing. This
will align the bottom mounting bracket holes.
8. Install the four Allen head screws to secure the bottom cap to the housing, and tighten
with a 9/64-inch Allen wrench.
Installing the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly
1. Attach the Dual Air Cleanup Assembly to the interior of the isothermal oven wall. Secure
the air cleanup/methanizer with your hand while installing the four Phillips head screws
through the support bracket holes and into the mounting holes located in the isothermal
oven back interior wall.
2. Connect the tube connections to their respective reducing unions while matching the
numbers on the temporary labels.
3. Remove the temporary tape labels.
4. Apply carrier and air to the air cleanup assembly.
5. Using a liquid leak detection solution, test for leaks and make necessary repairs before
proceeding.
6. Route the heater harness in the oven interior, following the same path as the original
harness installation.
7. Connect heater one wires to J48E terminals 1 and 2, and connect heater two wires to
J48E terminals 5 and 6.
8. Connect the temperature sensor wires to terminals 1 through 6, as follows:
Overtemp Thermocouple: yellow (+) to 1

Overtemp Thermocouple: red (-) to 2
RTD sensor: 4 and 5
Shield (individual): 3
Composite Shield: 6
9. Close and secure the isothermal oven door, and the Controller front and side doors.
8-68 2000-OSM, C1
Air Cleanup Testing
1. Restore burner air to the cleanup unit by adjusting the burner air regulator for the correct
burner air pressure as indicated at the burner air pressure indicator.
2. Using a suitable liquid leak detection solution, test and repair any leaks that may be
present in the connections loosened or disconnected during the maintenance
procedure.
3. Close the isothermal oven door and secure the latch.
4. Restore carrier gas, oven air and fuel gas, if necessary, by adjusting the regulators for
the correct indications at the pressure indicators.
5. After ensuring the area is safe, and the proper permits are in effect, apply AC power.
6. To check the temperature of the air cleanup assembly, exit to the Background screen by
pressing the F1 soft key.
7. Access the Manual Control Mode screen by pressing the F2 (Manual Control) soft key.
8. Access the Pressure and Temperature Control Mode by pressing the F4 (Press. and
Temp. Control) soft key.
9. From the Pres and Temp Control screen, position the cursor up or down to highlight
TEMP CONTROL and press the F2 (Manual Temperature Control) soft key to access
the Manual Temperature Control Screen.
10. On the Manual Temperature Control screen observe the setpoint value. If necessary,
change the setpoint of the air cleanup/methanizer temperature controller to 450° C.
11. The temperature of the air cleanup assembly can also be monitored from this screen.
The time required to achieve stability is two hours.
Air Cleanup Final Preparation
1. Restore all utility gases and verify that the pressures and flow rates are correct. These
include oven air, purge air, carrier, burner fuel, and burner air. If the faces of the
pressure gauges were previously marked and the marked location is known to be
correct, simply adjust the pressure regulators until the gauge pointers are aligned with
the pressure indicating marks. Refer to the engineering data package supplied with
your analyzer for the correct values.
2. After sufficient air purge time and when authorized by your safety administrator, apply
3. Verify that all Digital Temperature Control setpoint values are correct. Refer to the
engineering data package supplied with your analyzer for the correct values.
4. Allow the temperature controlled zone temperatures to equilibrate.
2000-OSM, C1 8-69
5. Verify that sample is being introduced to and is sufficiently flowing through the analyzer
sample valve.
6. Perform a minimum of three analyses to verify correct chromatographic response and

analysis reports. Minor adjustments or calibration may be necessary to achieve desired
analysis results.
7. Once analyzer operation and performance have been verified, place the analyzer back
in service.
REPAIRING THE CP VALVE
This section describes how to replace the CP Valve slider, wedges, and o-rings. The bulletin
applies to both the 40 psig and 60 psig valves (see Figure 8-46).
VALVE BODY
VALVE PLATE
CARRIER
ASSEMBLY
Figure 8-46. TYPICAL M2CP VALVE
Preparation and Safety
CAUTION


1. Stop the analysis at the end of a cycle.
2. Turn off sample and air to the analyzer.
NOTE
Verify that the oven is cool (ambient temperature) before removing

carrier gas.
8-70 2000-OSM, C1
3. Turn off power and carrier gas.
5. Locate the valve to be repaired.
Replacing the Slider
The Slider is part of the Carrier Assembly. To ensure you have the correct slider for your
application, verify the slider part number from the Data Sheets supplied with your analyzer.
To replace the slider:
1. Perform the "Preparation and Safety" procedure.
2. Open both Carrier Assembly latches by pulling down on the end of the latches.
3. Remove the Carrier Assembly from the Valve Plate and Valve Body, being careful to
keep the latches in their open position.
4. Compare the old slider with the new slider to ensure they are the same.
5. Note the orientation of the slider’s ports.
6. Remove the old slider from the Carrier Assembly.
7. Insert the new slider, ensuring that the ports are aligned in the same way as the old
slider.
8. Wipe the bottom of the Valve Plate with methanol and a lint-free wipe to remove any
slider residue or contamination.
9. Insert the Carrier Assembly on the Valve Plate.
10. Close the back Carrier Assembly latch. This ensures the Carrier Assembly is locked into
the hole in the piston stem.
11. Close the front Carrier Assembly latch.
Replacing the Wedges
The four wedges (part number 3527279-1), located on the Carrier Assembly, center the
Valve Plate on the Carrier Assembly.
To replace the wedges:
3. Remove the Carrier Assembly from the Valve Plate and Valve Body.
4. Remove the slider (see "Replacing the Slider").
2000-OSM, C1 8-71
5. Note the orientation of the wedges and push out each wedge from the outside of the
Carrier Assembly.
6. Insert a wedge from the inside of the Carrier Assembly, being careful not to scratch the
Carrier Assembly. Using a cold chisel, push the wedge into position, ensuring the back
of the wedge is against the carrier body.
7. Repeat step 6 for the remaining wedges.
8. Reinstall the slider.
9. Insert the Carrier Assembly on the Valve Plate.
Replacing the O-Rings
Since the o-rings are inside the valve, you will have to remove the Valve Body from the
analyzer. The o-rings come in a kit, with different kits for 40-psig and 60-psig CP valves (see
Figure 8-47). The rework procedure is the same for both valves.
PART NUMBER
40-PSIG KIT 60-PSIG KIT

764K001N-2 764K001N-1
DESCRIPTION (dimensions are in inches)

O-Ring, Fluorocarbon, 1/4 x 1/8 x 1/16 45051-4-11 45051-4-11
O-Ring, Fluorocarbon, 2 x 1-7/8 x 1/16 45051-4-35
O-Ring, Fluorocarbon, 1-3/4 x 1-1/2 x 1/8 45051-4-61
Grease, Molykote 33 3616175-1 3616175-1
Figure 8-47. O-RING KITS
NOTE
It is essential to the analyzer’s operation that all valve ports remain

correctly connected.
To replace the o-rings:
2. Tag each port connection to the valve, using the port numbers stamped on the Valve
Plate.
8-72 2000-OSM, C1
3. Remove the port connections.
4. Remove the air connection on the Valve Body. (You do not have to remove the
connection on the Mounting Plate that attaches to the analyzer.)
5. Using a 7/64- inch hex key wrench, loosen the four screws that attach the Valve Body to
the Mounting Plate.
6. Rotate the Valve Body counterclockwise and remove it from the Mounting Plate.
8. Remove the Carrier Assembly from the Valve Plate and Valve Body.
9. Push the piston rod into the Valve Body to release the piston, being careful not to
scratch any valve surfaces.
10. Remove the piston and piston rod from the Valve Body.
11. Remove the piston rod o-ring and the piston o-ring.
12. Wipe all surfaces of the piston and piston rod to remove contamination.
13. Verify that the screw holding the piston rod to the piston is tight.
14. Lubricate one o-ring part number 45051-4-11 with Molykote 33.
15. Position O-Ring Tool part number 3122-1 over the piston rod (see Figure 8-48).
LOCKWASHER
PISTON
PISTON O-RING
PISTON ROD SCREW

O-RING
PISTON ROD
INSTALLATION TOOL
Figure 8-48. INSTALLING THE O-RINGS ON THE PISTON ROD AND PISTON
16. Install the o-ring over the O-Ring Tool and into the o-ring groove on the piston rod.
17. Lubricate o-ring part number 45051-4-61 (40-psig valve) or 45051-4-29 (60-psig valve)
with Molykote 33 and install it in the o-ring groove of the piston.
2000-OSM, C1 8-73
18. Remove the old o-ring from the Valve Body (see Figure 8-49).
O-RING
VALVE BODY
Figure 8-49. INSTALLING THE O-RING ON THE VALVE BODY
19. Wipe the inside of the Valve Body to remove contamination and old lubricant.
20. Inspect the piston rod bore to ensure the bore is clean.
21. Lubricate O-Ring part number 45051-4-35 (40-psig valve) or 45051-4-31 (60-psig valve)
with Molykote 33 and install it in the o-ring groove in the Valve Body.
22. Lubricate the piston rod and the inside of the Valve Body (the piston housing area) with
Molykote 33.
23. Insert the piston rod and piston rod assembly into the Valve Body. Before seating the
piston, ensure the flat surface on the piston rod is facing up.
24. Insert the Carrier Assembly into the Valve Plate.
27. Install the Valve Body over the screws on the Mounting Plate and rotate the Valve Body
clockwise to seat it. The port connections must face the same direction as when it was
originally installed.
28. Tighten the four screws securing the Valve Body to the Mounting Plate.
29. Reinstall the air connection onto the Valve Body.
30. Reinstall the port connections, being careful to get each connection to the correct port.
31. Perform a leak check on the valve (see "Leak Check" in Section 2).
32. Turn on carrier, air and power.
33. Check the operation of the valve (see "Manual Operation of Valves" in Section 2).
8-74 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 9. REPLACEMENT PARTS
ORDERING INFORMATION
NOTE
Since the component parts specific to any given system are defined by
the particular application, you should refer to the “Recommended
Spare Parts Lists” in the Data Package supplied with the analyzer, to
obtain the full and correct part number for the desired part or assembly.
Equipment Identification
The following information, found in the Data Package and on the analyzer nameplate, should
be included in any communication concerning replacement parts or components:
• ABB Sales Order Number.
• Analyzer Model Number.
• Analyzer Part Number (P/N) and serial number.
• For serial numbered subassemblies such as PC boards, include the serial number and
the part number (including dash number and revision letter) for the subassembly in the
request. If a PC board requires conformal coating, prefix the PCB part number with the
letters "CC."
• Applicable references from the “Recommended Spare Parts List” of the Data Package,
included with each analyzer.
• Description of part.
Hardware Configuration Identification
The nameplate (see Figure 9-1), which is located on the right side of the Oven Compartment,
lists the hardware configuration information.
ABB
ABB AUTOMATION INC.
LEWISBURG WEST VIRGINIA 24901
Made In U.S.A. Model No.

Sales
Order No. SERIES: 2000 MODEL:
S.O. NO.:
T-Rating
CLASS: 1 GROUP: B C D DIVISION:
TEMPERATURE CODE:
PRESSURIZATION TYPE: TYPE
Figure 9-1. TYPICAL NAMEPLATE
The hardware configuration consists of the model number, customer order number, and T-
Rating.
2000-OSM, C1 9-1
Software Configuration Identification
The software configuration appears at the top of the Background screen just below "ABB
Analytical GCC." In Figure 9-2 the software configuration is 803V029-1G.
Software
Configuration
** B A C K G R O U N D **
803V029-1R (Std GCC) (C) 2001
**ALARM**
**ALARM** 18-JUN-12002 TUE 08:16:01
**ALARM**
Analysis Time :00114 Peaks Found : 00
Cycle Time :00000 State : Idle

entered

Commands Options
F1 F2 F3 F4
Who to Contact
Contact Aftermarket Spares for specific ordering instructions. Include a complete description
of the component, analyzer, symptoms and problems with your request.
ABB Inc.
Attention: Aftermarket Spares
P.O. Box 831
Lewisburg, WV 24901
Telephone: (304) 647-1736

Fax: (304) 647-1837
The remainder of this section lists the replaceable parts and components by their location in
the equipment. Part numbers and drawing numbers listed here are for identification
purposes only. When you order parts for replacement, use the list of parts included in the
Engineering Data Package provided with your equipment to ensure you have the correct
version of each part.
9-2 2000-OSM, C1
GC CONTROLLER
Back of Front Panel (see Figure 9-3)
Description Part Number
Display Panel 81943A008-1

Front Panel PCB 802A008B-1
Lo Comm PCB 733A037D-1
LO COMM
FRONT PCB
PANEL PCB
LO COMM DISPLAY
CABLE PANEL
Figure 9-3. BACK OF FRONT PANEL
Card Cage (see Figure 9-4)
Chroma I/O PCB (old type) 3528515-_

Chroma I/O PCB (new type) 802A028B-_
Digital I/O PCB 3528770-4
Analog Output PCB (Current) 733A096B-2
Analog Output PCB (Voltage) 3528289-1
VistaNET Communication PCB 3617198-1
Electronic Pressure Control PCB 802A013B-1
Single Board Computer PCB (application dependent–see Data Package)
Chroma I/O PCB #2 or Analog Output

Communications PCB PCB #1
Chroma I/O PCB #1 Analog Output PCB #2

or Digital I/O PCB #2
Single Board
Computer PCB
Digital I/O PCB #1
Electronic Pressure
Control PCB
Figure 9-4. CARD CAGE COMPONENTS
2000-OSM, C1 9-3
GCC Chassis (see Figure 9-5)
FID Amplifier (per application) 81943A040-_

Fuse for FID Amplifier (1 amp) 3615087-03
Filament TCD Amplifier 81943A041-1
Fuse for TCD Amplifier (0.375 amp) 3615086-04
Thermistor TCD Amplifier PCB 802A023B-1
Thermistor Amplifier Interface PCB 802A024B-1
RFI Filter (115 VAC) 3617199-1
RFI Filter (220 VAC) 3617189-1
Power Supply PCB 759A002D-1
Solenoid Driver PCB 802A001B-1
Relay/Solenoid Driver PCB 826A003B-1
Carrier Alarm Pressure Switch 3617859-2508
Pressure Sensor 3615565-6
FPD Amplifier* 3525647-1
*see "FLAME PHOTOMETRIC DETECTOR" for alternate location
RFI Filter
Power Supply Pressure
PCB Sensors
FID Amplifier
and/or
TCD
Amplifier
or
FPD
Amplifier Carrier
Solenoid Driver Alarm
PCB Switch
Figure 9-5. CHASSIS COMPONENTS
Components on Right Side Door (see Figure 9-6)
Panel Assembly 800A001-1

DTC Zone PCB 802A007B-2
0.25 A 3AG fast acting Fuse 3615087-01
25 amp Fuse, semiconductor type 3616470-25
AC Conditioning PCB 802A009B-2
AC Conditioning PCB
(has both fuses) Panel
Assembly
DTC Zone
PCB
Figure 9-6. RIGHT SIDE DOOR OF GCC
9-4 2000-OSM, C1
PURGE AIR PANEL (SEE FIGURE 9-7)
Heater Air Pressure Switch 3617302-1037

1/4-inch Tubing 3617355-2
1/8-inch Tubing 3617355-1
Solenoid Valve 800K005-1
Solenoid Valve Gasket 3617331-1
Pressure Relieving Regulator, 0-40 psig 3616975-2
Pressure Gauge, 0-110 psi 44726-4
Regulator Gasket 81943D033-1
Gauge Gasket 81943D033-2
Pressure
Gauge Heater Air
Pressure Switch
1/4-inch
0 0 Tubing
Pressure Solenoid 1/8-inch

Regulator Valve Tubing
Figure 9-7. PURGE AIR PANEL
ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL PANEL (SEE FIGURE 9-8)
Proportional Valve 3617341-1

O-Ring Kit 801K001-1
Control PCB 802A011B-1
Sensor PCB 802A012B-1
Heater 81943A042-1
Metric Allen Wrenches TL161-1
Proportional
Valve
Sensor PCB
Heater
Control PCB
Figure 9-8. ELECTRONIC PRESSURE CONTROL PANEL
2000-OSM, C1 9-5
CARRIER GAS PANEL (SEE FIGURE 9-9)
Pressure Regulator, 0-100 3617409-1

Pressure Regulator, 0-30 3617409-2
Pressure Gauge, 0-100 44726-4
Pressure Gauge, 0-30 44726-2
Hydrogen Fuel Restrictor 3617360-1
Carrier Gas Filter 3617370-1
Gauges
0 0 0 0 Filter/Restrictor
Regulators
Figure 9-9. CARRIER GAS PANEL
ISOTHERMAL OVEN COMPONENTS (SEE FIGURE 9-10)
NOTE
Part Numbers are incomplete without dash numbers. See the

Recommended Spare Parts List (in the Engineering Data Package) for
application-specific information.
Oven Heater Kit, 115 V 1000W 800K007-1

Temperature Sensor, Platinum 3617330-1
Makeup Valve 3616890-1
Splitter Valve 3616890-2
Metering Valve 3529409-1
Restrictor Valve 3616446-1
Liquid Sample Valve (see "Liquid Sample Valve")
Flame Ionization Detector (see "Flame Ionization Detector")
Filament Type TC Detector (see Filament Type Thermal Conductivity Detector")
Thermistor Type TC Detector (see "Thermistor Type Thermal Conductivity Detector")
M2CP Valve (see "M2CP Valve")
781 Methanizer/Air Cleanup (see "Type 781 Methanizer/Air Clean Up System")
805 Methanizer/Air Cleanup (see "Type 805 Methanizer/Air Clean Up System")
Dual Air Clean Up (see "Dual Air Clean Up System")
9-6 2000-OSM, C1
Temperature
Sensor
Detector
Thermocouple
Methanizer Liquid Sample

Valve
Oven
Heater
Figure 9-10. ISOTHERMAL OVEN COMPONENTS
Liquid Sample Valve (see Figure 9-11)
O-Ring Seal Kit 791K003N-1

0.125 inch Stem (per application) 791A008B-_
0.125 inch Seal (per application) 791M001B-_
0.062 inch Stem (per application) 791A009B-_
0.062 inch Seal (per application) 791M028B-_
Vaporizer (per application) 805A015-_
Seal Insertion Tool TL-791A006B
Seals Stem
Figure 9-11. LIQUID SAMPLE VALVE
2000-OSM, C1 9-7
Flame Ionization Detector (see Figure 9-12)
Maintenance Kit 799K003-1

Jet 3617156-2
Ignitor Assy 794A007B-1
Thermocouple Assy 794A008B-1
Polarizer Assy 794A009B-1
Column kits are application dependent–see Data Package for correct part
Capillary Column Kit NEC 799K001N-1
Packed Column Kit NEC 799K001N-2
Packed Column Kit CENELEC 799K001N-3
Capillary Column Kit CENELEC 799K001N-4
Wire Splice Kit 800K001-1
Microdot Cable Insertion Kit 799K006-1
Thermocouple
Polarizer
Ignitor
Jet
Figure 9-12. FID COMPONENTS
Filament Type Thermal Conductivity Detector (see Figure 9-13)
Filament Kit NEC 800K003-1

Filament Kit CENELEC/CSA 800K003-2
Reference Measure
Filament Filament
Reference Vent
Sample In
Sample Vent
TC Assembly
Reference In
Figure 9-13. FILAMENT TYPE TCD COMPONENTS
9-8 2000-OSM, C1
Thermistor Type Thermal Conductivity Detector (see Figure 9-14)
Thermistor Assembly, matched pair 798A002B-1

Wire Splice Kit 800K001-1
Cable
Measure Reference
Vent Vent
In In
Figure 9-14. THERMISTOR TYPE TCD COMPONENTS
M2CP Valve (see Figure 9-15)
10 port Slider (per application) 3527366-_

Fitting Kit 753K002N-11
O-Ring Kit, 40 psi Valve 764K001N-2
Carrier Assy SPV 3527273-1
Wedge 3527279-1
O-Ring Kit, 60 psi Valve 764K001N-1
Slider
Carrier
Figure 9-15. M2CP VALVE COMPONENTS
2000-OSM, C1 9-9
Type 781 Methanizer/Air Clean Up System (see Figure 9-16)
Methanizer Tube 781A002C-1

Air Cleanup Tube 781A003C-1
115V Heater Kit 805K001-1
230V Heater Kit 805K001-2
Sensor Kit 805K002-1
Crimper 3617469-1
Harness Assy
Air Cleanup Tube
4 2 1 3
Methanizer Tube
Figure 9-16. TYPE 781 METHANIZER/AIR CLEAN UP SYSTEM
Type 805 Methanizer/Air Clean Up System (see Figure 9-17)
Methanizer Tube 805A017-1

Air Cleanup Tube 805A018-1
Heater 3617474-1
Crimper 3617469-1
Metric Hex Wrench TL-161
Air Cleanup Tube Methanizer Tube
Figure 9-17. TYPE 805 METHANIZER/AIR CLEAN UP SYSTEM
9-10 2000-OSM, C1
Valco Diaphragm Valve (see Figure 9-18)
Valve, 10-port 8230442-1

Clamp Ring 8230443-1
Plunger & Diaphragm Kit 8230560-1
Alignment Pin 8230577-1
Air Fitting 8230567-1
Connection Nut 3616312-4
Connection Ferrule 3616313-4
Hex Head
Screw
Cap Plunger Enlarged

to show
Counterbored Eng
Diaphragm
Plungers
Alignment
Pins
Body
Figure 9-18. VALCO DIAPHRAGM VALVE
Dual Air Clean Up System (see Figure 9-19)
Air Cleanup Tube 805A018-1

Heater 3617474-1
Crimper 3617469-1
Metric Hex Wrench TL-161
Harness
Assembly
3 1 2 4
Air Cleanup Air Cleanup

Tube #1 Tube #2
Figure 9-19. DUAL AIR CLEAN UP SYSTEM
2000-OSM, C1 9-11
FLAME PHOTOMETRIC DETECTOR (FPD)
Transformer and Photomultiplier Components (see Figure 9-20)
Transformer 3617648-1
Capillary Tubing, Burner Fuel (not shown) 5514584-39
Coaxial Cable Assy 3528546-1
Photomultiplier Assy 804A003-1
Solenoid, 3 Way (for X Purge) 3616261-3
Pressure Sensor 3615565-6
FPD Electrometer* 804A010-1
*see "GCC Chassis" for alternate location
Burner Block (see "Burner Block Components")
Pressure Sensor
Solenoid
Transformer
0 0
FPD Electrometer
Coaxial Cable
Photomultiplier
Burner Block
Figure 9-20. PGC2000 SHOWING FPD COMPONENTS
Burner Block Components (see Figure 9-21)
Burner Block Assy 804A005-1

Heater Cartridge, 70W 3617444-1
Thermocouple Washer Assy 3617462-1
Electrode Nut (not shown) 804A004-1
Jet 3617432-1
O-Ring 15/16-in OD, Fluorocarbon 45051-4-106
O-Ring 11/16-in OD, Teflon 45051-5-18
9-12 2000-OSM, C1
O-Ring 3/8-in OD, Fluorocarbon 45051-4-13
Breather Vent 3528205-1
Breather Line 753A038-5
Fitting 804M009-1
Sulfur Addition Wafer 3617453-_
Breather O-Ring O-Ring

Vent 45051-5-18 45051-4-106
Sulfur
Addition
Wafer
Breather O-Ring O-Ring

Fitting Line 45051-4-13 45051-4-106
Figure 9-21. BURNER BLOCK COMPONENTS
TEMPERATURE PROGRAMMED OVEN (SEE FIGURE 9-22)
Heater Assy 806A034-1

Flame Ionization Detector with Heater Block 794A001B-2
Thermal Conductivity Detector with Heater Block 795A001B-2
Detector
(FID shown)
Heater
Figure 9-22. TEMPERATURE PROGRAMMED OVEN
2000-OSM, C1 9-13
Flame Ionization Detector with Heater Block (see Figure 9-23)
Heater Block 795A002B-1

Flame Ionization Detector 799A001B-2
(see "Flame Ionization Detector" for FID component parts)
Detector
Heater
Block
Insulation
Figure 9-23. FID WITH HEATER BLOCK
Filament Type TC Detector with Heater Block (see Figure 9-24)
Heater Block 795A002B-1

Fialement Type Thermal Conductivity Detector 798A001B-2
(see "Filament Type Thermal Conductivity Detector" for Filament Type TCD
component parts)
Detector
Heater
Block
Insulation
Figure 9-24. FILAMENT TYPE TCD WITH HEATER BLOCK
9-14 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 10. VISTA BASIC
INTRODUCTION
Vista BASIC is for the user familiar with the fundamentals of BASIC programming languages
and general programming techniques. This information is provided for reference only, not as
a tool for teaching BASIC programming. "ALPHABETIC LISTING" lists the Vista BASIC
commands, functions and statements in alphabetical order, with descriptive information
included in each listing. "SUBJECT LISTING" lists the Vista BASIC commands, functions
and statements in subject order, as a quick reference guide.
Metacharacters are used to indicate language rules for syntax, but are not actually put into
the source program. Metacharacters and their meanings are as follows:
[] language elements in square brackets are optional

... indicates that a language element can be repeated many time
<> delimits a language element
Using the Editor
Line Numbers: Each edit line has the following format:
0000 | <—— Text Field ——> |
where 0000 is a Line Number from 0 - 9999; the Text Field has 33 spaces for program
text. The Line Number is not contained in the source program text file and is not
interpreted by Vista BASIC. It functions as a line location indicator only. The editor
automatically sorts the lines in ascending order by the Line Numbers.
Adding Lines: To add lines, press the soft key labeled “Insert.” A new line will be added
with the cursor positioned in the line number field. Entering a line number is optional but
is recommended to facilitate moving lines of text. When you move to the text field by
pressing the right arrow key, you can enter characters into the text field of the line.
Positioning the Cursor to a Line: You position the cursor on a particular line by moving it
with the up or down arrow key. The cursor will move up and down only when the cursor
is in the line number field.
Deleting Lines: To delete a line, move the cursor to the line to be deleted with the up and
down arrow keys and press the soft key labeled “Delete.”
Inserting Lines: To insert a line between two existing lines, position the cursor on the line
above where the new line is to be inserted, then press the soft key labeled “Insert.”
Lines are inserted after the line with the cursor.
Moving Lines: To move a line, cursor to the line number field of the line to be moved. Then
change the line number to a number greater than or equal to the line number of the line
above the new location and less than the line number below the new location.
Modifying Text: To make changes to a text line, position the cursor at the line to be
changed. Then move the cursor to the text field by pressing the right arrow key. Next
position the cursor at the character position to be changed. Corrections are made in an
overstrike mode rather than with character insertion and deletion.
2000-OSM, C1 10-1
Restrictions: Programming in Vista BASIC is limited according to the following
specifications.
• The total time of execution is 5 seconds.

• The maximum number of programs allowed is 8.
In each program,
• the maximum number of source program lines allowed is 50;

• the maximum number of variables allowed is 49;
• the maximum number of characters allowed in a string is 255;
• the maximum number of FOR...NEXT statements allowed is 11;
• the maximum number of nested GOSUB statements allowed is 10;
• an equation cannot be more than 25 variables in length.
Vista BASIC Line Format
Vista BASIC program lines are contained in the Text Fields of edit lines and have the
following format:
[nnnnn] statement[: statement...]
Where "nnnnn" is the optional statement number in the range 1 through 65535. The
statement number is only required when it is the destination of a GOTO or GOSUB.
Where the statement is a valid Vista BASIC statement, a line may contain more than one
statement separated by colons (:). A statement can span more than one line by using a
continuation character (:) in the first column of the continuation line.
Character Set
Character Usage
_ underscore Identifiers
= equal sign Assignment and Relational Operator
+ plus sign Addition Operator
- minus sign Subtraction Operator and Unary Negation
* asterisk Multiplication Operator
/ slash Division Operator
( left parenthesis Delimiter
) right parenthesis Delimiter
> greater than Relational Operator
< less than Relational Operator
, comma Argument Separator
: colon Statement Separator/Continuation Character
. period Decimal Point
“ quotation mark String Delimiter
% percent sign Integer Type Declaration
$ dollar sign String Type Declaration
! exclamation point Single Precision Type Declaration
10-2 2000-OSM, C1
Constants
Integer Constants: Integer constants are whole numbers between -32768 and 32767,
inclusive. A decimal point indicates a floating point constant and is not allowed in
integer constants. Negative values are produced with the unary negation operator (-).
Floating Point Constants: A floating point constant is a number that contains a decimal
point and must have a digit or unary negation operator for the first character. Floating
point constants are of two forms: fixed point form and exponential form. Fixed point
constants must have a leading digit and decimal point somewhere within the number.
For exponential form floating point numbers, a fixed point constant is followed by the
letter E and an optionally signed integer with no blanks separating them.
Numbers between 0 and 1.0E ±38 approximately can be represented. Negative values
are indicated with the unary negation operator (-).
Examples of valid floating point constants are:
0.
0.123
-10.123
0.123E3
0.123E-3
Examples of INVALID floating point constants are:
.123 (no leading digit)

123E14 (no decimal point)
0.123 E3 (embedded blank)
String Constants: A string constant is a series of up to 255 characters enclosed in double

quotes.
Variables
Variable names and data types can be up to 40 characters (no spaces) and must start with a
letter. Subsequent characters may be letters, digits, or underscore (_) characters. The last
character may be an exclamation mark (!), dollar sign ($), or per cent sign (%) to indicate the
data type.
Integer Variables: Integer variables have names that end with the per cent sign (%) or
without any sign. These variables are used to store whole numbers between -32768
and 32767.
Floating Point Variables: These variables have names that end with an exclamation point
(!); these variables can store real numbers between -1.0E ±38 and +1.0E ±38.
String Variables: String variables have names that end with the dollar sign ($) and are
used to store strings of up to 255 characters. Examples of variable declaration:
2000-OSM, C1 10-3
ABC! declares a floating point variable
XYZ% declares an integer variable
A$ declares a string variable
I defaults to an integer variable.
Arrays
An array is a collection of scalar variables, all of which have the same data type and variable
name. An individual scalar variable or element of an array is referenced with the use of a
subscript.
The DIM statement defines the number of elements or extent of the array. For example, an
array with a dimension of ten has ten elements. A subscript must be in the range from 1 to
the number of array elements. For an array with a dimension of ten, subscripts go from 1 to
10. A subscript of one refers to the first array element. Usage of an array element before the
DIM statement is not allowed.
The COMMON! array is an array of floating point variables shared between all of the BASIC
programs. A reference to a particular element of COMMON! by any of the BASIC programs
accesses the same memory locations in memory. Values can be stored in COMMON! by a
BASIC program and those values can then be accessed by another BASIC program. Thus,
the COMMON! array is a mechanism whereby information and data values can be passed
between BASIC programs.
Another characteristic of the COMMON! array is that the memory allocation is static. That is,
the COMMON! array stays around forever and the values are retained between program
modifications and compilations. As a result, the contents of the COMMON! array normally
only change when a value is assigned to an array element by using the assignment
statement. If the analyzer is reset using the Reset switch on the Single Board Computer
PCB, the COMMON! array contents are reset to zero. All other variables are local and their
memory allocation is dynamic. Local variables maintain their values between program
executions, but not between compilations. When a program is successfully compiled, all
local variables are initialized to zero and the previous contents are destroyed.
Expressions and Operators
An expression consists of operands combined together by operators. Operands can be

constants, variables, functions or subexpressions. Operators are either arithmetic, relational,
logical or string type. The data type of operands determines which operators are allowed.
Mixed mode expressions (i.e., expressions in which operands have different data types) are
not allowed. For instance, a floating point operand cannot appear in an expression with an
integer operand. Conversion routines are provided for data type conversions necessary to
mix data types in expressions.
Arithmetic Operators: Arithmetic operators include:
+ addition
- subtraction
* multiplication
/ division
unary - operates on a single operand to yield the negation of the
operand.
10-4 2000-OSM, C1
Relational Operators: Relational operators are used to compare operands of the same
data type yielding a logical (Boolean) result. Since there are no Boolean type variables
in this implementation, the result of a relational operator cannot be stored in a variable,
unless a conversion routine is used. Relational operators are:
< less than

> greater than
<= less than or equal to
>= greater than or equal to
<> not equal to
= equal
Logical Operators: The logical operators NOT, AND and OR operate on logical operands
to yield a logical result: TRUE or FALSE.
String Operators: The only string operator is concatenation, which is accomplished using
“+.”
Operator Precedence and Associativity: The order of operators is determined by

operator precedence and associativity. When an expression is evaluated, operators
having the highest precedence are evaluated first. Operators of equal precedence are
evaluated according to associativity. Parentheses can be used to override precedence
and associativity. Operator precedence from highest to lowest are:
() Parentheses
unary - Arithmetic
*/ Arithmetic
+- Arithmetic
< <= <> = >= > Relational
NOT Logical
AND Logical
OR Logical
ALPHABETIC LISTING
This section lists the Vista BASIC commands, functions and statements alphabetically, with
descriptive information in each listing to guide you in using the listing. VistaNET commands
are listed separately at the end of this section.
ABSOLUTE VALUE Function
Description: Returns the absolute value of a floating point expression.

Syntax: ABS(fp!)
Comments: fp! is a floating point expression.
Example: 0010 A! = ABS(A!)
Takes the absolute value of the expression stored in variable A! and assigns it
to variable A!.
ACTIVATED BY Function
Description: Returns the code that defines how the Vista BASIC program was activated.
Syntax: ACTIVATED_BY
Comments: 0 = status cleared
1 = Manually
2 = Time Module
2000-OSM, C1 10-5
3 = End of Analysis
4 = End of Benchmark
5 = End of Calibration
Example: 0010 CODE = ACTIVATED_BY
0020 IF CODE = 1 THEN
0030 :LPRINT “ACTIVATED MANUALLY”
ACTIVATE STREAM Command
Description: Adds a stream to the sequence of streams analyzed.

Syntax: ACT(stream%)
Comments: stream% is the stream to be activated (from 1 to the maximum number of
streams).
Example: 0010 FOR I = 1 TO 5
0020 ACT(I)
0030 NEXT I
Statement 20 is executed five times to activate streams 1 through 5.
ADD TCF Command
Description: Adds a Time Coded Function (TCF) to a method table (Sim Dis analyzers
only).
Syntax: ADD_TCF(method%,time%,function$,value$)
Comments: method% is the method table (1-8).
time% is the time at which the TCF is to occur.
function$ is the TCF the method table is perform at the specified time.
value$ is the TCF’s value.
Example: 0010 N = ADD_TCF(1,100,“FORCED GATE
0020 :”,“ON @ BASE”)
A Forced Gate TCF is added to method table 1 at 100 seconds.
Note: In the example, N represents one of the following numbers which is used to
indicate if the function was successful, or why it was unsuccessful, where:
0 means the TCF was successfully added to the method table.
-1 means there is no room to add TCFs.
-2 means time% has exceeded the cycle time of the method table.
-3 means function$ did not have a valid TCF.
-4 means value$ was not valid.
-13 means method% is not in the range 1-8.
ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Alarms.

Syntax: ALARM
Example: 0010 IF ALARM GOTO 100
ASC Function
Description: Converts the first character of a string to an integer.

Syntax: ASC(string$)
Example: 0010 A$ = CHECKSUM STRING
0020 CKS = 0;
0030 REM CALCULATE CHECKSUM OF A$
0040 FOR J = 1 TO LEN(A$)
0050 CKS = ASC(MID$(A$,J,1))
0060 NEXT J
10-6 2000-OSM, C1
ASSIGN STREAM Command
Description: Specifies the stream analysis method.

Syntax: ASSIGN(stream%,method%)
Comments: stream% is the stream to be assigned (from 1 to the maximum number of
streams).
method% is the method table (1-8).
Example: 0010 ASSIGN(5,1)
Stream five is assigned method one.
BPRINT Statement
Description: Functions identically to LPRINT except BPRINT converts numeric values into
a string and places it in a string variable. See LPRINT statement for all
options.
Syntax: BPRINT TO string_var$ [USING format$;][expression[,expression]...]
Comments: string_var$ is a string variable.
format$ is a string constant or string variable whose value specifies the
format for conversions as defined for LPRINT.
Example 1: 0010 BPRINT TO A$ USING %3D;0,-1,
0020 :10,100
will put the following into A$: 000 0-1 010 100
Example 2: 0010 BPRINT TO A$ USING %9.2R;-0.12,
0020 :100.23
will put the following into A$: - 0.12 100.23
CHAIN Statement
Description: Chains to another program.

Syntax: CHAIN n%
Comments: n% is the BASIC program (1-8) to be chained to.
Example: 0010 IF PREV_STRM = 2 THEN CHAIN 2
Transfers control to program two, when stream two was analyzed in the
previous analysis cycle.
CHR$ Function
Description: Converts an integer to a one character long string.

Syntax: CHR$(integer%)
Comments: integer% is a number between 0 and 255.
Example: 0010 A$ = "AREA MONITORING REPORT:"
0020 REM TACK ON SOME LINE FEEDS
0030 A$ = A$ + CHR$(10) + CHR$(10)
CLEAR Command
Description: Clears all the alarms.

Syntax: CLEAR
Example: 0020 CLEAR
CLOCK ERROR ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Clock Error Alarms.
2000-OSM, C1 10-7
Syntax: CLOCK_ERROR_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF CLOCK_ERROR_ALARM GOTO 12
COMMON Floating Point Array
Description: Is a predeclared array of floating point variables shared among all BASIC
programs. A reference to a particular element of COMMON! by any of the
BASIC programs accesses the same locations in memory. Values can be
stored in COMMON! by a BASIC program and then be accessed by another
BASIC program. COMMON! passes information and data values between
BASIC programs. The operator sets the maximum value for this array on the
Digital Configuration screen.
Syntax: COMMON!(index%)
Comments: index% are integers representing start point and end point of array.
0020 COMMON!(I) = FLT(I)
0030 NEXT I
0040 END
COMMON String Array
Description: Is a predeclared array of string variables shared between all BASIC

programs. A reference to a particular element of COMMON$ by any BASIC
program accesses the same locations in memory. Values can be stored in
COMMON$ by a BASIC program and then accessed by another BASIC
program. The COMMON$ array passes strings between BASIC programs.
Syntax: COMMON$(index%)
Comments: index% is an integer from 1 to 10.
Example: 0010 A$ = "ALARM HAS OCCURRED"
0020 B$ = "NO ALARMS"
0030 IF ALARM THEN COMMON$(1) = A$
0040 : ELSE COMMON$(1) = B$
COMMUNICATION ERROR ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Communication Error Alarms.

Syntax: COMM_ERROR_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF COMM_ERROR_ALARM GOTO 100
COMPONENT NAME Function
Description: Returns the name of the component.

Syntax: COMP_NAME$(method%,component%)
Comments: method% is method table (1-8).
component% is the sought for component.
Example: 0010 LPRINT COMP_NAME$(1,1)
COMPONENT TYPE Function
Description: Returns a string containing the type of the component (% , PPM , or CALC).
Since each must have four characters to be correctly read, % must be
followed by three spaces and PPM followed by one space.
Syntax: COMP_TYPE$(method%,component%)
10-8 2000-OSM, C1
component% is the component number for which the type is sought.
Example: 0005 N = N_COMP(1)
0010 FOR I = 1 TO N
0015 IF COMP_TYPE$(1,I)<>"CALC"
0017 :GOTO 100
0020 LPRINT GET_CC(1,I)
For every component in method one (statements 5 and 10), check for the
units (statement 15). If the component is calculated, print the component’s
value; otherwise skip to statement 100.
COPY ARRAY Command
Description: Copies contents of one array to another array.

Syntax: COPY_ARRAY(src_array,dst_array)
Comments: src_array is the array from which the contents will be copied.
dst_array is the array to which the contents will be copied.
Both arrays should have the same dimensions and data types.
Example: 0010 DIM A!(10), B!(10)
0020 COPY_ARRAY(A!,B!)
The data in the 10 elements of array A! are copied into the 10 elements of
array B!.
CURRENT METHOD Function
Description: Returns the method for the stream currently being analyzed.
Syntax: CUR_METHOD
Comments: The value returned ranges from 1 to 8.
Example: 0010 N = CUR_METHOD
Note: use PREV_METHOD for stream that has just been analyzed.
CURRENT STREAM Function
Description: Returns the stream currently under analysis.

Syntax: CUR_STRM
Example: 0010 IF CUR_STRM = 2 GOTO 100
Note: use PREV_STRM for the stream that has just been analyzed.
CYCLE TIME Function
Description: Returns the Cycle Time for the specified method table.
Syntax: CYCLE_TIME(method%)
Example: 0010 A% = CYCLE_TIME(1)
Gets the cycle time from analysis method one and assigns it to integer
variable A%.
DACS EVENT MESSAGE Function
Description: Sends an operator message to the Vista Workstation (VWS).

Syntax: DACS_EVT_MSG(string$)
Comments: string$ is the message to be sent to the VWS; it is limited to 32 characters.
Example: 0010 DACS_EVT_MSG("UNUSUAL EVENT")
2000-OSM, C1 10-9
DEACTIVATE STREAM Command
Description: Removes a stream from the sequence of streams analyzed.

Syntax: DEACT(stream%)
Comments: stream% is the stream to be deactivated (from 1 to the maximum number of
streams).
Example: 0010 DEACT(2)
Stream two is deactivated.
DELETE ALL GATE TCFS Command
Description: Deletes all Forced Gate Time Coded Functions (TCFs) from a method table
(Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: DELETE_ALL_GATE_TCFS (method%)
Example: 0010 N = DELETE_ALL_GATE_TCFS(1)
0020 FOR I = 1 TO N
0030 IF I/2*2 = I THEN
0040 :X = ADD_TCF(1,100+I*10,
0050 :“FORCED GATE”,“ON @ BASE”)
0060 :ELSE X = ADD_TCF(1,100+I*10,
0070 :“FORCED GATE”,“OFF @ BASE”)
0080 NEXT I
All Gate TCFs are deleted from method table 1; then a Gate TCF is added for
each one deleted.
Note: In the example, N represents one of the following numbers that
indicates if the function was successful, or why it was unsuccessful:
-1 means method% is not in the range 1-8.
-2 means the method table does not exist.
>0 is the number of TCFs deleted from the method table.
DELETE ALL TCFS OF A TYPE Command
Description: Deletes all Time Coded Functions (TCFs) of the type specified from a method
table (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: DELETE_ALL_TCFS(method%, function$)
function$ is the TCF to be deleted from the method table.
Example: 0010 N = DELETE_ALL_TCFS(1,
0020 :“FORCED GATE”)
0030 LPRINT N
All Forced Gate TCFs are deleted from method table 1; then the number of
deleted TCFs is printed.
Note: In the example, N represents one of the following numbers that
indicates if the function was successful, or why it was unsuccessful, where:
-1 means method% is not in the 1-8 range.
-2 means the method table does not exist.
-3 means function$ did not have a valid TCF.
>0 is the number of TCFs deleted from the method table.
DIM Statement
Description: Allocates storage for an array of variables.
10-10 2000-OSM, C1
Syntax: DIM variable(extent)[,variable(extent)]....
Comments: variable is the variable name of the array.
extent is the number of elements in the array.
Notes: a) Only one dimension is allowed.
b) Array subscripts must be from 1 to the array dimension (extent).
c) To use a variable as an array, it must be declared before use in the
DIM statement.
Example: 0020 DIM A!(N_COMP(1)),B$(10),C%(50)
Declares an array A! of floating point variables with as many elements as
there are components in analysis method 1, array B$ of 10 strings, and array
C% of 50 integer variables.
END Statement
Description: Indicates that program execution is complete.

Syntax: END
Comments: END is a statement that may appear anywhere in the program; if not, it is
assumed to follow the last statement of the program.
Example: 0010 IF ALARM THEN END
For this example, when an alarm condition exists, program execution
terminates.
EXPONENT Function
Description: Returns e (i.e., 2.71828) raised to the power of the floating point expression.
Syntax: EXP(fp!)
Example: 0010 A! = EXP(T!)
Raises e to the power of floating point variable T! and assigns it to floating
point variable A!.
FLAME OUT ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of the GCC Flame Out Alarm.

Syntax: FLAME_OUT_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF FLAME_OUT_ALARM GOTO 100
FLOATING POINT Conversion Routine
Description: Returns the Floating Point value of an expression.

Syntax: FLT(integer expression)
Example: 0010 A! = FLT(I)
The value of integer variable I is converted to a floating point value and
assigned to floating point variable A!.
FOR...NEXT Statements
Description: Does an iteration loop.

Syntax: FOR variable = x TO y [STEP z]
NEXT [variable[,variable]....]
Comments: variable is an integer used as a counter.
x is the initial value of the counter.
y is the final value of the counter.
z is the increment for the counter.
2000-OSM, C1 10-11
Example: 0010 FOR I = 100 TO -100 STEP -2
.
.
0020 NEXT I
Executes loop 101 times with loop counter values of 100, 98, 96, ..., 0, ..., -96,
-98, and -100.
GET ACTUAL RETENTION TIME Function
Description: Returns the component’s actual retention time.

Syntax: GET_ACTUAL_RT(method%,component%)
component% is the component number for which the actual retention time is
to be retrieved.
Example: 0010 A! = GET_ACTUAL_RT(1,2)
Gets the actual retention time of component two from analysis method one
and assigns it to floating point variable A!.
GET ASTM Function
Description: Returns the setting for the Sim Dis ASTM parameter in the Sim Dis Setup
Screen (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_ASTM
Comments: 0 is returned when the ASTM parameter is set to ASTM-2887.
1 is returned when the ASTM parameter is set to ASTM-3710.
Example: 0010 IF GET_ASTM = 0 THEN END
0020 FOR I = 1 TO 10
0030 D86!(I) = 0.0
0040 NEXT I
Checks Sim Dis Setup screen parameter ASTM. When ASTM 3710 is not
selected the program ends. Otherwise, program variables are set to zero.
GET BENCHMARK CONCENTRATION Function
Description: Returns the component’s benchmark concentration.

Syntax: GET_BENCH_CONC(method%,component%)
component% is the component number from which the benchmark
concentration is to be retrieved.
Example: 0010 A! = GET_BENCH_CONC(1,2)
Gets the benchmark concentration of component two from analysis method
one and assigns it to floating point variable A!.
GET BLEND Function
Description: Returns the setting for the Sim Dis Blend Number parameter in the Stream
Table (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_BLEND(stream)
Example: 0010 LPRINT GET_BLEND(1)
The Blend Number for stream one is printed.
GET CALIBRATION CONCENTRATION Function
Description: Returns the component’s calibration concentration.
10-12 2000-OSM, C1
Syntax: GET_CAL_CONC(method%,component%)
component% is the component number for which the calibration
concentration is to be retrieved.
Example: 0010 A! = GET_CAL_CONC(1,2)
Gets the calibration concentration of component two from analysis method
one and assigns it to floating point variable A!.
GET COMPONENT CONCENTRATION Function
Description: Returns the component concentration.

Syntax: GET_CC(method%, component%)
component% is the component number for which the concentration is
sought.
The valid range depends on the number of components in the method.
Example: 0010 A! = GET_CC(1,2)
Gets component two concentration from analysis method one and assigns it
to floating point variable A!.
GET CORRELATION FACTOR TABLE Command
Description: Reads one of the 25 Sim Dis Correlation Factor Tables into a BASIC array
Syntax: GET_FACT_TBL(array!,table%)
Comments: array! is a previously dimensioned array that is the destination of the data
read from the table.
table% is the table (1-25).
Example: 0010 N = LEN_FACT_TBL(1)
0020 DIM FACT!(N)
0030 GET_FACT_TBL(FACT!,1)
Variable N gets the number of entries in the Correlation Factor table; array
FACT! is dimensioned to have as many elements as entries in the table; the
table is read into the array.
GET EXPECTED RETENTION TIME Function
Description: Returns the component’s expected retention time.

Syntax: GET_EXPECTED_RT(method%,component%)
integer% is the component number for which the expected retention time is to
be retrieved.
Example: 0010 A = GET_EXPECTED_RT(1,2)
Gets the expected retention time of component two from analysis method one
and assigns it to integer variable A.
GET MAXIMUM PEAK PARAMETER Function
Description: Returns the Sim Dis Maximum Peak parameter from the Sim Dis Setup
Screen (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_MAX_PEAK_PARM
Example: 0010 LPRINT GET_MAX_PEAK_PARM
Prints Max Peak from the Sim Dis Setup Screen.
2000-OSM, C1 10-13
GET MULTIPLIER EXPONENT Function
Description: Returns the method table’s multiplier exponent.

Syntax: GET_MULTIPLIER_EXP(method%)
Example: 0010 A% = GET_MULTIPLIER_EXP(1)
Gets the multiplier exponent from analysis method one and assigns it to
integer variable A%.
GET OUTSTANDING REQUESTS Function
Description: Returns the number of pending requests in Analysis Request Queue.

Syntax: GET_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS
Example: 0010 IF GET_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS
0020 :<>0
0030 :THEN ZERO_OUTSTANDING
0040 :_REQUESTS
All requests are deleted if there are any requests in the Analysis Request
Queue.
GET PEAK TYPE PARAMETER Function
Description: Returns the Sim Dis Peak Type from the Sim Dis Setup Screen (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_PEAK_TYPE
Comments: 0 means peaks are selected by area
1 means peaks are selected by height
Example: 0010 LPRINT GET_PEAK_TYPE
The Sim Dis Setup screen parameter, Peak Type, is printed on the teleprinter.
GET PERCENT OFF FOR A TEMPERATURE Command
Description: Returns the percent off for a given temperature using a specified Time vs.
Boiling Point Table (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_POFF(temperature!,time_vs_bp_table%)
Comments: temperature! is the temperature to convert to a percent off.
time_vs_bp_table% is the Time vs. Boiling Point Table (1-8) to use for the
conversion.
Example: 0010 PERCENT! = GET_POFF(212.0,1)
Returns the percent off for 212.0 degrees.
GET PERCENT OFF FOR A TIME Command
Description: Returns a percent off for a given time using a specified Time vs. Boiling Point
Syntax: TIME_TO_OFF(time!,time_vs_bp_ table%)
Comments: time! is the time to convert to a percent off.
conversion.
Example: 0010 PERCENT! = TIME_TO_OFF(100.0,1)
Returns the percent off that occurred at 100.0 seconds.
10-14 2000-OSM, C1
GET PERCENT OFF TABLE Command
Description: Returns the percent off column of one of the eight Time vs. Boiling Point
tables (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_POFF_TBL(array!,table%)
Comments: array! is a previously dimensioned array that is the destination of the Percent
Off Table.
table% is the table number (1-8).
Example: 0010 N = LEN_POFF_TBL(1)
0020 DIM A!(N)
0030 GET_POFF_TBL(A!,1)
Gets the Percent Off Table size, dimensions an array to hold it, copies the
table into array A!.
GET PRESSURE OF A ZONE Command
Description: Returns the actual pressure of the specified zone.

Syntax: GET_PRESS(zone%)
Comments: zone% is the zone number (1-5).
Example: 0010 Z1! = GET_PRESS(1)
Returns the actual pressure of zone 1.
GET RESPONSE FACTOR Function
Description: Returns the component’s response factor.

Syntax: GET_RF(method%,component%)
component% is the component number for which the response factor is to be
retrieved.
Example: 0010 A! = GET_RF(1,2)
Gets the response factor of component two from analysis method one and
assigns it to floating point variable A!.
GET STREAM ASSIGNMENT Function
Description: Returns the analysis method assigned to a stream.

Syntax: GET_ASSIGN(stream%)
Comments: stream% is the stream number (from 1 to the maximum number of streams).
Example: 0010 M = GET_ASSIGN(5)
The variable M gets the table number of the method assigned for the analysis
of stream #5.
GET TEMPERATURE FOR A PERCENT OFF Command
Description: Returns the temperature for a given percent off using a specified Time vs.
Boiling Point Table (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_TEMP(percent_off!,time_vs_bp_table%)
Comments: percent_off! is the percent off to convert to a temperature.
conversion.
Example: 0010 TEMP! = GET_TEMP(50.0,1)
Returns the temperature for 50.0 percent off.
2000-OSM, C1 10-15
GET TEMPERATURE FOR A TIME Command
Description: Returns a temperature for a given time using a specified Time vs. Boiling
Point Table (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: TIME_TO_TEMP(time!,time_vs_ bp_table%)
Comments: time! is the time to convert to a temperature.
conversion.
Example: 0010 TEMP! = TIME_TO_TEMP(100.0,1)
Returns the temperature that occurred at 100.0 seconds.
GET TEMPERATURE OF A ZONE Command
Description: Returns the actual temperature of the specified zone.

Syntax: GET_TEMP(zone%)
Example: 0010 Z1! = GET_TEMP(1)
Returns the actual temperature of zone 1.
GET TEMPERATURE TABLE Command
Description: Returns the temperature column from one of the eight Time vs. Boiling Point
Tables (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: GET_TEMP_TBL(array!,table%)
Comments: array! is a previously dimensioned array that is the destination of the
Temperature Table.
Example: 0010 N = LEN_TEMP_TBL(1)
0020 DIM A!(N)
0030 GET_TEMP_TBL(A!,1)
Gets the size of the Temperature Table, dimensions an array to hold it, copies
the table into array A!.
GET TIME FOR A PERCENT OFF Command
Description: Returns a time for a given percent off using a specified Time vs. Boiling Point
Syntax: POFF_TO_TIME(percent_off!,time_vs_bp_table%)
Comments: percent_off! is the percent off to convert to a time.
conversion.
Example: 0010 TIME! = POFF_TO_TIME(50.0,1)
Returns the time that 50.0 percent off occurred.
GET TIME FOR A TEMPERATURE Command
Description: Returns a time for a given temperature using a specified Time vs. Boiling
Point Table (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: TEMP_TO_TIME(temperature!,time_vs_bp_table%)
Comments: temperature! is the temperature to convert to a time.
conversion.
Example: 0010 TIME! = TEMP_TO_TIME(212.0,1)
Returns the time that 212.0 degrees occurred.
10-16 2000-OSM, C1
GET TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Command
Description: Returns one of the eight Time vs. Boiling Point Tables (Sim Dis analyzers
only).
Syntax: GET_TVSBP_TBL(array!,table%)
Comments: array! is a previously dimensioned array that is the destination of the Time vs.
Boiling Point Table.
Example: 0010 N = LEN_TVSBP_TBL(1)
0020 DIM A!(N)
0030 GET_TVSBP_TBL(A!,1)
Gets the size of the Time vs. Boiling Point Table, dimensions an array to hold
it, copies the table into array A!.
GOTO Statement
Description: Branches to a numbered statement.

Syntax: GOTO line
Comments: line is the statement number to branch to.
Example: 0010 GOTO 30
0020 END
0030 30 LPRINT "BYE"
Skips statement 20 by branching to statement 30, prints BYE, then ends
executions.
GO TO SUBROUTINE Statement
Description: Branches to subroutine.

Syntax: GOSUB line
RETURN
Comments: line is the statement number for the subroutine.
Example: 0010 GOSUB 100
0020 END
0030 100 RETURN
Branches to subroutine at statement 100. Subroutine returns execution at
statement 20 which ends execution.
HARDWARE ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Hardware Alarms.

Syntax: HARDWARE_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF HARDWARE_ALARM GOTO 100
HIGH CONCENTRATION ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC High Concentration Alarms.

Syntax: HIGH_CONC_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF HIGH_CONC_ALARM GOTO 100
IDLE ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Idle Alarm.

Syntax: IDLE_ALARM
2000-OSM, C1 10-17
Example: 0010 IF IDLE_ALARM THEN LPRINT “ALARM”
IF Statement
Description: Makes a decision.

Syntax: IF expression THEN stmt [ELSE stmt]
IF expression GOTO line [ELSE stmt]
Comments: expression is a logical expression whose result is TRUE or FALSE.
stmt is a single or multiple statement separated by colons.
Example: 0010 IF A = 1 AND B = 2 GOTO 50
0020 LPRINT “ONE”
0030 END
0040 50 LPRINT “TWO”
If the expression between IF and GOTO is true, a branch to statement 50 is
performed; otherwise, execution continues with line 0020.
INJECT TIME Function
Description: Returns a string with the sample inject date and time for the current stream,
uses the same format as TIME$ and PREV_INJT.
Syntax: INJT
Example: 0010 A$ = INJT
String variable A$ gets inject time and date for the current sample.
INJECT UCT Function
Description: Returns a two-element array with the sample inject date and time for the
current stream. The first element in the array gives the UCT date since 1
January 1970. The second element gives the time in seconds since midnight.
Syntax: INJT_UCT(T!)
Example: 0010 DIM T!(2)
0020 INJT_UCT(T!)
INSTR Function
Description: Returns an integer indicating the position of string2 in string1; otherwise 0 is

returned.
Syntax: INSTR(string1$,string2$)
Comments: string1$ is any string expression.
string2$ is any string expression.
Examples: 0010 P = INSTR(“ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP”,“HI”)
The variable P is set to 8.
0010 P = INSTR(“ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP”,“RS”)
The variable P is set to zero.
0010 P = INSTR(“ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP”,“HO”)
The variable P is set to zero.
INTEGER TYPE Conversion Routine
Description: Returns the integer value of an expression.

Syntax: INT(fp!)
10-18 2000-OSM, C1
Example: 0010 I = INT(A!)
Converts the value of floating point variable A! to an integer and assigns it to
integer variable I.
LENGTH OF CORRELATION FACTOR TABLE Function
Description: Returns the number of entries in the specified Sim Dis Correlation Factor
Syntax: LEN_FACT_TBL(table%)
Comments: table% is the specified Sim Dis Correlation Factor Table (1-25).
0020 DIM FACT!(N)
Variable N gets the number of entries in the Sim Dis Correlation Factor Table;
array FACT! is dimensioned with as many elements as entries in the table; the
table is read into the array.
LENGTH OF PERCENT OFF TABLE Function
Description: Returns the length of the percent off column of one of the eight Time vs.
Boiling Point Tables (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: LEN_POFF_TBL(table%)
Comments: table% is the table number (1-8).
Gets the length of the Percent Off Table.
LENGTH OF STRING Function
Description: Returns the number of characters in a string.

Syntax: LEN(string$)
Comments string$ is any string expression.
Example: 0010 A$ = 1234567890
0020 N = LEN(A$)
Variable N gets the number of characters (10) in string variable A$.
LENGTH OF TEMPERATURE TABLE Function
Description: Returns the length of the temperature column of one of the eight Time vs.
Boiling Point Tables (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: LEN_TEMP_TBL(table%)
Gets the length of the Temperature Table.
LENGTH OF TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Function
Description: Returns the length of one of the eight Time vs. Boiling Point Tables (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: LEN_TVSBP_TBL(table%)
Gets the length of the Time vs. Boiling Point Table.
2000-OSM, C1 10-19
LET Statement
Description: Assigns the value of an expression to a variable.

Syntax: [LET] variable = expression
Comments: variable is the scalar or aggregate variable to receive the expression value.
expression is a string or numeric expression.
Example: 0010 LET A! = 0.0
0020 N = 0
0030 A$ = “THIS IS A STRING”
In 0010, floating point constant zero is assigned to floating point variable A!; in
0020, integer constant zero is assigned to integer variable N; in 0030, string
variable A$ is assigned a string constant.
LOGARITHM BASE TEN Function
Description: Returns the Logarithm to base ten of an expression.

Syntax: LOG(fp!)
Example: 0010 A! = LOG(10.123)
The logarithm to base ten of 10.123 is assigned to floating point variable A!.
LOW CONCENTRATION ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Low Concentration Alarms.

Syntax: LOW_CONC_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF LOW_CONC_ALARM GOTO 100
LPRINT Statement
Description: Prints to the line printer.

Syntax: LPRINT [USING format$;][expression[,expression]...]
Comments: format$ is a string constant or variable that specifies the printout format, as
follows:
“%wD” is a format specification used to print integers as whole numbers

(no decimal points or fractions) with leading zeros. The space included
in the format following the “D” is to provide separation between
numbers that are printed, where “w” is an optional number that
specifies the number of characters to be printed for each item. If “w” is
not specified, it is assumed to be 6.
Example: 0010 LPRINT USING %3D ;0,-1,10,100

will print “000 0-1 010 100”
Note: With USING, all data items contained in the LPRINT statement
must be of the same data type and agree in type with the format
specification.
“%w.pR” is a format specification used to print floating point numbers as

real numbers without exponents, where “w” is an optional number that
specifies the number of characters to be printed for each item. This
number allows two characters for the sign, plus the number of digits
left of the decimal point, plus the precision, plus one character for the
decimal point. If “w” is not specified it is assumed to be 10.
10-20 2000-OSM, C1
“p” is an optional number that specifies the precision, or number of
digits to the right of the decimal point. If “p” is not specified,
it is assumed to be 2.
Example: 0010 LPRINT USING %9.2R;-0.12,

0020 :100.23
will print “-0.12 100.23”
“%w.pE” is a format specification used for printing floating point numbers

as real numbers with exponents, where “w” is an optional number that
specifies the number of characters to be printed for each item. This
number allows two characters for the sign, plus one character for a
digit to the left of the decimal point, plus the precision, plus one
character for the decimal point, plus four characters for the exponent,
plus one character for good measure. If “w” is not specified, it is
assumed to be 10.
“p” is an optional number that specifies the precision. If “p” is not

specified, it is assumed to be 2.
Example: 0010 LPRINT USING %11.2E;-0.12,

0020 :123.E-2,100.23,-1.E5
will print “-1.199E-1 1.230E 0 1.002E 2-1.000E 5”
“%w.pA” is a format specification used to print floating point numbers as

real numbers without exponents. The precision is automatically
adjusted according to the magnitude of the number. “w” is an optional
number that specifies the number of characters to be printed for each
item. This number should allow two characters for the sign, plus the
number of digits to left of decimal point, plus the precision, plus one
character for the decimal point. If “w” is not specified, it is assumed to
be 10.
“p” is an optional number that specifies the precision. If “p” is not

specified, it is assumed to be 4.
Example: 0010 LPRINT USING %A;-0.12,123.E-2,

0020 :100.23,-1.E5
will print “-0.119 1.230 100.2 -100000”
“%S” is a format specification used to print character strings, which allows

control characters to be included in the string sent to the teleprinter.
Control characters are specified with a back slash (\) followed by three
octal digits.
Example: 0010 LPRINT USING \007%S; “THIS IS A

0020 :STRING”
sound bell at printer and print “THIS IS A STRING”
“%wI “ is a format specification used to print integers as whole numbers (no

decimal points or fractions). The space in the format following the “I” is
to separate the numbers printed, where “w” is an optional number that
specifies the number of characters to be printed for each item. If “w” is
not specified, it is assumed to be 6.
2000-OSM, C1 10-21
Example: 0010 LPRINT USING %3I;0,-1,10,100
will print “0 -1 10 100”
Note: With USING, all data items contained in the LPRINT

statement must be of the same data type and agree in type
with the format specification.
MAXIMUM SIM DIS PEAK HEIGHT Command
Description: Returns the maximum Sim Dis peak height (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: SD_PEAK_HEIGHT
Example: 0010 HEIGHT! = SD_PEAK_HEIGHT
Returns the maximum height found during the Sim Dis analysis.
NATURAL LOGARITHM Function
Description: Returns natural Logarithm (to the base e) of floating point expression.
Syntax: LN(fp!)
Example: 0010 A! = LN(2.71828)
The natural logarithm (logarithm to the base e) of 2.71828 is assigned to
floating point variable A!.
NUMBER OF COMPONENTS Function
Description: Returns the number of components in a method.

Syntax: N_COMP(method%)
Example: 0010 FOR I = 1 TO N_COMP(1)
0020 LPRINT COMP_NAME$(1,I)
0030 NEXT I
For every component in analysis method one (statement 10), the component
name is printed (statement 20).
NUMBER OF PEAKS Function
Description: Returns the number of peaks detected in an analysis.

Syntax: N_PEAKS
Example: 0010 FOR I = 1 TO N_PEAKS
0020 IF PK_COMP_NUM(I) <> 0 THEN,
0030 :LPRINT GET_CC(1,PK_COMP_NUM(I))
0040 NEXT I
Prints the component concentration for the component that matches each
peak detected.
OFFLINE ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Offline Alarms.

Syntax: OFFLINE_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF OFFLINE_ALARM THEN LPRINT
0020 :”ALARM”
10-22 2000-OSM, C1
OPERATOR MESSAGE ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Operator Message Alarm.

Syntax: OP_MSG_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF OP_MSG_ALARM THEN LPRINT
0020 :”ALARM”
PEAK AREA Function
Description: Returns the peak’s corrected area.

Syntax: PK_AREA(peak%)
Comments: peak% is the peak number (1 to N_PEAKS).
0020 LPRINT PK_AREA(I)
0030 NEXT I
The example prints the area under each peak.
PEAK COMPONENT NUMBER Function
Description: Returns the component number whose retention time matches the crest time
for the peak.
Syntax: PK_COMP_NUM(peak%)
Example: 0010 LPRINT COMP_NAME$(1,
0020 :PK_COMP_NUM(2))
Prints the name of the component in method one for the second peak
detected in the analysis.
PEAK CREST AMPLITUDE Function
Description: Returns the peak’s amplitude at crest.

Syntax: PK_CREST_AMP(peak%)
0020 LPRINT PK_CREST_AMP(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the amplitude of each peak’s crest.
PEAK CREST TIME Function
Description: Returns the peak’s crest time.

Syntax: PK_CREST_TIME(peak%)
0020 LPRINT PK_CREST_TIME(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the time of each peak’s crest.
PEAK END AMPLITUDE Function
Description: Returns the amplitude at the end of the peak.

Syntax: PK_END_AMP(peak%)
Comments peak% is the peak number (1 to N_PEAKS)
2000-OSM, C1 10-23
0020 LPRINT PK_END_AMP(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the amplitude of each peak’s end.
PEAK END TIME Function
Description: Returns the end time for the peak.

Syntax: PK_END_TIME(peak%)
0020 LPRINT PK_END_TIME(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the time of each peak’s end.
PEAK HEIGHT Function
Description: Returns the peak’s height at crest.

Syntax: PK_HEIGHT(peak%)
0020 LPRINT PK_HEIGHT(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the corrected height of each peak.
PEAK RAW AREA Function
Description: Returns the peak’s raw area.

Syntax: PK_RAW_AREA(peak%)
0020 LPRINT PK_RAW_AREA(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the uncorrected area of each peak.
PEAK START AMPLITUDE Function
Description: Returns the peak’s starting amplitude.

Syntax: PK_START_AMP(peak%)
0020 LPRINT PK_START_AMP(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the amplitude at the start of each peak.
PEAK START TIME Function
Description: Returns the start time for the peak.

Syntax: PK_START_TIME(peak%)
0020 LPRINT PK_START_TIME(I)
0030 NEXT I
Prints the time at the start of each peak.
10-24 2000-OSM, C1
POST ANALYSIS ERROR ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Post-Analysis Error Alarms.

Syntax: POSTAN_ERROR_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF POSTAN_ERROR_ALARM GOTO 100
POWER FAIL ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of the GCC Power Fail Alarm.

Syntax: POWER_FAIL_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF POWER_FAIL_ALARM THEN LPRINT
0020 :“ALARM”
PREVIOUS INJECT TIME Function
Description: Returns a string containing date and time for the sample injection performed
in the most recently completed analysis cycle. The string has the following
format:
hh:mm:ss Day DD Mon YYYY
(e.g., 17:46:31 Mon 6 Nov 1989)
Syntax: PREV_INJT
Example: 0010 A$ = PREV_INJT
The string variable A$ gets the time and date for the sample injection.
PREVIOUS INJECT UCT Function
Description: Returns a two-element array containing date and time for the sample injection
performed in the most recently completed analysis cycle. The first element in
the array gives the UCT date since 1 January 1970. the second element
gives the time in seconds since midnight.
Syntax: PREV_INJT_UCT(T!)
0020 PREV_INJT_UCT(T!)
PREVIOUS METHOD Function
Description: Returns the method for the stream that has just been analyzed.
Syntax: PREV_METHOD
Comments: The value returned ranges from 1 to 8.
Example: 0010 N = PREV_METHOD
PREVIOUS STREAM Function
Description: Returns the stream number analyzed in last analysis cycle.

Syntax: PREV_STRM
Example: 0010 IF PREV_STRM = 3 GOTO 100
When stream analyzed in previous cycle (analysis data currently being
computed) is number three, branch to statement 100.
PURGING STREAM Command
Description: Changes the stream to be purged.

Syntax: PURGE(stream%)
2000-OSM, C1 10-25
Example: 0010 IF HIGH_CONC_ALARM THEN PURGE(3)
If a high concentration alarm occurs, purge stream 3.
PURGING STREAM Function
Description: Identifies the stream currently purging.

Syntax: PRG_STRM
Example: 0010 ST = PRG_STRM
Requests the number of the stream currently purging.
PUT ACTUAL RETENTION TIME Command
Description: Changes actual (measured) retention time for a particular component.

Syntax: PUT_ACTUAL_RT(method%,component%,retention_time!)
Comments method% is the method table (1-8).
component% is the component number for which the actual retention time is
to be updated.
retention_time! is the new actual retention time for the specified component.
Example: 0010 PUT_ACTUAL_RT(1,2,123.64)
The measured retention time of the peak for the second component is set at
123.64 seconds into analysis method one.
PUT ASTM Command
Description: Sets the Sim Dis ASTM parameter in the Sim Dis Setup Screen (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: PUT_ASTM(setting%)
Comments: setting% is the ASTM parameter in the Sim Dis Setup Screen, where:
0 sets the ASTM parameter to ASTM-2887
1 sets the ASTM parameter to ASTM-3710
Example: 0010 PUT_ASTM(0)
The ASTM parameter in Sim Dis Setup Screen is set to ASTM2887.
PUT BENCHMARK CONCENTRATION Command
Description: Updates the benchmark concentration for a particular component.

Syntax: PUT_BENCH_CONC(method%,component%, concentration!)
component% is the component number for which the concentration is to be
updated.
concentration! is the new benchmark concentration for the specified
component.
Example: 0010 PUT_BENCH_CONC(1,2,10.1234)
The concentration of 10.1234 is stored in the benchmark concentration for
component two of analysis method one.
PUT BLEND Command
Description: Sets the Sim Dis Blend Number parameter in the Stream Table (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: PUT_BLEND(stream%,setting%)
Comments: stream% is the stream to get the blend for.
setting% is the Sim Dis Blend Number (1-25), also known as the Correlation
Factor Table.
10-26 2000-OSM, C1
Example: 0010 PUT_BLEND(1,25)
Sim Dis Blend Number for stream 1 in the Stream Table is set to 25.
PUT CALIBRATION CONCENTRATION Command
Description: Updates calibration concentration for a particular component.

Syntax: PUT_CAL_CONC(method%,component%,concentration!)
component% is the component number for which the calibration
concentration is to be updated.
concentration! is the new calibration concentration for the specified
component.
Example: 0010 PUT_CAL_CONC(1,2,10.1234)
The concentration of 10.1234 is stored in the calibration concentration for
component two of analysis method one.
PUT COMPONENT CONCENTRATION Command
Description: Updates the component concentration.

Syntax: PUT_CC(method%,component%,concentration!)
component% is the component number for which the concentration is to be
updated.
concentration! is the new concentration for the specified component.
Example: 0010 PUT_CC(1,2,10.1234)
The concentration of 10.1234 is stored in the concentration for component
two of analysis method one.
PUT COMPONENT NAME Command
Description: Updates the component name for a particular component.

Syntax: PUT_COMP_NAME(method%,component%, name$)
component% is the component number to be updated.
name$ is the new name for the specified component.
Example: 0010 PUT_COMP_NAME(1,2,"COMP ONE")
The component name for component two of analysis method one is set to
‘COMP ONE.’
PUT CORRELATION FACTOR TABLE Command
Description Writes an array into one of the Sim Dis Correlation Factor Tables (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: PUT_FACT_TBL(array!,table%)
Comments: array! is a previously dimensioned array that is the data source.
table% is the Sim Dis Correlation Factor Table (1-25).
0020 DIM FACT!(N)
0040 PUT_FACT_TBL(FACT!,2)
Variable N gets the number of entries in the Correlation Factor Table; array
FACT! is dimensioned to have as many elements as entries in table 1. Then
the table is read into the array and the array is written back to table 2.
2000-OSM, C1 10-27
PUT EXPECTED RETENTION TIME Command
Description: Changes the expected retention time for a particular component and sorts all
method table components in ascending order of expected retention times.
Syntax: PUT_EXPECTED_RT(method%,component%,retention_time%)
component% is the component number for which the expected retention time
is to be updated.
retention_time% is the new expected retention time for the specified
component.
Example: 0010 PUT_EXPECTED_RT(1,2,123)
The peak for the second component is expected to crest at approximately 123
seconds into analysis method one.
PUT MULTIPLIER EXPONENT Command
Description: Updates the multiplier exponent for a particular method.

Syntax: PUT_MULTIPLIER_EXP(method%,value%)
value% is the new multiplier exponent for the specified method.
Example: 0010 PUT_MULTILPIER_EXP(1,4)
The value of 4 is stored in multiplier exponent of analysis method one.
PUT PERCENT OFF TABLE Command
Description: Writes an array into the %off column of a Time vs Boiling Point Table (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: PUT_POFF_TBL(array!,table%)
table% is the Sim Dis TvsBP Table (1-8).
0020 DIM POFF!(N)
0030 GET_POFF_TBL(POFF!,1)
0040 PUT_POFF_TBL(POFF!,2)
Variable N gets the number of entries in the TvsBP Table; array POFF! is
dimensioned to have as many elements as entries in table 1. Then the table
is read into the array and the array is written back to table 2.
PUT PRESSURE OF A ZONE Command
Description: Updates the set point and ramp rate of the specified zone.
Syntax: PUT_PRESS(zone%,set point!,ramp rate!)
set point! is the desired set point value.
ramp rate! is the desired ramp rate value.
Example: 0010 Z1! = GET_PRESS(1)
0020 PUT_PRESS(2,Z1!,0)
Gets the actual pressure of zone 1 and gets 0 ramp rate and inserts them as
the set point and ramp rate values for zone 2.
PUT REPORT TYPE Command
Description: Updates settings for the teleprinter report parameters, the same parameters
set in the Printer Report Type screen.
10-28 2000-OSM, C1
Syntax: PUT_REPORT_TYPE(report_type%)
Comments: report_type
0 = RAW DATA and NEVER
1 = RAW DATA and ALWAYS
2 = RAW DATA and ON ALARM
4 = REGULAR and NEVER
5 = REGULAR and ALWAYS
6 = REGULAR and ON ALARM
8 = SHORT and NEVER
9 = SHORT and ALWAYS
10 = SHORT and ON ALARM
Example: 0010 PUT_REPORT_TYPE(2)
A raw data report will be printed on the teleprinter at the end of analysis if an
alarm has been set.
PUT RESPONSE FACTOR Command
Description: Updates the response factor for a particular component.

Syntax: PUT_RF(method%,component%,response_factor!)
component% is the component for which the response factor is to be
updated.
response_factor! is the new response factor for the specified component.
Example: 0010 PUT_RF(1,2,0.98)
The value of 0.98 is stored in the response factor for component two of
method one.
PUT TEMPERATURE OF A ZONE Command
Description: Updates the set point and ramp rate of the specified zone.
Syntax: PUT_TEMP(zone%,set point!,ramp rate!)
set point! is the desired set point value.
ramp rate! is the desired ramp rate value.
Example: 0010 Z1! = GET_TEMP(1)
0020 PUT_TEMP(2,Z1!,0)
Gets the actual temperature of zone 1 and gets 0 ramp rate and inserts them
as the set point and ramp rate values for zone 2.
PUT TEMPERATURE TABLE Command
Description: Writes an array into the boiling point column of a Time vs Boiling Point Table
Syntax: PUT_TEMP_TBL(array!,table%)
table% is the TvsBP Table (1-8).
0020 DIM TEMP!(N)
0030 GET_TEMP_TBL(TEMP!,1)
0040 PUT_TEMP_TBL(TEMP!,2)
Variable N gets the number of entries in the TvsBP Table; array TEMP! is
dimensioned to have as many elements as entries in table 1. Then the table
is read into the array and the array is written back to table 2.
2000-OSM, C1 10-29
PUT TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Command
Description: Writes to one of eight Time vs. Boiling Point Tables (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: PUT_TVSBP_TBL(array!,table%)
Comments: array! is a previously dimensioned array that is the destination of the Time
vs. Boiling Point Table.
0020 DIM A!(N)
0030 GET_TVSBP_TBL(A!,1)
0040 PUT_TVSBP_TBL(A!,2)
Variable N gets the number of entries in the TvsBP Table; array A! is
dimensioned to have as many elements as entries in table 1. Then the table is
read into the array and the array is written back to table 2.
READ ANALOG INPUT Function
Description: Reads 13 bit Analog/Digital Conversion Value.

Syntax: RAI(channel)
Comments: channel is the analog to digital converter channel (0 or 1). On the Chroma
Board, channel 0 is read from J106 pins 1 and 2, channel 1 is read from J106
pins 4 and 5.
NOTE
The Chroma I/O Board must have A/D Converter ICs UG1 and UH1
installed (see Figure 10-1) in order for this function to operate.
UH1 UG1
Figure 10-1. CHROMA I/O BOARD, SHOWING UG1 AND UH1
Example: For this example, let a temperature sensor register -4096 at -30°C and 4095
at 1000°C.
0010 SLOPE! = (1000.-(-30.))/(4095.-(-4096.))
0020 T_ZERO! = 1000. - SLOPE! * 4095.
0030 TEMPERATURE! = SLOPE! * FLT(
0040 :RAI(0)) + T_ZERO!
10-30 2000-OSM, C1
Use “T=mx+T0” to compute temperature from the reading of the A/D
converter, where “m” is the slope of the line, “x” is the A/D value, and “T0” is
the temperature at an A/D value of zero.
READ DIGITAL INPUT Function
Description: Returns the status, 0 or 1, of the digital input addressed.

Syntax: RDI(channel%,type%)
Comments: channel% is the input channel (1-96)
type% is the specific input to be sensed:
type: 0, channel: 1-5; input description: sensor alarms (depends on
software configuration)
type: 1, channel: 1-12; input description: remote stream select
type: 2, channel: 1-16; input description: Vista BASIC
type: 3, channel: 0; input description: flame out alarm
type: 4, channel: 0; input description: purge alarm
type: 5, channel: 0; input description: carrier alarm
type: 6, channel: 0; input description: low oven temp alarm
type: 7, channel: 0; input description: high oven temp alarm
type: 8, channel: 0; input description: low calibration sample alarm
type: 9, channel: 0; input description: low sample flow alarm
type: 10, channel: 0; input description: low hydrogen alarm
type: 11, channel: 0; input description: remote start/stop input
REMARKS Command
Description: Used for placing remarks in the BASIC program.

Syntax: REM remark
Example: 0010 REM CLEAR OUT COMMON!(1)
0020 COMMON!(1) = 0.0
REPORT TYPE Function
Description: Returns an integer indicating the report selected in the Printer Report Type
screen.
Syntax: REPORT_TYPE
Comments: 0 = RAW DATA and NEVER
1 = RAW DATA and ALWAYS
2 = RAW DATA and ON ALARM
4 = REGULAR and NEVER
5 = REGULAR and ALWAYS
6 = REGULAR and ON ALARM
8 = SHORT and NEVER
9 = SHORT and ALWAYS
10 = SHORT and ON ALARM
Example: 0010 IF REPORT_TYPE/4<>0 GOTO 9999
0020 LPRINT REPORT
0030 9999 END
If RAW DATA reports are selected on the Printer Report Type screen,
REPORT is printed; otherwise, nothing is printed.
REQUEST ANALYSIS Command
Description: Requests an analysis of a stream.

Syntax: RQANA(stream%)
2000-OSM, C1 10-31
Comments: stream% is the stream (from 1 to the maximum number of streams) to be
analyzed.
Example: 0010 RQANA(1)
Requests an analysis for stream one.
REQUEST BENCHMARK Command
Description Requests a benchmark of an analysis method.

Syntax: RQBEN(method%)
Comments method% is method (1-8) for which benchmark is to be performed.
Example: 0010 RQBEN(1)
Requests a benchmark analysis for method one.
REQUEST CALIBRATION Command
Description: Requests a calibration of an analysis method.

Syntax: RQCAL(method%)
Comments: method% is method (1-8) for which calibration is to be performed.
Example: 0010 RQCAL(1)
Requests a calibration analysis for method one.
RESET TIME LIMIT Command
Description: Resets BASIC’s time limit allowing the program more time to execute (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: RESET_TIME_LIMIT
0020 NEXT I
0030 RESET_TIME_LIMIT
The time limit is reset to allow the program to continue executing past the
normal time limit.
SENSOR ALARM Function
Description: Returns the state of GCC Sensor Alarms.

Syntax: SENSOR_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF SENSOR_ALARM THEN LPRINT
0020 :“ALARM”
SET BASIC ALARM Function
Description: Sets up to 16 different user-named alarms.

Syntax: SET_BASIC_ALARM(alarm%)
Comments: alarm% is the alarm number (1-16). After you set an alarm, you can assign it
a name from the Sensor screen on the analyzer.
Example: 0010 SET_BASIC_ALARM(12)
SET BASIC COMPONENT ALARM Function
Description: Sets up to eight different user-named component alarms.

Syntax: SET_BASIC_COMP_ALARM(method%,component%,alarm%)
component% is the component number.
alarm% is the alarm number (1-16). After you set an alarm, you can assign it
10-32 2000-OSM, C1
a name from the Sensor screen on the analyzer.
Example: 0010 SET_BASIC_COMP_ALARM(2)
SPACE Function
Description: Returns a string containing the specified number of blank characters.

Syntax: SPACE(length%)
Comments: length% is an integer from 1 to 128.
Example: 0010 LPRINT "A",SPACE(10),“B”
The following appears at the printer (has 10 spaces between letters):
A B
SQUARE ROOT Function
Description: Returns the square root of a floating point expression.

Syntax: SQRT(fp!)
Example: 0010 A! = SQRT(A!*100.)
The square root of the quantity 100 times the value of floating point variable A!
is assigned to floating point variable A!.
START ANALYSIS Command
Description: Starts an analysis cycle.

Syntax START
STOP ANALYSIS Command
Description: Stops the analyzer from performing further analyses.

Syntax: STOP(n%)
Comments: n% If n = 0, analysis stops immediately; otherwise it stops at the end of the
analysis.
Example: 0010 IF FLAME_OUT_ALARM THEN STOP(0)
If the detector flame is extinguished, the analyzer immediately stops the
current analysis.
STREAM NAME Function
Description: Returns the name of the associated stream.

Syntax: STR_NAME$(stream%)
Comments: stream% is the stream number (1-32).
Example: 0010 A$ = STR_NAME$(2)
STREAM STATUS Function
Description: Returns the active/inactive status of the stream.

Syntax: STATUS(stream%)
Comments: 0 = Inactive
1 = Active
Example: 0010 IF STATUS(5) = 0 THEN
0020 :LPRINT “STREAM 5 INACTIVE”
Prints the message if stream 5 is inactive.
2000-OSM, C1 10-33
SUBSTRING Function
Description: Returns a sub-string of a string.

Syntax: MID$(string$,position%,length%)
Comments: string$ is any string expression.
position% is the starting point in the string (1-255).
length% is the number of characters (0-255) to be copied from the string,
from the starting point.
Example: 0010 A$ = MID$("ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
0020 :QR",8,2)
The string variable A$ gets the string “HI”.
TCF ERROR ALARM Function
Description Returns the state of GCC Time Coded Function Error Alarms.
Syntax: TCF_ERROR_ALARM
Example: 0010 IF TCF_ERROR_ALARM GOTO 100
TEMPERATURE UNITS Function
Description: Returns units of temperature for the analyzer as specified in the Sim Dis
Setup Screen (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: T_UNITS
Comments: 0 = Temperature Units in Fahrenheit
1 = Temperature Units in Celsius
2 = Temperature Units in Kelvin
Example: 0010 IF T_UNITS = 1 THEN
0020 :T!=9.0/5.0*T!+32.0
Temperature in degrees Celsius is converted to Fahrenheit when the
Temperature Units Parameter in the Control Parameters Screen has been set
to Fahrenheit.
TIME Function
Description: Returns a string containing the date and time in the following format:
hh:mm:ss Day DD Mon YYYY
(e.g., 17:46:31 Mon 6 Nov 1989)
Syntax: TIME$
Example: 0010 A$ = TIME$
The string variable A$ gets the time and date.
TIME UCT Function
Description: Returns a two-element array containing the date and time. the first element in
the array give the UCT date since 1 January 1970. the second element gives
the time in seconds since midnight.
Syntax: TIME_UCT(T!)
0020 TIME_UCT(T!)
10-34 2000-OSM, C1
TIME VS. BOILING POINT TABLE Function
Description: Returns the Time vs. BP Table number that is to be used for a particular
stream (Sim Dis analyzers only).
Syntax: TVSBP_TBL(stream%)
Comments: stream% is the stream number (from 1 to the maximum number of streams).
Example: 0010 T = TVSBP_TBL(1)
0020 LPRINT GET_TEMP(0.5,T)
The number for the proper Time vs. BP Table is obtained by the function
TVSBP_TBL and assigned to variable T. The temperature for the Initial Boiling
Point is obtained by the function GET_TEMP using the Time vs. BP Table
specified in the stream.
TOTAL PEAK RAW AREA Function
Description: Returns the total area value for all the peaks detected in an analysis.
Syntax: TOT_PK_RAW_AREA
0020 LPRINT PK_RAW_AREA(I)
0030 NEXT I
0040 LPRINT TOT_PK_RAW _AREA
For each peak, print the uncorrected area of the peak.
TOTAL SIM DIS AREA Command
Description: Returns the total Sim Dis area measured during the analysis (Sim Dis
analyzers only).
Syntax: SD_TOTAL_AREA
Example: 0010 AREA! = SD_TOTAL_AREA
Returns the total measured Sim Dis area.
UCT TO TIME Conversion Routine
Description: Converts time expressed as UCT array to time as time and date.
Syntax: UCT_TO_TIME$(T!)
0020 TIME_UCT(T!)
0030 TM$ = UCT_TO_TIME$(T!)
0040 LPRINT TM$
VALUE Function
Description: Returns a floating point number that is the result of a conversion of the string
passed.
Syntax: VAL(string$)
Comments: string$ is any string expression. If a valid conversion cannot be performed,
VAL returns zero. Leading non-numeric characters will cause an invalid
conversion. Trailing blanks without a decimal point are interpreted as decimal
places.
Examples: 0010 A! = VAL( -10)
The floating point variable A! becomes -10.
2000-OSM, C1 10-35
0010 A! = VAL(10 )
The floating point variable A! is assigned the value 100000.
0010 A! = VAL(10. )
The floating point variable A! is assigned the value 10.
VALVE Command
Description: Turns valve On or Off.

Syntax: VALVE(valve number%,state%)
Comments: valve number% ranges from 1 to the total number of valves, which may
vary from 2 to 12.
state% 0 = valve Off, 1 = valve On.
Example: 0010 VALVE(2,0)
This command turns valve 2 Off.
WRITE DIGITAL OUTPUT Command
Description: Specifies the state of alarm type contact closures.

Syntax: WDO(channel%,state%)
Comments: channel% is the output channel (1-96).
state%, where state = 0 is the normal condition and state = 1 is the alarm
condition; whether or not there is contact closure is determined by the
hardware setup.
0020 WDO(I,0)
0030 NEXT I
All digital outputs, if they exist, are put in normal state.
WRITE TREND OUTPUT Command
Description: Sets the specified Trend output to the percentage level desired, by writing an
integer between 0 and 4095.
Syntax: WTO(channel%,value%)
Comments: channel% is the output channel (1-96).
value% is the trend output value.
0020 WTO(I,0)
0030 NEXT I
All trend outputs that exist are set to their lowest value.
Y2X Function
Description: Returns the value of Y raised to the X power.

Syntax: Y2X(fp!,fp!)
Example: 0010 LPRINT Y2X(2.,10.)
Prints the value of 2 raised to the power of 10 (1024).
ZERO OUTSTANDING REQUESTS Command
Description: Removes all pending requests from the Analysis Request Queue.
Syntax: ZERO_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS
Example: 0010 RQANA(1) : RQANA(2)
10-36 2000-OSM, C1
0020 ZERO_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS
0030 RQCAL(8)
Requests an analysis for streams one and two, removes all requests including
the ones just made for streams one and two, then requests a calibration on
method 8.
Vista BASIC Support for VistaNET Communications
VistaNET is a UDP-based communications protocol. The protocol is such that any message
can be sent from one device to another. In order to do this, a message header must be built
that instructs the UDP messaging layer how the message should be handled. To that
message header, a user-defined datagram is attached. Vista BASIC messages are ASCII
text blocks attached to these UDP headers.
The user can define ASCII messages to be sent to another device. These ASCII messages
can be parsed for the content at the receiving end.
BUILD HEADER Command
Description: Constructs a UDP header for VistaNET messaging.

Syntax: HDR$ = BLD_HDR$(domain%, address%, port_number%, dev_type%,
msg_type%,block_type%, flags%)
Comments: domain% is the domain number expressed as an integer. Since the domain
designation consists of two bytes, the desired domain must be converted to
an integer. Examples:
domain 0.1 in binary is 0000 0000 0000 0001; as integer it is 1.
domain 1.15 in binary is 0000 0001 0000 1111; as integer, 271.
address% is the device address expressed as an integer. Since the device
address consists of two bytes, the desired address must be converted to an
integer. (see domain discussion above).
port_number% is the port number to which message is to be sent. The Vista
BASIC port is 518.
dev_type% is the device type, and is defined as follows:
1 = GC
2 = CAC
5 = SIMDIS GC
7 = DUAL DETECTOR GC
msg_type% is the message type; for Vista BASIC this is always 0.
block_type% is the block type; for Vista BASIC this is always 0.
flags% is the message flag; for Vista BASIC this is always 0.
Example: shown below
SEND MESSAGE Command
Description: Sends a UDP message from one VistaNET device to another.

Syntax: SND_MSG(header$,data$)
Comments: header$ is the UDP message header constructed using the BUILD HEADER
Command.
data$ is the ASCII data block to be sent.
SEND REPLY Command
Description: Sends a VistaNET reply to another VistaNET device.

Syntax: SND_RPL(header$,data$)
2000-OSM, C1 10-37
Comments: header$ is the UDP message header received using the RECEIVE HEADER
Command.
data$ is the ASCII data block to be sent.
RECEIVE HEADER Command
Description: Receives a UDP message header from a VistaNET device.

Syntax: HDR$ = RCV_HDR$
Comments: HDR$ is a string variable which will store the received UDP header
information. If the length of HDR$ is 0 upon executing this command, no
message has been received.
RECEIVE DATA Command
Description: Receives a message from a VistaNET device.

Syntax: DATA$ = RCV_DATA$
Comments: DATA$ is a string variable which will store the received data.
VistaNET Messaging Example
The sending application is located at VistaNET address 0.1.0.5. The receiving application is
located at VistaNET address 0.1.0.4
At 0.1.0.5 (the sending end):
First the message header is built: 0010 HDR$ = BLD_HDR(1,4,518,1,0,0,0)

Then the message is constructed: 0020 DATA$ = “THIS IS THE MESSAGE”
The message is sent: 0030 SND_MSG(HDR$,DATA$)
At 0.1.0.4 (the receiving end):
A BASIC program (usually in real-time BASIC table number 8) is written to accept VistaNET
messages:
0010 HDR$ = RCV_HDR$
0020 IF LEN(HDR$) = 0 THEN END
0030 DATA$ = RCV_DATA$
The string variable DATA$ now contains “THIS IS THE MESSAGE”
To reply, at 0.1.0.4:
A reply message is constructed: 0040 REPLY$ = “GOT THE MESSAGE”

Using the header received in
line 0010 above, the reply is sent: 0050 SND_RPL(HDR$,REPLY$)
SUBJECT LISTING
This lists the Vista BASIC commands, functions and statements (shown on the left side of
the page) in subject order. If you need additional information on a particular listing, use the
key term on the right side of the page to refer to the appropriate detailed alphabetical listing.
10-38 2000-OSM, C1
General Statements
BPRINT BPRINT
CHAIN CHAIN
COMMON! COMMON floating point array
COMMON$ COMMON string array
DIM DIM
END END
FOR...NEXT FOR...NEXT
GOSUB...RETURN GO TO SUBROUTINE
GOTO GOTO
IF IF
LET LET
LPRINT LPRINT
REM REMARKS
Math Routines
ABS(fp!) ABSOLUTE VALUE

EXP(fp!) EXPONENT
LN(fp!) NATURAL LOGARITHM
LOG(fp!) LOGARITHM BASE TEN
SQRT(fp!) SQUARE ROOT
Y2X(fp!fp!) Y2X
String and Conversion Routines
ASC(string$) ASC
CHR$(integer%) CHR$
FLT(integer%) FLOATING POINT
INSTR(string1$,string2$) INSTR
INT(fp!) INTEGER TYPE
LEN(string$) LENGTH OF STRING
MID$(string$,position%,length%) SUBSTRING
SPACE(length%) SPACE
STR_NAME$ STREAM NAME
UCT_TO_TIME$ UCT TO TIME
VAL(string$) VALUE
GCC Commands and Functions
ACT(stream%) ACTIVE STREAM

ACTIVATED_BY ACTIVATED BY
ALARM ALARM
ASSIGN(stream%,method%) ASSIGN STREAM
CLEAR CLEAR
CLOCK_ERROR_ALARM CLOCK ERROR ALARM
COMM_ERROR_ALARM COMMUNICATION ERROR ALARM
COMP_NAME$(table%,component%) COMPONENT NAME
COMP_TYPE$(method%,component%) COMPONENT TYPE
COPY_ARRAY(src_array,dst_array) COPY ARRAY
CUR_METHOD CURRENT METHOD
CUR_STRM CURRENT STREAM
2000-OSM, C1 10-39
CYCLE_TIME(method%) CYCLE TIME
DACS_EVT_MSG(message$) DACS EVENT MESSAGE
DEACT(stream%) DEACTIVATE STREAM
FLAME_OUT_ALARM FLAME OUT ALARM
GET_ACTUAL_RT(method%,component%) GET ACTUAL RETENTION TIME
GET_ASSIGN(stream%) GET STREAM ASSIGNMENT
GET_BENCH_CONC(method%,component%) GET BENCHMARK CONCENTRATION
GET_CAL_CONC(method%,component%) GET CALIBRATION CONCENTRATION
GET_CC(method%,component%) GET COMPONENT CONCENTRATION
GET_EXPECTED_RT(method%,component%) GET EXPECTED RETENTION TIME
GET_MULTIPLIER_EXP(method%) GET MULTIPLIER EXPONENT
GET_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS GET OUTSTANDING REQUESTS
GET_PRESS(zone%) GET PRESSURE OF A ZONE
GET_RF(method%,component%) GET RESPONSE FACTOR
GET_TEMP(zone%) GET TEMPERATURE FOR A % OFF
HARDWARE_ALARM HARDWARE ALARM
HIGH_CONC_ALARM HIGH CONCENTRATION ALARM
IDLE_ALARM IDLE ALARM
INJT INJECT TIME
INJT_UCT(T!) INJECT UCT
LOW_CONC_ALARM LOW CONCENTRATION ALARM
N_COMP(method%) NUMBER OF COMPONENTS
N_PEAKS NUMBER OF PEAKS
OFFLINE_ALARM OFFLINE ALARM
OP_MSG_ALARM OPERATOR MESSAGE ALARM
PK_AREA(peak%) PEAK AREA
PK_COMP_NUM(peak%) PEAK COMPONENT NUMBER
PK_CREST_AMP(peak%) PEAK CREST AMPLITUDE
PK_CREST_TIME(peak%) PEAK CREST TIME
PK_END_AMP(peak%) PEAK END AMPLITUDE
PK_END_TIME(peak%) PEAK END TIME
PK_HEIGHT(peak%) PEAK HEIGHT
PK_RAW_AREA(peak%) PEAK RAW AREA
PK_START_AMP(peak%) PEAK START AMPLITUDE
PK_START_TIME(peak%) PEAK START TIME
POSTAN_ERROR_ALARM POST ANALYSIS ERROR ALARM
POWER_FAIL_ALARM POWER FAIL ALARM
PREV_INJT PREVIOUS INJECT TIME
PREV_INJT_UCT(T!) PREVIOUS INJECT UCT
PREV_METHOD PREVIOUS METHOD
PREV_STRM PREVIOUS STREAM
PRG_STRM PURGING STREAM function
PURGE(stream%) PURGING STREAM command
PUT_ACTUAL_RT(method%,component%,retention!)
PUT ACTUAL RETENTION TIME
PUT_BENCH_CONC(method%,component%,concentration!)
PUT BENCHMK CONCENTRATION
PUT_CAL_CONC(method%,component%,concentration!)
PUT CALIB CONCENTRATION
PUT_CC(method%,component%,concentration!)
PUT COMP CONCENTRATION
PUT_COMP_NAME(method%,component%,name$)
PUT COMPONENT NAME
PUT_EXPECTED_RT(method%,component%,retention%)
10-40 2000-OSM, C1
PUT EXPECTED RETENTION TIME
PUT_MULTIPLIER_EXP(method%,value%) PUT MULTIPLIER EXPONENT
PUT_PRESS(zone%,set point!,ramp rate!) PUT PRESSURE OF A ZONE
PUT_REPORT_TYPE(type%) PUT REPORT TYPE
PUT_RF(method%,component%,response!) PUT RESPONSE FACTOR
PUT_TEMP(zone%,set point!,ramp rate!) PUT TEMPERATURE OF A ZONE
RAI(channel%) READ ANALOG INPUT
RDI(channel%,type%) READ DIGITAL INPUT
REPORT_TYPE REPORT TYPE
RQANA(stream%) REQUEST ANALYSIS
RQBEN(method%) REQUEST BENCHMARK
RQCAL(method%) REQUEST CALIBRATION
SENSOR_ALARM SENSOR ALARM
SET_BASIC_ALARM(alarm%) SET BASIC ALARM
SET_BASIC_COMP_ALARM(method%,component%,alarm%)
SET BASIC COMPONENT ALARM
START START ANALYSIS
STATUS(stream%) STREAM STATUS
STOP(n%) STOP ANALYSIS
TCF_ERROR_ALARM TCF ERROR ALARM
TIME$ TIME
TOT_PK_RAW_AREA TOTAL PEAK RAW AREA
VALVE(number%,state%) VALVE
WDO(channel%,state%) WRITE DIGITQL OUTPUT
WTO(channel%,state%) WRITE TREND OUTPUT
ZERO_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS ZERO OUTSTANDING REQUESTS
SIM DIS (Only) Commands
ADD_TCF(method%,time%,function$,value$) ADD TCF

DELETE_ALL_GATE_TCFS(method%) DELETE ALL GATE TCFS
DELETE_ALL_TCFS(method%,function$) DELETE ALL TCFS OF A TYPE
GET_ASTM GET ASTM
GET_BLEND(stream%) GET BLEND
GET_FACT_TBL(array!,table%) GET CORREL FACTOR TABLE
GET_MAX_PEAK_PARM GET MAX PEAK PARAMETER
GET_PEAK_TYPE GET PEAK TYPE PARAMETER
GET_POFF(temperature!,time_vs_bp_table%) GET % OFF FOR A TEMPERATURE
GET_POFF_TBL(array!,table%) GET % OFF TABLE
GET_TEMP(percent_off!,time_vs_bp_table%) GET TEMPERATURE FOR A % OFF
GET_TEMP_TBL(array!,table%) GET TEMPERATURE TABLE
GET_TVSBP_TBL(array!,table%) GET TIME VS. BOIL POINT TABLE
LEN_FACT_TBL(table%) LENGTH OF CORREL FACTOR
LEN_POFF_TBL(table%) LENGTH OF % OFF TABLE
LEN_TEMP_TBL(table%) LENGTH OF TEMP TABLE
LEN_TVSBP_TBL(table%) LENGTH OF TIME VS BOIL POINT
POFF_TO_TIME(percent_off!,time_vs_bp_table%)
GET TIME FOR A % OFF
PUT_ASTM(integer%) PUT ASTM
PUT_BLEND(stream%,blend%) PUT BLEND
PUT_FACT_TBL(array!,table%) PUT CORREL FACTOR TABLE
PUT_POFF_TBL(array!,table%) PUT % OFF TABLE
PUT_TEMP_TBL(array!,table%) PUT TEMPERAURE TABLE
PUT_TVSBP_TBL(array!,table%) PUT TIME VS BOIL POINT TABLE
RESET_TIME_LIMIT RESET TIME LIMIT
2000-OSM, C1 10-41
SD_PEAK_HEIGHT MAXIMUM SIM DIS PEAK HEIGHT
SD_TOTAL_AREA TOTAL SIM DIS AREA
TEMP_TO_TIME(temperature!,time_vs_bp_table%)
GET TIME FOR A TEMPERATURE
TIME_TO_OFF(time!,time_vs_bp_table%) GET % OFF FOR A TIME
TIME_TO_TEMP(time!,time_vs_bp_table%) GET TEMPERATURE FOR A TIME
T_UNITS TEMPERATURE UNITS
TVSBP_TBL(stream%) TIME VS BOILING POINT TABLE
Simultaneous Dual Detector Commands
Numerous Vista BASIC command functions have been modified to accommodate the extra
Chroma I/O Board used in GCCs with Simultaneous Dual Detectors. They are:
ALARM(Chroma%) ALARM
CLOCK_ERROR_ALARM(Chroma%) CLOCK ERROR ALARM
COMM_ERROR_ALARM(Chroma%) COMMUNICATION ERROR ALARM
CUR_METHOD(Chroma%) CURRENT METHOD
CUR_STRM(Chroma%) CURRENT STREAM
GET_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS(Chroma%) GET OUTSTANDING REQUESTS
HARDWARE_ALARM(Chroma%) HARDWARE ALARM
HIGH_CONC_ALARM(Chroma%) HIGH CONCENTRATION ALARM
IDLE_ALARM(Chroma%) IDLE ALARM
INJT(Chroma%) INJECT TIME
INJT_UCT(Chroma%,T!) INJECT UCT
LOW_CONC_ALARM(Chroma%) LOW CONCENTRATION ALARM
POSTAN_ERROR_ALARM(Chroma%) POST ANALYSIS ERROR ALARM
PREV_INJT(Chroma%) PREVIOUS INJECT TIME
PREV_INJT_UCT(Chroma%,T!) PREVIOUS INJECT UCT
PREV_METHOD(Chroma%) PREVIOUS METHOD
PREV_STRM(Chroma%) PREVIOUS STREAM
RAI(Chroma%,channel%) READ ANALOG INPUT
RDI(Chroma%,channel%,type%) READ DIGITAL INPUT
RQANA(Chroma%,stream%) REQUEST ANALYSIS
RQBEN(Chroma%,method%) REQUEST BENCHMARK
RQCAL(Chroma%,method%) REQUEST CALIBRATION
SENSOR_ALARM(Chroma%) SENSOR ALARM
SET_BASIC_ALARM(Chroma%,alarm%) SET BASIC ALARM
SET_BASIC_COMP_ALARM(Chroma%,method%,component%,alarm%)
SET BASIC COMPONENT ALARM
START(Chroma%) START ANALYSIS
STOP(Chroma%,n%) STOP ANALYSIS
TCF_ERROR_ALARM(Chroma%) TCF ERROR ALARM
ZERO_OUTSTANDING_REQUESTS(Chroma%)
ZERO OUTSTANDING REQUESTS
VistaNET Commands
Since VistaNET commands are interlinked, these commands have little meaning shown as
independent commands. See "Vista Basic Support for VistaNET Communications" in Section
2 for an explanation of this command structure.
10-42 2000-OSM, C1
ERROR MESSAGES
Compilation Error Messages
Invalid Integer Constant: An integer constant is too large. Integer constants must be in the
range from -32768 to 32767.
Invalid Floating Point Constant: Floating Point constant does not conform to proper
syntax.
String Too Long: String constant contains more than 255 characters. Reduce the number
of characters within the string and make sure the string constant ends with the double
quotation mark (”).
Illegal Character: A character not recognized by the compiler has been encountered. This
error should not occur and should be reported to ABB Lewisburg.
Syntax Error: The compiler has encountered something which does not conform to the
rules for proper syntax of the language. A major cause for this diagnostic message is
the incorrect spelling of commands and keywords, as well as, other typographical
errors, such as missing commas or parentheses.
Data Type Mismatch: An expression contains operands which are not of the same data
type. If the expression contains floating point operands, then all of the operands must
be floating point or converted to floating point. Expressions with integer operands must
contain all integer operands or conversions to integer type. Another cause for this error
occurs when an argument passed to a command or function does not agree with the
data type expected for the parameter.
Array Not Defined: A variable contains a subscript when the variable has not previously
been declared as an array with the DIM statement. All arrays, with the exception of the
COMMON! array, must be declared in a DIM statement.
Number of Arguments: The number of arguments passed to a command or function does

not agree with the number expected.
Duplicate Declaration: This error occurs when an attempt is made to name a variable to a
name already used for a command or function. The error can also occur in a DIM
statement when the variable name is already in use by another variable, or by a function
or command.
Unreachable Statement: An attempt has been made to branch to a statement that does
not exist. For instance, a GOTO or GOSUB statement contains a statement number that
does not otherwise exist in the source program. Confusing Line numbers with
Statement numbers might be a cause for this error. Line numbers are not interpreted by
Vista BASIC and are used strictly for editing purposes. A Statement number is a
number at the beginning of a statement in the statement field of the source program.
Insufficient Memory: Not enough free memory exists for the compiler to operate properly.
The corrective action is to retry the compilation when more free memory is available.
2000-OSM, C1 10-43
Restriction: Code Size: An implementation restriction that limits the number of object code
instructions has been exceeded. The corrective action is to reduce the number of
statements in the source program.
Restriction: Variable Allocation: A restriction that limits the number of variables allowed
has been exceeded. The corrective action is to reduce the number of variables in the
source program.
Array Index Missing: An array has been referenced without the use of an index. This error
frequently occurs when there is a duplicate declaration of an array and a scalar variable
having the same variable name for both. The corrective action is to use a different
name for the scalar variable or provide an index for the array element.
Illegal Statement Number: A Statement number of zero is not allowed.
Illegal DIM Number: An array dimension (extent) of zero is not allowed in the DIM
statement.
Internal Error: No Such Error: This is an error that should never occur, but if it does,
indicates a design or modification error to the internal software that should be reported
to ABB Lewisburg.
Run-Time Error Messages
Illegal Opcode: This is an error that should never occur, but if it does it indicates a design
or modification error to the internal software that should be reported to ABB Lewisburg.
Array Index Out of Bounds: An array subscript is negative or exceeds the array dimension
(extent).
FOR and NEXT Variables Not the Same: The variable name in the NEXT statement does
not agree with the variable name for the counter in the matching FOR statement.
Index Pointer Out of Bounds: An instruction pointer out of bounds error may indicate a
wild branch and is probably caused by an internal error that should be reported to ABB
Lewisburg.
Stack Pointer Out of Bounds: A stack pointer out of bounds error could be caused by an
expression that contains too many operands for the stack to hold. Corrective action
requires splitting excessively long expressions into more than one statement and to use
intermediate variables for temporary storage of results.
NEXT without FOR: A NEXT statement occurred that did not have a matching FOR
statement.
RETURN without GOSUB: A RETURN statement occurred that did not have a matching
GOSUB statement.
GOSUB without RETURN: A GOSUB was executed, but no RETURN statement was
executed before the physical/logical end of the program.
FOR without NEXT: A FOR statement was executed, but no NEXT statement was executed
before the physical/logical end of the program.
10-44 2000-OSM, C1
Stream Number Out of Range: A stream number passed as an argument to a command or
function is too large or too small.
Method Number Out of Range: A method number passed as an argument to a command

or function is too large or too small.
Component Number Out of Range: A component number passed as an argument to a

command or function is too large or too small.
Component Table Does Not Exist: A method number or component table number passed
as an argument to a command or function was too large or too small.
Ratio Table Number Out of Range: This error occurs when you chain to a nonexistent
Vista BASIC program.
Interpreter Called without Program: The Interpreter was called at end-of-analysis for a
program to be executed according to the program-to-stream assignment, but the
program was nonexistent. The corrective action for this case would be to compile the
program.
Time Limit Exceeded: The execution time limit for a given program has been exceeded.
The execution time limit is the actual time for execution as measured by the number of
Vista BASIC instructions executed. Corrective action would be to reduce time needed
for execution of a program by:
a) minimizing the number of statements within loops,

b) reducing the number of statements in a program,
c) minimizing the number of statements that require long times to execute (i.e.,
LPRINT statement).
Insufficient Memory: This error occurs when not enough free memory exists for the
interpreter to dynamically allocate memory for arrays in the DIM statement or for buffers
in the LPRINT statement. The corrective action is to retry the execution when more free
memory is available.
Illegal DIM Number: An array dimension (extent) of zero is not allowed in the DIM
statement.
REAL-TIME VISTA BASIC
Introduction
Vista BASIC is a programming language that allows the operator to customize some
analyzer operations. Vista BASIC programs can be set up to run manually, at the end of the
analysis of a given stream, or at a specified time of day.
Vista BASIC can also run continuously in the background (this is called running in real time).
Running in real time allows the Vista BASIC program to watch the state of the analyzer and
make decisions based on that state. Six commands in the Vista BASIC language support
running in real time.
2000-OSM, C1 10-45
Real Time Operation
Only Vista BASIC table number eight can run in real time. If more space is needed, then this
table can chain to another Vista BASIC table. Once it is started manually, table number eight
runs continuously; as soon as it finishes, it starts again.
Table eight can still be used as a normal Vista BASIC table if it is not started manually as
Real-Time Vista BASIC.
How often the table runs depends on how long it takes to execute and what other functions
the analyzer is performing at that time. For example, with the analyzer idle and a very short
table, Real-Time Vista BASIC may run up to forty times per second. At the end of the
analysis, Real-Time Vista BASIC may not run at all for several seconds. At any given time it
is difficult to determine how often it will run.
For this reason, the Vista BASIC table should be written very carefully, taking into
consideration table length and the time required for execution.
Screens
Three screens support Real-Time Vista BASIC. These screens are accessed from the
Background Screen (see Figure 10-2).
********** B A C K G R O U N D **********
803V029-1R (Std GCC) (C) 2001
**ALARM**
**ALARM** 18-JUN-2002 TUE 08:16:01
**ALARM**

Method :01 entered

Commands Options
F1 F2 F3 F4
Press the F3 (Cur Report, Basic I/O & Options) soft key on the Background Screen to
display the Report, Basic I/O and Options menu (see Figure 10-3).
10-46 2000-OSM, C1
****** Report, Basic I/O and Options ******
CURRENT REPORT
[BASIC INPUT AND OUTPUT ]
START/STOP AND EDIT BASIC
OPTIONS
View Edit/View
Escape Basic COMMON!
Output Area
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 10-3. REPORT, BASIC I/O AND OPTIONS SCREEN
This screen allows you to start and stop Real-Time Vista BASIC. Real-Time Vista BASIC
uses two other screens: one to display Real-Time Status, and one to Edit/View the
COMMON! Area. To review the state of the Real-Time Vista BASIC program (running or
idle), any text sent to it (using RT_TEXT), and the state of any input requested from it (using
RT_INPUT$), press the F2 (View Basic Output) soft key. The Real Time Basic Status screen
appears (see Figure 10-4).
******** Real Time Basic Status ********
Status: Running Input: Pending
ALARM EXISTS
Clear Answer
Escape All Input
Messages Request
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 10-4. REAL TIME BASIC STATUS SCREEN
2000-OSM, C1 10-47
To edit or view the COMMON! Area, press the F3 (Edit/View COMMON! Area) soft key on the
Report, Basic I/O and Options screen. The Basic COMMON! Area Edit screen appears (see Fig-
ure 10-5) and updates once each second.
******** Basic COMMON! Area Edit ********
COMMON! Number:[1 ]
COMMON! Value : 0.00000000
(0001)= 0.0000 (0002)= 0.00000

(0003)= 0.0000 (0004)= 0.00000
(0005)= 0.0000 (0006)= 0.00000
(0007)= 0.0000 (0008)= 0.00000
(0009)= 0.0000 (0010)= 0.00000
(0011)= 0.0000 (0012)= 0.00000
(0013)= 0.0000 (0014)= 0.00000
Accept View View

Escape New COMMON! Next
Value Number
F1 F2 F3 F4
Figure 10-5. BASIC COMMON! AREA EDIT SCREEN
Real-Time Vista BASIC Commands
While all standard Vista BASIC commands are available for use with Real-Time Vista BASIC,
the following commands are specifically for running in real time.
WARNING
When using Real-Time Vista BASIC, do not use these commands: LPRINT
and DACS_EVT_MSG!
The Real-Time Vista BASIC program can generate LPRINT and

DACS_EVT_MSG information FASTER than it can be processed. This could
eat up all of the memory in the GCC.
Time Into Analysis
Description: Returns the time into analysis.

Syntax: integer = TIA
Comments: integer is the returned time into analysis; a zero means the analyzer is not
running an analysis.
Example: 0100 TIME = TIA
0200 IF TIME < 49 THEN END
10-48 2000-OSM, C1
Real-Time Text
Description: Sends a line of text to the Real-Time Vista BASIC Status Screen
Syntax: RT_TEXT(string)
Comments: string is the line of text to be sent to the Real-Time Vista BASIC Status
Screen. A total of ten lines are supported, with the newest line printed on the
bottom of the screen and older lines scrolled up and off.
Example: 0100 IF ALARM THEN
0110 :RT_TEXT(“ALARM EXISTS”)
Real-Time Text Clear
Description: Clears all the text on the Real-Time Vista BASIC Status Screen
Syntax: RT_CLEAR
Example: 0100 RT_CLEAR
Real-Time Input
Description: Requests input from the user.

Syntax: input = RT_INPUT$(output)
Comments: output is text to be sent to the Real-Time Vista BASIC input screen. The first
time this command is used the input state on the Vista BASIC Status Screen
changes to PENDING. The operator can now use the third soft key to enter
the input. When the “Exit & Update” key is used, the input status changes to
ENTERED. The next RT_INPUT$ will return the operator-entered string.
input is the operator-entered string; this display will have a length of zero until
the operator enters the string.
Example: 0100 A$ = RT_INPUT$(“ENTER SOME TEXT”)
0200 IF A$ = 0 THEN END
0300 RT_TEXT(“INPUT =” + A$)
Sleep
Description: Stops program execution for a specific amount of time.

Syntax: SLEEP(tick%)
Comments: tick% is the amount of time to wait, where each tick represents 1/32 of a
second.
Example: 0100 SLEEP(20)
Temperature
Description: Returns the temperature of a zone of the Five Zone Temperature Controller.
Syntax: temp = TEMPS(zone)
Comment: zone is zone 1 through 5 of the controller
temp is the floating point temperature of the zone
Example: 0100 IF TEMPS(1) > 280.0 THEN
0200 : STOP(0)
Aborts the analysis if the temperature gets too high.
2000-OSM, C1 10-49
ABB Inc.
P.O. Box 831
Lewisburg, WV 24901

Fax (304) 645-4236

Fax (304) 647-1837

10-50 2000-OSM, C1
SECTION 11. DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS
USE OF DRAWINGS
The drawings and diagrams contained in this manual are of a general nature. Since
analyzer configuration depends on the particular application, you should refer to the
drawings provided in the engineering drawings supplied with your analyzer as the final
authority. In addition there is an Application Data Package which contains information on
application-dependent components or subassemblies, outline and mounting diagrams, and
flow diagrams.
LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS
The following drawings and diagrams, which make up this section of the manual, provide
general information about the analyzer that is not covered elsewhere.
Figure No. Description
11-1 Jumper Configuration, RS-232 Printer

11-2 Overall System Block Diagram
11-3 Analytical Section Block Diagram
11-4 Control Section Block Diagram
2000-OSM, C1 11-1
SERIAL I/O JUMPER CONNECTIONS
JP10-2 JP10-3
JP10-4 JP10-5
INTERRUPT JP7-2 JP7-8 JP7-5
JUMPERS JP7-4 JP8-12
JP7-3 JP8-9
JP7-1 JP10-8
CHO JP11-1 JP13-1 HIGHWAY #1
DATA CH1 JP11-2 JP14-1 FRONT PANEL
INPUTS CH2 JP11-3 JP13-2 HIGHWAY #2
TO S.B.C. CH3 JP11-4 JP12-4 PRINTER
DATA CHO JP11-5 JP16-3 HIGHWAY #1
OUTPUTS CH1 JP11-6 JP13-6 FRONT PANEL
FROM CH2 JP11-7 JP16-6 HIGHWAY #2
S.B.C. CH3 JP11-8 JP12-8 PRINTER
SERIAL I/O
JUMPERS JP14-7 JP15-7 FRONT PANEL
RS-422
JP14-8 JP15-8 DRIVER
JP6-2 JP6-3 RAM 256K BIT

MEMORY JP5-1 JP5-2
ROM 256K BIT
JP5-4 JP5-5
SWITCH SETTINGS
I/O POSITION (ON) STATE
HIGHWAY #1 SW3-2, SW3-4 PASSIVE

HIGHWAY #2 SW1-2, SW1-4 PASSIVE
TERMINAL I/O
HIGHWAY #1: [+] 7-34
[-] 7-35
[+] 7-45
[-] 7-44
HIGHWAY #2: [+] 7-38

[-] 7-39
[+] 7-49
[-] 7-48
PRINTER (RS-232) 7-32 RCV

7-33 COM
Figure 11-1. JUMPER CONFIGURATION, RS-232 PRINTER
11-2 2000-OSM, C1
Air In PURGE AIR
PANEL
Heater Air
Purge Air
Digital Out
Analog Out
Sample In Recorder
OVEN GCC
Printer
VistaNET
Burner Fuel
Burner Air
Carrier
Air In
H2 In CARRIER
GAS
PANEL
Carrier In
ANALYTICAL SECTION CONTROL SECTION
Figure 11-2. OVERALL SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
2000-OSM, C1 11-3
PURGE AIR PANEL
Regulator
& Gauge
Air In Regulator
& Gauge
Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Valve
Heater Air
Purge Air
Purge Air
OVEN
Heater
Sample In Sample Selector To Control

Column Detector
Valve Valve Section
Sample
Return
Burner Fuel
Burner Air
Carrier
Air In Adj
Valve
H2 In Adj
Valve
Carrier Adj
In Valve
CARRIER GAS PANEL (Analog)
Figure 11-3. ANALYTICAL SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM
11-4 2000-OSM, C1
To LOCOM
Circuit
Display LOCOM
PCB
Keypad
from Analytical Front

Detector Chroma
Panel
Section Ampl I/O PCB
PCB
SBC Trend
PCB #1
Analog
EPC
Outputs
Sensors Power
Trend
Supply
#2
PCB
EPC
Control EPC
Digital
PCB Multibus
I/O #1
PCB Digital
Zone Inputs &
PCB Outputs
Digital
(5) DTC
I/O #2
Backplane
AC PCB
Cond VistaNET
PCB Multibus VistaNET
PCB Domains
GCC
Figure 11-4. CONTROL SECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM
2000-OSM, C1 11-5
ABB Analytical Products
www.abb.com/analytical
ABB Inc.
843 N. Jefferson Street
Lewisburg, WV 24901 USA
Office: (304) 647-4358

FAX: (304) 645-4236
0207

2000 GC Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2000 GC Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2000 GC Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATION AND SERVICE MANUAL

Process Gas Chromatograph PGC2000

2000-OSM C1: August 2002

Material contained within this manual is proprietary information of

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

©2000 - 2002, ABB Inc.

For further information or assistance contact:

General Information: Telephone (304) 647-4358

Field Service: Telephone (304) 340-0508

Aftermarket Spares: Telephone (304) 647-1736

Please include Sales Order Number, Tag Number,

Date of issue for each version of this manual:

Revision status of each page in this manual:

Page No. Revision Status

General Information: Telephone (304) 647-4358

Field Service: Telephone (304) 340-0508

Aftermarket Spares: Telephone (304) 647-1736

Please include Sales Order Number, Tag Number,

GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................................................ G-1

EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................................. 1-1

SECTION 2. INSTALLATION AND START-UP

PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 2-1

Checking Selector Vent ................................................................................................................... 2-12

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS ............................................................................................................. 3-1

SECTION 4. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 4-1

Chroma I/O PCB ............................................................................................................................. 4-11

X Purge Operation .......................................................................................................................... 4-38

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................... 5-1

Hardware Setup ................................................................................................................................ 5-7

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDELINES ...................................................................................................... 6-1

Set Point Unacceptable ................................................................................................................... 6-22

SECTION 7. TEST PROCEDURES

TP 1: CARRIER, MAKEUP, AND UTILITY GAS SUPPLIES ................................................................... 7-1

TP 7: TCD ELECTRONICS .................................................................................................................... 7-5

REPLACING HEATERS .......................................................................................................................... 8-1

Capillary Column Installation ............................................................................................................. 8-8

Replacing the Control PCB ............................................................................................................. 8-41

SECTION 9. REPLACEMENT PARTS

ORDERING INFORMATION ................................................................................................................... 9-1

Software Configuration Identification ................................................................................................. 9-2

SECTION 10. VISTA BASIC

INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................... 10-1

COMMON Floating Point Array ....................................................................................................... 10-8

INJECT UCT Function .................................................................................................................. 10-18

PUT TEMPERATURE TABLE Command ...................................................................................... 10-29

Real-Time Vista BASIC Commands .............................................................................................. 10-48

SECTION 11. DRAWINGS

USE OF DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................ 11-1

1-1 Typical Process Gas Chromatograph PGC2000 ....................................................................... 1-1

2-1 Liquid Sample Valve Connection Methods ................................................................................ 2-3

3-1 GCC Card Cage Controls and Indicators .................................................................................. 3-1

4-1 Typical Analytical Flow System Diagram ................................................................................... 4-1

Figure Title Page

4-15 Cal Define & Cycle Time Screen ............................................................................................. 4-17

Figure Title Page

5-1 Recommended Preventive Maintenance Schedule ................................................................... 5-1

6-1 Example of Baseline Offset ....................................................................................................... 6-1